LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket's Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

41 I ))I ,1 J1
j":;
t
/,
I;ANY
lir-II:
:;
.1A7
II
-.4
Name of Gun.
t
0
r..)
if
to
.4
Kragr-Jorgensen
100.
Ride
Colts Automatic
100.
Gun (.30)
Maxim's 1-Pdr.
42.5
Automatic (1.48,
1-Pd r. heavy
42.5
(Diam. 1.46)
3-Pdr.(Diam.1.85). 43.5
45
).
2.24
iDiam.
r.
-Pd
6
3-inch Field Piece

Fire
Rapid
-inch
3
50
Gun
4-inch Rapid Fire
Gun
4-inch R.F G.,
Mark VII
5-inch 11. F G..
Mark I..........
5-inch H. F. D.,
Mark V
6- inch R. F. G
Mark III
6-inch R. F. G.,
Mark Vi
7-inch R. F. G.,
Mark I ...... .
8-inch B. L. B.,
Mark 111
8-inch B. L. R.,
Mark??
10-inch B. L. R.,
Mark III...
12-inch Ii. L.
III
Mark
13-inch B. L. R.,
Mark I...
4t
-ra
..T
.14
to
g2
:
E
.5
P
12 td
S.%
10 lbs.
49
.98
40
30
1.51
608 "
63.5
4.5
120 "
525 "
795 "
530"
tons.
.87
63.5
80.6
108.9
'4
154
40
1.5
163.4
13
50
2.56
204.5
13
40
3.1
209
16.5
50
3.3
255
16.5
40
6.0
256
21
60
8.37
300
21
45
40
co
El
13.3
315
29
15.2
314
28.8
30
24
24
28
82
32
45
18
363
40
33.4
400
39
40
52
493
45
35
60.5
480
49
40
48
52
cl)
Bursting Charge.
cs
il4
.t.
-).
o
A
Eil isi
k0
4..
Perforation,
Krupp Armor at
muzzle.
0
a)
4.. E
12
12
20
24
19
19
35 to 42grs. 220 grains

35 to 42 " 220
...
4.9 ozs.
4.9 "
27 "
...
400 grams.
...
30
15
30
...
30
15
30
24
15
24
17
5 lbs.
1 lb.
....
...
....
. .. 440 g rs
....
250grs 250gm .. .
16
66
1 lb.
3.3 lb. 900 gm 900gm
6.0 lb. 1450" 1450"
.
....
13.25
.
ii
6...
....
....
....
40 grs
Ce
'
'1)
831
....
831
....
,E,I
C)
2000
....
45.8" Pine
Boards.
45.8" Pine
Boards.
1.4"
1.65 lb 1800
1.61
6.8
9.9
15.5
...
....
58
2000
....
58
2900
6.4
95
....
....
2900
8.4
....
3i2
....
;2
....
--
100
...
3.5
100
....
3.5
34
...,
17
74 "
165
82
15
100"
250
'
....
6.0" Pine.
527
....
6.0
695
....
.43
....
5.6
6.6
10.9
....
....
....
..
2900
13.2
....
10
....
...
....
....
3.1
....
....
2380
5.2
....
....
2460
6.7
....
....
4.4
5.6
...
4.
....
....
2085
5.5
3.4
...
7.3
68
2185
7.2
6.0
10.5
'2580
11.4
8.9
2295
9.7
7.6
....
....
...
11.7
....
9.1
17
115 "
250
....
....
2800
15
12.1
2530
13.2 10.4
....
240 "
500
30..
....
2800
20
17.1
2585
18.3 15.
2390
16.5 13.5
48
17
335 .,
860
36....
..
2800
25
21.7
2620
23.
2450
21.2 17.9
52
15
1882
....
1772
....
....
...
10
1100
..-
C200(2.1_
19.4
...
"
60
"
.....
.
....
....
8.8
....
"
590
....
....
43 per min.
400
4.7
....
....
....
....
1955
2525
...
2900
2130
2090
40
"
1/.3
60
.66
527
..
60
11.5
1620
....
....
"
03
0
.43
1.21
1.59
.
32
27 lbs.
....
1.5" Pine.
Rapidity of
Fire Possible.
.g
....
....
....
15 lbs.
943
Ce
Perforation
Krupp Armor at
2000 yards.
695
....
.66
943
1800
....
1.4
1008
.... 1.83
1344
2000
....
2.7
1057
2.27
1357
..1870....
3.4
1250 0nly s hrapnel used. Only shrapnel used. ...
10 to 12 lbs 332
....
46 lbs.
2000
03t
0..
4.0
t:f
03
P.
0
0
0.
P.
a
0
13
28
32
"
....
Perforation
Krupp Armor at
2000 yards.
ci
,5.,.
Capped.
Velocity at 2000.
ELEMENTS OF NAVAL GUNS.

6
.... ...
........
-MI
THE
3LUEJACKETS MANUAL
UNITED STATES NAVY
1902
PREPARED BY
Lieutenant RIDLEY McLEAN, U.S.N.
PRICE, $1.25
PUBLISHED BY
THE NAVAL INSTITUTE,
ANNAPOLIS, MD.
COPYRIGHT, 1902, HT
LIEUT. E. L. BEACH, U. S. N.
Sec. and Treas. U. S. Naval Institute
ZOt Rorb Caflimore (Nese

THE PRIEDENNY 11.13 COMPANY
BALTIMORE, MD., U. S. A.
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
IVashington, Octobcr 4, 1902.
Me Bluejacket's Manual, prepare
d by Lieutenant Ridley
Lean, U. S. Navy, and publish
ed by the Naval Institute,
ler the direction of the Bureau
of Navigation, is issued to
service for the use and information of petty officers and
isted men.
WILLIAM H. MOODY,
Secretary.
gi
rc
(lc
th
un
th,
as
ha
tic
pc:
CIL
ald
PREFACE
This manual is a cOmpilation from various books, and contains information of special value to enlisted men.
Petty officers in every branch will find the information herein
given of value and interest; but for many details they must
refer to books ot a less general nature.
Petty officers will find this book valuable for reference. The
details of many drills are given, which will aid petty officers
in
the performance of their duties, and serve as a guide in instructing the men under them.
, This manual is designed
to be of value to men just entering
he serviceboth in the Naval
Reserve and in the regular navy
as landsmen or apprenticesand for this
reason an attempt
has been made to give, in a condensed form,
not only instructions for petty officers, but information with
which every
person in the naval service
should be familiar.
RIDLEY McLEAN,
Lieutenant, U. S. N.
NOTE
This manual is divided into chapters as follows:
hapter I. Petty Officers and their Duties.
II. Events in Daily Routine; Duties in Connection
with Life on board Ship.

III. Questions in Seamanship.
IV. Boats.
V. Questions in Ordnance and Gunnery.
VI. Questions in Signals.
VII. Miscellaneous Extracts from Navy Regulations;
General Information regarding Naval Discipline and Customs. Ship Regulations, Enlistment, Discharge, Pay, Promotion, etc.
Each chapter has a separate table of contents, and a general
:
.le 2
1 2f contents will be found at the back of the book.Editor.
CHAPTER 1
PETTY OFFICERS
CONTENTS.
Hints for Petty Officers
Boatswain's Mates
Masters-at-Arms
Gunner's Mates
Gun Captains
Quartermasters
The Log Book
WeatherStorms
Storm Signals
Distress Signals
Signals for Pilots
Seamen's Proverbs
Questions for Quartermasters
Flags, Signals and Ceremonies
Miscellaneous Questions
Honors
Coxswains
General Instructions for Coxswains
Care of Boats
Hoisting Boats
Boat-lines
Questions for Coxswains
Boat Salutes
Life Boats
General Rules
Rules of the Road, Lights, etc
Buoys
Boat Tactics
th
efl
an
PAG du
an
5
be
1 11.:
1
tdvPtilitiiaIIIjjEi
Lff
'e
illir
igui
jqn 1
nt
Ie
nth
2ti0
2witl
21 Ii
Ihel
Avh 1
0Hut]
).err
A 1
3or
1:o
20t
Jrhai
3edg
Alie
4
HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS

THEIR DUTIES AND THE MANNER
OF PERFORMING THEM
Petty officers are men rated for their superior knowledge,
and for their ability in handling men. They are selected for
the purpose of assisting the officers of the ship to promote its
efficiency in every way. They should, in virtue of their position
and experience, instruct and direct those below them, in their
AGsduties, in the customs of the service, in its established routine,
land in naval discipline generally.
9 A petty officer is not a man who is paid a larger salary
cbecause he is expected to perform extra manual labor. He is
paid for his knowledge and his ability to superinten
direct the work of those placed under him. He shouldd and
at all
imes take the same interest in the appearance, condition,
and
,
'efficiency
of the ship and in the performance of any duty with
Ilwhich he is connected as any officer on shipboard.
It He should at all times be respectful and obedient to
his
xisuperiors, and exact discipline and obedience from those under
'Lim. He should make himself perfectly familiar with all the
unties of his rate and be prepared to fill a temporary vacancy
/in the next higher
rate. He should be able to correctly and
instruct men of lower ratings in all their duties.
He
e should at all times correct lubberly and untidy habits of
Pher members of the crew. The direct handling and instrucio
the crew falls to the petty officer, and he is clothed
vith the necessary authority for that purpose.
lie should be an example to the other members of the crew,
never forgetting that the superior knowledge and experience
2)A'hIch he possesses, together with his manner of performing
AltY, and his attention to details are powerful factors in de;terrnining his influence and his ability to demand obedience.
21. The following general duties and instructions are laid down
3r petty officers of the numerous ratings. It is not possible
30
0 give every duty of each rating, but the general duties are
1". Petty officers of whatever rating should remember
3.11
3tdat
their efficiency depends upon their own detailed knowlRe and upon the degree of interest they take in promoting
Ihe ship's efficiency.

4
r8
THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
The petty officer in a division should endeavor to have the

work over which he has charge thoroughly and efficiently performedwith celerity and in a ship-shape manner. He should
at all times attempt to obtain man-o'-war conduct from the
division. At drill he should carefully instruct his squad, or
section, in the subject assigned by the division officer, making
every effort to interest the men in the work, seeing that the di
short time of drill period is not wasted, and proceeding with fu
1 the instruction of the squad or section, from drill to drill, iti oi
a systematic manner. He should recommend for extra instruc- cl
tion those men who are backward, or who, through a lack of th
desire to learn, keep the others back. In the morning watch hi
he will, while seeing his part of the ship scrupulously cleaned,th
instruct his division as to the proper method of doing the
work. When clothes are scrubbed, he should see that all mell in
scrub clothes, or if not, that they start on the morning work of
He should give special attention in this regard to any untidy of
members of the division. At brightwork, he will see all at
brightwork thoroughly cleaned and that oil and pumade are Pt
not left on it; this work should, as far as practicable, lid H
divided equally in the division and the brightwork of absenteeisa
should be distributed equally among men who are present. i in
'When decks are cleared for quarters he should see his ow th
part of ship clean and that nothing is secreted in stowhole in
Such things should be sent by him to the "lucky bag" befor
the executive officer's inspection at 9.15. At quarters the 1
petty officer of division should muster the division, succeede
in his absence by the petty officer next in rank. He shoul
see the division promptly formed, muster the men and repo?
all absentees, taking station on the right of the division; 2i th
petty officer on the left, others as file closers, all of theri
correcting infractions of discipline.
Ship's work in every part of the ship is done by men de of
tailed by the petty officers. The list of men excused ;roil re
ship's work on account of special detail should be kept at 1
minimum. Instruction in the smallest details are often 0 in,
great value. For this reason the petty officer should see th all
his men in cleaning ship, painting, etc., are all instructed
expla1 ,
the best way to do the work. He should at all times
at
to members of his division points pertaining to seamanshi vi(
etc., which daily crop up. When directed, he will make o
and submit to his division officer a list of clothing and
inspectio
smaijfo
n
stores desired by the men of his squad. At clothing
, rc
he will see the bags of his squad carefully and properly la, ,
L out for inspection, and when directed will inspect his squa. th,
seeing that the clothes are regulation and properly marke
isms
HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.
the and take the list when required to do so. All petty officers of
er divisions must be competent to give instruction in the
uld Setting-up" drill and other divisional exercises.
the
BOATSWAIN'S MATES.
of
ing The chief boatswain's mate on small ships combines his own
the duties with those of boatswain. The duties of a boatswain are
ritll fully laid down, page 163, Navy Regulations. The other duties
, iii of chief boatswain's mate are mainly forward; and being the
ruc- chief petty officer in that part of the ship, where, owing to
of the habitual absence of officers, irregularities are apt to occur,
itch he is specially charged with the maintenance of discipline in
Led, the forward part of the ship.
the A boatswain's mate of a watch will, when unoccupied, keep
men in the vicinity of his assigned place, in easy hearing of the
ork officer of the deck. He will pass all orders given him by the
tidy officer of the deck, and follow them up and see that the orders
all are obeyed, reporting delinquents if necessary. Work in
ar progress during a watch will be personally supervised by him.
b He will see it done with as much dispatch as possibleat the
tee .me time checking unnecessary noise. Orders will be passed
it. in the phraseology in which they are received. He will exact
ow thoroughness in all work performed, and see that it is done
oie in a ship-shape manner.
:for,
igt
MASTERS-AT-ARMS.
edei
ottii Q. What are the duties of the master-at-arms?
no1 A. The Navy Regulations say:
r 2 "804. I. The senior master-at-arms is the chief-of-police of
he te
h ship, The other masters-at-arms are his assistants.
"2. He shall exercise a strict surveillance over the conduct
de of,the crew.
i
'1 He shall have charge of the messes of the crew and is
froil res
,Ponsible for the maintenance of order and decorum therein.
at
order,
i1 i '4. He shall exert himself to the utmost to preserve
thg lsure'cleanliness, and prevent any infractions of discipline in
Id ii ail, parts of the ship.
He shall, when necessary, arrest offenders and report
Pshic at. once to the officer of the deck or to the executive officer any
Oil violation of the regulations.
m all "805. I. He is the 'custodian of all prisoners, and he shall
:cti000t suffer them to escape, nor dismiss them without orders
r tail tr9rn the proper authority.
In case of serious fire, or of any sudden danger whereby
ltla th'
2.
rke. e safety of the ship is imperiled and when time will not per-

to
tl
mit a reference to superior authority, he shall release all prisoners at once, reporting the fact immediately to the officer oftf,
the deck.
"3. He shall be watchful over the prisoners and visit thentth
at least once every four hours during the day, and oftener if
necessary, to ascertain their condition and needs.
"4. While he must suppress disorder among the prisoner.%
and report all delinquents, he shall be reasonable and not
unduly severe in his demands.
01
"5. When confining prisoners, he shall take care to havee
,
sufficient assistance at hand. He must always be prepared, so
far as possible, to confine additional prisoners.
Sc
"806. He shall keep a record of punishments involving cow
finement, and shall report to the officer of the deck for entod,
in the log all cases of confinement and release of prisoners.
"807. At 9 a. m. daily he shall submit through the executivtr
officer a report of all persons confined, with a statement oan
their offenses, the manner and date ofordered.shz
confinement, and thi
authority by which the confinement was
"8o8. He shall examine the holds and store-rooms to see fDe
they have been closed at the appointed hour, the lights extin
guished and keys turned in, and report the result to the execujut
tive officer when the latter makes his evening rounds.
inc
"8o9. 1. He shall be vigilant in his efforts to prevent liquatat
and other prohibited articles from being smuggled on board c
and to prevent any of the crew from leaving the ship withoon
authority. In cases where his suspicions have been aroused A
he shall make report accordingly.
"2. At 9 and to p. m. he shall make the rounds to see tha A
fires and lights are extinguished as prescribed, reporting tithe
result of his inspection to the officer of the deck.
"3. He shall take great care that no Government propert: A
is injured or taken out of the ship without authority.
igh
"4. He shall use every possible effort to prevent thieviilt
and to detect any person who may be guilty thereof.
A
"5. He shall take charge of all unclaimed private properVtat
found on board until instructions are given him as to its di
position.
A
"6. He shall check all profane and bad language, quarrellinEine
gambling and unseemly noises, and use every effort to prevell
improper conduct in any form.
"lho. He shall examine the bumboats and report the pr5,5
ence of any unwholesome or objectionable articles therein. 11 T]
shall note the prices charged, and report to the executilteli
officer any exorbitant demands, or cases of unfair dealing.
Jon
"811. He shall have charge of the smoking lantern and s
1
It
,that it is kept lighted during smoking hours only. He shall

ris .;take care that there is no smoking in unauthorized places and
otthat the galley fires and other lights are not used by smokers.
"812. At general muster he shall answer for the members of
Etirthe crew who are in confinement.
if "813.
1. He shall take charge of the effects of all absent and
deceased members of the crew and hold them until disposed of
terty,order of superior authority.
not
2. He shall take charge of the bag and hammock of any
one who is absent without leave, reporting his action to the
taveexecutive officer.
s "3. He shall take charge of the effects of liberty men when
SO directed.
otr "4. He shall be present at the sale of effects of deserters and
ntddeceased persons.
ts. "814. When the magazine is about to be opened, he shall
itivrst see that all unauthorized lights and fires are extinguished,
oind report the fact to the officer of the deck.
tli "815. When an order
is given to clear the lower decks, he
,thall see that it is obeyed at once, and that no unauthorized
tpersons remain below.
Ktio "816. During the absence
the senior master-at-arms, his
ecoluties shall be performed by of
master-at-arms next in rank,
the
tnd if there be no junior master-at-arms, by some one desigiquoiated to act in that capacity."
oard Q. Who are responsible for observing regulations about lights
thotin store-rooms occupied by
yeomen and hospital stewards?
tised A. The yeomen and hospital
stewards themselves.
_ Q. At what hours are fires for cooking extinguished?
tIV A ,.
A t 9 p. m., unless specially authorized by the captain.
hey may be extinguished earlier by his order.
g
, Q. What are &oo o'clock lights?
pert A. All
lights in hold, store-rooms and orlops, and all open
lghts in the ship except in officers' quarters.
eviol Q. 9.00 o'clock
lights?
A. All lights except. cabin, officers', ward-room, steerage,
open tate-room,
and designated standing-lights.
di5 Q. io.00 o'clock lights?
. A. Ward-room and steerage country, or mess-rooms, except
in each, unless extensions are granted.
revel'
GUNNER'S MATES.
The duties of a gunner's mate require a most thorough
1.
;cud clinical knowledge on all points relating to the care, preservaII) and manipulation of the guns (or battery) to which he is
,
nd 5
12
assigned. He forms one of the gunner's gang, and in that

capacity, should have a thorough knowledge of all ammunition;
of the magazines, shell-rooms, etc. In each drill he assists
and is at hand when needed, chiefly in using articles of equip-D1
ment, assisting in case of accident to gun, etc. He should(
make every endeavor to preserve the gun or battery to whiclil
assigned by care in observing rules laid down for that purposeez
The cleaning of the gun itself devolves on the gun's crew, but
the bore and the paintwork is usually looked out for by the
gunner's mate. If detailed as armorer, all small arms are it
his care for cleaning, issuing to divisions, etc.
Q. What inspection must a magazine or shell-room pass? !/)
.re]
A. Article 6o6, U. S. Navy Regulations, says:
"2. He (the navigator and ordnance officer) shall, during hi-e
inspection, ascertain whether the magazines and shell-roorn)ni
are dry and their linings tight; the means for flooding ao-r
draining efficient and in order; the arrangement for stowagto,
complete and ample; the lenses clean, carefully set and withogd
fracture; the lighting apparatus in order, well ventilated, amplqir
in power, and capable of burning at least four hours; and thlus
means for supplying ammunition to the battery safe, efficietbo
lie
and ample."
Q. During cruise how often are floodcocks tested and magli-rn
zines inspected?
mu
A. Weekly.
Q. In the absence of the gunner, who performs his duties? al
A. The chief, or senior gunner's mate. The duties are to triz
TII
obtained from the Navy Regulations.
Gunner's mates should consult the chapter on Ordnance a;art
Gunnery for further information.
GUN CAPTAINS.
Q.
Gun captains must have a perfect familiarity with their OA.
,
and mounts, ammunition, and the instructions pertaining t
them, and must instruct the crews in all details. When ts:
directed they will instruct the crews in the various poi.ed
affecting good marksmanship, in rapidity of loading and firt or/
in the use of various kinds of ammunition, and the details er
drill. They will endeavor to increase the knowledge of ste
gun crew at every drill, and will not permit men to drag I ut
lessly through the period. They should feel that it rests
ar
them to give to guns' crews the training which will deli n
t
o
l
minute.
per
hits
in action the greatest possible number of
brightwork they will see everything scrupulously clean, Oieste
that objectionable cleaning material is not used on any pal'
Ilb
13
L atinnlarly at overhauling battery. They should at all times take

>n, personal interest in their guns, and report shortcomings
to
sthe division officer, instead of depending on the officer to disOver defects in the gun equipment, training of crew, etc.
uld Gun captains should familiarize themselves with the chapter
01"-u Ordnance and Gunnery, which contains much information
isdearing upon their duties.
bu
tli
QUARTERMASTERS.
The chief quartermaster has general charge of the navigation
:partment and stores under the navigator. He will see that
.ierything is in good order and condition. He is generall
lisesent at important signalling, and, at "All Hands," takes they
a0The other quarter

stand their bridge watch; they
wagiould carefully entermasters
of the log hourly,
hos;id at all times keep the various columns
a
bright lookout for signals, boats
mViproaching with personsvery
in them, movements of ships, or any
thiusual occurrence, all of
which are reported immediately.
ciesbo much attentio
n
nes. Boats approaccannot be paid to a good lookout at all
nagirmaster. At sea hing at night will be hailed by the guarthe habitual watch is stood at the conn.
e should be expert
in all kinds of signals, and should
miliarize himself with other
useful informationsuch as flags
es? all nations,
to ssrtance entitleduniforms, and the features of persons of imto a salute, etc.
;The
ng instructions are particularly applicable to
e astarterfollowi
masters.
THE LOG BOOK.
Q. What is the log book?
OA. ItIS a record of the daily events on board ship.

mg
It is
n
uy the officer of the deck and consists of two general
le"
oifFts: the columns and the remarks. The weather
, clouds.
Pfirird,
s of the barometer, thermometer, etc., are
ta.,_!ordedreading
in the columns by the quartermaster of the watch,
If'fler the
direction of the officer of the deck. The quarter0' ter usually
keeps a slate or pad in which the time of certain
ag
utions
or occurrences which should be entered in the
ts . arks
are recorded for the use of the officer of the deck
deli n
ite. ;orethe latter writes his log, which he does after e&ch watch
going below. All items of importance, or current inin' ?est, relating to the ship are entered in the log.
pa
14
Q. How is the state of the weather expressed in the-columrIL

A. By the following letters, which have the meanings pia(
opposite them:
.11
b Clear blue sky.
c Cloudy weather.
d Drizzling or light rain.
f Foggy weather or fog.
g Gloomy or dark stormy looking weather.
h Hail.
I Lightning.
m Misty or hazy weather.
o Overcast.
p Passing showers of rain.
q Squally weather.
Rainy weather or continuous rain.
s Snow, snowy weather or snowing.
t Thunder.
u Ugly appearance or threatening weather.
Variable weather.
w Wet or heavy dew.
lc
Q. How are the forms of the clouds expressed in the lo A
A. By the following abbreviations. (The brief descripli Q
given should enable a cloud form to be recognized, but fti A
descriptions are in the front of every log book.)OTC
Cirrus. Isolated feathery clouds of fine fibrous by
Ci.
ture; Mares tails.
Cirro-Stratus. Fine whitish veil giving a whitishl.
pearance to the sky. Often produces halos, "
rus haze."
Ci-Cu. Cirro-Cumulus. Small fleecy white balls and w
without shades, arranged in groups and often
lines. "Mackerel sky.
Alto-Cumulus. Larger white or grayish balls, I
A-Cu.
. shaded portions in flocks or rows, often so cl
that edges meet.
Alto-Stratus. Thick veil of gray or bluish color, 17
A-S.
'liant in moon or sun. May produce Coronae.
Strato-Cumulus. A succession of rolls of dark cl
S-Cu.
' which frequently cover the whole sky. The c Q.
acteristic cloud of storm areas, especially of A.
fore part of those areas.
ffic,
Nimbus. Rain cloud. A thick layer of dark clo) is
. without shape from which continuous rain is Yficc
ing. Cirro-Stratus or Alto-Stratus is seen throi
the breaks. Low flying fragments are knowfWas
"Scud."
15
Cumulus. Thick clouds whose summits are domes

with protuberances, but whose bases, are flat.
"Woolpack clouds."
-N. Cumulo-Nimbus. Thundershower clouds. Mountainous clouds, surrounded at top by veil of false cirrus, and below by Nimbus-like masses of clouds.
Stratus. Horizontal sheet of lifted fog.
Q. How is the state of the sea entered in the log?
A. By the following abbreviations:
B Broken or irregular sea.
C Chopping, short, or cross sea.
L Long rolling sea.
R Rough sea.
T Tide-rips.
G Ground swell.
H Heavy sea.
M Moderate sea or swell.
S Smooth
Q. How is the strengthsea.
of the wind indicated by the entry
log?
lo A. In figures
varying
o-a dead calm, to 52-a hurricane.
lit) Q. What is the velocityfrom
of the wind for the various strengths?
t f A.
Lun
pla
Force
Of wind
IS 1 by figures.
ish)
Name of wind in
language.
breezesnnautical
0
I
Calm
Light airs
Light
Velocity of wind in
miles per hour.
0
I 10 2
4
Gentle breezes (occasional whitecaps).
9
Moderate breezes (many whitecaps)
14
Stiff breezes
17
Fresh breezes
20
4
,
(Very) Fresh breezes
24
1 CI
30
Moderate gales
Strong gales
40
Gale
67
C.
.I_i
8o
Heavy gale
90t0 120
Hurricane
e c,
9 What is the rough log?
Of /I. The log is written cach watch in lead pencil by the deck
lcer
c ,Is before being relieved. This is called the "rough log."
is icercopied daily in a larger book with pen and ink, and each
signs his log in ink. This is the "smooth log," and it
tiro
A
rwarded every six months to the Navy Department at
OW.' ad
vv
[tell
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-.ungt011.
16
WEATHERSTORMS.
Q. In a general way how can the state of the weather be fo1j.11,
told by the clouds and the sky?
A. By experience, in each locality, mariners get proficient yi
foretelling the state of weather and shifts of wind ,by the aw
pearance of the sky and the state of the clouds. Genera1111
speaking, the following are given as accepted indications I,
certain weather:
rc
FAIR WEATHER is to be expected after (t) A rosy sky at su
set. (2) A gray sky in the morning. (3) Soft delicate cloiln
in sky. (4) A light bright blue sky.
a.
WINDY WEATHER is foretold by (t) A red sky in the morm
(2) A high dawn, that is, when the sun rises from behin
cloudbank. (3) Hard-edge, oily looking clouds. (4) A d
gloomy blue sky. (5) A bright yellow sky at sunset. (6)
light driving scud over clear sky. (7) Gaudy unusual hues W e
hard definite lines.
. rc
RAIN is foretold by (t) Bright red sky at sunset (possilar
rain). (2) Soft clouds. (3) A pale yellow sky at sunset. ' c
Small inky clouds. (5) Driving scud over heavy clouds. n
r ,
Gaudy or unusual hues with hard definite lines (will be acco A
panied by wind).
,!r,
CHANGE OF WEATHER is foretold by (t) High upper cioie
moving in direction opposite to that of the wind. (2) Sol
curly streaked or spotty clouds, with overcasting vapor.
CYCLONE is foretold by (I) Hard steel-gray or greenish 5
(2) Blood-red or bright yellow sunset. (3) Heavy swell Q
A
confused agitation of sea.
Q. What form of cloud is most closely connected with stale
centers?
A. Probably the cirrus. The value of accurate observati t
of the cirrus cloud is most important, as it is often clo2Q
connected with the winds. If the cirrus clouds appear' ti
radiating bands, crossing the sky, the point where these bal A
meet should be noted and its bearing entered in the log,2111
this often indicates the center of an approaching cyclone.' c
the cirrus cloud is in the form of a cloud bank or sheetof.
:
s:
l,li
the horizon, the point of greatest density of this bank shoeew
be noted for the same reason.
Q. Generally speaking, how do dampness and wind affect TI
barometer?
A. A barometer generally rises with dry weather, or noal
erly winds, and falls with wet weather, or southerly winds. ad]
Q. Aside from the appearance of the sky, what are It
signs of an approaching hurricane?
17
A. EARLIEST INDICATIONS.The distant storm usually causes

.n abnormal rise of the barometer, with cool, dry, fresh winds,
idnd a cessation of the ordinary land and sea breezes with a
crY transparent atmosphere. A long, low swell is often
at a great distance, sometimes for hundreds of miles,
nt ioticed
rith
occasional high hurricane rollers. The direction of the
e dwell,
0
r
when unaffected by the presence of intervening islands
2
d neighboring coasts indicates the bearing of the center; as
ns o also the light feathery plumes of cirrus cloud that radiate
om a point of the horizon marked by a whitish arc.
t s UNMISTAKABLE SIGNS.AS the sky becomes hazy with a thin
:I -worm cirrus veil, halos are noticed by day and night, the
. rometer begins to fall slowly,
the air becomes heavy, hot
rn d
moist, with red and
tints at dawn and sunset; the
lin w but solid and ruggedviolet
looking cloudbank of the hurricane
cla pears on the horizon
break off and
(6) verge from it, and like distant land; squallspassing
across
later squalls are noticed
e center of the bank.
seeming to
ow out of the atmosphe Fine misty rain forms,
re; a heavy cross sea is felt, and the
ossi rometer
t. Q. Why while rapidly falling, becomes unsteady.
S. cated? is it necessary for the center of the cyclone to be
acc A. SD the
ship can keep out of harm and danger. The cenbeing
lot?er,avoided.the worst and most dangerous portion, is always to
csio
STORM SIGNALS.
sh
NellQ. What is meant by storm signals?
A. The various
stetlegram at their civilized nations give warning, received by
various stations along the coast, of the aproach of storms, their direction and position of centers, so
vatif to guide and warn vessels about to sail.
clo1Q. What are these signals as displayed from signal stations
peari the United
States?
eb& A. Warnings of the approach of windstorms will be pubio g,shed by the
display of flags by day and by lanterns by night,
one.I connection with the bulletins posted and the reports furet af.shed to newspapers, sailors, etc. Every effort is made by the
shonited States Weather Bureau to give this information to
7erY
,,, one who needs or desires it.
fleet'
he signal warnings are as follows (no night hurricane signals
ied):
r norrhe STORM WARNING (a red flag, eight
feet square, with a
inds
center three feet square) indicates that a storm of marked
are ack
olence is expected.
The RED PENNANT (eight feet hoist and fifteen feet fly) di
played with the flags indicates easterly winds, that is, from ti(
northeast to the south inclusive, and that the storm center E
approaching.
The WHITE PENNANT (eight feet hoist and fifteen feet 11 2
displayed with the flags indicates westerly winds, that is, fro ;
north to southwest inclusive, and that the storm center ba
passed.
When the RED PENNANT is hoisted above the storm warnillai,
winds are expected from the northeast quadrant; when belo A
from the southeast quadrant.
When the WHITE PENNANT is hoisted above the storm wilful
ing, winds are expected from the northwest quadrant; wli 2
te
below, from the southwest quadrant.
NIGHT STORM WARNINGS.By night, a red light will indi N
easterly winds; a white above a red light will indicate weste.
winds.
HURRICANE WARNING.Two storm-warning flags, red 17,eel
black centers, displayed one above the other, indicates I
expected approach of a tropical hurricane or an extreni
severe and dangerous storm. No night hurricane warning
displayed.
DISTRESS SIGNALS.
vhuiteti
:
Q. What are the International Signals of Distress from
sels requiring assistance?
nfl
A. IN THE DAYTIME:
1. Gun or other explosive fired at intervals of about op:
minute.
2. The International Code Signal of Distress indicated
"N.
3. The "distant signal," consisting of a square flag, halt
either above or below it a ball or anything resembling a till',
4. The "distant signal," consisting of a cone, point upwr
having either above it or below it a ball or anything resemVo('rr(
a ball. (This is purely a code signal.)
5. A continuous sounding with any fog-signal apparatu5wi
AT NIGHT:
1. A gun or other explosive signal fired about every mio
2. Flames on the vessel (as from a burning tar or oil bail
3. Rockets or shells throwing stars of any color or desc
tion, fired one at a time or at short intervals.
4. A continuous sounding with any fog-signal apparatus.
11E1
19
SIGNALS FOR PILOTS.
tl
Q. What are
the International Signals for a pilot?
A. IN THE DAYTIME:
I. The Jack to be hoisted at the fore.
t fl 2. The International Code Pilot Signal, indicated by "P.T."
fro 3. The International Code Flag "S," with or without penr

4. The "distant signal," consisting of a cone, point upward,
rnitaving above it two balls or shapes resembling balls.
eld AT NIGHT:
I. The pyrotechnic light known as the Costons Blue Light
valurned every fifteen minutes.
WIT 2. A bright white light flashed or shown at short or frequent
itervals just above the bulwarks for about a minute at a time.
dic NOTE.The
attention of all quartermasters and signalmen is
steivited to the various instructions given in the International
iignal Book, many of
through lack of space, have not
I vt'een given in this bookwhich,
t
r env
SEAMEN'S PROVERBS.
nig
A red sky in the morning, sailors take warning;
A red sky at night is a sailor's delight.
'he evening red and morning gray, are sure signs of a fine day;
lut the evening gray and morning red, make the sailor shake
m4
[his head.
Yith the rain before the wind, your topsail halliards you must
!Lind; but when the wind's before the rain, you may hoist your
ut bPsails up again.
Long foretold, long last; short notice, soon past.
tted
Rainbow in the morning sailors take warning;
Rainbow at night is the sailors' delight.
haC
a ttackerel skies and Mares tails, make lofty ships carry low sails.
Bermuda lets you pass, then lookout for Hatteras.
dead calm often precedes a violent gale.
orpoises swim toward the coming breeze.
[will come.
5 e the
wind veers against the sun, trust it not, for back it
1,
atu ,Vhn
vv hen the sun sets in a clear, an easterly wind you need not
[fear."
blow.
stronger
First
a
indicates
low,
very
rise
after
hart
June too soon, July stand by, August lookout you must,
desc
September remember. October all over.
(W. I. cyclones).
ttus.
()
, -20 ,4.4,74-,
-4, O.,. TIIE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
go
QUESTIONS FOR QUARTERMASTERSFLAGS, SIGNALiig
m;
AND CEREMONIES.
for
Q. How half-mast colors?
1
A. Hoist to full mast and then haul half-way down. .
already mastheaded, haul half-way down.
;2)
Q. How haul down half-masted colors?
!ig
A. Hoist all the way up, then haul down as usual at colorsit :
Q. In dressing ship, what flags are at masthead?
(
A. National ensign. If masts are same height, ensigns sholm
be same size. At peak, or on staff aft, display largest ensl A
in ship. Hoist jack forward. Put derricks and cranes Ind
place. If in honor of foreign national anniversary, hoist /I C.,
tb
of nation at main truck instead of U. S. ensign.
Q. Suppose a salute is to be fired when clothes or scrubt
) ).
canvas is up, what should be done?
A. Pipe down temporarily, and hoist jack until salute)
"
nit
fired; then trice up lines and haul down jack.
Q. What shows that a ship of the Navy is in commissiorder
A. Every naval ship in commission carries at all times 'IT
admiral or rear-admiral's flag or captain's pennant at la"
truck. The pennant and flag of admiral is at main truck; r6as
admiral at mizzen; or main on two-masted ship.
Q. What is the flag of an admiral?
j
nrine911
A. Blue with four white stars.
A
Q. Rear-Admiral?
A. Blue with two white stars.
c
Q. Captain?
A
A. The coach-whip, forked end.
ias
Q. When two or more naval ships are in company, how u c
tinguish senior ship?
_Pan
A. By senior-officer's pennanta short blue pennant flo A
from the mizzen. It is flown in addition to the captain's as
nant.
Q
Q. When admiral's or rear-admiral's flag is flying, does 1lan
captain fly the pennant?
A
A. No.
Q
Q. When is the national ensign flown?
iiaPt
A. On ships at anchor from 8 a. m. until sunset, and wP A
getting under-way or coming to anchor during daylight an
answer to other men-of-war which show colors under thr. Q
circumstances; when falling in with other ships of war. if
21
good reason to contrary; when near land, especially forts,

LLiighthouses or town; when meeting other ships at sea; if a
man-of-war enters port at night she should hoist her colors
for a short time at daylight in order to show her nationality.
Q. When is the national ensign displayed from the boats?
A. (r) At boom only when ship is dressed or full dressed;
2) between 8 a. m. and sunset when away from ship in a for!ign part; (3) in home port when boarding foreign vessels, or
)rs1t such other times as the commanding officer may prescribe.
Q. Suppose three or more rear-admirals of the United States
hoNavy meet, how distinguish their
ranks?
ns; A. The senior flies blue flag, next in rank the red, the junior
cs tnd all others the white (white
with two blue stars).
t fl Q. How can you tell that a captain or admiral is coming in
t boat to pay an official call?
ubt A. The admiral would
fly his flag on staff shipped in bow of
)oat; a captain or commandin officer would similarly fly his
g
utoennant. These may
be carried when he comes unofficially,
nit generally are signs
of his coming officially. In foreign
juulervice, frequently,
visit the ship on her
les trrival fly pennant;boarding officers, who
also when coming officially from the caplain or admiral.
our service. In this
; rose the rank can This is not done in the
number of stripes
ascertained
by
only
be
in the arm of the
officer in the boat.
Q. If a captain in the Navy obtained leave to command a
nerchant steamer, would he fly a pennant?
A. No; only
when commanding a ship in the service of the
Jnited States.
Q. What devices mark an admiral's barge?
A. Gilt stars on
each bow as in his flag. Flagstaff forward
las gilt lance
-head.
Q. What devices mark the boats of other officers in cornrand?
flO
01 A. A gilt
Pennant or staff of captain
"Las gilt ball;arrow on each bow. lower rank, flat truck.
commander, gilt star;
Q. When does
a chief-of-staff not in command carry penDes tan in
bow?
A. Only
when visiting officially in behalf of flag officer.
aQ. .In half-masting colors, is the jack and admiral's flag or
d
P
AtaL's pennant half-masted?
The jack is. The flag of admiral, or pennant of comht;
g 1andin
n. lz officer only in the event of the decease of that officer.
r
What does the jack flown in bow of boat mean?
r. if
22
THE BLUEJACICET'S MANUAL.
A. It is a flag of a diplomatic representative of the Unit

States of or above the rank of charge-d'affaires, such as mi
isters, ambassadors, etc.
Q. What ceremony is held at colors?
A
A. Field music and band must be present. Music gives thrpo
rolls and three flourishes. At third roll, ensign starts frea.
deck and is hoisted slowly to peak or truck, during which tlim
band shall play "Star Spangled Banner." All sentries sal
and remain at salute from time the ensign leaves the deck u A
the band finishes the national air. All officers and men sliei
face aft and salute the ensign when it reaches peak or tru te
Same at sunset colors except ruffles and flourishes are gi e
before the flag leaves the peak. Band plays "Hail Columbi e
Salutes are made by officers and men when flag reaches tip]
deck.
Q. If the flag is hoisted at sunrise does it receive the sat A
honors?
y I]
A. Yes; and they are not repeated at 8 a. m.
Q. Would a junior ship in presence of a senior display jgley
at jackstaff if senior ship had jack flying, whether wash-clott A
were up or not?
ron
A. Yes; she follows motion of senior ship,
regardless.
senior ship had wash-clothes up the latter would not dispi_91;
jack. (See Arts. 144 and 16i, U. S. Navy Regs.)
A
Q. Do merchant ships ever salute men-of-war?
A. Yes; by dipping their ensigns.
A
Q. How is it answered?
vei
A. By dipping, dip for dip.
le
Q. On what occasions do we dress ship?
ac
A. February 22 (Washington's Birthday), May 30 (Decoratl n
Day), and July 4 (Anniversary of Independence of the Unit'
41
ur
States). Ships in commission, not under way, full dress f A.
8 a. m. until sunset, and at noon fire a national salute. At
salute with ensign at peak. Only when these anniversa
occur on Sunday, postpone until Monday. Dress or full d(1
ship in foreign ports when requested to do so.
A.
Q. What is done if the weather is bad?
A. Ships may be ordered to"dress"instead of "full dregn land flags may, if necessary, be hauled down after hoisting.
Q.
Q. What holidays aboard ship?
A. January r, February 22, May 30. July 4, first Mondal
September, Thanksgiving Day, and December 25, except
Sunday; in such case Monday will be observed as holiday. le (1
,tg a
Quartermasters should study and familiarize themsd
with the chapter on signals.
OF
23
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS.
rni
Q. What are the chronometers and where kept?
A. They are very accurate clocks kept in the navigator's

hroom or office, and used in determining position of a ship at
frcea. The signal or chief quartermaster should know how to
tlind, transport and care for chronometers.
alti Q. What is a barometer?
uu A. An instrument for measuring the pressure of the atmosshhere. The aneroid is a mechanical instrument which faciliruAtes the determination of the pressure in rough weather, but
giNoe mercurial is always the standard. The reading is simply
tbitte height of a column of mercury which the pressure of air
s pports. Above the mercury is a vacuum.
Q. What is a psychrometer?
sal A. The wet and dry bulb thermometer. It measures humidy in air.
Q. Is a
required to be kept on ships' boats after
r jhey shove lookout
off?
100 A. Yes, especially when
under sail, so that aid can be sent
romptly if needed.
S. Q. If a boat
is
or returning to ship, and the officerislii-the-deck is not leaving
on quarter-deck, what do?
A. Look him up, and report departure or return.
Q. How tell when a ship drags?
A. If there is danger of dragging, a drift lead should be put
ver the side with
slack
If ship drags she will tauten out
line. A good rangeline.
is important if the heading of
ashore
ra
ship is watched; it will tell very quickly if the ship drags.
)
unit Q. In steering, what precautions are necessary in regard to
fey'
Uniform?
A No iron nor steel should be in pockets, nor grommet in

rsatap.
ass. No iron nor steel movable objects should be near comdti
u piny?
A. They often
change the compass a considerable amount.
dreOndsi cannot be discovered until the bearing of sun is taken
t causes the actual course steered to be in error.
IQ. When and how are the lead and log lines checked up?
1(114
The navigator has the chief quartermaster do this before
01ng to sea. Somewhere on the upper deck are brass tacks,
ept
y. :e
distances between which are accurately known. By stretchmsCll g a line along them any change in length can be discovered.
g.
24
HONORS.
Q. What are the various honors shown officers vis ting the ship?
Salute.
A.
Rank.
Arriv. Dep.
President
President Foreign Rep.or Foreign
Sov'rn
Membr. Royal Family..........
Ex. Pres't
fib
Uniform.
S. F. D.
66
46
1
1
66
1
...
Vice-Pres't
....
U. S. Ambassador (within waters
accredited, etc.)
Dross.
....
Secretary of Navy
S. F. D.
....
Asst. Sec. Navy
Dress.
....
66
Cabinet Officer
....
66
Chief Justice
...
66
Govr. Genl. U. S. Islands
...a
Govr. State, Territory. or U. S
66
Island
a...
,,,
Presl. Senate
.. .
64
Speaker House Reps.
....
4.
Committee of Congress
..
46
Envoy Extraordinary .............
....
66
Minister Resident
....
66
Charge
....
Cons. Gen'i.
Uniform day. ..
Consul
"
'
6 ....
V. Cons., where be is only rep. of
66
66
United States.
....
Dress.
Adm'I. or Gen'l
....
V. Adml., Lt Gen.
66
....
Maj. Gen. Comdg. U.
or.
B. A. 1...'
46
R. Adml. or Maj Gen
Commodore,or Brig.Gen'l. t
66
....
tr.S. A.or M.C.
Capt., Col. or Comdr
Lieut. Col
Lt. Comdr If C
0
l
Major.
Other Commissioned Officers.

Lt. Comdr. and Maj., If not Comdg
Officer
t-4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
.'...
25
HONORS.
lifies Marine
Guard.
Gu
4
4
4
:I 4
Air.
Yards
Manned.
Full.
National
Yes.
66
66
66
44
4
p 4
3
4
4
66
66
No.
46
Flag.
Presidents at main during visit.

National at66main during visit.
66
"
salute.
National at main during salute in
foreign countries.
National at fore during salute.
44
46
64
4
4
4
4
3
2
46
66
64
Sec'ry.at main during salute.

Asst. Secty's at main during visit.
National at,fore during salute.
66
64
66
66.
64
64
66
64
64
66
66
64
66
66
s6
46
6,
66
IA
66
66
66
46
46
64
66
64
IA
66
.
I 4
3
14
2
Ser5ts.
66
8 s. boys.
8s. boys.
6s. boys.
65. boys.
4 s. boys.
4s. boys.
2s. boys.
2s. boys.
2s. boys.
66
66
61
66
66
In case of foreign officers, National

at fore during salute.
26
an
itn
COXSWAINS.
P
Coxswains should be thoroughly familiar with everything I,nd
e
o
rules
,
handling,
nomenclature
boatsthe
lating to their
road, etc.and be competent to instruct their crews in ea
details. The coxswain is responsible to the officer in chargefel.
the boat for its cleanliness and condition for service. B
should constantly keep himself informed as to the complete it
and condition of the boat equipments. He details from at
crew boat cleaners and boat keepers. He should instruct el
crew in the principles of handling a boat under oars and th
in the rules of road, boat salutes, etc. He will see that his c ti
pulls a proper stroke at all times. He will bear in mind ar
the condition of a ship's boats and the excellence of ta
crews are the best criterion of the tone of the ship. V at
coxswain of a running boat, he will man the boat when ca Bt
away, drop down to the gangway, see all men at their stati ui,
etc., in absolute uniform of the day; see that boat is in all ey
spects ready, and report to the officer of the deck that the e
tht
is manned.
When alongside a wharf he will not permit the crew to 1
the boat without permission, nor will he allow forbidden i
des to be brought into the boat. When boats are fitted ou Co
different kinds of service he will see the required articles fIlne
vided at the designated place, and form the crew as direi :at n
He will carefully observe boat salutes, and particularly at 1.
hie:
ings will be careful to avoid crowding the boats contairgfrver
rey
officers. When coxswain of a lifeboat at sea, he will
s 1..)
,,
lower
pdi
to the officer of the deck that the boat is ready for
every watch. At night he musters the crew every vr
at
abreast stations and thwarts.
g fi
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COXSWAINS OF BOATS. roki
foi
The flag "B" of the International Code is the boat g
flag, and, hoisted on the same mast with a signal, indiar"
that the meaning of the signal will be found in the boat f LY
book.
ess
A signal is made to a certain boat by displaying above,aut:
...pz,
code flag the flag or pennant representing the boat's numbgt.
The boats of each ship shall be provided with and shall cln,:
in the bow, at drills, a white distinguishing flag 25 x 18 inga. '
with the ship's distinguishing letter and the boat's distinglIsAy
ing number painted on it, in black block letters, to read Ileasi
bid
staff to fly, to show four feet above rail.
0
answering
with
times
an
all
at
provided
Boats will be
27
ant and a boat signal book, and boats away from the ship
lust keep a good lookout for signals.
Particular attention shall be given to the appearance of boats
g..nd to the dress of their crews;
in bad weather crews should
't le dressed in regulation water-proo
clothing, and in cold
eather should have their pea-jacketsf.at hand. Running boat
g`cews must always be
'Boats visiting other dressed in uniform.
ships shall not lie at the gangway while
ellifaiting, but off the boom
other
1 pats, unless permission or quarter out of the way ofboom.
is given to haul out to the
t Irews must never
their boats to go on board a ship
L 64ithout first obtainileave
ng
C1f the ship visited. Thispermission of the officer of the deck
applies especially to petty officers in
ltiarge of
if,tbtain this visiting parties, who must first go on board and
permission before allowing the party to leave the
\Wt at
cal Boats at the boom,
if they are at all in the way. must be
itiaiuled ahead when
allhey should alwaysother boats leave or arrive at the gangway.
haul clear of shore landings while waiting.
c the crew should
not
ithout permission. be allowed to leave the boats on shore
3 14
CARE OF BOATS.
at Coxswains will
have general charge of their boats at all
es es,
and will be responsible to the officer of the boat
for
ire atness of
nce and readiness for service. Any accident
injury toappeara
tal vered. Thethe boat will be reported to him as soon as discoxswain will familiarize himself with handling
,w
ree boat,
both under sail and oars at every opportunity, and in
ndling her will use the orders customary in the service.
henever
at everythaway from the ship he will exercise care to see
ing is neat and shipshape, no rope's ends hangg from
roke, and aregunwale, his crew neat, that they pull a correct
quiet and attentive. When away from the ship
t c foreign ports the
shall be displayed. A moderate
.1`_ tip* of provisions colors
and water shall be kept in all boats at
11(
'Ea. The
tS ily at coxswains of both life-boats will, when at sea, report
ess forsunset the condition of their boats with respect to readovel ains ofservice and the same report shall be made by the coxthe life-boat's crews of each watch. Life preservers,
tn
Vass, lantern with reserve supply of oil and means of igniill.
and provisi
ons shall always be kept in life-boats when at
he
g oar must be shipped, and the gripes toggled
ingvI'lY for steerin
ad m asiona. slipping. Boats at booms fly colors ofily on special
Smoking in ship's boats, not on detached duty, is
bidden.
ing
28
TIIE
BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
A
Q. If necessary at any time to unbend boat-sails, how keill
them ready for use?
A. They are kept in bags properly marked, with all gi6
complete.
vin
A.
HOISTING BOATS.
Q.
hoisted?
be
boat
A.
Q. How should a
sholQ.
A. After hooking on, "set taut, hoist away." Men
walk briskly away with falls married; when one is up, bA.
on to one and hoist other up "two blocks." Never let b su
sag down after hoisting and while belaying. Every boat at O.
davits at 8 a. m. should be "two blocks." If the boatsvvA.
has his falls in good condition and they have a fair lead, twee k
five men should be able to hoist a boat quickly. Boats Itcn1(ei
d
properly hoisted should be lowered and hoisted again.
ip'5
BOAT LINES.
Q. When should boats coming alongside be given a boat bre,
A. In a strong tideway or wind, or when such a heavy iili
is running as to prevent the bowman from holding on by at
:ho
boat-hook.
FOR
COXSWAINS.
QUESTIONS
N.. '
Q. By whom is the starboard gangway used, and by Ada
nni
the port?
A. The starboard gangway is for the use of commissideat
officers and their visitors; the port for the use of all others.athi
boa
Q. When half-mast boat colors?
11 1
A. Whenever the vessel to which the boat belongs )
masts her colors. If absent from the ship, out of
.
to fok.
men-of-war in vicinity are half-masting, it is proper sight4?1
their movements.
Q. In a running boat, or service boat not on drill, s?.. 1
are the general orders about using sail?
A. If not otherwise ordered, use sail whenever it can be "t..
li it
without delaying the service on which engaged.
mg
Q. How run a line with a boat, against tide?
A. Coil greater part in stern sheets, but have it led fol. I,
with enough in bow to make fast on reaching landing.. P
away, let ship pay out until you have enough to reach, j. I
pay out from boat. If with the tide, take less line in 11.. A
Against tide, a good way is to take all in boat, secure end, ere
pay out dowm to ship; sometimes necessary to under-run hma
line by having other boats come under and float the bight. the
Q. In handling a boat, how should orders be given?

29
A.
eill With a sharp, quick, decisive tone, so that each person
know what to
ee boat should givedoalland when to do it. Whoever handles
ssary orders.
r2r
. Q. When a ship's boat nece
is in the water, where does she usually
ring?
A. To a pendant at
boom, or to a stern pendant.
Q. Who is habitually
A. The boat-keeper. in her?
tc)Q. How is he
led?
liA. By the coxsdetai
wain from the crew; usually by the thwarts,
D' succession.
it Q. What are the
M. He keeps his duties of a boat-keeper?
boat clear of other boats, and clear of side.
elle keeps it neat
in order. If near the gangway, he hauls
s 'clear when boatand
oach or leave gangway. Boat-keepers
d all other mens appr
in a boat when an awning is not spread
aid and salute when
an officer comes alongside, leaves the
ip's side, or pass
es near them. They shall remain standing
,til the boat pass
es or reaches the
t lead, they
s side. If awnings are
salute without rising. ship'
They shall keep ensigns
.ry 'shipped exce
pt
when
ship is dressed; keep oars in, and shall
by attentive, and
not read or lounge in boats, or leave boat
.hout being
. When relieved.
k. They boat is called way, what does crew do?
immediately man the boat from the boom or stern
Adant. The
boat-keeper should haul boat up to facilitate
nning it. Crew
sideatening rain, must be in exact uniform of the day. If
regulation rain clothes at hand; in cold
rs ather, over
coats at hand. The crew and coxswain take place
,boat and drop
s
i 11). What is a down to gangway as soon as possible.
fair
allo
time
wanc
e for a boat to reach gangit. Y?
iok. Three
minu
tes.
Five minutes is very slow.
). If officers
go
1, A.. Rise
s and salutin boat what does coxswain do?
In making runnes. '
ing trip, what is done?
le . Coxs
wain gives orders to shove off, and in accordan
It instructio
ce
ns in drill, under "Oars," sees crew pull good
ing stroke, and, especially in windy weather,
a dry oar.
'or
c. ... What is a dry oar?
Pulling Without splashing.
br l If it is
n V. Always necessary to wait at landing, what do?
haul well clear of landing. Allo no member of
,n(1, cre
w
3" Ntuandto leave the boat unless he has permwissi
on from the
ht. the tog officer to do so. When time arrives for shoving
coxswain shoves off promptly and returns
to ship.
36
Special orders concerning visitors using a ship's boats

always a part of the ship's routine.
Q. In a steam launch, how indicate the rank of the s
officer in the boat?
A. Four blasts, flag officer; three blasts, commanding oil
or chief of staff; two blasts, commissioned officer; one b ,
all others.
J.
Q. What does a coxswain do when officers leave the boat\
,a
A. Rises and salutes.
Q. Suppose the boat is to take a liberty party to a no'er
)fi
ship?
or9,c.
When
gangway.
port
,to
come
A. The boat would
the coxswain would shove off and go alongside port gang'Y'
of ship to be visited. The petty officer in charge would 'at
leave the boat and go alone to the officer of the deck, rea",c)
ing his permission for the party to come aboard. If grame
they would be ordered aboard by the petty officer. If the 'as
was to wait for the liberty party, or for any purpose, she s111'01
invariably lay off the beam or quarter, out of the way of
boats, unless permission is given to haul out to the boon' nd
that case the crew would remain in their boat unless peri1ia
is granted by the officer of the deck of the vessel visiteua
nc(
them to come aboard.
Q. As running boat, how could ship communicate with rhe
10
A. By flag or wigwag.
so
Q. How call you by wigwag?
A. She would call C, "W," or "L "; accordingly oithe
Xpl
boat signalled to was cutter, whaler, or launch.
Q
C) How by flags?
A. Hoist boat number over boat code flag and signal o Yin
A.
yard arm.
t, Q.
Q. How read signals?
A. From boat signal book, if kept in boat. Answer bionl
A.
swering pennant.
Q. What is the meaning of the boat recall?
Q.
A
A. It recalls boat to ship immediately; not answered
obeyed promptly.
A.
Q. What is the meaning of the general recall?
QI
drill
or
A. It recalls boats and vessels on detached duty
A.
answered, but obeyed promptly.
Q. If you had just gone ashore on liberty for 24 hou19
on landing saw the cornet at the fore, what would it moll.
A. It is a positive order for everybody to come aboard Q.
A,
diotely.
Q. Would a boat return at once?

A. Yes, everybody.
Q. Should it be answered?
A. No; obey it at once.
31
BOAT SALUTES.
Salutes shall be exch
anged between boat meeting or passing.
t.Vo junior shall pass ahead of a senior s without
permission.
3alutes are given
,ctenior to be reco whenever boats pass near enough to the
ed, whether he is in uniform or not.
Dfficers of the Armgniz
y, and foreign officers in boats, shall alwa
ys
oe saluted when
gnized. Officers without flag or pennant
,slying, and those reco
in civilian's dress, should be saluted with the
tand only, regardless
of their rank. Coxswains in charge of
(rats should alwa
ralbeir boats. Boatys rise and salute when officers enter or leave
c lassing in boat -keepers should stand up and salute officers
s, and remain standing until the boat has gone
sidongside or has
passed. If boat awnings are spread, they
f calute without
,ra..nder way andrising. This applies to all men in a boat not
raitoat is coming not containing an officer, whether the other
telleaners. At alongside, is leaving or passing, but not to sidelandings or gangways, juniors always show defernee to seniors,
her belonging to the same ship or not.
t b fhe coxswain in whet
other boats, orcharge of a boat, meeting or passing officers
when steering a boat, extending or returning
salute, shall
a'ihen in chargesalute as prescribed. He will vary his salute,
boat, according to the officer saluted, as
xplained in table of
on page 32.
, Q. How are
)0'Mg, saluted? officers in uniform, but without flag or pennant
A. By hand only
.
Q Do men working
on ship's side salute officers coming
biongside
or leaving?
A
; No; they are excused from so doin
g.
cl..,
If in charge of a sail-boat, you meet the
Qomir
C al
barge of an
flying
A. Rise and flag in bow, what do you do?
salute with hand.
Llri Q. A towing, or lade
n, boat? '
A Rise and salut
e with the hand.
)
1.1
A stea
iv0 O
A. Stop mer not towing?
engines, stand and salute with hand.
.rd Q A pulli
A, Toss orng boat?
trail; stand and salute with hand.
C.4
c.)
Rank of the Senior Officer

in the Saluting Boat.
Rank of the Senior Officer in the boat to be saluted.

Flag Officer,or
Commodore, with
the Flag Flying.
Commanding
Officer(with Pennant Flying).
Commissioned
Officer.
Midshipman and
Warrant Officer.
Commanding Officer
Stops engine, lays Junior salutes with

on oars and ea- hand.
lutes with hand.
salutes with
Staff Officer with the rank Stops engine, lays When meeting a Junior
on oars and sa- Senior Comman'g hand.
of Captain or Com'der
immeor
Officer,
hand.
lutes with
d iat e Comman'g Junior salutes with
Marine Officer with the
Officer, stops en- hand.
rank of Col. or Lt.-Col
gine, lays on oars
and salutes with
hand.
Junior salutes with
Commissioned Officer - Stops engine,tosses Stops engine, lays
or trails oars and on oars and sa- hand.
salutes with hand lutes with hand.
Salutes with hand. Junior salutes wit'
Midshipman and Warrant Stopsengine,tosses Stops engine, lays
hand.
or trails oars and on oars and saOfficer
hand.
with
lutes
hand
with
salutes
Junior salutes with Junior salutes will
Officer in loaded or towing Salutes with hand. Salutes with hand
hand.
' hand.
boat, or boat under sail.
hand.
Stops engine,tosses Stops engine, lays Stands and salutes Salutes with
. or trails oars, on oars, stands with hand.
wsse. WIPS.1.1tea Vatil
..: ..-. ....'1-....N...c
- ..-. i..,-.4 ,..,,
Coxswain
TIIE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
Flag Officer or Commo- Junior salutes with

hand.
dore
IQ.'Q.
i!, QQ..
Q.
33
Suppose you pass a commanding officer with pennant

ying?
A. In sail-boat, towing, or laden boat stand and salute with
and. In a steamer, stop engines,
stand
salute with hand;
ulling boat lays on oars, stand and saluteand
with hand.
Commissioned officer, commanding officer or an admiral
without flag flying?
A. Stand and salute with
hand.
Q. Midshipman or warrant
officer?
'
A. Salute with hand without
rising.
Q. What general rule governs the conduct of boats at landing
ind gangways and while
afloat?
A. At landings
to
1 ;eniors, and at all and gangways juniors shall give way
times juniors shall show deference to their
i
;eniors
by
:,
abstaining from crossing the bows of their boats,
:rowding them, or ignoring their presence.
If necessary to pass a
boat with senior officer going in
-ame direction as you,
how do it?
0? A. Ask
0
permission.
How
if in charge: of a boat which contains an
a pfficer who proceed
will be
A A. Pull clear of saluted with cannon on shoving off?
the
saluting
cuns. At the first gun ship, and forward or astern offorward;
lay on oars or stop engine, bow
'tart ahead when flag
comes down or at last gun. Don't lie
0000 close to ship.
.I
..
,-,
LIFE-BOATS.
ca,
0j
1 How is a life-boat tecured for sea when. rigged out at
--. avits?
1 A. The boat is griped in by padded gripes (usually made of
wordagainst the strong-back, with soft fender between
ro. s rail
and Strong-back. The gripes are secured either by a
, jggle or
slip-hlook, which can be slipped in an instant. Minor
"
Ifferences exist as to the best method of doing this. A .seaainter secured in
the bows is led outside everything well forard. .This
ope yarn is sometimes stopped up out of the water by a
li
se of the stop. Knotted lifelines are hung from the span for
in hoisting or lowering and in case of accident;
s clear crew
for lowering. At night they are on deck. During
they are
triced up with becket or toggle; boat
lugday
at hand; life usually
belts in boat and ready for use; steering oar
I crutch; rudder unshipped. Boat equipments, provisions,
c, ;u1Pass
c., lace. and lantern (which is lighted every night at sunset) in
Everything in boat is in order for immediate use.
34
Q. How would you lower a life-boat at sea in bad weather?At

A. The lee life-boat is the one to lower. If strong wind
ahead a lee will be made by heading the ship around. 0
would be used both ahead and astern of the boat. The sf
painter should be hauled nearly taut, and tended carefully; V
fore boat touches water it is carried to inboard bow rowld
by second bow oarsman and tended by him with a turn arod I
the thwart. If boat is provided with travellers on jack sts!
from davit head to near water-line, their laniards must
tended by taking a turn of laniard around a thwart. If notr
provided, hold boat into ship's side while rolling; men on dd
should pass frapping lines around falls and haul all parts well
while lowering. A hatchet or axe is handy should anyth/ I
jamb at a critical moment. When ordered the falls are lowet
away invariably together. Crew steady the boat by the 1 1\Th
I
lines. If detaching apparatus is supplied, boat should be
tached just before reaching water. The greatest danger is
that instant, as the boat may be dashed against ship's si
For that reason, the coxswain should give the stern a sheer
in order to get bow out. Oars should be ready and gotten ,C
as soon as possible. One man should attend each fall to cli
it and attend slack, and keep it from striking other membi 1
of the crew. If not supplied with detaching apparatus, thf
men unhook fallsthe after fall firstas soon as possible ail L
boat touches water. Five knots may be roughly given as
probable absolutely safe limit of speed of ship which pert 1
lowering a boat. Never lower a boat with sternboard on s I
Q. How hoist a boat in a seaway?
A. The same general principles apply as in lowering. It I
preferable for a ship to have a little headway in case shi
already under way. Boat is hauled up under falls by sea paithm(
from forward, and helm being tended to prevent her bt
dashed into ship's side. Oil should, if necessary, be freely Ise P
to calm the sea. Frapping lines, or travellers, if fitted, shdP.
be used, as described under "Lowering." A stern line sht
be led from stern of boat well aft, to prevent swinging cot-op,.
when she leaves water. Falls should be well overhauled, 111e
along deck so men have a fair hauling space. Crew steady V.11
by life-lines. All being ready on deck, stand by, wait for smoull
time; hook on forward, then aft, haul taut, hoist away. 15o
should be run up quickly but steadily. If winch is used. Iris
should be rove around barrel of winch, and winch shouldubl
tt:rned at desired speed before order haul taut is given.
35
GENERAL RULES IN HANDLING BOATS.
r? tI
A
LWAYS
r
le(
ouf
stl'
t t
Eit
de
ell
thi
vef
e
is
Si
2r '
4
cle
rib(
til
ail
is l
coil
511
Pull good strong stroke with backs;

Watch the ship for signals;
See required equipment is in boat; See key to boat box is in boat before shoving off:,
Tend sheets while sailing;
Keep in uniform;
Keep quiet;
Give commands while oars are in water;
Handle your oar; don't let it handle you;
In "way enough," come to complete pause with oars vertical before boating them;
Keep boat clean and
shipshape;
Coxswain salutes officers
on entering and leaving boat.
EVER
Belay a sheet while
sailing;
Attempt to gybe main
boom in a freshAireeze;
Stow away boat flag
wet (colors run);
Unhook forward fall when
first in lowering;
Carry very heavy
Go over a ship's weights in extreme ends of boat;
ing colors, ifgangway, to or from a boat, without salutTalk while pullinghoisted;
or when a passenger in a boat;
Leave boat at
Lay alongside landing without proper permission;
shore landing longer than is required to land;
Pass senior boat
Try to steer in a without permission;
seaway without steering oar;
If
inexperienced, try to land through serf without backing
in;
Leave boat after capsized until rescued.
it
,he
'e
RULES OF THE ROAD, LIGHTS, ETC.
al
The safety
be.t
of life depends on a familiarity with these rules on
r
part of
3
coxswains.
hat
Ai A.
lights are required to be carried by a steam launch?
,--'ne bright white light, and two side lights, red and green.
roiK p.es.cribe the
lights above mentioned.
wil'Ee light to be in fore part of launch, on, or in front of,
viSIble
at least two. miles and two points abaft beam on

Y
mo,th
Green
to be visible side light on starboard, and red on port side.
at least one mile, and visible from ahead to
, ? Points abaft the beam on their respective sides. These
rits
at
areuldb green least three feet below the bright light. (Or a
and red lantern may be used.)
36
Q. What lights are required to be carried by rowing boa,.ar;

A. Whether under oars or sail, they have ready a hand lan A
which shall be shown in time to prevent collision. Fa vt
anchor light use ordinary hand lantern when required.
Q. What fog signals are used for a steam launch going ah
A. At intervals of not more than one minute, a blast of A
four to six seconds' duration.
ar
rE
Q. Stopped, but not at anchor?
A. At intervals of not more than two minutes, two blaf. Q
from four to six seconds' duration with an interval of A
second between.
A
Q. When shall the above be given?
A. In fog, mist, falling snow or heavy rain storms, daj Q
Si
night.
A
Q. What speed'at such times?
A. Speed at such times must be moderate.
Q. What are sailing rules, one boat free and one ofv,
c,1(.10YA
Q
hauled?
A. The boat running free shall keep out of the way
.Q
other.
c at
Q. Both boats close hauled, opposite tacks?
A. The boat on port tack must keep out of the way of A
other.
A.
Q. Both going free, wind opposite sides?
A. Boat having wind on port side keeps out of the wal,Q
'las;
other.
A.
Q. Both going free, wind on same side?
A. Windward boat keeps out of the way of one to leem$,Q
>ias
Q. Boat with wind aft, and any other boat?
A. Boat with wind aft shall keep out of the way of any tort
A.
boat under sail.
n(
Q. Boats under steam or oars, meeting so as to ends,Q.
collision?
o p
A. Each shall alter her course to starboard.
A.
Q. Boats under steam or oars crossing?
A. The boat having the other on her starboard side Q'
way.
A.
Q. Boat under steam meeting or crossing one under sail.Ilid
A. The boat under steam always gives way.
er
Q. Boats under oars meeting or crossing one under saillwer
A. The boat under oars always gives way.
)
!
Q. When, under rules, one boat must give way, what r4c1
Our
other do?
A. Keeps her speed and course, unless at the very last A.
ment sees other boat is not going to do it.
37
Q. Should one boat be overtaking another whether under

3 ars, sail, or steam,
who has the right of way?

A. The approaching vessel,
whatever may be her power, must
ve way.
Q. What signals are used
with steam boats on approaching
ch other?
A. Give one blast to
arboard "; two blasts, show "I am directing my course to
"I am directing my course to port
ree blasts, "My
s are going full speed astern."
Q. What side of engine
the fairway must be kept ordinarily?
E A. Keep to the side
of the fairway to the starboard of boat.
Q. What signal is given
on nearing a short turn or bend?
A. Give one long
blast on the steam whistle.
a Q. When leaving the side
and proceeding across the bow of
ship, what signal
A. Give the signalshould be given?
y course to starbowhich is required to show "I am directing
ard" or port, as the case may be.
c Q. What are the rules of the road?
A. They are a set
of rules agreed upon by all nations which
of.overn the
ents of vessels in danger of collision.
Q. When movem
two steamers are meeting end on, what do you do
at the helm?
of A. Alter
course to starboardthat is, incline to your right.
Q.
are
required to indicate this?
By a shortyou
II By
blast of the whistle.
Q. If under these
circumstances the other vessel blows one
last of the
whistle before you do, what would you do?
A Blow one
.Q. Suppose ablast in reply and ease off to starboard.
c3)
meetin of vessels end on, after she blew one
last, You found it wasg not
possible for her to pass on your
y fort side, what
would you do?
several quick blasts (not less than four), stop and,
t
lw
ary,
dI necess
to avoid collision.
Q. How doback
you indicate that you are directing your course
o portr
A. B.. L
short blasts of the whistle.
Q. it atwcZ
"
e 1,n
vessel blows one blast, and you find she cannot pass
are you ever justified in answering by two blasts
ee
Tng ,your course to port?
.eA. Abso.
Absoluutel
tely
y never. If she cannot pass to your port, give
ail four or five short blasts and stop to avoid collision. AnOne toot with two toots is called "cross signalling"
nd is
at n ve. rY dangerous and should never be done.
oppose a vessel should answer your one blast by two, or
,"r two blasts by one, what would you do?
as, A.
Stop your
boat and give her four or five toots. Steer
we'
38
your boat while stopping, in the direction indicated by

signal as she will probably go to the side indicated by it. Av
getting your broadside to her bow, as she may sink y d
Always avoid collisions, but if it must come, receive it on y
bow as much as possible.
a
Q. Suppose yourself coxswain of a steam launch; anot 1i!
launch is approaching on your port bow, so as to involve
of collision. Who has the right of way; what would you dohv
A. You have the right of way; you would maintain At
course and speed until you saw that a collision was probel,
if you did nothing. Then you would do what seems bestl
avoid collision, or to minimize its effects.
u;
Q. Suppose this boat was on your starboard bow?
e
A. She would have the right of way, and would keep 1 t
course and speed. You should pass astern of her if possiQ.
even if it involves stopping; also give her one blast to slitic
what you are going to do.
Q. Suppose this vessel is coming up anywhere from .
tile:
tot
points abaft your beam to astern?
A. She is an overtaking vessel; you have the right of wollit
t.
Q. Suppose it is a sailing vessel on your port bow?
A. She has*the right of way. Sailing vessels always have..
right of way over steamers and boats under oars, except wri.
they are the overtaking vessel.
Q. Suppose a sailing vessel is coming up on your starbtil
ci
quarter, close-hauled on starboard tack?
A. She is an overtaking vessel and you have the right of Os
ler
Q. What is meant by close-hauled?
A. A vessel is close-hauled when she is sailing as near to D.
er
wind as practicable.
Q. What do you mean by sailing free?
A. Whenever she is not as near the wind as practicablPur
D.
vessel is sailing free.
Q. What is meant by "Broad off the bow ";"Two poinoim
the bow "; "Two points abaft beam "; "Broad off quartet.
!ry
"One point on.quarter "?
A. Beginning ahead, relative bearings are "Dead alti:
"One point on bow," "Two points on bow," "Three point.
bow," Broad off bow," "Three points forward of bea'-' P
"Two points forward of beam," "One point forward of be?,*
"Right abeam," "One point abaft beam," "Two points a
beam," "Three points abaft beam," "Broad off quart 1
"Three points on quarter," "Two points on quarter,', (1.
point on quarter."
Q. What is a short blast?
A. A blast of about one second.
-1111
39
Long blast?
K. A blast of from four to six seconds.
Q. When are you justified in disregarding
the rules of the
ad?
A. Only when after having obeyed them to the
tant, you see that your disregard of them can last possible
alone prevent
lision.
. Why is it absolutely necessary, when you have
right
o!way, for you to make no effort to avoid collision the
until the
yct moment?
A. So long as you have the right of way the
Al what you are going to do and manceuvre other vessel can
u alter your course and speed when it is her accordingly. It
place to do so,
e won't know what you are going to do, and
a collision is
t to result.
Q. Which has right of way, a boat under oars or a steam
,titnch?
k. The rules of the road, generally speak
ing, place these boats
tder the same rules, i. e., a row
low the same rules as two steamboat and a steamer would
ers. Practically, however,
va)lling boats, for their own
safety, usually keep clear of steam;.
,e
What precautions are taken in a fog?
wfi. Run slow, sound whistl
st every minute. So far e, long blasts (4 to 6 seconds) at
as possible keep out of fairway. If
boving ship in fog steer
compa courses so you will know her
ection when you return. Onss
ps course of ship from landi first trip ashore, ascertain cornng, with boat headed for ship, in
ier that if caught ashor
e in fog you can make the ship.
to What anchor
light would you use if anchoring in a cutter
er night?
A. Hoist oil lantern to
mast so it could be clearly seen all
impund.
D. If in a fog, mist, falling snow or heavy rain,
you stop
ntamer for
any purpose, what fog signal would you give?
Two
rttA
!ry two prolonged blasts, one second between them at least
es.
beg: Give minut
the rules of the road in rhyme.
intrk Aid to memory, in four verses, by Thos. Gray.
(Rules of
Lea
!Road
"
bei. Two at Sea.)
steamers meeting:
s
When both side lights you see ahead,
Port your helm, and show your red.
tart
Two steam
ers passing:
Green to green, or red to red,
Perfect safety, go ahead.
40
3. Two steamers crossing:

If to your starboard red appear,
It is your duty to keep clear,
To act as judgment says is proper,
To port, or starboard, back, or stop her.
But when upon your port is seen
A steamer's starboard light of green,
There's not so much for you to do,
For green to port keeps clear of you.
4. All ships must keep a bright lookout. Steamers
stop and go astern if necessary.
Both in safety and in doubt,
Always keep a good lookout;
In danger with no room to turn,
Ease her! Stop her! Go astern!
).
I.
c
lc
c
t
ht
rt
te
1)
.
L.
d
ng
).
L
d
BUOYS.
un
).
Q. What buoys are used in United States waters?
A. Red, black, yellow, green, red and black horizontal strt.
black and white vertical striped. Also bell and whistling hi).
i.
Q. What are the various buoys used for?
A. Coming in from seaward, red are on starboard side; 13n
a
on port; red and black horizontal striped mark dangers; 1,
and white vertical stripes are mid-channel buoys; green "
sunken wrecks; yellow quarantine grounds. Buoys with
or shapes mark sharp turns; bell and whistling buoys e
important points or turns, often at sea approaches.
foi
Q. How are buoys numbered?
nt
A. Red buoys bear the even numbers and black buoY4the
odd. Buoys are numbered from the seaward.
).
k.
TACTICS.
WI
The answers to the questions given herein are essentia9.
correct understanding of the various manceuvres descrilA
).
the "Tactical Signal Book."
Q. What is meant by "distance "?"Half distance"? ``k
).
ble distance"?
A. Distance is the prescribed length of a line betweek
center of a vessel and the center of the one next to it in li).
column. Standard "distance" is now goo yards. Half k.
h t
tance"zoo yards, and "double distance 800 yards.
Q. What is meant by "line."?

A. Ships are in line when they are steaming abreast.
other.
HINTS FOR
PETTY
OFFICERS.
41
). What is meant by "column "?
Ships are in column when they are steaming one behind
other.
10TE.Ships in column do not steam actually one behind
other. The second ship is one-quarter of a point on the
t quarter of the leader, the third ship in column
is onehth of a point on the starboard quarter of the leader.
The
rth in wake of the second; the fifth in wake of the third.
ten steaming at half distance these angles of bearing are
tbled.
What is meant by "double line"?
Ships are in "double line" when the fleet or squadron
divided into two parts, each part forming line, and one line
ng behind the other.
). What is meant by "double column"?
Ships are in double column when the fleet or squadron
divided into two parts, each part being in column, the two
umns being abreast and parallel to each other.
. What is meant by "interval"?
st ."Interval" is the
distance between two ships in line.
. What is meant by "column, open order'
It is a cruising column formation where "?
the second ship
; ne point on the port
quarter of the leader, the third onea point on the starboard quarte
of the leader. The fourth
9
fifth ships in wake of the secondr and third.
. What is a "successive movement"? A "simultaneou
s
ement"?
. A successive movement is one in which the evoluti
on is
ormed by one ship after another. A simultaneous movet is one where all vessels begin to execute the movem
ent
10 he same time, viz.:
at the signal of execution.
. What is "standard
speed"
?
. It is the speed
of the squadron prescribed by the cornder-in-chief.
tta What is full speed?
oil. It is a speed one-quarter greater than standa
rd speed.
?. What is half speed?
?
It is a speed one-quarter less than standard speed.
) What is ";low speed"?
vce,l A speed equal to one-half of standard speed.
n lt). What is
"reser
all t. The 'highest ve ped"?s
speed any ship can make, for a short time
hthe boiler
ower then in use.
2. What is "steer
P
age way"?
astk It is the slowest speed at which a ship will
steer.
5.
42

A
Q. What is meant by"oblique "?

2ct
A. It is a temporary change of course of three points c Q
to the right or to the left.
-s
Q. What is meant by "half turn"?
A
le
A. A change of course of four points (45 degrees).
or
Q. What is meant by "turn "?
as
A. A change of course of eight points (90 degrees).
Q. What is meant by"about"?
A. A change of course of sixteen points (18o degreeP 1
c
right or left.
A
Q. In squadron formation who is the guide?
A. The flagship, unless the guide is indicated by signiel3
Q
unless the tactical manceuvre indicates the guide.
Q. How long does a vessel keep the guide flag hoisted
A. Until the flagship signals for another vessel to talc',
guide, or until she hoists the guide flag, or until aril
A
manceuvre indicates another guide.
Q. From which ship should your bearing or distant'-o,
taken?
A. From the guide vessel herself. This makes you indeiXv
ent of the varying and more or less incorrect positiot t
intermediate vessels between you and the guide vessel. 1r
Q. In double line or column, what does the guide ves
Q
the rear line or 2d column hoist to indicate that she is IA.
vessel?
A. The position pennant. This is used by rear divis Q
same manner that the guide flag is used in simple formats
Q. When a boat or ship falls out of formation whateio
she do?
;a
A. She makes repairs and falls in again as soon as po.c,
and her place is left vacant until signal to close up is miler)
Q. When in column what movement do ships make
executing a manceuvre?
A. They sheer into the wake of the leading vessel as
answer the signal so they are in exact column before exet
the movement.
Q. In formation, in case of an accident, what does a sh.#
A. She sheers out of formation and gives prescribed sy
Never stop if possible to avoid it, while in formation.
Q. In boat drill, what is a boat's length considered?
A. A boat's length is 40 feet. Distance is four boats' le
Q. In boat drill, how is distance measured?
4
A. It is measured from stern of one boat to the bow .
other in column instead of from their centers as in ship
Q. What is a division of boats at boat drill?

43
A. The group of boats from each
ship
divisi
form
on.
a
The
let is composed of all
boats of the various ships present.
C Q. At boat drill, howthe
great
-s of columns when in doublean interval is kept between leadA. The same as their dista column?
nce apart when in single line. It
ierefore depends on the numb
er of boats in the formation.
or example, if the leaders
as in single line had five of the two columns, when the fleet
boats between them, when they go
I double column they
would retain five boat lengths (5 times
feet) interval.
Q. What does the signal
"Boats right" mean?
A. When signal leave
s truck or yardarm all boats immediOelY turn go degrees to the right
(port helm).
Q. What does the
"Boats right, half turn," mean?
,d A. When the signasignal
l leaves the truck or yardarm, boats turn
io to right.
aa Q. What does "Column
right" mean?
A. The head of the
column turns go degrees to the right and
nc-oceeds; the other
vessels follow in the wake of the leader.
Q. Suppose
terve signal? a compass signal is hoisted at the same time as
compass signal is hoisfed the head of the column turns
the course indic
ated and proceeds, instead of turning eight
esr
Q.
where are the
. In the Tactical explanations of all manceuvres found?
l Book.
Q. When boats areSigna
IS1)
called away for fleet drill, where and how
; they form?
la_
ti rt In colum
latslong. The n natural order, abreast the ship to which they
natural order of boats is assigned to each ship
; a fleet.
pm Coxswains
should study and familiarize themselves with
miperyth
ing contained in the chapters on Boats and Signals.
e t
n
I
immir-
El
tie;
;
jar
:ne
On
List
iali
0th
0th
qu
ark
.g
ate'
=ss(
aok
!sse
fnal
le
okc
tea,
le (
ute
CHAPTER 11
EVENTS IN DAILY ROUTINE

ENERAL DUTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH LIFE
ON BOARD SHIP
CONTENTS.
uestions in Discipline
and Routine
:a and
Port Routine
rubbing and
' h work Cleaning
:k Call
larters and Drill;
Ship Work
:nera1 Ship
ore LibertyRegulations
tasters and
)aling Ship Inspections
othes, Bags and
Hammocks
thing Outfit
:quisitions for Clothing
arking Clothes
g Inspection
atches and
Divisions
:sses
1king Hours
:
ssengers
Inal Boys
le Boya
okouts
reading Awnings
le
Cleaners
.utes and
Honors
PAGE
46
47
52
56
56
57
58
59
59
6o
60
63
63
64
65
66
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
69
69
!flec
flg
,Q
A
vo i
WITH
TION
IN
CONNEC
DUTIES
L
GENERA
lAor
Q.
ON BOARD SHIP
A.
his(
Q.
QUESTIONS IN DISCIPLINE AND ROUTINE. A.
r
Q. What is meant by obedience to orders?
comp' Q.
complete
and
zealous
ready,
a
prompt,
A. It is
with Orders given. A slow, unwilling, partial eompiiance
1141
orders is as bad as a flat disobedience, and in such e3 rib
guilty person should be reported.
Q. What is the first principle in discipline?
atk
tie
A. A prompt obedience to the orders of superiors.
Q. How is this obtained and enforced?
ilet
P
to
A. While it is often necessary to have recourse
bte4
ments for those who deliberately violate orders, it al-j
91111
111
hand
be supposed that discipline and punishment go DisciPfill '
and that one is directly dependent on the other.details
obtained by a constant attention to the minor
c
det'
life. By requiring an absolute compliance with the reP
Q.
all drills and evolutions, correcting, and if necessary
every infraction of the regulations.A,
Q. In seeking to obtain good discipline, what is the rtai
course to follow?
regui 111e
A. To pass over faults and infractions of the ffice
o
or
officers
petty
the
which the recruit knows
noticed. In such cases it is not always necessary to reP
but itd Aft
recruit; the instructor must use his discretion;
portant that faults should be pointed out and correcte
times.
Q. What instructor will have the best control of t1/1 "
under him?
A. One who knows what he wants insists with firma
without tyrannical treatment on a strict obedience to his.
in the smallest details, and one whose zeal inspires tilos'
him.
Q. In what manner should orders or commands al
given by any one?
with
A. Use the phraseology customary in the service tOf
ve
authoritati
and
dezided
a
use
necessary repetition;
gg
14
14
EVENTS IN DAILY ROUTINE.
47
ffi
ceepleantlY loud for the occasion. Insist on quick, alert obedind do not permit noise, confusion or unseamanlike sing4. out.
Q. N
welli.xt to a strict obedience to orders, what always marks
A. ,..,u1seplined ship's company?
fii-;elerity of movement, and a complete absence of noise.
ons
:
s11) and "singing out." These points should be insisted
. d officers and petty officers alike.
Q
A. .g'nat language is always improper aboard ship?
nis.frofane, abusive, obscene, loud, boisterous language; and
Q.Ndisturbances or confusion of any kind.
,A. Ti_ho should check this?
sa "e officer, or petty officer, hearing it, whatever may be
nk.
Q. IA%at
are station billets?

amineY are small slips given to each man when he comes
ribed shiP showing his station at the various evolutions prea man-of-war. They are made out by numbers,
ci
atio "en a man's number changes, he takes the duties and
tiesil f his new number. The combination bill showing the
lleti la,f each number for each exercise is posted in ship's
tilesa Doard for reference. Owing to changes of numbers the
n115
Prilb;f men holding these numbers are not written on the
b:Pation Bill. The corrected Watch, Quarter and Station
- of "lrh names, is kept in the executive officer's office.
rice
lets
ROUTINE.
eP Q. Ix,
A,ghat is meant by daily routine?
lie rtai2. is a list of the various times during the day at which
Thew"Jinties are performed. The sea and port routines differ
8'11
"ar. The following are given as examples:
eP
it
tea
a
'
Cl
tli"
150
440
4.30
5.00
S.ts
ose
Ig
4
to[
6.3
6'5
, 740
SEA ROUTINE.
Call ship's cook.
Call the watch: relieve the wheel and lookouts.
Relieve the watch: light smoking lamp.
Turn to: out smoking lamp: pipe sweepers: clear
up the decks: wash clothes.
Call idlers and day men.
Trice up clothes lines: execute morning orders: at
sunrise take in running lights: station masthead
lookout.
Hoist ashes.
Trice up six bell hammock cloths.
Up all hammocks: serve out washing water.
48
Mess gear: watch below: light smoking lam14,

7.30 Breakfast: watch below: clean deck bright-01.1'.
Mess gear: watch on deck.
8.00 Relieve the watch: breakfast.
8.30 Turn to: out smoking lamp: clean bright-v/014c
9.00 Sick call.
9.15 Clear up deck: down towel lines: stow away
boxes and cleaning gear: pipe sweepers.
9.25 Officers' call. Report decks ready for quartell
9.30 Quarters: after which drills and exercises as
routine.
" 10.00 Relieve wheel and lookouts.
" 10.30 Retreat from drill:"Extra duty call ": pipe SO
ers: hoist ashes.
" 11.30 Clean up decks: pipe sweepers.
" 11.50 Mess gear: watch below: light smoking lan1P.
Dinner: watch below.
NOON
12.20 Mess gear: watch on deck.
12.30 Relieve the watch: dinner.
P. M. Loo Turn to: out smoking lamp: pipe sweepers: 51
work about deck.
1.30 Serve out provisions: drill call.
2.00 Hoist ashes: relieve the wheel and lookout.
2.15 Retreat from drill: pipe sweepers: "extra
call."
2.30 Instruction of landsmen: hoist ashes.
3.30 Pipe sweepers.
4.00 Relieve the watch.
4.30 Pipe sweepers: clear up decks: knock-off all 11('
4.55 Officers' call.
5.00 Evening quarters: close water-tight doors.
Mess gear: watch below: light smoking lamP
Supper: watch below: pipe sweepers.
Mess gear: watch on deck.
6.00 Relieve watch: supper: relieve wheel and loo/'
life-boats and life-buoys reported ready.
6.30 Turn to: pipe sweepers: hoist ashes.
Set deck lookouts: running lights: get UP
SUNSET
deck gear.
P. M. 7.30 Hammocks: mate of splinter-deck see water
doors and hatches closed.
" 8.00 Relieve the watch, wheel and lookouts: out
ing lamp.
Warrant officers and store-room keepers rep
7.20
gt
7.50
Ig
gi
(g
lg
I(
gf
gg
gg
5.20
ig
5(30
if
5.50
EVENTS IN DAILY 'ROUTINE.

P.
or
49
PORT ROUTINE.
4.00 Call ship's cook (earlier if necessary).
4.45 Anchor watch trice up hammock 'cloths: call
),r1c.
hammock stowers, boatswain's mate and music,
mates of deck.
5.0o Reveille, call "All hands:" fifteen minutes to clear
,4
deck of hammocks: coffee: light smoking lamp.
erS ,, 5.2o Pipe sweepers.
as
5.30 Turn to: clear up decks: execute morning orders
and routine: hoist ashes: call warrant officers.
5.45 Market boat.
SW
6.00 Day men report to the officer-of-the-deck: side
cleaners over the side, this not later than 6.30:
fresh water to be served out between 6.30 and
Ig
P. ,
7.30: fill distributing tanks.
6.50 Trice up hammock cloths.
7.00 Up all hammocks.
7.20 Mess gear: light smoking lamp: coxswains report
If
boats ready.
7-30 Breakfast: shift into the uniform of the day.
8.00 Colors: lower running boats.
8-15 Turn to: Bright-work: out smoking lamp: pipe
sweepers: inspect running crews.
8.45 Sick call.
9.00 Spread awnings: flemish down gear.
9.15 Clear up decks for quarters: down towels and
I,
wash deck gear: pipe sweepers.
9.25 Officers' call: report decks ready for quarters.
9.30 Quarters. First drill period: inspection of berth
deck, mess gear and storerooms. When first
drill period is over, reports and requests at
mast. Extra duty men to work when not at
drill. Saturdays, weather permitting, up all
r) "
bags.
,
.30 Second drill period.
10
tg
1/.00
0 Retreat from drill. still up and dry, down wash
//....
0
Inspect dinner: if
1
fg
clothes: up ditty boxes: pipe sweepers.
ei o
45 Mess gear: light smoking lamp.
Dinner (emergencies alone interfere with this).
4)0 Turn to: out smoking lamp: down ditty boxes:
pipe sweepers: special requests to the execu4,
tive officer.
1.30
Provision call: extra duty men at work when not
at drill: drill call.
THE BLUEJACKET'S- MANUAL.
50
Drill retreat: pipe sweepers.

Pipe sweepers.
Knock off work: pipe sweepers.
eF1
Pipe sweepers: clear up for quarters: lay UP th
Officers' call.
ati
Quarters.
th
Spread- mess gear.
Supper: shift into blue.
ipePti
Turn to: pipe sweepers: coal and water SteaiIe
fill distributing tanks.
R.
SUNSET
Retreat: ceremony prescribed to be carefullY.
hoist
bc",
is
served. When ceremony is ended
up wash deck gear: see fire hose Oticiva
Scrub clothes Sunday, Tuesday and Thurs ei
P. M. 6.25 Wardroom dinner call.
0,b1
7.30 Hammocks: lights in hold, orlop, and store t fli
to be reported out not later than 7.30. Ma h
splinter deck see that water-tight door z
hatches are closed for the night.
8.00 Warrant officers and storeroom keepers repoft,43a
8.55 First call: out smoking lamp: down ditty h,10
9.00 Tattoo: inspection of all decks. Silence.
anchor watch. Pipe down. Taps.ii
zo.00 Lights in wardroom and steerage to be e$
guished.
e
The times of running the boats, etc., appear on the R
The orderly reports the various times mentioned on the be
tine, and informs the officer of the deck what is to be do 1
th
that time.
Q. What is done at reveille?.Q.
A. The ship fires a gun at the beginning of revelle. e s
buglers sound reveille on the stroke of bell if occurring at A
half-hour; the boatswain's mates, in concert, pipe their
"All hands," and endeavor to get the crew out quicklY Q.
master-at-arms makes a hurried round of tne berth deck t
that all are out promptly and are dressing and lashing Dec
mocks. Cooks, who have been called earlier, get coffee
3,
for serving out in large pots to different divisions.
th,
Q. How are hammocks lashed?
A. A hammock-lashinga piece of 12-thread manila
eye spliced in one end, other end whipped, long enough t th
seven turns around hammockis used. Lay blankets 01.
folds in centre of mattress, draw edges of hammock tog'
making smooth skin. Haul taut loop around head; hay b
bedding showing. Counting this as first turn, take seven Q.
with marline hitches at equal distances apart. After the
ti
44
2.00
3.00
4.00
4.30
4.55
5.00
5.20
5.3o
6.00
el(
P.
51
'i'inularly taken around end of hammock without bedding

low
eitiItg, take round turn about foot, and expend end by neatly
p 1,"g along belly of hammock. All turns should be taut, and
ge th hgaittnock stiff with a smooth skin. Unhook one end, and
II arranock held under the arm off the gun deck, twist clews
at ,11(1 tuck neatly under lashing along belly, hauling taut and
41 end of hammock well down. Proceed in same manner
!
th'
epefcl'e other end, then stow hammock in netting. Hammocks
Ike be inspected by a petty officer of division, and re-lashed,
essary. The ring-test is good.
ullY , r,ovir are hammocks stowed?
t b jab,aoh division has a netting where its hammocks are inCOP IY stowed. The hammock-stower is called ten minutes
trstia ere,reveille, and should be in netting at reveille to arrange
h t'aMmocks left in netting in desired order, and to receive
th arnalocks of men who, having turned out early, may bring
gat ch, 11P for stowing immediately the call is sounded. The
Os for Watch should trice up or roll back the hammock cloths
ss reveille. Men with hammocks go to their nettings and
allaarnmocks to stower, who stows them with the numbers
Port''
ho
- out.
,hen are hammock cloths hauled over?
oe,":hen the master-at-arms reports all hammocks up. They
iLusually stopped down until 6 bell hammocks are up.
-ghat are 6 bell hammocks?
Ro ve bine hammocks of certain men with night-watches, or who
he htueen up late on duty, or having permission to sleep in until
doe Dpes,i When these are stowed the hammock cloths are
the down for the day, and are entered only by permission
Q. 19fficer of the deck.
Ile. e st"
.(Av long should it take from reveille until all hammocks
C at A. i,IWed and hammock cloths hauled over?
icit aysekn minutes is the usual time, and late hammocks should
:IY. Q, Oe reported.
6v_h,a,t is Turn to," and when piped?
."Turn to".is
ig
coinarily half an hour after "All hands,"
rasi, tt is the signal for morning work to begin. On special
:Its; such as coaling ship, painting ship, etc., the time may
the reatiY and is always indicated in the "morning orders"
'
ila
1,x,ectitive officer. The usual port routine is here given.
hi to ths'v oat is done by men between hauling over hammock
;
turn to?
toed, i;9st.time is allowed them to get morning coffee, a smoke,
ha' CO is a morning for scrubbing clothes, to get out soap,
en Q. 17rtishes, soiled clothes, etc.
"that is done at "Turn to?"
the
52
A. Smoking ceases; smoking lamp is put out; morning ''Y

begins. Sweepers are piped, gear is laid up off the deck ses
keep dry, and preparations for cleaning ship are made.
er
Q. What is meant by "piping sweepers?"
111
WI).
A. It is a pipe sounded by the boatswain's mate ri till
is an order, whenever sounded, for the men of the va
divisions detailed as sweepers to get their brooms and 5 11(1
down the part of the ship assigned them. It should alwra5 P',
done before morning work to remove loose dirt and to
I
clean deck for scrubbing clothes.
t
Q. What parts of the deck should be swept?rt
deck,
Part
A. The sweepers should sweep every part of the
larly all corners. Men should always "make way" for.ati-i tly
ers. The petty officer of that part of the ship is partic 1 Ivii
charged with the thoroughness of this duty. The swel al
should never be swept into a scupper, but always into a te m
sto
pan and thrown into an ash chute.
Q. During the daily routine, when sweepers are piPed' 4 r
orders usually accompany the pipe?

A. "Clean out all the spit kids and wipe off all ladders. t Ril
spit kids are taken to the head, emptied and washed otl,,tr . k
about one inch of water is put in them, when they are ret, hes
to their places. All ladders in the ship should be wiped 0a Ille t
a damp swab.
7 3 at
Q. What is done in morning watch after sweeping clowa tleit
A. The word is passed, "Wet down the decks.' The va Ii
parts of the ship proceed to wet down with clean salt ,, $3'
Formerly this was carried in buckets from pumps in the cl' I'l
Now it is generally done by use of a small rubber wash
ta
hose led from a hydrant on fire main. Every part of the de s
wet down thoroughly.
' ti
Q. What regulations about foot gear while washing deJ4 i0A
A. When washing decks and the temperature permits, re L 41
the crew to take off shoes and socks, unless excused bY 44 ,
tive or captain, or by the doctor approved by captain.
t
It
SCRUBBING AND CLEANING.
'
41
Q. What follows this?
A. If it is the morning for scrubbing, the boatswain:a s'
pipes and calls, "Scrub and wash clothes," or "ScriR_e
mocks (bags, blankets, or mattress covers);" othervl, bs
word is immediately passed to "Scrub down the lec
scrub down the deck with sand,,, Clean all the paint' a
etc.
Q. How are clothes scrubbed?

53
They are
laid flat on deck, soaked with salt-Water Soap
rum,
seehts
-zyed thoroughly. Particular attention should be given
er
ng the tape and seams, which collect much dirt.
h tvherY thorough scrubbing with brush, be very careful to
eith roughly and remove all soap, as it can be plainly seen
i hmer
white or blue, and is injurious to the cloth if not
asys pie out. If several
pieces are to be scrubbed, after finishing
40 , amee wring it out and lay it aside on a place clear of soap,
111 Proceed with next piece.
, Thcivv stop clothes on the line?
red!clothes should be secured to the clothes line by stops
)31. , ean'll eyelet holes on each piece of clothes. Rope-yarns,
sW
not be used as stops. They may be made of cordline
lot. /'
ea' W Whipped, or fine canvas threads neatly twisted, waxed
If two lines are used, all blue clothes are on one
;1 d '
te allid
.,White on the other. If one line only is used, all the
stt be together above and the blue below. Clothes should
(
aPtled on with corners lapping over, so they cannot slip
tl leave "holidays"(vacant spaces) along the line.
itit t giv hell "Scrub hammocks" or 'bags" is passed, does
J . Noe.Permission to scrub clothes?
unless the word, "Scrub clothes" is passed, no
ell'ill be wet. There
(0
may be no place to dry them, and as
anPiles are not scrubbed the same day with hammocks,
01' lleithu_hammocks are frequently scrubbed the same morning,
0 Ito cr will be wet until the word is passed. .
t
13v ir are hammocks scrubbed?
!5iicl/ tt
tro aYIng them on deck and scrubbing them like clothes.
w are bags scrubbed?
ags
!d seatns
lust be scrubbed thoroughly both inside and out;
40 especially must be thoroughly scrubbed.
ler A stw stop online?
red toril. tel3 should be thoroughly secured on the inner side of
e
) hell, aFrough the eyelet holes. The bag, turned inside out,
WI, ter thorough rinsing, stopped bottom up on line.
t "iat does the word, "Scrub and wash clothes" mean?
'. It iss it optional or not to scrub?
13 ba a Positive order for every one having soiled clothes
V to
scrub them.
11'5 8iouqat Particular duty should the petty officer of the
lib 4 Perform
this time?
1vise 68 cie s ld at
take particular care to see that every
ecie ho ()flihoman,
, tild ,
I es if a man states that he has no clothes to scrub,
1 ;a ne:#e immediately put to work on morning cleaning; if
," 31ove"`,nlan the petty officer may accept his statement. If
'"Y and shiftless, an investigation may be necessary.
, NI/
ccic
:ril
II
54
An inspection of his bag will determine whether or not

clothes to scrub. The petty officer should never let
his part loiter around while others are scrubbing. it r
t
premium on dirtiness and laziness, and encourages men
"out of hours," which should be permitted only by the,
of the deck or the executive officer for some sufficient"
Q. How often are clothes scrubbed?
A. On some ships they are scrubbed every morning oel
Sunday. Generally four times a week is all that can be Lii
on in port. A man will scrub none too often if he avails
of every opportunity.
Q. What about soaking clothes over night?
A. Clothes should never be put in soak unless it 15
tamed that they can surely be scrubbed the next lel d
Having wet clothes around deck makes you liable to 3, r
Washing clothes out of hours is an offense and shouleil,Sc
ermitted. It is always accompanied by undesirable 311 b
ealthful wetting of the deck; it gets soap on deck,
very hard to remove when the deck is dry. A pettY
should see that no scrubbing takes place out of hone t lrt
part of the ship. The corporal of the guard must see th3
to .A
occurs during night watches.
Q. What does the order, "Scrub blankets," or "See Jol
A3
tress covers" mean?
Se
A. As this is done with sufficient frequency to keep
as 3, \
and mattress covers clean, it must be regarded
hands" job, and every man must scrub unless specially
It does not mean to scrub clothes, and no clothes will b
bed unless the word is passed, or permission obtained
Q. What warning is given before lines are triced uj 0 Pe
A. The word is passed,"Get your clothes forward 3 a
them on the line." The lines should go up ten mintlt, ri(
the time this order is passed. It is therefore necesri
get the clothes forward immediately. When the clothe
the line they are triced up. The chief boatswain's mate ast
ez
has direct charge of stopping clothes on the line.
Q. What is done when the clothes are on the line?
A. Morning work begins. Word is passed, "Scrub 0,,iisn
deck;" "Clean off all the paint-work;""Go over the;
side-cleaners;" "Boat-keepers clean out your boats. c
keepers go in boats and thoroughly clean them. Sider-t
get stages and go to work cleaning side. The captain
of the ship generally starts a part of his men ele3n111
work and the remainder should get deck-scrubbillgo Of
and go down the deck abreast and in stroke, thoroug.,,' 3,
ing every part of the deck. It is not proper for a ie.

55
n .11 13 around at random. Sand, if used, assists in cleaning
a 111t 1t cleaMng pairt-work sand and canvas take off the
well as the dirt unless great care is used. Fresh water
avieirY little soap will often save much labor, though
there
he t anYd no allowance of soap for this purpose. Lye eats off
in reas
should not be used. Rust spots can be removed by
a+ni,d. fresh water if care is exercised. Greasy dirt is the
ng verùing to remove. For that reason care should be taken
tlin
b Y mem er of the crew to keep the paint-work clean.
Lls s g Paint-work does not mean certain exposed places. So
ninPg
,ssible, every nook and corner should be cleaned every
W
15hat is
meant by field day?
creeekerallY, Saturday morning is devoted to cleaning ship.
are not dried down before breakfast, but all gratings,
old, sei.2,ara, and when necessary boat
spar covers, etc.,
le b t"uned. Every movable thing iscovers,
out in order to
inilueneath it. Sand is nearly alwaysbroken
used, and the cleaning
s well into the day. A field day generally follows
:
2ttY .141
sAn's t
sfiiP." This is sometimes in the afternoon, if the
s tits Ix.3 finished early enough.
,Avittl_at is done after scrubbing decks?
Scrli Jobs the decks are thoroughly clean, various little cleandone. There is always enough cleaning to fully
ep a sei "e time. Men take this opportunity to bathe or wash
as "; then the word is passed, "Wash down the decks."
,iat
llY
Is done at this order?
11 be riis lets or a wash-deck hose and long bristle scrubd cor e used. The men use care to get into every nook
01). Ders--r and wash all dirt, sand, soap, etc., off the deck into
rd 3 ar Corn brooms should never be used on a wet deck.
inote le
;i mmediately ruined, and even if old ones are used by
cee5 tiejerl men, it sets the example, and very soon the less
rthes ')jed. are using the newest broom procurable. When the
nate ast,r1
'down the deck" is passed, men with squilgees form
teld go down the deck shoving the water before them.
e?
s.",,It'n
7)
hard on the deck. The squilgees are for this
do
31) 4 ntch1;
1.3wabs have their use, but this is not one of them.
gee
the;
gets most of the water off the deck. A swab
ats l's,ale'ng after squilgees is useful in removing water from
;ide- Weck sockets, etc.
(11 t vhata,t Parts of the ship are cared for by the deck force
005
Y the engineer's force?
ingoi
htleck force is responsibte for cleanliness and condiLig" ell compartments and double bottoms and all bulkfeW '
1's, pipes and valves within them, except those speci-
to st
56
fied as coming under supervision of steam engineerior

deck force also clean casings and bulkheads around all
ery outside of engineer compartments, and all piPes' I
I,
lators, hatches and bulkheads, except when otherwise
by the captain. Besides the steam machinery the ea y
are responsible for cleanliness and condition of all he
doors, valves and pipes within engine rooms, boiler
shaft alleys, firemen's washrooms, engineer's storero t
workshop, all compartments and double bottoms wit et;
line of such bulkheads and compartments and double
accessible only through the engine room.
Q. What is done after drying down decks?
A. Preparations are made for breakfast. Work, if e0I''
stops until after breakfast. Men must shift into uniforla
day during the breakfast hour.
Q. What is the first thing done at"Turn to"after bre
et
BRIGHT-WORK.
Thd e
A."Gun and deck bright-work" are sounded.
(1$
the same call, followed by one blast for deck bright-wd be
blasts gun bright-work. The gunner's mate spreads
r
paulin with cleaning gear. The captain of part of sh.P
be present to see that the deck is kept clean. The gun ilost
sees that the various men satisfactorily clean bright-W
longing to them, whether it is steel or brass. Care in tat
taken to see that equipments are cleaned. The petty 0
divisions see that the men clean all the bright-work 3t
to them. In case men are absent for any reason, their
work must be cleaned by others. The petty officer has 11,11
of this detail.
Q. What is done at "Knock off bright-work?"
t
A. This is sounded on the bugle. Bright-work must bitell
pleted by that time. Those who spread tarpaulins WI 13
away. Men should now clean themselves and the eetc
,
quarters (inspection), black shoes, brush clothes,
word is passed, "Take down the towel line; clean HP
for quarters." All wash-deck gear, buckets, ditty-boxes, 1
etc., to be stowed away, and everything made ready for atII
tion. The executive officer will usually inspect by
at which time everything should be ready for quarters.
hi
SICK CALL.
Q. now get excused from duty ff unwell?
t
A. Go to the medical officer of the ship. Do no
auth
division officer. He is not a doctor, and has no
excuse you.
Jig
Ix

57
Wh
irig At 8ar Is the customary time of day to see the doctor?
I an b'3 a- m., when sick call is sounded. The medical offics,
e seen, if necessary, at any other time of the day.
.ase you are sick, can you report it or not, as you like.
Non
e
ly. YOU are obliged to report any serious illness immeAllcShould the medical officer suspect you of 'concealing
1 1 he can report the matter to the captain.
ioo it4at
i is malingering?
vitt' ess0 feigning sickness. It is a serious offense, is rarely
i", and is unmilitary and dishonest, in that it involves
leaves your work to be done by others, who, in addihave
ye their usual
duties to perform.
rto
QUARTERS AND DRILL; SHIP WORK.

re j'Itril;at is "Quarters?"
etio
'
ns really the formation at 9.30 a. m. for muster and
ow
Gun crews were formerly inspected at their guns,
bel e diY are usually mustered by divisions. The officer
sr ds thIsIon inspects the battery and the men, especially as
de bearde Condition of their clothes, cleanliness, length of hair
r
QC. The division is mustered by the senior petty
ii
rts an
tu reported. The division officer then lays aft and
40 ion e division, leaving the petty officer in charge. The
e
e 0PaY be allowed to "rest," but if the order is not given
O.taineAcer or petty officer, absolute silence in ranks must be
0'
be b On the return of the division officer the division
eir .4\tb rtight to attention before turning it over to him.
las The nas the deck during quarters?
hi,..navigator, unless some one is temporarily detailed to
N'VhZ
st '
The is done when drill call is sounded?
sto es 0rDeftY officer, by direction of the division officer, disd Yto t q.IIIPs the division, and men repair quickly and
etc
heir stations for drill, or are marched there by com) l.-low .
es,. I'll is the forenoon occupied after drill?
or di'eYe is usually some ship's work to more or less occupy
ti tb,17sn;timee
x!ra drills for men who are deficient are also
;.
ow
Altn nnIch time do men have at dinner?
hip ;1st invariably one hour. Boats should get back to
hotten:r Meals. All honors are dispensed with during the
e and no work is required except what may be neces,
not
WCtergencies.
takes place at Loo p. m.1
58
al
A. "Turn to;" usually a boat goes ashore; swe
piped, and preparations made for afternoon drills.
Q. How is tile drill specified?
A. In each squadron it is laid down in the routine.
Q. How is the afternoon occupied?
A. After drill, various jobs of ship's work are done
stowing boats, double bottoms, etc. Men go on llib 1
latter part of afternoon, quarters for muster is held
are exercised at "Setting up drill," the petty officer,''
orders or conducting the exercise silently, followini i.
tions of a leader.
GENERAL SHIP REGULATIONS.
Q. What about "All hands" manceuvre when or

at wheel, etc.?
A. Every such man has a relief, whose duty it is t ;
through his own work and relieve the man on duty.
is the one who would naturally relieve the man should
denly become disabled. A relief is not entirely off like4
doing a relief watch and is rarely needed for actual u
ld
in any instance when he knows the man actually on
be relieved it is his duty to relieve him immediatelY i.
being ordered to do so. Suppose, for example, 3,13 frc
come on at the wheel at 2 p. m., and at i p. m. hamnifIr
aired. After your hammock was secured in the rigth e;
should go to the wheel without orders, and relieve
until his hammock was in the rigging, when he shouldil,
ately return and relieve you.
ir
Q. What is the signal for closing water-tight doors
A. Usually one long blast of the siren. Large vessl
electric whistles in remote parts of the vessel. '1.11_edth
never used except for collision or drill, except at 7."
lc
a 0
when it is tested daily. At any other time it is hull.
t.
compartmen
the
of
get out
tg.
Q. What precaution is to be taken in closing thou?si r0
A. Men stationed to close water-tight doors top
search for and give warning to men in distant comPart,
Q. When at sea, how are the water-tight doors kat' i
pa
A. As many as possible are kept closed. Extreme
necessiti
be taken by every member of the crew that if
ill Ì
the opening of any such door it must be closed ago tig
dogs set up.
sea? Ailo
Q. What are the regulations about air-ports at
the
by
only
sea
to
going
on
closed
A. Air-ports are
er
'Ind
and
reported,
so
are
they
tioned to close them;
59
etr.
aonfees will they be opened without the permission of the
-the-deck. The ship's safety depends on this.
SHORE LIBERTY.
1-10v,do
The
you know when you can go on liberty?
be lib. word is passed, or a notice posted, that certain men
e <:"rtY You put down your name, and the list is entered
y; yberty book."
Word is passed, "Lay aft the liberty
er5
Lay aft on the quarter-deck; fall in for inspection.'
r at be taken that the uniform is clean and complete;
may lose your liberty.
Th atYou
general regulations govern you on liberty?
e sbe,general regulation that "all offenses committed on
be punished in the same manner as if committed at
sainuis requires the same respect to superior officers, the
to ; beLtesI such conduct as will not bring discredit on your
'lb
"avior which will not disgrace your uniform.
id
3teb'
MUSTERS AND INSPECTION.
Id Wh
on-art difference between Sunday and daily inspections?
do
dress" is the usual uniform, and men
br rId b',in their "full
best clothes, clean and perfect in appearance.
00 elante'vision officer
inspects and reports, ranks are opened,
C
nO.
er is rank faced about and dressed. When the commanding
es near the order is given, "Hand salute!" Every man
tb,
ap with the hand furthest from the captain, keeps hand
de.
the salute is returned, then drops hand smartly
1. ne division and battery are then inspected by the
r?
es5 W bat is
meant by the call, "All hands to muster?"
be
lied ands not absolutely necessary to ship's safety are
1.,,afe, or lay aft, on the port side of quarter deck. Offiore a line on the starboard side. The reading of all gents-111;ra. and communications affecting men, sentences of
the presentation of medals, etc., take place at
ala'c'n like
whn salutes.this. At the order, "Attention to orders,"
5) is is general muster?
a ,Complete muster of the ship's company when "all
formed aft. It is made in the presence of the capgirl.'" officers, and the name of every officer and man
nye to the crew is called. Men answer their rate and
trl,to the opposite side of the vessel; as they pass the
der Paul? make the salute, holding the hand at cap until
- gun. The master-at-arms, yeoman, hospital steward
iii
6o
THE BLUEJACKET'S
MANUAL.
ii
and engineer's yeoman stand ready with their lists to

for known absentees. On the first Sunday in each
"Articles for the Government of the Navy" are rea
while all hands are at muster.
COALING SHIP.
Q. Why is coaling ship regarded as a drill?
A. Because, in time of war, coaling is absolutely neh.
and time is most valuable. For that reason every effc'rrLub
be made in time of peace to increase the efficiency of a
a man-of-war in this respect.
hi
Q. How prepare for coaling?
A. The stations and duties are different for each ship,
always laid down clearly in the station bill. As a gene
each division works in its own part of the ship, gets uP,e
screens, gets canvas over side, gets up baskets and s1100 d
rigs booms, guys, etc. Engineer's force usually rigs P,
chutes below, and handles the coal after it is in the diet
Q. How is coaling conducted?
ii SIC
A. Men are stationed on the decks and in the si(
Everything depends on the method adopted. Basket'
and buckets are used. Men must all work diligentbl
officers supervise and expedite work. They should dqt.:
show others how to work, and station them properly. der
cer or man can leave the ship, except on duty, during .
Each division should strive to make a new record for ,
each coaling. During the coaling do not lose all intereVw
ship. Everything will get dirty, but if paint is worn 011. th
foul lead of a whip, or by a bag being dragged over s
it shows a lack of care. Every man in the division 0011 Ilan
a pride in keeping the ship in good condition.
all
CLOTHES, BAGS AND HAMMOCKS.
or
Q. How does an enlisted man stow his clothes, etc.,
board?
A. Each man has a canvas bag for his clothing, an.1
box for his trinkets, photographs, writing material,
cies, etc. Rain clothes are stowed in lockers for this le
Many men very improperly stow various things in thel,,tvro
mocks. This should not be permitted. Only mattrO*i
blankets belong there.
Ii
Q. How are bags marked and stowed?
A. They are marked on the bottom with the watch tii
of the man to whom assigned. They are hung to bagC
the berth deck, under charge of master-at-arms, and
61
led e
at special hours without permission from the
a er of'rept
h
r's
o deck, who will inform the master-at-arms. Engiaroe sometimes have black bags.
nneo are hammocks scrubbed?
ber ee a month. At evening quarters hammocks bearing
Iiiitshof men in division are served out, and men are ordered
ah
that night and -scrub in the morning. Men
Will mmocks
e on watch during the morning watch may obtain
from the officer-of-the-deck to scrub that night.
b
are shifted, and dirty hammocks thoroughly
e(1 t next morning when scrub hammocks is piped.
1,.he
.1.1:3w are they dried?
b
are stopped on hammock girtlines securely. With
1fles numbers are up and out. Three stops in head of
er on
each foot corner of hammock securely stops to the
pie if_eaeh side. Starboard watch, starboard line; port watch.
d in e teing large and heavy, special care must be exer)
t
l
hammocks to the line.
ote lt.ecuring
vf
.Me,!tt Piped down what is done?
sion remove them from line and care for them until
ts, Sion is Caned to quarters. They are then inspected by the
Itioof,
(
),
f eer, and if satisfactorily scrubbed are turned in in
uags to the sailmaker's mate.
w are they inspected?
de petty officer of the division calls out the numbers in
r it hisesktred The number called steps forward from ranks.
est 1Y "ammock down, spreads out on pile. If not perwean, the division officer will order it rescrubbed, when
rff the
cit.ake it and re-scrub at the next opportunity. Do not
not'vision officer how it was soiled; that is unnecessary.
I1 haill ordered scrubbed as a punishment, but simply to get
am illook cleaned. Similarly, if hammocks are being served
all Your hammock is found to be dirty, it is unnecessary
40"eotion to it. The division officer cannot help it.
are hammocks marked?
'A
i 81141144)erthe watch number of the man to whom it was
414,1Cis
on canvas with a stencil, then sewed on
oil two he ofmarked
the hammock about 18 inches from head. There
e sairlmocks for each memberone in use, and one below
r"rn, to be used when the one in use gets dirty and
es5
keg
'
A at are hammock clews?
11 gs?ollection of small lines called "nettles," secured to a
111001:anized ring. The dews are made fast to each end of
f
through eyelet holes. The rings go over hammock
62
hooks, and sling the hammock. A rope lanyard is sPli

one ring to facilitate swinging the hammock betweell
hooks.
Q. How is a hammock slung?
each
A. Hook ring of clew to hammock hook; pass dole
lengths;
equal
them
nettle through eyelet, making
centre,'
them over their own part so ends point towards
'
hammock. Take middle nettles to corresponding eyes
a
that end of hammock is a straight line, and does not 5 .
cure other nettles to eyelets at proportional lengths.
each end in loop through eyelet next to it, so that no er;
down. When one end is slung proceed with the other I
manner.
Q. How are hammock berths marked?
painted
A. The watch number of each man is plainly
the hook to which the clew at the head of the hadni'l
slung.
Q. What function at evening hammocks?
A. (t) Bugler sounds "Hammocks." (2) Every mail
the,
those on post stand abreast netting about where
,
their hammock is; two ranks facing aft; keep absolute
Chief boatswain's mate reports "All up and aft." In Jo
ships the officer-of-the-deck orders, "Cast off the stoPs%0
up and uncover;" "Pipe down." With new ships, usual11 r,
up"(hammock cloths); "Pipe down." Hammock stowert
is 11
THRu4
out hammocks, calls numbers in low tone; if owner
re
shoves it behind him, calls next, etc. NEVER
CLAIMED HAMMOCKS ON DECK. After men
have been relieved and obtained hammocks, "Re-st
liar,
tings." "Haul over hammock cloths." After that
are obtained only on applying for permission to the
the-deck.
Q. What is meant by "uniform?"
A. It is the style and make of clothes worn in a Mil
naval organization.
Q. On board ship how is the uniform prescribed?
A. The senior officer prescribes the uniform. It is ts
to other ships and on a dress board is pictured a sailor iv
scribed uniform of the day.
Q. What clothes are allowed to be kept aboard shiP1 e
A. Only clothes of uniform pattern are permitted to Is
lo
whether worn or not.
ii
clothes?
civilian's
wear
to
Q. Is a man allowed
aj
A. No, neither ashore nor afloat.

63
plicC
CLOTHING OUTFIT.
ce:'fl'aWhat
amounts
of
clothing are required by each person in
k. val service?
,,e
i,'
l pl
t Ilbe follOwing articles are to be owned by all
enlisted men,
Lai
aboard cruising ships:
suit rdsmen,
ore) ,...
2 pairs socks (light).
re Suit'u!t lue dress
white
I blue cap, complete.
Yed
" s, blue dress
2 white hats (or 1 white cap and
undress.
sav,'l stills
white undress.
2 covers).
suit's underclothes (heavy). 1 neckerchief or cravat, as reush
:lid'
(light).
quired.
,..,es.
r ifl Pairs nderclothes
I overcoat.
Pairs
'
socks (heavy).
I jersey.
I
4lattress and 2 covers.
ted;
nittic 1
BY MEN WHO REQUIRE THEM:
, 4anyard,
r pair leggings.
I suit rain clothes and rubber boots.
'. Can
ati i..p, _ tnen have clothing made, or must they draw it?
Ilel141;11." making of clothing is allowed so long as it conforms
te 15,1 W1,0 uniform regulations.
1 . ce , eat are ship's
tailors required to do with clothes they
,ps,,.,, s'?r, the
llY &y _u1,tlit crew?
it to the division officer for inspection before dewer I. tx,
u It to the person ordering it.
notti. 'lrat
are the various uniforms of an enlisted man?
ss,'blue and white; "undress," blue and white; dunL hes.,,w1th blue cap, white hat or watch cap; "working
_sic)
'
l Ca C,
Pill rd? tii ready-made" uniform clothes be obtained on shipof6 l yes,
Upon
requisition.
REQUISITIONS FOR CLOTHING.

w,
nen
11,10u,, and how are requisitions made?
After bag inspection the division officer makes
is 5
gensitioeraln for the division. He ascertains what each man
Rot
ly through the petty officers of the different crews
drawri,s, who take the lists.
ip? erveding clothes the men form in line. The petty officers
IO
'ills Pre first, regardless of position in line. A division offiOvvea s,ent. Each man gets the clothes he requested if it
L'IPIR ",eY the commanding and division officer. If a man's
cake ad owance is short, he will be required to draw enough
the
outfit complete.
64
Q. What is done with the clothing after it is drawn?

A
A. After trying it on, it should be marked immedta.telY
regulation stencil and paint. The place for marking Is Cie Si
laid down and should,be strictly followed.
MARKING CLOTHES.
Q. What are the regulations for marking and folding clt
A. The following rules are quoted from the Navy DePart
ii
General Order No. 48:
Every article of clothing shall be legibly marked with
owner's name,,as follows:
OVERSHIRTSOn the outside of front and on the insi
back, both marks being placed one inch from the bottom
shirt, the former across the center line; also on the under Ce
of the collar.
JUMPERSOn the inside, on the hem, across the center cc

of the front, and to the right of the center-line of the back; IlL
flt
on the under-side of the collar.
the rke
TROUSERSOn the inside of the back of both legs on I
torn hem.
UNDERSHIRTSOn the outside of the front one inch fro takj
bottom of the shirt and to the right of the center.
the,
DRAWERSOn the outside of the right half waistband. s
NECKERCHIEFIn center.
CLOTH CAPInside crown.
ee
WATCH CAPInside, one-half inch from bottom.
Iv;
WHITE HATOn the sweat band.
LEGGINGSInside on center-piece three inches from ari e of
allel to top.
OVERCOATCenter of under-side of collar; on lining sto
side of split of tail three inches from and parallel to bot Re
MATTRESSIn center. Four inches from each end.
MATTRESS COVERRight corners four inches from oPe Ilit
BLANKETSAll the right-hand corners, four inches fro ak,
'
edge.
Q. If clothes are bought at auction, what is to be dou sion
A. The master-at-arms has a stamp, "D. C." which Th
over the former owner's name in red paint. The purcha! 13:
marks his name on in white or black paint; white 0 in
Ar
clothes, and black on white clothes.
Q. What is the morning inspection?
A. It is the inspection at 9.30 every morning, at laic Spe
the officer of the division sees all his men in exact unil
the day, neat, shoes blacked, cleanly shaved or beard tr 1.
etc.

65
Q. R
A.. t ow are clothes mended?
ernnaell man should have his "sewing kit." Wednesday
is usually allowed for mending, and it should be so
e7ed and not as a holiday. Saturday afternoon is a good
"3
Areoverhaul, mend, and mark clothing.
enlisted men allowed to wear civilian's clothes?
0, Article 211 says:"No member of the crew shall at
ti
either on board ship or on shore, wear any dress but
e !scribed uniform." Particular attention shall be paid that
aut uniform underclothing is worn by the crew.
Ii
'd
BAG INSPECTION.
What is "bag inspection?"
'
cerit is an inspection of the bags of the division by the petty
ter tos luPervised by officers, for cleanliness, tidiness, quantity,
.1z;uldni`.!ition of clothes. At the first bag inspection every piece
nia ",e inspected for marking; after that, inspect to see that
he tke_Pcs do not need renewing, that new clothes are properly
u, etc.
w is it conducted?
ro
takags are "piped up" and taken to quarters; everything
their!. Out, the bag flattened and laid on deck to arrange
s j ."Pon. The bags should be in two fore and aft lines, the
h oakd athwartships, mouths of bags of the two lines toward
e e'er,i. e., toward the division officer when he inspects.
401 piece of clothes, brush it thoroughly, fold it in regula3'; one of the regulation marks then appears on the outf roiI; roll
,
up taut and with a smooth skin. Stop it with
elos
iog stoutes stop at each end. Appearance is improved by plack'S some distance apart on each piece of clothing. Ar)e ,RestIpeces
on bag according to sizeblue on right, white on
e iNtek, s and caps near foot of bag, wisp broom standing
.0 g, 10t of bag. When ready, stand at attention in rear
.ktawaiting officer.
ll ton bag inspection what should the petty officer of the
.
provided?
1
"ere should be a "division marking kit," with white and
5
aint and stencil brushes
All,,
'111e inspection of clothing, what is looked into?
t. 11,gele 642, Navy Regulations, says:
"eY (officers of the deck, etc.) shall, in addition to car1 ,
tIt the instructions already laid down for inspection,
tl
Ceial care that all outer and underclothing, pea-jackets,
I's and bedding of the men are, in respect to quality,
and color, in accordance with the prescribed uniform.
b.have
66
"2. They shall see that all materials drawn are used
purpose required; that all clothing is neatly made, marke
kept in order, and that none of it is sold; that the
net in person and clothing and provided with regul'i
knives and lanyards; and that underclothing is worn ail
times unless dispensed with by order of the captain. All
done by the ship's tailor shall be submitted to the divisio
cer for inspection and approval before it is accepted."
WATCHES AND DIVISIONS.

Q. How should ship's companies be divided?
A. Generally speaking, in two "watches," starboard
port. .Also by divisions: I, 2, 3 and 4, gun divisions; 5 ar
powder divisions; 7, 8 and 9, engineer division and 1113,,
Each division is nearly equally divided between starboariu
port; similarly every gun crew, etc., down to a squa
division. The divisions are divided into parts I, 2, 3
the 1st and 3d parts being starboard, the zd and 4th P0
old ships odd numbers mean starboard, even port; ri
numbers are sometimes different. No. 325 will mean 3
sion, zd part (hence port watch) and No. 5 in that P
No. 1041, 1st division, 4th part and No. i in that part;
the next io the last number now gives the watch. Me
deck force wear white tape watch marks on right
sleeve, according to whether they are starboard or port
and on white clothes a black mark. Engineer force We 13
watch mark.
MESSES.
Q. What is a mess caterer?
A. A person selected to take charge of the mess tilrg
rived from stopping rations, or from contributions. P,
chases such extra provisions as the men may wish to al
Q. What is a mess cook?
A. Each mess has a cook, detailed by the executive
t t,
His duties are to keep the mess table, gear, and che5j
draws all provisions; prepares all food for the mess ao d
it over to the ship's cook and does minor cooking.11
chest ready for inspection at all times and assists in r
the berth deck. The number of cooks and messes 113c
greatly reduced by the organization of the general olelire,
It
the canteen system.
1
1(
SMOKING HOURS.
Q. What are the regular smoking hours aboard shir.,
A. Smoking hours are at the discretion of the coil:jh
I.
67
ii 1, he custom is for all ship's routines to allow from

eal ;lands" to "Turn to" in the morning watch, during the
eit el.nrs, and from supper to tattoo; smoking after hamls only permitted on upper deck; on holidays, halfecijs and in afternoons after work it may be allowed by
airwPermission of the executive officer, but it will not be
ersu ed If men abuse it, or if a few idle men want it. while
den. are at work. Smoking during divine service is forany Smoking in the ship's boats, not on detached service,
"me during daylight is forbidden.
MESSENGERS.
hat are the duties of a messenger?
ssa e Is for the use of the officer-of-the-deck in carrying
ntieges, striking bells, etc. He is usually detailed from aphnioes, ofl board. He should familiarize himself with the
4.! names of nautical things, and with the names, ranks
ssa les of various officers and petty officers, so as to carry
I Ors intelligently; also with the customs of service, as he
he hue thrown on his own resources. In carrying a mespa
a,n,,111d always move on a run. In striking bells, strike
rt; es it,:cKIY and sharply, man-of-war style. In carrying mesen
nly before leaving what you intend to say, and say it
"
rret as received. When the officer-of-the-deck leaves the
St
'
L eA ch, follow him at a short distance, to be ready if
ea Perk, 'round the quarter deck he can be of great assistance
ii es.rnlIng small
tending boat-lines, etc. He should
"act uniform atjobs,
all times.
ara
53
m at
lard
Lad
3 3
port
00
ric
ti
iT
SIGNAL BOYS.
I/
Wh
e !,
t are the duties of a signal boy?
Ile ?Lands watch on the bridge and sends and receives sig11 ti an assistant to the quartermaster and keeps lookout
es; carries reports to the officer-of-the-deck. When
Ikate21- signalling he comes on the bridge at once, whether
and or not. His constant aim should be to be quick,
amalwaYs correct; answer signals quickly when under1 get the signal reported and send reply as soon as
SIDE BOYS.
essen
Ine,Re
fourrs
and signal boys are detailed as side boys; one
'nS two side boys; two pipes, four; three pipes, six;
gway o
PIPes, eight. On hearing the pipe they come to the
hiPi
n the run and are stationed by the boatswain's mate.
int
68
When an officer leaves they salute with off hand, remaihie

salute while the side is being piped. They do not leav.
side until the boatswain's mate has finished piping the $t
LOOKOUTS.
Q. What lookouts are stationed on men-of-war, and Ik

.nre
what purpose?
vet
A. Beside the quartermaster at conn, in daytime, t
_
t
always at sea a masthead lookout, who is there to rePhil
eu
thing out of the ordinary, such as vessels, land, lighttPt
, de
breakers, discolored water, floating timbers, tide-rips, 01.
thing of interest. A man is always stationed at sea by t-Pi
buoy, and he should, in addition to that, keep a bright
out and make reports as above concerning anything see
:
night lookouts are stationed forward of side lights to
,
bright lookout and at each half-hour they report thehl-xc 4
by singing out. This also serves to show they are awa
alert. Lookouts are also usually on each side amidshiPs* r ep
sig
Q. What report is made half-hourly by them?
A."Starboard (or port) cathead, bright light;" "S,tator 4,1th
(or port) gangway;" "Starboard (or port) quarter,' . in
ssi n
order, each waiting a short time before reporting.
,
Q. How report sail or land sighted?
h
A. "Sail ho!""Land ho!" etc.
illtt
Q. How are you answered by officer-of-the-deck?
eior
A. "Where away?"
,,i fZks
Q. What reply do you give?
A. Give relative bearing of objects from ship, e. g.,
off starboard bow, sir;" "Two points abaft port bean', tc,
etc., etc.
he er
how.
h
SPREADING AWNINGS.
kar
b e'
Q. How are awnings spread?
tO-ae
. 'II
A. Everything should be done by order, and toge,d,
the awning is below it should be brought up and Plac`rel(a:r1
stretch. At the order, "Loose awnings," the stops 3,1,05w)I
off, the awning falling from the backbone, which shen'r(tkt er i
be tautened out by fore and aft tackle, and the earings 3,, skboellr
off and manned. If large spaces occur between earing'jitrstIt ,
\)n,
about half way between earings should be lengthene"d 311'4 0:
as an earing. At order, " Haul out the earings. t eiati4 I
hauled well out until the awning is flat, then everyone i
along, and at order, "Lay up and bring to," theyIVrll ,q
rail, bring all stops taut and expend all ends; no wriltily uir
...g
'
am
h011ows to be left. Lacings are passed. Everyone
69
tetJail
until the order, "Lay in," when all lay in together.
in
0
off part of ship has general supervision ofhis
"g and does not lay up.
SIDE CLEANERS.
at are side cleaners?
oin "e executive officer details a suitable number of men
yen eia,c11 division to keep the side clean. Cleaning gear is
and they are excused from all other calls. They
'ald"lem
0 eas ,always be required at drill and quarters unless specill
de je
u Tliey are responsible for the cleanliness of the ship's
bwake of their divisions. Men on lookout should avoid
I
g tobacco, and should never spit over the side.
Q. wh
SALUTES AND HONORS.

he
14ebiel,pw,follwing
extract from the Navy Regulations is quoted
tilp024
.E
, very officer or man, upon reaching the quarter-deck,
leaving it to go over the side, shall salute the national
onT
atI,
hhainsd alute shall be returned by the officers of the
lo3
Any officer or man, in uniform or not, when meeting,

offi 0r addressing, either ashore or afloat, his commandnot,cer,, or an officer his senior in rank, whether in uniform
I lute. snall salute him. An officer saluted shall return the
hen several officers are together in uniform, the
iler
,fr
.pks 001Y Shall return the salute. Personal salutes and other
ql,,ters respect due their rank shall always be extended to
104. the army and marine corps.
Cer a
The salute for all officers and men, when not
41e hand
whether in uniform or not, should be made with
farthest away, or with the disengaged hand, and
eetest 'e rendered at six paces before passing, unless the
aa thint reached be greater than six paces and not more
Th:LY Paces, in which case salute at the point of passing.
0.r,.(a) k...salute shall be as follows:
.11A7
ser 04
,1se the hand quickly until the forefinger touches the
11cle,irt
z of the head-dress above the eye; thumb and fingers
45 and joined; palm toward the face; forearm inclined at
(b)n
se "grees hand and wrist straight; glance toward the
e
Thsaluted.
tIll
"
iCksalute being returned, or the officer passed, drop the
0
.11l
1" Wh '3' to the side.
1114i aildin e" no head-dress is worn the salute shall consist in
at attention and facing the officer saluted.
ssj.
ii
70
to5. When any member of the crew is seated arm, 0 ePt.

work, he shall rise upon the approach of an officer an,, A
him. If the officer remains in the vicinity some tin A
salute need not be repeated. Men actually engaged it ern
are not required to cease working and salute upon tile lj
proach of an officer unless addressed by him."
7 T
Q. Is an officer in civilian's clothes entitled to honor .
A. No; except that in passing him he should alwal't do
saluted with the hand.
T
Q. Do officers on a ship receive side honors when les'10 four
is
coming aboard their own ship?
A. Yes; always when they have on side-arms. The Cs.
is authorized to dispense with side honors to officers,5
own ship in uniform, but without side-arms, and this 1 114,
erally done by a general order from the captain.
Q. If an officer in uniform, or other person entitleddt
oe d
honors, comes alongside or leaves in a shore boat,
oi
receive side honors?
A. The boat is not piped alongside or away, but he, 1 ard
is piped over the gangway.
Q. Why is the approach of an officer to the ship, 01
rank, always reported to the officer-of-the-deck by the rl
master on watch?
A. Because, if coming aboard, the officer-of-the-deel4
quired, when not otherwise engaged, to meet him at ti(ti
way with prescribed honors. If passing, he may be ent
have the guard paraded in his honor.
Q. When are honors for officers dispensed with?
A. For officers: (1) When in plain clothes; (2) whell5
tion or departure takes place before 8 a. m. or after _
(3) during meal hours of crew for officers of U. S.
Marine corps.
Q. When commanding officers are passing close
what do sentries in sight do?
A. They salute.
00
Q. What does every man do when "Attention" is 5'
during daily routine?
a
A. Every man in sight from outside stands at attenti4
ing the person for whom "Attention" is sounded if he
seen; otherwise stand at attention facing outboard
inside on covered decks, if not in sight through gun Pill
other openings, are not required to obey the bugle CI
they must keep silence.
Q. If at drill, and the same signal, "Attention
"Silence "), is sounded, what do?
A. Every man stops instantaneously and stands at
ept.
71
is tracks. Everything is stopped. Absolute silence
in h.
Are
No, cheers allowed in compliment of an officer?
ttal the Navy Regulations say cheers shall not be given
ipment to any officer.
.
many
5? ix7,eritY-one.guns are fired as a national salute?
.do
"
oriel is meant by manning the yards, or rails, and when
The
r men lay out on the yards and stand up at intervals
ar five feet, holding on to the life lines. Manning the
ds. corresponding function when ship is not rigged with
0 r
en then stand in line along the rail. It is done as an
blie`mly when the President. the President of a foreign
.
or member of a royal family comes on board.
to , wcil,w do the men face?
4 d Oen the person thus honored comes aboard, all are
order towards the gangway. If he goes
the
ar'd Jarious yards, or rail, are faced about toforward
keep faces
Luiz.
0e
CHAPTER III
SEAMANSHIP
QUESTIONS
AND ANSWERS ON VARIOUS
SUBJECTS IN SEAMANSHIP
CONTENTS.
illenclature of Ships
illstirIs on Spars and Sails
cie,4clature of Sails
ottling and Running Rigging
(ki stig and Splicing
rAkeles
e Lo nlPass
e
and Sounding Machine
1111Steering
r,.3." TackleAnchoringMooring
,erilng Out Anchors
tvi44,"affect of Propeller
st, 9,1 in a Heavy Sea
trurilla the Apparently Drowned
Ittr -etic'ns for Saving the Drowning
setilktien in Case of
Shipwreck
r
.e with Breeches Buoy or Life a
"ns of Sea Terms
........................
etuii
PAGE
8o
84
90
94
Ion
103
103
108
113
116
120
126
130
140
140
140
141
142
143s
143
146
Iso
SEAMANSHIP
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ON VARIOUSA

A
SUBJECTS IN SEAMANSHIP
61 !
NOMENCLATURE OF SHIPS.
Q.
Q. What are the different rigs of sailing vessels?

th
A. Ship, bark, barkentine, brig, brigantine, hermap.
sell
brig, two, three, four, five, six and seven-master
sloops.
Q. How are vessels of the navy classed?
A. First class battleships, second class battleships, aj rd
cruisers, protected cruisers, gunboats, torpedo boats,
rams, despatch vessels, auxiliary or converted vessels, Cìt.
and repair vessels.
Q. How are they rated?
I
A. 1st rate are regular vessels of 8000 tons or
rate are regular men-of-war of 4000 to 8000 tons, and coll,Wet
cruisers of 6000 tons and above, except colliers and d1,
vessels; 3d rate are regular men-of-war moo to 4000,
and auxiliary vessels below 6000 tons, colliers, refr,i0xt
ships, supply, distilling, repair, hospital and other vesso5 .
4000 tons; 4th rate are all other rated vessels.
Ao
NOTE.Sailing ships, receiving ships, tugs and torpev
are not rated.
Q. How are the decks of a man-of-war named?
e rl
A. The first deck complete from stem to stern is tk
deck. Above this is the superstructure deck and thL. vv
decks. Below the main deck is the berth deck. The II
tive deck is usually just below the berth deck. (On ba t
it is the same as the protective deck and the deck
W
called the armor deck.) Below the protective deck
forward and aft platforms, which are partial decks
It
only to the engine rooms.
Q. What is the spar deck?
A. It is really a light deck running fore and aft a
other decks and not carrying guns. In this way the ra
has been often spoken of as the spar deck.
co-1.
SEAMANSHIP.
75
Is a ship divided lengthways?
forward, midships, and after parts.
4,v,n1ch is the bow?
forward end of the ship.
hich is the stern?
after end of the ship.
nat is the part known
as 'midships?
middle part.
, iluat are the starboard and port sides?
rt 11, starboard side is the right hand side looking for. lip ne Port side is the left hand side looking forward.
zhnat is
the keel?
Jinn.' first piece of metal or timber laid on the blocks when
a the ship.
, ir.lat is the stem?
ph he lics the.piece of timber or metalthe vertical extension
ing eelin the forward part of the vessel to which the
vvlis secured
forward.
.at is the sternpost?
ar
lics the piece or
timber or metalthe vertical extension
roo re.4 eelin the after part of the ship to which plating is
c0 ler r.
'" If a single screw is used the post to which the
gt. s secured is the "rudder post"
and the other the stern
1-113w
What are the

The
frames?
th_ a
thwartship frames or ribs rising from the keel to
.oi'ttles7 Main
body of the ship. The plating is secured to the
IlYthat is the bilge?
--0'
ft1\C -r.ne
ttend -at Part of the ship's body on each side of the keel.
wts out to the "turn of the bilge."
, _urat are the
bilge keels?
Y less n Pieces of metal secured near the turn of the bilge.
en a ship's motion while rolling.
Vat is the
"counter"?
(orat Portion of the stern from the waterline to the overhe
the Part which projects out over the water).
What
is the waterline?
s
Isistile line the water makes along her side when she
loadis
k !line"Vs bottoms are usually painted red up to the
Vol (that is the waterline at heaviest load).
it i at is displacement?
8 the actual weight, in tons, Of water displaced by the
ab,; TWilheat is
the "
of a ship?
narrowingrun"
of a hull aft, between keel and counter,
76
A
Q. What is the cutwater?
A. It is the forward edge of the stem. The part that Ile
the water when a ship is in motion.
Q. What is a double bottom?
botAt.r
A. Iron or steel ships generally have two complete
\
calleu,
is
them
between
space
The
outer.
and
inner
the
A.
"double bottom."
road
Q. What is a watertight compartment?
A. All steel ships are divided into a large number of. f-\.
and passages which are so fitted as to be watertightCOT
separate compartment is known as a "watertight
ment." They serve to keep the ship afloat by confiniag '
water if her hull is pierced.
It
'
Q. What are the eyes of a ship?
ed
PI
the
A. The extreme forward portion of a ship where
1
joins the stem.
cli
Q. What are the wings?
A. The portion of the hold nearest the side of the shit>
, rjY
Q. What are chain lockers?
A. Compartments in the forward portion of vessel uo eaI
chain pipes for carrying and storing cables.
t t
Q. What are the beams of a ship?
the
across
running
A. Horizontal bars of metal
be
support the decks and connect the sides. They are V
"L" or "T" beams.
!. A
Q. What are waterways?
A. Small gutters extending all around the edge of the f(:I
deck. They carry off over the side, through the scuPP
II:
water when the deck is washed down.
V
scuppers?
the
are
What
Q.
Ti
A. They are holes in the waterways through which
a
conveyed overboard through pipes.
VI
Q. What are partners?
A. Frames of timber fitted into the decks immediatelY Ai
to
the masts to strengthen the decks.
W
Q. What are the ports? Air ports?
A. The openings in the ship's side for various purpos III
b,
ports are for the admission of air. Gun ports are 0 kWI
through which the guns are pointed and fired. Merch
Co
have cargo ports.
eS,
Q. What are the port sills?
A. Formerly the timber forming upper or lower pa, WI
port. Now it is simply the upper and lower side of tr tAie
lig
Q. What are stanchions?
WI)
A. Vertical pillars of wood or metal supporting a
some other portion of the ship.
T.
to
WII,a..t is caulking?
d inriving oakum between the planks of a deck. It is then
, ti',. r Payed" with pitch.
tt The is the rudder?
ea npo e aPParatus used to steer a vessel. It hangs to the
(or rudder post) by pintles and gudgeons.
Zna,t is the tiller?
of Pteee of timber or metal fitted fore and aft into the
u,the rudder by which to turn it when steering.
hat is
the wheel?
rudYarne work shaped like a wheel used to move the tiller
,d, ti.,"er With the steam-steering gear, now almost always
kiee"e wheel when turned opens the valve of the steering
pl.ned tand the engine moves the tiller. The wheel is con). \Alp the valve
by gearings, or by a flexible wire cable.
,deeklat is the forecastle, gangway (or waist), and the guar40'. In
krly ,441tIern ships these portions of the ship are not so
as in old sailing ships. Generally speaking, the
deteastilefilled
lc (m e. extends from the foremast forward on the upper
st toaat deck). The quarter deck extends from the mainTe Poop, or to the stern if there is no poop. each
The
betw'angwaYs, are the portions of the upper deck on
een the forecastle and quarter deck.
'
L '
;at is the topgallant forecastle? The poop?
iC in de Mall deck on the bows of a vessel above the spar or
)cr k usuecastio
'
c A poop deck is a similar deck aft. The topgalusually extends aft to the foremast. The poop
WlailYisextends forward only to the mizzenmast.
rhtat
the break of the poop or forecastle?
deck ter end of the forecastle, or the forward end of the
AWtilinat is a
hatchway?
to,
-Pening in the decks forming a passageway from one
I'Vh-nther, and into the holds.
's Theat is a coaming?
raised boundary of the hatchways, to keep water from
I
'1 Wit
'
aTAr'
Cev- are gratings?
kes ete
-"rigs of lattice-work for the hatchways, waterways,
11'
. tki at are
deadlights?
1,,,itui,
l'e
eehets? of heavy glass fixed in the deck, or ship's side, to
'v hat
are scuttles?
78
A. Round or square holes cut in the deck for Pas

coal, ammunition, etc.
Q. What are the bulwarks?
A. The planking or plating around the vessel abav
upper deck.
Q. What is a bulkhead?
A. A partition separating the various comparttnent
ship.
Q. What is the taffrail?
A. The rail around a vessel's stern.
Q. What is a bumpkin?
A. A short beam, or metal bar, projecting out from 111L'A
or quarter of a ship. They are used to give better 1c:ki
certain gear.
0 1,
Q. What are hawse holes?
A. Holes in the bows of a ship for cables to pass t i
Q. What are hawse pipes?
A. Iron pipes fitted in the hawse holes to take the ( k.
cables.
Q. What are hawse plugs?
A. Plugs made to fit the hawse holes to prevent
from coming on board through them. When made of '
ate
stuffed or filled with oakum, they are called jackasses.
Q. What are bucklers?
A. Shutters fitted over an opening to confine the 1Pi: 11
put in the holes to keep water out. They keep haws
from washing inboarU.

c
Q. What is the manger?
A. It is the part of the deck that is partitioned off
to prevent any water that may enter through the haws
from running aft over the deck.
Q. What are the chain pipes?
4(44'
A. The holes for the cable where it passes from one IA
It
another from the chain lockers.
Q. What are the chain bitts?
A. The heavy vertical pieces of iron fitted in the fore,
the deck, to which, with the assistance of deck stoPPdik01
compressors, the cable is secured. One or two tt
ateh
taken around the bitts.
Q. What is a compressor?,
A. The large movable iron lever fixed at te bottol; pi,
chain pipe. A tackle is secured to its end and by ha, k tpt
the tackle the cable is controlled as it runs out, by ban''
between the compressor and the lower part of the el S
Q. What is a capstan?
A. A barrel of wood or iron turning around horiz
SEAMANSHIP.
79
,
tally 0n a
push.
central spindle. By forcing it to turn, either
Vy in.g on capstan bars or by steam, it is used in hoisting
aelghts or weighing anchor.
)
i'Lli t are bitts?
tene'ry are vertical pieces of timber or metal very securely
s_e to the deck of the vessel and are used for securing
or for any purpose where heavy strains must be taken.
.Vi_bat are the fife and pin rails?
.tindtle7 are rails at which gear is belayed. Fife rails are
cl. ,'last. Pin rails are straight and are along the rail
s-,...
4111warks
rhtat is an eyebolt?
"eolt with an eye (or opening) in the head, to which a
15
is 2
1 '
.3 be hooked. An eyebolt having a ring welded in the
, 1;v- ring bolt.
A hat is a fish boom or fish davit?
Inovable boom, or davit, for fishing the anchor.
0 .. A
What
ells the billboard?
4thor. , or ledge, on the ship's side to support the fluke
the
11\rha are the channels, or chains?

Piatft
ter _ orals projecting out from the ship's side to give
wh4Pread to lower rigging.
A at is a bridge?
(
go eoti latform extending above the rail across the ship for
. wile'lience of the officer of the deck.
Ste at is the sea ladder?
,g 1 4 th Ps secured to the ship's side for use incoming aboard
,,,,i5e 4
1 gangway is unshipped (used chiefly at sea).
Ladd.
at are the accommodation ladders?
rtiin 'I's shipped at the gangway in port for convenience
Ile Whg n board.
It ;at is a goose neck?
h air a sort of an iron hook fitted in the end of a boom
lre Whlaws it vertical and lateral motion at the same time.
)1' 011ta are davits?
h-ea rIggers projecting from the ship's side used for hoiste articles
,,
or weights, such as boats, stores, etc. Also
Whs tor ammunition, etc.
[
toil/ ,Ilje,at are hammock cloths?
ba it 11 es of canvas for covering the openings to the ham.io qtings
cll Skat are hammock nettings?
4cite:
es along the ship's rail in which hammocks are stowed
use.
8o
Q. What are head-boards?

A. Boards placed vertically at the forward and after
the hammock nettings. They are frequently at gang waY'
are carved.
Q. What is the galley?
A. The cooking range and compartments on board alliC
Q. What is the magazine?
A. The place where all powder is stowed.
th
Q. What is the shell-room?
sti 111
A. The place where all the shell is stowed.
oi
Q. How is the position of waterline shown insidethe
P
A. A black line is painted all around inside at
height.
Ii
Q. For what are the composition numbers placed oil t
and stern?
A. To determine the draft of water at any time.
Q. How is the draft determined by these figures?
A. The bottom of the figures mark the exact even it al]
of feet from the bottom of the keel. The tops the ha
The rest is estimated by the eye. For example, the bott
adS
the figure 9 is exactly nine feet from the bottom of
The top of the figure 9 is exactly nine feet six inches
bottom of the keel.
Q. What are the holds, store-rooms, ward-room, cabin, f4
C
is r,
sickbay, etc.?
A. Holds are forward usually. The gear of the ship
belovi
there. Store-rooms arc all over the ship, mostly The
a
and are for use in stowing the various stores.
the quarters of the captain or admiral. Ward-room, tit
ters of all officers who are below the captain and who
junior officers. The steerage is occupied by junior 0e or
officers below the grade of junior lieutenant who ha
regular watch and division. The sickbay is the hospital W
ship.
QUESTIONS ON SPARS AND SAILS.
to
Q. What are the masts and how named?
ro4yz
A. They are upright spars placed in a vessel to still
yards, masts and booms. Counting from forward I
named the foremast, the mainmast, and mizzenmast. Plijr
two masts, fore and main.
Q. Into how many parts is each mast divided?
At i
A. Four. The lowermast, topmast, topgallant 111'
royalmast.
ee.
Q. Why are these divisions made?
A. Spars of sufficient length could not be obtained
SEAMANSHIP.
Si
mast, and even

if so, it could not be given the proper
suPPort. Besides, it is necessary to send down the upper
Y5 8 11 the masts in heavy weather, and at other times.
place.?
w are the masts arranged and secured in
Tile low - part of the mast rests on a "step" on the
so,,
10,
"
1 In the bottom of the ship. It comes up through the
d ins decks which
are strengthened by "partners," and is
aft, Place
, bY stays" and "backstays" running forward
0 1 by "shrouds" on either side. Water is kept out
itast Pening in the deck by wedges and a mast coat. The
se, rests on a "fid" on tressletrees" on the lowermast;
6, si11) through the
"cap," and is held in place by"shrouds'
aretaY.s." The topgallant and royalmasts are in one piece,
tsimilarly held in place.
,''e are yards?
TInat
3, are pieces of timber, or spars, suspended horizontally
triewiast upon which
sails are spread. They are name
ailin,ast they are on and the sail they spread; e. g., main141 w3ii4r, fore-royal-yard, etc.
oti
at are gaffs?
n projecting spars abaft the masts. They are used to
we-Per parts of trysails and spankers.
oolat is a
boom?
t"g spar used for various purposes, often to extend
0
of a sail, studding-sail booms, spanker booms. The
15
ow Wh.ere
r swinging,
is the booms are now used mainly for boats.
yard?
is the lowercross-jack
yard of the mizzen. No sail is spread on
tll t.
) P
"hat
ot - are the names of some of the other yards?
e Yard, foretopsail, foretopgallant, fore royal,royal
love e
and
01 Whin
_ ain; mizzen-topsail yard, mizzen-topgallant and
"_at are the "head yards"?
Yards crossed on the foremast.
ilneat are the spars forward on a sailing ship?
tbewsprit, corresponding to the lower mast, the jibto .
yaltne topmast and the flying-jib-boom to the topgallant
t "he Mast. In order to give lead to the rigging and hold
nad
boo s" in place are the "whisker booms" exm
Phin tit horizontally on each side of bowsprit, and the
wh striker"
hanging vertically below it.
o h iar is the jib, flying jib, and staysails?
a
triangular sail hoisted on the jib stay. The flying
e2
.1nailar sail hoisting on the flying jib stay. Staysails
cornered sails hoisting on the various stays.
led
82
Q. What are square sails; fore and aft sails?

A. Square sails are those that are spread by yards.
and aft sails are spread by gaffs and booms, or hoist on'
Q. What are head sails? After sails? Light sails? I
A. Head sails are those that are spread on and for's'
foremast. After sails are those on main and abaft it
sails are the topgallant-sails, royals, flying jib, and tops
staysails.
Q. What are awnings?
A. They are canvas coverings spread over the deck
vessel to protect the crew from the weather. Awning 5
ions secured outside the ship along rail support the ridg P
to which the awning is hauled out by the earings and(' '?
r
The space between the awning and the deck is protecte
necessary by awning or side curtains.
Q. What is a mast cover?
A. A canvas cover placed over a mast when going t
protect it from the smoke and heat from smokepipe
Q. What are the "lower booms" and their uses?
A. They are the long booms rigged outside of ale th
abreast foremast. They were formerly used for spread .11
lower studdingsail. They are now used only in port, 311
for boats to secure to.
o
Q. What are studdingsails? (Pronounced stun-sails1 e 1
A:
A. Sails that are set outside of the square sails.
spread at the top by yards and at the bottom by booms'
Q. What other sails are sometimes used at sea?
A. Skysails, small sails set above royals. Sky-sera
triangular sail set above skysails (sometimes called starInner jib, a sail set just inside of jib. Jib-o-jib, a sail 5 girl
side of flying jib. Jib topsail, a small sail set on the t
stay of sloops or schooners. Merchantmen also use
topsail-yards. Rolling topsails are sometimes seen.
Q. What are masts and bowsprits made of?
A. Wood, iron, or steel. Wood used is pinc, spruce s
Iron and steel are used principally in vessels made t
material. Being hollow, they act as ventilators. WoocÀ: I
ermasts are usually made of four pieces united by 110,1, (
inner corner of each is cut off leaving a square bole r, ()
center.
A:
Q. What is the step?
A. The timber on which the heel, or lower end, of .1,4at
rests.
Q. What are the various parts of a mast?

A. MASTHEAD-FrOM where the rigging is placed to 'A
of the mast.
L.
SEAMANSHIP.
83
Side pieces bolted to the hounds to support trestle

trees.
Ro
"DsProjections at the masthead which support the
trestle trees of lower and topmasts, and rigging of
tipper masts.
va
ItEsri-E TREESFore and aft pieces, one on each side of
c
masthead.
rt,8,S TREESTwo cross pieces on top of trestle trees.
The "horns" of the cross tree are the outer ends or
,artris.
,rwilhat are tops?
Ps theY are platforms made of oak or steel. In wooden

.i_eY rest on trestle trees. Used to spread topmast and
rigrehi u, steel ships they are used to mount small guns
ur,hts
lg
"
/l nat are the doublings?
he
ap, Portion of the two masts between the trestle trees
; AW1Lat is a cap?
the the nil/lick iron-bound block of wood, fixed upon the head
eppe aSt for an upper mast to pass through. It supports
will' mast in position.
A, suar is a"cap-shore"?
eping.PPort under the fore part of a lower cap to prevent it
P
op .
mast wedges?
gellat are
of wood placed between the mast and partners to
uPright in place.
. pie at are bolsters?
s Ring ,
tees of oak placed on trestle trees for the eyes of the
rest on to prevent a sharp nip.
An"at is the "jack "?
wartships iron bar at topgallant masthead, for spreadWhnr
,igging The topgallant funnel and jack are in one.
are the "bees "?
hocks of wood
ta
on each side of the bowsprit for foretop'
51 s to reeve through.
;04 choat
, is the
saddle of the jibboom?
)1c otti eK of wood on top of the bowsprit, in which heel of
whrests.
Prw..sat are jaws?
a Seunlpie.ces of wood on inner end of a gaff or boom, formYards 'circle to keep it in place against its mast. Also
vvb atnidships.
A ha,!, is,a fid-hole?
s"e in the heel of a topmast or topgallant mast for
84
the fid, which is a bar of iron or wood put through the fid'i A
and across the trestle trees to support topmast or topg,31
A
mast.
Q. What is a sheave hole?
is.fitte` Yt :
A. An opening cut in a spar in which a sheave
A
reeve a rope through.
Q. What is a dumb sheave?
a iid, Q
A
A. It is simply a groove in the heel of a spar for
to lie in.
Q
Q. What is the truck?
.,,,i
A. A circular piece of wood on the head of the NY- lie
In it is a sheave for signal halliards.
he
Q. What is the lightning conductor?
f
es
ae
A. A small copper rope, extending from the top
royalmast, down royal backstay to waterline or COPPer 5 Q.
ing. This end of the conductor should always be in the A.
te,
during rain or showers.
. Q.
Q. What is a jack-staff?
A. A short staff forward on which the "jack" is 11015 A.
Q. What is the flag staff?
Q.
Q.
, A. A staff rigged astern on which colors are hoiste A.
reef
at anchor.
Q. What is meant by a spar "buckling "?
A. The bending of a spar when not properly supP11 ./C?:
when too much strain is put upon it.
Q.
Q. Where are spars most likely to decay?
, A.
A. At the heel, partners, and cap. Anywhere, in fact, 31nt,

the water can get in and air cannot freely circulate.
Q.
Q. What are the slings of a yard?
A. The center, or middle, of the yard. Also applied4k
lowe
1 bail
chain which supports lower yards by going around
head.
the
Q. What are thejaws?,
1
A. The projections at the slings embracing each side.
.
I
mast.
t3
Q. What are the yard-arms and quarters?
reef
fa
A. The ends of the yards are the yardarms. The ..hef
tween the yardarms and the slings are the quarters.
rd
SAILS.
k. 1
Q. Of what material are sails made?
A. In the Navy of flax canvas. In merchant service"i
times cotton.
. k: A?
Q. How is it graduated as regards strength?
,, rse
A. No. 1 is the strongest. From that it goes to Nv
finest.
SEAMANSHIP.
85
Q What
; Storm sails are made of the coarsest canvas?
sails.
usually are fore and aft sails.
A.
What are theThese
fore and aft storm sails?
y t he fore, main, and mizzen storm staysails, fore and main
sahM'and the
storm
set abaft the mizzenmast.
_rthat are the clothsmizzen
of a sail?
strips of canvas forming the sail?
fla
What,
are the principal parts of a square sail?
:,!,lead, foot, leeches,
dews, head-earing cringles and bunt.
e.
yescribe them.
Y he he head is the upper edge which is made fast to the yard.
he ,
eleciles are the two sides. The foot is the lower edge.
ews
f es
aci..ere
tt. are the two lower corners. The head-earing crin.
cringles spliced in the two upper corners for the
The bunt is the middle part of the sail.
le
, Is a cringle?
ted
a piece of rope worked around into the roping,
sailand
Q v
is A. ,`,,w,Ithhat thimbles. They are for securing gear to the
T1.
is the bolt rope?
14 Q. w rope sewed around the sail along the edge.
A'TO'is the tabling?
cures.e double part of canvas around edge to which bolt rope
7 A. t at are head-holes?
Q. o3,'Ielet holes in the head of sails for the robands.
A.
.,Yy tat are
ftr,4101es in eyelet holes?
the tabling, reefbands, etc., for cringles, reef`,
s etc
vvh
pi at are
robands?
f!ees of spun or rope yarn hitched through the headref ar
ileT securing sail to the jackstay on yard. The middle
the 4:is called the midship roband. It is of larger
stuff, and
de
tie
in bending.
Tv,Vohat arc passed
ubie the reefbands?
eYelet pieces of canvas sewed across the sail for working
eefedholes for reefpoints and to take strain when sail
etieh The first and second reefbands are usually fitted as
an,
r,fs with grab lines for beckets and toggles, and the
R loarth bands with
reefpoints.
many reef bands do square sails usually have?
tiaTrses two; topsails three and four, except mizzen, which
,
has two. Last reef is called close reef.
Z__riat is the
bellyband?
rse'
,
I extra piece of
canvas sewed across the topsail or
uelow the
lower reefband for additional strength.
Sr
1111 1 11
I 11 I
I II III II
4.1
1111HiI
TOPSAIL
1. Head
4. Clew
2. Cringle (Head wiring)
5. Leech
3. Foot
8. Reef Tackle
7 Reef Pointe 8 Reads
82
SEAMANSHIP.
SPANKER
Head
2,
each
8 Clew
4root
S.Tctek
6. Th,
r eit
freleech
8. Brails
JIB
a
1 Head
2. Tack
3. Clew
4. Fore leech or luff
5. After leech
6. Foot
88

ill!
Q. What is a footband?
A. An extra piece of canvas sewed along the foot Of 3
ft
on the after side.
tic(
Q. What is a top lining?
A. The extra piece of canvas sewed on the after Part '
topsail from the bellyband to the foot, to protect sail
I)s
chafe of top.
tiPs
Q. What is the mast lining?
A. An extra piece of canvas sewed on after part of a 5 IQ
A
protect it from the chafe of the mast.
as
Q. What are buntline cloths?
the
g
A. Extra pieces of canvas on the forward part of
extending from the foot to the bellyband, in wake of a
A,
take chafe of the buntlines.
te,
Q. What is a reef-tackle patch?
A. The extra piece of canvas sewed on the forward Pa a
the sail at the reef-tackle cringles to take the strain of the
tackles.
gt
Q. What are head earings?
CI
cringl
A. Pieces of rope spliced into the head-earing
A.
haul the head of the sail taut along the yard.
ade
Q. What are reef earings?
, de c
A. Pieces of rope spliced to the eyelet holes below eac.' l a
caring cringle and spliced to the cringle. Each earing iso el i
fast to the earing next above. They are used in reefi Q.
haul up the cringle and make it fast to the yard.
A.
Q. What are bowline bridles?
3'
v
A. Pieces of rope spliced into the bowline cringles, ha
toggle to which the bowline is toggled.
A. 4
Q. What are spectacles?
si
t
A. Pieces of iron with three or more eyes, spliced I rN.
boltrope in the clew of each square sail. Named from r IN,I
blance to spectacles.
A. t
Q. What are gluts?
. rei,1
A. Pieces of rope spliced into the middle cloth of
:n!
fitted with a thimble for buntwhips. Buntwhip is hool A. ,1
the glut in furling. .
e,
Q. What are gaskets?
UP Q,7v1
A. They are for binding sail to yard in furling. T"",,
classed as harbor and sea gaskets. Harbor gaskets arc.r,
P
from their position on yard as bunt, quarter, and Y"'s I .j
gaskets. They are usually made of sword-mat or hearY C
The extremity having a laniard for securing. They are
times secured to the sail. The sea gaskets, or furling_
(three on each arm of lower or topsail yards, and one OP
light yard arm), are usually of small-sized rope, of so
SEAMANSHIP.
89
to take several turns around the yard and sail. These

ra"'Dt securely fastened to yard. They are put around it with
eye end being bighted up and thrown over forward
irled.Sail Harbor gaskets should be carefully blacked and
0 Q with duck.
IArhat are back cloths?
T
ops....riangular pieces of canvas secured to each quarter of
bp
sai
'1.1ls.Yards. They are for convenience in stowing bunt of
oLIl Q.
A. Av. hat is meant by the hoist of a sail? The drop of a sail?
asts. ,ti,rto applied to sails whose yards travel up and down
g the ,.ne drop of a sail is a term applied to courses, meansail.?
,utstance from the head to the foot of the sail.
hat are the principal parts of a fore and aft
A. lishe
ftee
forward corner of the lower edge is the "tack ", the
ead Fotner of foot is "clew "; the forward corner of the
c r healsd the throat or "nock"; the after corner the "peak"
tlge th athfteforward
er
edge the foreleech or "luff"; the after
Q"leech."
, A. / A, are fore and aft sails made fast to spars and stays?
ade sPankers and trysails robands rove through eyelets are
e of ast to travellers in vertical railroad up and down after
Ii la ntast and
beneath gaff. Staysails or jibs travel by hanks
eletCs on the stays. These are secured by robands to
Q. W",`"
in the Lail.
A. vo?at is the "roach" of a sail?
Ys, "ere the foot is hollowed out to prevent chafe on the
Q. wh
A. A n at is a goring cloth?
P,sai1.-3
'cloth cut obliquely, as those on a jib or sides of a
Wit
? '
3 are reefbands on some sails not fitted with reef-
holes are there but it is desirable to reef them so

be used.
is the roping placed on sails?
te ant.; the after side of square sails; on the port side of
Q. ..%.4 aft
sails.
1
Tvvi,12a.t are the principal parts of an awning?
I. lArt
backbone, sharks-mouth, earings, stops, lacings, etc.
hat is the batkbone?
A
e fore rope running fore and aft with a thimble in each end
y -alld-aft tackle. The awning is hauled out at the corno
and at the sides by stops. It should always be
'tlo wrinkles. Stops and earings well expended.
3,14
Q.
ulat when the time comes robands can
A. d'nere
90
Q. What is the sharks-mouth?

A. An opening to accommodate the masts and stay5.
corners thus formed are the dogs-ears.
STANDING AND RUNNING RIGGING.
Q. What two general classes of rigging are aboard sh
A. Running and standing rigging. Running rigging
gear which is used in setting sails or handling the yards, 13 oc
or spars. Standing rigging steadies and secures the rnas.ts
spars in place, and gets its name from the fact that it 1
manent.
. Q. What are the principal pieces of standing riggi
their uses?
A. STAYSRopes leading from head of, and supporting
from forward.
RouDsSide supports for the masts, leading from
head to sides of ship.
BACKSTAYSLead from head of upper masts, abaft,
to ship's side.
GuysSide supports for booms.
1
BoBsTAYsChains which hold bowsprit down.
secured to the cutwater. As the bowsprit so
the foremast, the fore the mainmast, and the rnaii
mizzenmast, these .are the most important Pie
standing rigging in the ship.
BOWSPRIT SHROUDSThe side supports of a bovvsPI
BACK RorEsLead from end of Dolphin striker
eyebolts in bow.
JumPERsLead downward from ends of whisker boc If
hold them down.
JIB MARTINGALEThe downward support of a jibbd
JIB GuysSide supports of the jibboom. TheY
spond to shrouds
FLYING JIB MARTINGALE and GuysSame suppol
flying jibboom.
PENDANTSShort heavy ropes over masthead witIt
for hooking "burtons."
RATLINESSmall lines hitched across shrouds, t
ladders.
SHEER POLEAn iron rod seized to shrouds just
deadeyes. Used to steady lower rigging and P
deadeyes from sluing.
SHEER RATLINEEvery fifth ratline. It extends I
backstay.
SWIFTERThe forward or after shroud.
SEAMANSIIIP.
9'
CI
A,. Of virhat material is standing rigging made?
,re r
Pornll of tarred hemp rope. Now nearly always of
crewPe, parcelled and served and tarred to preserve it.
Q. ,are used now in setting up shrouds instead of laniards.
has nY has each mast more support sideways and aft than
,iorward?
,:b,!ecause the force of the wind tends to blow sail forward
the side and never aft unless caught aback, which is
tS
Q. 1.1
A. R Iv is the standing rigging named?

suppaoch Piece has the name corresponding to the spar which
tilairt,s; e g., main-topgallant-backstay is the backstay on
Q. IATTL0Pgallant-mast, etc.
A. A,Par are fore-and-aft stays?
Q. .\?171stays that lead forward.
gaiinollat are some of the principal auxiliaries to standing
A.
.11.1E--An iron band on end of jibboom supporting flyGlflg jibboom.
AM moNixc--Heavy iron bands which hold the bowsprit
el
? do
IP
tlITc'cx
SimounsIron rods leading from an iron band
On
is
lowermast, called futtock band, to an iron plate near
tPrim called futtock plate. These shrouds take the
strain of the topmast shrouds, and keep top from warpL ing*
Alsj.IAEnsSmall hemp ropes which connect the deadeyes,
"arts, etc., of rigging, used to set up and secure the
btend
of shrouds and stays.
piece of lignum vitm with holes in it through
Rtwhich
Which is rove the laniards that secure the shrouds.
AltrsFor reeving the laniard of stays, etc. It has but
Pile large hole, and several grooves or scores. It is
-r..iron bound.
"'IDLEAn iron ring, the outer surface scored so as to
receive the eye of a rope when spliced around it. Used
eye splices.
,.1(sTAYsRods of iron secured along the tops of yards,
r elsewhere. Those on tops of yards are used for
Pno
reefing and bending sail.
011(
I'DRope hanging under yards for men to stand
1
il
0-ritt
n urs--Short pieces of rope hanging from yard, supFyt,'"rting the footrope.

ISli IioasEThe short footrope at outer end
of yard.
THE
92
IRONSIron fixtures fitted on the extroaeo

of both fore and main yards and fore and main li,
yards. Support outer end of flemish horse and ''
Irons.
Boom IRONSMetal hoops, or rings, on lower and
sail yards to support studdingsail booms.
attat,
PARRELA rope collar encircling the mast, and
to the jaws of the yard. It confines yard to Ma%
permits vertical motion of yard. The eyes of parr
connected by parrel lashing.
TRUSSA heavy iron fixture holding center of lowe
to mast.
SLINGSA chain going around lower masthead, con
to lower yard by a pelican hook.
A,
JACOB'S LADDERA ladder with iron or wooden 11.
)1i,
rope or wire sides.
I
Q. What are the "eyes" of the rigging?
Q.
A. The parts that go over the masthead.
Q. What advantage has wire rigging over hemp? streilet. 1
A. It is neater, lighter, lasts longer, and does not
PACIFIC
easily.,
Q. What three things are necessary to know about eac ea
of the running rigging?.G)
A. (I) The object of the rope; that is to say, what t ,
(2) Where it belays on deck. (3) How to reeve it.
I
Q. In reeving gear what must always be watched?
It
A. To lead it in such a manner as to avoid chafe. e t t
Q. What are the principal pieces of running rigging all at
st
uses?
1
A. HALLIARDSTO hoist a sail on a mast or stay.
11
SHEETSTO spread out the foot of a sail. See
clews of sail.
TACKSTO haul down the forward clew of a course4
weather side.
%
BRAcEsSecured to ends of yards to swing thein 'II
horizontally.
Ya i
LIFTSTO support the yard-armsand keep tile'
'V
drooping.
es,
CLEWLINESTO haul up the dews of a sail when ,
ing sail. On courses they are called "clew garnet' .P11
(
spanker or trysails, "clew ropes."
ey
BuNTLINEs--Haul foot of a sail up to, and for
d'
yard.
old
aod
up
courses
of
LEEcuLINEsHaul leech
forward side of yard.
Butcrwittes--Hattl up bunt of sail when furling.
SEAMANSHIP.
IIREP TAcicLEsHaul
93
leeches of sail up under yard-arm,

b When reefing.
WLINEs--Haul out forward and steady a weather leech
II to catch
wind.
AILSHaul the after leech of spanker or trysail to the
vikrnast in
furling.
GsSteady after end of gaff when sail is brailed up.
0IvilnAurs--Haul down the heads of fore and aft sails.
rel
lirn Auts---Haul head of spanker, or trysail, out to end
I/ Of gaff. Haul foot of spanker to end of boom.
it c;_w does running rigging take its name?
ieLaas its own name connected with the name of the sail
"it belongs; e. g.,
main-topsail sheet, clewline, buntline.
110,
It i: do you describe how a piece of gear is rove off?
rove as it would be, starting with the end of a rope
'
the
red.ci1 and following through every block and leader
?"hat, iss
et
centipede?
itsisLa strong piece of rope extending on top of jibboom.
als ,1.!Pd to the bowsprit cap. Through the strands, at
calle,i't four feet, small pieces of rope are placed. These
otli `! centipede legs and are used to bind the jib down to
whin stowing it.
at are topsail tyes?
tiel3' are wire ropes. The topsail halliards hook in an
6 t tre,
e end. They lead up through gin blocks below topae trees, down through tye blocks on yard, then up
se the-11 masthead. When the halliards are hoisted they
\v, Yard to
Thaear are fly rise.
blocks?
4reY are the large upper blocks of the topsail halliards.
steadied aloft by travelling up and down on a jack
' Wh
Theat are rolling tackles?
fli YareLare tackles carried out from the mast to the quarter
Ikh norizontally to steady yard when ship is rolling.
paa,! is meant by preventer gear, such as preventer
Lets : zt
etc.?
gear put temporarily in place to assist to take the
regular gear and to replace it in case other gear
,,,,
a,Y It is gotten up and aloft when a storm is ex"11'c gear is weak.
'AN: are heel ropes?
Made fast to heels of tokallantmasts, jibboom, and
..11,
94
flying-jibboorn. They steady the former in sending down.

rig out the latter.
Q. What is a snorter? Its use?
;roa
A. Small ropes, the outer end being spliced to the
at the yard-arm of light yards. The inner end is 5t06Lthe slings of yard. The eye of the lift and brace fit
the snorter. The tripping line is secured to snorter anu (
hauled upon from deck the lower lift is pulled off.
Q. What is a tripping line?
A. A small line long enough to reach from the deck t
end of snorter when yard is crossed. When hauled on It
yard and pulls off lift and brace, and guides yard to decic'
Q. What is a timenoguy?
A. A piece of rope placed to support a bight of rig ,
prevent chafeon the main brace for instance.
Q. What are Irish pennants?
A. Rope yarns, or loose ends, hanging about the rigging' .41
KNOTTING AND SPLICING.
Q. What is marlinespike seamanship?
A. It comprises a knowledge of knotting, splicing,
etc.
Q. How can it best be learned?
A. It can only be learned by practice.
Q. What is meant by splicing?
A. Joining ropes together by uniting their strands.
Q. What is meant by seizing?
A. Binding two parts of a rope together with spull
marline.
Q. What kinds of seizings are there?
A. ROUND SEIZINGHas two layers of marline.
called "riders."
FLAT SEIZINGHas no riding turns.
THROAT SEIZINGSeizes one or two parts of a
gether that cross.
Q. What is worming a rope?
A. Filling up the divisions between the strands (el
lay) by passtng spun yarn along in it. Requires about
one-half timEs the length of rope.
Q. What is parcelling?
A. After a smooth surface has been obtained by 4f
strips of old canvas or sheeting are wrapped aroun
called parcelling. The edges overlap like shingles no 9
shed water. For wire rope use sheeting coated with ti
and linseed oil instead of tar.
SEAMANSHIP.
95
3
Figure-of-eight knot.
gi
:1
Bowline.
Running bowline.
Half hitch.
Two half Wein,.
96
Sling a cask,
Hogshead sling.
Sling a cask,head up.
Bale sling.
Parbucla
Li
SEAMANSHIP.
97
Timber hitch.
Round turn and
half hitch.
"titielLor ratline
Timber and half hitch.
Marling hitch.
Catspaw.
Shei 11 Shank.
98
Q. What is serving a rope?

A. After parcelling to keep water out, it is served
marline or spun yarn, by wrapping it in a complete it
around rope. This protects it from chafe and from the wea
and makes a neat finish.
"Worm and parcel with the lay;
Serve and marl the other way."
Q. What marlinespike work should every sailor be abIld
do? Give the uses and the order in which they sh11
learned.
A. KNOTS, ETC.Table No. 1.
I. Knot a rope yarn. For uniting rope yarns WI
large knot.
2. Overhand knot.
3. Figure-of-eight knot. To keep gear from LI
ing through block.
4. Reef or square knot. For tying reefpoints
bending ropes together.
5. Bowline knot. Various uses. Does not slip
6. Running bowline. A bowline made around
ing part.
7. Bowline on a bight. Used to sling a man olet
side.
8. Clap a jigger on a rope.
9. Stopper a rope. To hold it while it is beisg
layed.
so. Belay a boat-fall. So it can be safely lowered
out running.
IL Belay a rope to a cleat.
12. Half-hitch.
53. Clove hitch. Ratlines are hitched to shrotl
way.
14. Timber hitch. For towing spars.
55. Round turn and half hitch. Bending a line
anchor.
16. Blackwall hitch (also double). Securing h
bight of rope.
17. Cat's-paw. Used for same purpose as his
hitch.
18. Sheep shank. For shortening bight of a ro
19. Rolling hitch. For bending line to a spar.
not slip.
20. Marlinespike hitch. Used in heaving on
with spike.
21. Marling hitch. Used in marling down.
hammocks.
SEAMANSHIP.
99
22. Weaver's hitch. Used for net making.

23. Hitch end of a rope. For making neat ends to
ropes.
24. Hitch over a ring bolt. For covering ringbolts.

25. Sheet bend. For bending ropes together. Does
not jamb.
Double bend, or double sheet bend. Same purpose
2
as sheet bend.
7'
bend. Securing hawser to spar or
ring of anchor.
Studdingsail halliard bend. Securing halliards to
stunsail yard.
29. Carrick bend. For bending hawsers together.
(Also double carrick.)
30
Half hitch and seizing. For same purpose.
IL Reeving line bend. For bending two small hawsers
together.
s' Clinches, inside and outside. On hawsers and leechlines, etc.

Sanish windlass. For heaving two parts of a rope
together.
1V,Iouse a hook. To prevent it coming unhooked.
'ling a cask. (Head knocked out, on bilge, with
36. ,.can-hooks, etc.)
37. Ita parbuckle. Getting heavy weights aboard.
How make a net. For making jib net, splinter net,
or fish
0
Snaking. nets.
Binds two pieces of rigging together if
_ one is shot away.
ackling. Used to prevent chafe.
Midshipman's hitch. A back half hitch, much used
Sp,
on ship for stoppering ropes.
Ci
Ct ETC. Table No. 2.
I. 'D
E.Ye splice.
2.
splice.
3. Long
splice.
a three to a four-stranded rope.
Splice
g.(
Vice a rope around a thimble.
?Pike a small rope to a chain.
Flemish eye.
on. Grommet.
Cringle.
POINTINGS, ETC. Table No. 3.
2. ,1.
10und seizings.
hroat seizings.
100
Flat seizings.
Racking seizings.
Worm, parcel and serve a rope.
Spike serving.
Whip end of a rope.
Sailmakers' whipping.
Point a rope (make eye in end).
Turkshcad on a lope.
Turkshead in a rope.
12. Selvagee strap.
13. Common sennit.
14. Round sennit.
15. French sennit.
16. Square sennit.
17. Sword-mat.
18. Paunch-mat.
VARIOUS KNOTS AND SPLICES. Table No. 4.
i. Manrope knot.
2. Stopper knot.
3. Matthew Walker knot (double).
4. Diamond knot (also double).
5. Shroud knot.
6. Cut splice.
7. Horseshoe splice.
8. Lengthen rope with additional strand.
9. Shorten a rope similarly.
10. Sailmaker's splice.
it. Make a gasket.
12. Make a Jacob's ladder complete.
13. Cover grab rope with canvas.
With the veil,
NOTE.The above applies to rope.
use of wire it is necessary to be able to handle that 0;1,
This must be done at a bench and two men usual'
together.
Q. How would you splice an eye in a wire rope?
A. Allow more end than for a hemp rope. Stick
strand once under two strands; two-thirds under next,
and then one-third under next strand. This will ittal
taper. Set it up and stretch it well, beating yarns
place, then break off wires close to rope.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
io.
BLOCKS.
Q. What is a block?
A. A flat oval piece of wood containing one or more
Q. What are they usually made of?
11(
1(
I
10
A,
SEAMANSHIP.
101
Ash, elm,
I_
iron, or composition.
A, F..""v many parts to a block?
hieh tut,nr The shell, or outside; the sheave., or wheel, over
bild th,"e rope passes; the pin, or axle on which sheave
.
turns,
'kelt,'
strap enclosing the shell, by which block is secured.
shep are
either "made" or "orticed."
m
The m
made blockhas
Th
iorticed
',_eoroposed of several pieces pinned together.
e
he h lock has a shell all of one piece. In a common block
le
1i
the
sheave for the pin is lined with composition.
1 ea,e .
arein
, however, patent blocks in which the hole in the
0. is fitted
with rollers.
.
A..
at are the cheeks
of a block?
sides of the shell.
A.
as is the swallow?
Q
V? hole through which the rope reeves.
A:Tvhaat
are scores?
lew the grooves cut on the sides and one end of the block to
1Q lv,! strap to fit in and hold block securely.
A; il Hat
are the straps made of?
rap, Pe and iron. The thimble and hook is attached to the
QA.. that
is the
c'ek t is a small becket or grommet spliced into strap of
St. which the standing part of a fall sometimes makes
Q. R
A, A cn'v are blocks classed?
Ilrfoltrr(ling to number of sheaves; e. g., single, double.
Q. H, etc.
A,?,are blocks measured? What is a so-inch block?
'
e
of shell. A so-inch block has a shell so inches
Q. R
A, pr- do they vary?
Q. wi 4
Il A, H at is to 24 inches.
included under the general head of blocks?
Dhreeearrs, deadeyes, bullseyes, wooden thimbles, fairleaders,
allieter,' rollers, chocks, etc. These are measured by their
Q. wi
:iat are bees or
bee blocks?
eY illick Pieces of oak bolted on the sides of the bowsprit.
ast-st
ave
() ay heavy metal sheaves through which the foretop.c. vo, reeves
A, C.nat are (lie
the various peculiar blocks seen on shipboard?
threefold iron-strapped block for catanchor
h01(
1 BLocxA block having but one cheek. It is
ted to a mast or gaff, which forms other cheek.
n1W1
IlCt
4. Ti
102
CLUMP BLocKShort, thick, single block, metal she

Fore and main tack and sheet block.
DASHER BLOCKSmall block at end of spanker St
0
through which signal halliards for ensign
crows
EUPHROELong piece of wood through whichreeves.'
of awning is rove.
FIDDLE BLOCKA block with two sheaves, one above
other.
4'
FLY BLOCKDouble block. Upper block of topsail
liards.
1,0
GIN BLOCKMetal, single block, composition she
iS
or small.
GIRTLINE BLOCKSingle blocks through which girtl
or whips reeve.
JEER BLocKsLarge treble blocks through whiebe
falls reeve.
JEWEL BLOCKSSingle, at yard-arm for studdingsaii
liards.
vs A
QUARTER 13L0ms--Str.ong multiple blocks under q
of yards for clewlines and reeftackles.
v at
SHOE BLOCKS--A single piece of wood with shea r
right angles.
SISTER BL.pcmDouble, one sheave above the a
seized between.
SECRET BLOCKSBlock with swallow only large
to take rope. Will not foul easily, as nothing Oa
ch.
swallow.
SNATCH BLOCKSingle iron-strapped block with 0 se
a
hook. The strap can be opened or closed by .
clasp, thus allowing the bight of rope to be
TYE BLOCKSLarge gin blocks on topsail yards fa
to reeve.
TAIL BLOCKA block which has a long tail on st
securing it.
VIOL BLOCKA large block with swallow large eno
take a small hawser.
TOP BLocKsLarge single, iron-strapped blocks 11
under caps for top pendant. Used in sending
down topmasts.
Q. How are blocks now usually strapped?
A. Most blocks now have metal straps made into the
straps also.
Q. What general method is followed in strapping a le
A. A strap may be made either by splicing two ends 01 Si
together or by working a grommet of the proper length.
once and a half around the block will allow en(' for s
.4.117
SEAMANSHIP.
103
,s
ce,strand or rope through eye of hook, then fit to block and
work
thintvisLtolkock. grommet. Put seizing on strap between
Splice goes at breech of block. It is sometimes
ore best to worm, parcel, and cover strap with leather
securing in
place.
TACKLES.
IA%_at Is
a tackle?
easi robination of ropes and blocks for the purpose of
.
Power. They are used in hoisting heavy weights.
. A"
sr is the simplest kind of tackle?
s does
whip. A rope rove through a stationary block.
ves not increase power, as the block does not move.
w
oetter lead.
be,
Ilat block of a tackle should be hooked to the weight
0 .
of-ti,sslble, the block containing the greatest number oi
la Dow -"e rope, because each part of the rope will increase
gle ener If a tackle with a double block in one end and a
t th e M the other is used, the double block should always
r hWeight, as it has four parts of the rope while the
o Wha11.t three.
The ;is meant by the friction of a tackle?
opin of power that is lost by the resistance due to
Ii
etiDeuanissougnt
w many through the block.
principal tackles are there in general use?
hasee"--the runner, gun-tackle purchase, luff tackle, twofold
se, an I'd threefold purchase. Others are modifications of
d "they take their names from the purposes for which
f Dese
rthe each of these.
1_,ERA single movable block-and-fall, the fall has
thii"
Gulti:Illme in end for hooking purchase.
p 4cttLE PuucuAsETwo single blocks. The standing
of
- Par
art thefall being made fast to the block the hauling
ds from.
rieACKLE
ti
Double and single block, the standing part
Twov
'the fall being made fast to the single block.
pa113 PuucuAszTwo double blocks, the standim
,rIttcznrtebsefirnogn1made fast to the block that the hauling part
1
bioLe.k PURCHASE Or THREEFOLD PURCHASETWO treble

What
Sinai c,
Others are sometimes seen?
e Izoanish burton, double Spanish burton, Bells put-
104
chase, sometimes used for topsail halliards, and "luff

in which a luff tackle is bent to the hauling part of anothr
tackle.
Q. What various tackles are used on shipboard for Sr
purposes?
A. DECK TACKLES are heavy twofold purchases used ifl
ring ground tackle, mooring ship, and for other
work around decks.
PENDANT TACKLESHeavy twofold tackles 110014:c
lower pendants, used for setting up lower sho9ty
steadying masts if rigging slacks. Also used f01.
eral work about decks.
lIoi
YARD TACKLESAre used on the lower yards for
in stores, etc.
STAY TACKLESHook to collar of lower stay and a
hauling in and landing on deck articles hoisted
tackles.
Fisn FALLHeavy twofold or threefold purchas
fishing anchor and getting it on bow. Hook to '
link on shank of anchor.
TOP BURTONSHook to topmast pendants, and us.
setting up rigging, securing lower yards when VI
weights, and for other uses.
WATERWHIPSGun tackles used as yard tackles for
ing in moderate weights.
SAIL TACKLEA tackle (usually top burton) for 5
topsail aloft.
:
RELIEVING TACKLES
-Used IO assist or replace tlX11er
in steering. One block hooks to tiller, the ot
ship's side.
STOCK AND BILL TACKLESAre used on old-fa
ships for getting anchors on the bows.
THWARTSHIP TACKLESAny tackle leading athwarl5.1
so called. The tackles used on heads of boat .1 til
rigging out are so called.
JIGGERLight luff tackles used for miscellaneolUs
work.
HATCH TACKLEUsed at hatches for hoisting aning stores.
Boom TACKLEDouble purchase used on fore
vessels to guy boom out over the quarter.
FORE AND AFT TACKLEStretches out backbone
Mg.
JEER FALLSHeavy purchase for sending up all!
lower yards.
SEAMANSHIP.
gEP TACKLETackle
reefing.
"ATM
5
TACKLEA
I05
used in hauling up leech of sail in
common luff purchase, or jigger, for
Q. 0
lArriscellaneous use.
eat
is a winding pendant?
othn end of a pendant secures around topmast-head, and
',!.er reeves through eye of lizard secured to lower yardfl is thus taken on mast.
k
nat is a parbuckle?
)0 Lind c middle of a rope is made fast, and the ends taken
)1' tiled and underneath the object to be moved, which is then
p on skids.
,01A. AAat increase is caused by friction of the block?
eave";: about io per cent to weight to be lifted for every
$ cling!tie fall leads over; then divide by number of pails
,y Q.
Th atmoving block.
advantage has a patent block?
hoisteh friction rollers
make friction much less. Not good
WheavY weights because rollers might be crushed.
ma left is least affected by friction, manila or hemp rope?
5 II.
nlia. The stiffer the rope the greater effect has frico Wha ,
t is a thoroughfoot in a fall?
en a block gets capsized, thus crossing the parts of a
,1
What.is
.
altl. "fleeting a tackle."
.f
blocks get near together, the moving block is
to,
Wh, get a new nip. This is called fleeting the tackle.
ii Plet is "swigging off"?
"oth
e ng at right angles on the bight of a rope that is fast
I. 11, Nits.
?"hat is the
standing part, hauling part, and bight of a
The
5 the
en s
part is the end made fast. The hauling part
a Dart tanding
taken hold of to haul. The bight is the middle, or
liowetween the standing and hauling parts.
kar reeve off one rope by using another?
Yar'Y ends of the two ropes by laying three yarns of
one i nt the lay of ropes. Haul on old rope and reeve
thiarin,:lsniVe. Braces and other gear are generally rove
i i 110A,
ROPE.
' Pour.11,
.
1anY varieties of rope are used in the Navy?
elnp "en113, manila, hide and wire. Hemp made of fibre
'
ant; manila from fibre of wild banana; hide from
106
strips of green hide; wire from iron or steel wire with

of hemp.
Q. Where is rope for the Navy made?
A. At the Government Rope Walk, Navy Yard, Bo
Mass.
Q. What are the qualities of hemp rope?
A. It is strong and durable, but not so pliable as
Hemp is obtained from Russia, Philippines and America'
best comes from Philippines. American hemp is used for
line and hand-spun cordage. Ordinary hemp ropes are
color, being tarred to preserve them. Untarred hernP
called "white rope," or whiteline, and is used for lead al/
lines. Hemp is used for sheets, bolt ropes, and standi.
ging.
Q. What is manila rope used for?
A. Hawsers and running gear. It is lighter than her
pliable, and does not require tar to preserve it. Large
hawsers are tarred.
Q. What is hide rope used for?
A. Chiefly for wheel ropes; but now these are gelera
pliable wire.
Q. What is wire rope used for?
A. For nearly all purposes where strength and light
et
requisite. All standing rigging, block straps, hawsers'
Q. What is small stuff?
A. A term applied to small rope, and is specified bY
of yarns.
Q. What is spunyarn?
A. It is made of "long tow" of hemp, twisted UI
and tarred and rubbed to keep it from opening. Threads
right handed and laid up left handed. It is known as
three yarn spunyarn.
Q. What is seizing stuff?
A. Hambroline, houseline, marline, 4. 6, 9 or 12 thr
ing stuff. These are different in having two or three
and being right or left handed.
Q. How is small stuff measured?
5
A. All except ratline stuff by the pound. Ratline
the fathom.
Q. What is junk and for what used?
A. Pieces of condemned rigging, old rope. etc. If 11
and picked to pieces it makes oakum used for caulking
Q. How is a rope formed?
0
A. It is formed of strands, which in turn are formed
yarns.
SEAMANSHIP.
Q
A.
' What
107
is a rope-yarn?
illk_Inres of hemp or manila twisted up right handed. It
A..kn about Ioo
.)r
lbs.
hat is a strand?
3
c
ombination of rope-yarns laid up right handed.
Ilyhat is a plain laid rope?
a Pe. nrce strands laid, or twisted, up forming a right-handed
1. Q. w
Thhat is a cable laid rope?
a Ine ree plain laid ropes are taken and laid up left handed.
Lrand.
r
w
s,11 A. hat Is a four-stranded rope?

Q. 1,,?.nr strands laid up right handed with heart in center.
A. .A":111at is the
heart?
e,seps rrssmall soft pliable rope, one-third the size of strand.
wi,Pe in proper shape. .
A. A Vat is a back-handed rope?
Q
cre,p
. Acafbtieh.anded rope. Strands are of same twist as
Yarns
.0 A. 1,,,hat is tapered rope?
hate Part that bears the strain is large, and tapers 'down
Q.
which is light and pliable.
rt
hat is bolt rope?
et Y
rope used for going around edge of sails or awnings.
Q. 1../ow
e
It h s wire rope made up?
h st as six strands to a rope and eighteen wires to a strand.
rt Fra,11.d has a hemp heart and the rope itself has a hemp
gives it pliability. It is right handed.
st
IN: Measure the size of a rope?
nu. its circumference in inches. Length measured in
oW,
Pro uoes the cordage of men-of-war vary?
e
v/2 inches to 19-inch hawsers in very large vessels.
lArc'hw are hawsers stowed?
.Possible on reels. Should not be in holds if pos40",id They are in lengths of Izo fathoms.
w Is a new rope received from rope-walk?
e, .ra coil of from
so to 150 fathoms, depending on size of
Coiled auncoil it, the end should be taken through the coil
011
down against its lay, to get the turns out.
should a rope be coiled down?
tied; :handed rope, with the sun from left to right. Lefti 0 d imst the sun, except hemp hawsers, which are always
"ers with the sun.
'Aiv
to8
Q. What should always be done with running rigging

wet weather?
s
A. It should all be slacked up, because the rope shrinks'
wet, and the rigging will get so taut that it will spring or
something away.
Q. How is standing rigging protected against the sveatcb
A. If of hemp it should be covered with a coating of bla
made of tar oil and coal tar. .Wire rigging is galvanis
it is wormed, parcelled, and served and blackened from r
end as a protection against wear and tear. If ever usead
not galvanized it is protected by a mixture of red lea
boiled linseed oil.
Q. What is done before stowing ropes or hawsers bri
A. They are thoroughly dried to prevent rot and mila
e
COMPASS.
Q. What is a compass?
A. The instrument by which a ship is steered on _
course. Briefly, it is a magnetic needle, so fitted as
easily on a pivot, and therefore assumes a position Poi
magnetic North. The needle is attached to a comPass
which is circular and graduated so that any course
steered. As a matter of fact there are usually four bun
needles, contained in small cylinders attached to the
card, pointing North and South.
Q. Does the North point of the compass always P01
North?
A. No. The influence of the iron in the ship causes
tion," but this is nearly all compensated by the OA
which are carefully placed, and which therefore shoulu
be moved except by the officer having charge of the NO
This deviation is found by observing the sun, and the
by compass is corrected.
Q. What besides the iron of ship often changes coin
A. The men at wheel having a knife in the pocket, Or
grommet in their cap. This is very dangerous, as iltag
times throws the compass out a point or more, ans,
not constant or noticeable, it cannot be discovered. u' 78
the effect would be that when the ship was heading saYht II
east by compass, owing to this unknown error she mig" lir
be heading North and standing right onto a reef or sho
small piece of iron around the compass, especially Whe
able, is therefore to be carefully avoided.
Q. How is the compass card graduated?
A. There are two graduations. One by points and
109
SEAMANSHIP.
itints;
roe, and the other by degrees. There are 32 points in the
and 360 degrees; therefore one point is equal to eleven
coquarter degrees. The North and South points of the
d therresPond with the North and South ends of the needle,
p, graduation starts from these points going each way to
-"st arid West points, e. g., N. 50 E., N. 25 W., S. 56 E.,
10
r. i
t/
.ai
11
COMPASS.
f 78 1,.
w c
40'3111 the' oimilarly the half and quarter-points are reckoned
Whole point towards the East and West (except
&ill )(1'4etigElixtsprincipal points), thus you would say ESE.
A'TIZw are the Points of the compass named? . ._.....
Principal or cardinal points are North, South, Er
no
ir'
I 1 9e 4
and West. Half-way between these are the semi-cardin
These
Northeast, Southeast, Northwest and Southwest.
waY 0
are called the eight principal points. The point half- th
1, a
combines
nal
points
semi-cardi
tween the cardinal and
names, thus the point half-way between North and
is North-Northeast, West-Southwest is half-way betWee e C
and Southwest, etc. Points on each side of a princifal
1)Y f
begin with the name of that point, inserts the word
so 41
end with the name of the next cardinal point in that(1rec
e. g., North by East, Northeast by North, West .1:11 t
Northwest by West. Thus the names of the points in a 4 4
C
2 of the circle):
1
/
rant(
ixigst, A
v'
NORTHWEST BY
NORTH,
Q
WEST-NORTHWEST
NORTH BY WEST,
A
NORTH-NORTHWEST,
NORTHWEST BY NORTH,
NORTHWEST,
WEST BY NORTH,
WEST.
)jr
ey
Q. How are quarter-points named?

11
A. Except adjacent to the principal points, always to041Qid 4.
'
rec
are
they
#
points
principal
to
East or West. Adjacent
e
towards the nearest cardinal point. For example, Y110-o61
2 North, but as
1
North, or West /
say Northwest
.
you get one point airay from a principal point each P 0aCtii '
point must be reckoned towards East or West, e. lg., /c
119/aci
2 N. There Is co
1
2 W, and not NW. by N./
1
say WNW./
A.
k
point. Therefore the points of this quadrant are nar
We tri. 13(
Northwest.
Northwest.
.
North
North.
W.1" V :/4111
2 W.
1
2 W. NW./
1
NNW./
2 W.
1
N./
WI` V
2W.
1
2 W. NW./
1
NNW./
N. i/:, W.
V '"l'
NNW. Y4 W. NW.
N.44 W.
West 1 tk:
NW. by W.
NW by N.
N. by W.
t I Y)
2 W. We,
1
NW. by W./
2 W. NW. N.
1
N. by W./
till:
We:
W.
2
1
/
W.
by
NW.
N.
2
1
/
NW.
W.
2
1
/
N. by W.
NW.by W. W. We
2 N.
1
N. by W. W. NW./
. ,,
Q. What is the calling off the points of a compass?
A. Boxing the compass.
'N
tii
Q. How is the compass made?
A. The compass card rests on a metallic float which; c
the magnetic needles, and floats in a receptacle fill
( I
alt
liquid of 55 per cent pure water and 45 per cent .g k
wel0
it
that
balanced
so
It
is
keep it from freezing.
g"t
b,1a
few grains in the liquid. It is pivoted on jeweled beat'
s'
run
inside
supports it and reduced friction. On the
card chamber is a vertical line, which shows the Pore
94 w.
4
3
/
WI,
SEAMANSHIP.
III
of
.et Lie ship. This is called the lubber's point, and, in
ith
this line is made to coincide as nearly as possible
aYiohue given course. U. S. compasses are made by Ritchie &
Q. /.7ston, Mass.
rtl;\ A. .p,/,A1 many points are there in a quadrant?
Q. ritst.
g
Om, many in a half-quadrant?
reel 1,
$0 Threee.many points is it from NE. to N. by E.?
3 4"
A. p Ow many points from ENE. to ESE.?
Q. liour.
;T. A. Dc'w many from NE. by E. to SE. by S.?
A. i''w many from NW. by N. to S. by W.?

'ats
ve (It is twelve points from S. to NW., and as the
!Ir ar,?.lverl are each one point to the right of these points,
Ato.rts- twelve points apart.)
to r3
t Questions like this should be continued until perfect
is attained. There is no better method.
ec
Os'mvv many points can a ship sail?
olvtadil
.ally a square-rigged ship will sail within six points of
O e
ct "`
, many points are required for tacking?
3 4
. Tt.
w
o Q. if"Tve, ion each side.
41 0a",.!hip heads North on starboard tack, how would she
. Thevurtf
wind would be from ENE., hence she would head SE.
ort Lark
If a ,
)
,v1, snil) is heading NE. and has the wind on starboard
Nr
a_,t.ls direction of wind?
tN
u is from the southeast.
t bY
bY Stx11)se she tacked, how would she head?
Points to the right of SE., which is SSW.
tbY
iat.ts meant by the "bearing" of anything?
bY
its direction from the ship. There are two kinds.
,.ss bearing," which is the direction by compass, and
reC,1)
i\rfoorrt"
le`xlvaernp
bce,
aring," which is the bearing referred to the
if the ship was heading North, a light bearlled :least would be "broad off the starboard bow,' which
tic
to,tItasst.
;we relative bearing, while its compass bearing would
ghs te,. are relative bearings named?
jog staennit _ ahead, is dead ahead; one point on bow (port
ito bow,c)aril), two points on bow; three points on bow, broad
e points forward of the beans; two points forward
tico
112
01ni
:i
,-///
t
d
0
Q
A
a9
,
/
Q
t;-,/
A,
E,
/
/
*/
/
4'
01
Q
0/
,...,
/ ..9,
A,
/q/
z/ ,//
0/_.!/ ...,?./
,,,,,
Q
,
0/ / ,sv.v
rs A.
, 4/
0/ Q,
0/
`../'
/ "/1 ,/%
A.
,,/ // ,p, 4..c,1-`2x ,th
i c.4'.' o -/ Q.
I // 0/ ..e.....A.
0,
,.,C) --...
'>
THE BEARINGS
ON THE PORT SIDE
ARE DESIGNATED
0
,
...."
S,..
.
1111
t, ......
A.
T
,901
,---.....
IN THE SAME WAY.
_
-- -- _
ert
'
II o
ON_STAIV,
.
1 POiNr A
:::-.....----
*-------"--z-Z,SAFT
\ \,,p0 ',,...
\0 A
\\1( C
\
\14
1'
-,,,,
C.,
ad
oni
Q.
'
j
,
A.
-....,,
\. e., ..,,sr
ce
...,
o
.
9
\
\
'4
\''''\'?
4;
\ \.. \..
Ova
/..
I
1Z'c',
\,04,
V' \
\
\\-
\q,4,
t
\co,
\.,..
SEAMANSHIP.
113
the
d th'eani, one point forward of the beam; abeam, one, two
o a ree Points abaft the beam, broad off the quarter, three,
Q.
one point on the quarter. Astern.
A. tv many points from ahead to abeam?
Q Ight.
Pr
p tri ahead to the bow?
Q.
A. enn how to quarter?
Q
A: rrTri
0 tswelve.ahead to the quarter?
.e.rnt
ahead to right astern?
Q. v
teen.
A. it .
11at is a binnacle?
ss a,,ls the wooden or composition case that holds the com, n era`;,eorrectors. It is supplied with lamps, and a cover
1.1 ease.
A. APv would
boats steer at sea out of sight of land?
boats at sea are supplied with small portable boat
the
Ilipias:es.
If adrift this compass would be used to steer by
Q. ene manner
that ships use them.
A.4oes
t v, d
a compass act?
e swit,rig Pivoted on a fine point, the motion of the ship when
erth -gs does not affect it,
but it remains pointing to the
41W hile the ship, and hence
the binnacle, lubber'l point,
Vitlg. swing around it and makes it appear as if it were
ad ea Thus as long as it
points to the North, the ship's
bY the graduated card, be placed at any desired angle
h, or on any desired "course."
e t vvo
A en?
mg around compasses what precautions should
ie Never
, earof niern
tanivoe the correctors for a minute. Never carry any
n your person while the ship is under way if
le
near
k able . the compass. When the ship is under way large
shotitlieFes.of metal in the vicinity such as guns, davits,
ne in position.
QA
THE LOG.
.t.W is th
116 ,ither
e speed of a ship through the water found?
vVhat ..,13Y means of a patent, or chip, log.
The "nes the chip log consist of?
.g line, the reel on which it is wound, the chip which
teveigh,.Led
n r, the n its lower side to make it sit upright in the
nds -1,ng glass of 28 seconds, and the short glass of 14
athe line is
attached to the chip by a bridle, two legs
'e secured to the third by a plug and socket.
114
Q.. What is the log line.?

0
A. Small "white line" about iso fathoms long. It is
into distances, called knots, which are subdivided into te 11
of a knot. The distances on the line called knots are the set 11
portion of a sea knot, as 28 seconds is of an hour. Therh t
every knot that runs out while the sand is running throug,0
28 second glass represents so many real knots per hour art
made by the ship.
tie
Q. What is the length of a knot on a log line?
A. 47 feet and 4 inches.
e
Q. How is a log line marked?
11
A. Always soak the line in water several days to get tla
;I.
out and to make it shrink, as when it is used it is alvra.315
At 15 or 20 fathoms from the chip, mark the "stray 11510 fl
a piece of red bunting. From this measure (usually by 13..v e
on deck between carefully measured tackheads) 47 feet 4 1p, e4
and place a piece of fish line with one knot in it. The rehi c
ing knots at intervals of 47 feet 4 inches are marked._-
A
line with two, three, four, etc., knots in them. Each
between the knots is then divided into five equal pat `1
marked by a piece of white line, which therefore mark eve'i e
tenths of a knot.
'
tath
What is the stray line?
1141rr
A. The line between the chip and the red rag. It is 3 Wh i
to run out so that the chip will be well clear of the
the ship and the line will be running out regularly befcPa c
measuring begins.
4A
Q. What are time glasses, and why used?
A. They are glasses partly filled with sand, and with 3 e
a(I
on each end. The long glass requires 28 seconds for th. Q
to run from one end to another; the short glass requt A
seconds. As the line is divided into divisions that
het
same part of a seaknot as 28 seconds is of an hour,
is hove overboard and does not drag, the line which rgl'othe
while the sand is running through the long glass vel '84,
represent the speed being actually made at that tinieit
glasses are used because they are more convenient a n
liable to error than a watch. If the short glass is t15, X:
reading of the log line must be doubled. It is used g't or b
for speeds of more than five or six knots, to avoid 111 tich,
out a large quantity of line.
Q.
Q. If using the 14-second glass, 4 knots and 2 piece A
line are out, how fast is the ship going?
orq
A. Eight and eight-tenths knots.
Q. How is the log hove?
A. Two of the "afterguards"hold the reel and one he'I
Q.
SEAMANSHIP.
115
glass, getting all sand in one end. The quartermaster

"Plug and fits it securely in its socket, gathers a small
1th ,,the line in his hand, sings out "Clear glass:" The man
s
u'e glass replies (if all sand is in one bulb), "Clear glass."
ref qltrtermaster
sings out "Stand by," and throws the chip
se" Over the lee quarter clear of everything. The chip
,tie line
when the red rag passes the rail he sings
'free iurn." and
The glass holder repeats this and at the same
li turnso, glass until it is vertical, the sand end being on top.
's it in this position until just as the sand in upper bulb
hrn,I1 through when he calls "Up." The quartermaster
Pt th oi'ds the line and notes the mark nearest the taffrail.
'
ng glass was used this gives the speed, otherwise it
1e kl(; e,doubled. The quartermaster then gives the line a
il'
ler egieprulling out the plug, so chip drags along the surface
instead of vertically against it. The reel-holders
vineel in the line and secure reel. Care must be taken in
%tag. the log, not to make the chip unreel the line, as this
Q. \al to "drag it home," and will not show the real speed.
ts
Ost is the patent log?
!,11 e rev Its an instrument that registers by hands like a clock
atta Intions of a small propeller called the "fly." The fly
thorne'ed to the register by a closely woven line of about wo
all Ns, I,cngth. As the fly is dragged through the water it
thaKing the line turn and transferring motion to the dial,
1011t11
Q, wills registers the actual distance run.
alNt +flat is the difference in the measurements of chip and
TbiogS?
'
Dat: ChiP gives the speed being made at that moment.
ings.ut lug gives the actual distance covered between two
Qat are some of its troubles?
0st Patent logs have a certain error, but after this is
tlIC ce(
frèrrnined it should give no more trouble if kept oiled.
3d often gets fouled by catching a piece of seaweed or
A 11 e '
11
;,
ift,ing substance. It is frequently carried away by
ail Ines -eKing, and when there is any probability of stopping
is 11,-It should be hauled in.
at is the
current log?
n,/?Oat Zordinary log hove in the ordinary way from a ship
It is used to measure the speed and direc,. U)he anchor
.
currents.
*
It
Is the ground log?
'
1111(1 's a
for determining the ship's speed over the
)3
. The log
logs above give the speed through the water
Y attaching
a lead to a log line instead of a chip, and
lc%
rite.
116
.c
heaving it in the usual way with a time glass, the actual
over the ground is determined. Care must be taken t55 tt
stray line long enough to reach bottom before the gla Q.
A.
turned.
81
THE LEAD AND SOUNDING MACHINE.
Q. What is a lead line?
Et
A. A line with a leaden weight attached, used to 4nd
depth of water.
Q. What is finding the depth of water called?
A. Sounding.
? e
.
Q. Tadow are soundings obtained on board men-of-vvat.
A
o A
A. By using the hand lead, the deep-sea (pronounced O. r
lead, or by the use of the sounding machine.
ay
Q. Irow is the hand lead line marked and fitted?Id,
to
A. The lead weighs from 7 to 14 lbs. and is secured
c,
line by a piece of strong leather. The line is well soale.e e
fore marking, as was the case with the log line. It'
55 q
carefully measured and marked as follows: 2 fathoms, 2 It(
of leather; 3 fathoms, 3 strips of leather; 5 fathoms, a whit. e
7 fathoms, a red rag; to fathoms, leather with a hole in eit
same as 3; 15, same as 5; 17, same as 7; 20, with 2 k110 ttc
fishline; 25, I knot. These are marks. Depths not la Q.
are called deeps. A toggle is sometimes placed at 2 fa A.
for use of leadsman, in heaving lead over head.,.101
Q. How are soundings taken from a vessel under W0'
how reported?
, 11A. The leadsman gives the lead a swing in order to t.o
., ti
ahead so that the lead will be on the bottom by the tiwo Q.
line gets up and down. Of course the deeper the water, A.
faster the ship is going, the further it is necessary to he 10
ahead. After heaving it out ahead, the line must be,e
hauled in, so that it will not be hanging in a bight w,t 10r
leadsman gets over the lead. It is most important t A
line be taut at that time as the depth is read off then. j4
the lead is on the bottom and the line is up and down OS( in
man looks at the mark nearest the surface of the via'4, 111
calls out in a.voice loud enough to reach the bridge, the
ing obtained. Marks are called out "By the mark. th re r
seven," etc. Even fathoms without marks are called.
deep, four, eight," etc. Fractions are called by placng
before the whole number, as "And an quarter eight,"!at t?'
81
/
4 fathoms. "A quarter less eight," meaning 7Ys 'a
Lead lines should be carefully measured wet each t
ship goes to sea. The reports should be made in a sha
SEAMANSI1IP.
117
fee
'thedrawl is no longer allowed. If no bottom is obitied, tliat
r, at sreport
__,,, is as important as the others. Report,"No
eveII etc.
What is the
deep-sea lead.
gly h is a lead of from 30 to mo lbs., with a line correspondot eavY It is marked at every 5. fathoms; 2 knots 20, I
Q. A; 3
knots 30, etc.
1 A.
is a sounding taken by the deep-sea lead?
+ue
le
N ward
ad iss taken to the forecastle, and the line passed
1ritnhe
7, inen _a
side outside of and clear of everything.
of
r . ge themselves along the side each with asmall
and
lead".elinelead
in his hand. The line is bent to the
thr is armed" with tallow, the engine is stopped, or the
r wayw,n up into the wind, and when she has nearly lost
ves rkle captain of forecastle calls "Watch-ho, watch," and
e lead over well clear. Each man along the side
s11
, ,r,(3 the line until he feels the weight of the lead, when
gin Watch ho,
and lets go the bight, etc. No
the ist let go of thewatch,"
line until he actually feels the weight
e lte./li ead, as otherwise it would not be possible to tell when
s ;was reached. The man who obtains bottom while the
a ea '
earn ;his hands reads it off as in a hand lead. The line is
a light snatch-block and hauled in and the
It'll Q. 111
WhnrIet.edd taorld recorded.
/1. Y is a lead "armed," and how is it done?
'e for ..ere
.s a hollow in the lower end of every lead which,
e, is filled level full of tallow. When the lead sinks,
aorlst strikes the bottom, particles of which adhere
tt
sa "hg, and when the lead is hauled up, it brings an
olc "alN
rilp.le of the
bottom.
Thew,is a lead line read at night?
le this leadsman reads the mark in his hand, then subtracts
le Q.
reading the distance from his hand to the water.
e tar is the object in whirling the lead overthe head
In ing a sounding?
rierder to heave
the lead further forward so that a soundmee
1 ispwater or at a fast speed may be obtained. This
is oba"IY obtained by practice and in no other way.- One
strairrsi7ved by the best leadsmen. viz.: Always keep the
t from the shoulder, in line with the lead. In othei
ning the not necessary or desirable to bend your elbow in
i ew east
$
sounding done under service conditions at presiiii
Ord.
-artarily
by the hand lead when in shallow water. When
eali3
11
coasting or in deep water the Sir William Thompson 5
machine is used.
Q Why is this better than the deep-sea lead?
A. It can be used without stopping or slowing the shiP'
is more convenient.
Q. Describe this sounding machine briefly.
A. A wooden case bolted to deck aft carries a drool,I,
upon which are wound several hundred fathoms of evi
.ao
piano wire. This reel is controlled by a brake, and 1$ 05
loosel
way
by a crank handle. Turning the handle one
brake and the reel unwinds, letting the sinker which is a.to`g
to the end of the wire descend to the bottom. Turril mm
crank the other way puts on the brake, stops the reel ti
unwinding, and then by casting off a hinged clamp
ttl e 1
the frame of reel, the continued turning of the crankthe
tI
frame and reel and winds in the wire. Attached to
the wire is a metal cylinder, and beyond that, and c1`si
a1
with it by a short length of plaited rope is a heavY
The rope carrying this sinker is attached to a link
ak
permanently attached to the end of the wire. TI-em t
cylinder carries a slender tube of glass, closed at one
coated on the inside with a chemical substance which c; altel
color on being touched by sea water. It is placed in th 2
41;
cylinder with open end down; as the tube descends the vio rta'
forced up into the tube more and more the further
goes, and the height the water rises in the glass is sk talc
the discolored tube. On winding in the wire the tube 1,5 .itat
and placed on a graduated scale, and the depth read ott ort
the tube is discolored. A substitute for the tube with c
recerl
composition, which can only be used once, has
adopted which is to have tubes with inside surface..c re I
This similarly shows a sharply defined line where t
el
reached. Instead of the tubes there is also a depth rec
a
against
piston
a
on
which tits water pressure acts
both of which are enclosed in a composition cylinder,
distance the spring is compressed is indicated by
This is generally accurate, but not so reliable as the tau
main precaution to be taken is that after each time it,
the ntit on top should be slacked up and the valve ope,
any water in the top of the recorder be removed belo"
again.
Q. How take a sounding with a sounding machine?
A. At least two men are required. The quarternt
one in charge, sees everything in order, the lead ar
di
tube or recorder in and in order, ships the handles, etc.;
le
fair
is swung over the stern, being led through the
SEAMANSHIP.
119
kat The catch being on the

arm, the brakeman SFeS the
Ids it
Pr of the dial at zero,
takes the brass finger pin, and
LIY pressed against wire, waits for orders
to make
ow4it On the order
being given he heaves back'the handle,
the Weight
of
die th lAs soon as- hethe sinker to cause the reel to pay out
feels the wire slacken he quickly turns
e opposite way, putting
on brakes. Then raises the
C)
,
r1 the arm
./0
is 'jai/trail to and heaves in the wire. The leadsman goes
receive the sinker and get it aboard. he
measured
What
tta
iat precautions for depth and the arming examined.
are necessary?
l dra'
tihne, swuhrefancet,he ship has much way, the
1 ie.in
fleaving
along
and if care is not exerted it will
uld k the stern of ship just
as it leaves the water. (2) Care
r a'e taken
that the wire is not run out to the bitter end.
the
,
t.
r
eason the brakeman should begin to put on brakes
pne_, Lune
the
51 (1 before dial shows 250 fathoms, so that it will be
Rht ,r not. the 300 fathoms is reached, whether bottom is
(3) The wire will break at a kink under a very
e It" or jerk.
Without a kink it is almost impossible to
liii:
11,i ;vire in use. Wire will never kink so
long as it is
is is the
t4e
measure of a good leadsman. When the
e ake ittsen, es the
bottom it will
for an insant, but if the
kage; 12
,.1ntediately applied it slack
will tauten out without doing
I
4441
*
it
it
is
not immediately applied the wire is nearly
0 talcenL
Nie atbreak
and the lead will be lost. Whenever a cast
arlY speed less than five knots, it is advisable to
0 the brake so as
to moderate the speed of the wire
son14, according
to judgment, letting the reel run around
JY. 4
C)
:
like three turns per second.
It i;'` is, a drift lead?
e is any
a lead which is used when a ship is at
anchor and
exit, etc danger of dragging,
as in a fresh breeze, strong
40
i,
\v is it used?
tOIto- a heavy
lead of from 25 to 5o lbs. It is placed on
"le shP1, with
considerable slack line and a man to attend it.
thelPi. drags, the lead remaining fast on
the bottom will
Wh19.e to tauten.
js":1 1S the
breastband?
the i'me band, sometimes in the form of an apron,
against
A. 110w'eadsman
in the chains leans when taking a
4fter w"id a good leadsman heave a hand lead?sounding.
u, let ,..s winging it over
his head to get good speed he
"ard opot.of the toggle with
a jerk, just as the lead comes
'his feet before it rises. It would be
hove so the
120
lead as it shoots forward would not rise above theleadsel

body. The line should be paid out to it in its flight 35
strain comes on it, and the whole coil should not peces's
be let go. An accurate sounding can never be obtained if A
coil of line is let go, as it cannot be hauled in in time.
Q. When are leadsmen sent in the chains?
A. When approaching land or shoals.
If
THE HELMSTEERING.
Q. What is the helm?
14hf Q
A. The general name given to the mechanism by
ship is steered. It includes the rudder, tiller, wheel rcPes,c,' 'e]
wheel. In old ships the wheel ropes were connected die'vk
through necessary blocks, etc., to the end of the tiller, atteliff
men at wheel were the real force that moved the ruddel i t
however, the man at the wheel only opens, by meal's th
ge n
wheel ropes, the valve of the steering engine, and, by'
the engine causes the tiller and hence the rudder to 1106
.4
at the same time closes the valve. The general metilv
steering is unchanged, and so far as the terms used in stet l
er
old vessels apply to steamers, they are all retained.
Q. What is the rudder?
Lif
A. It is a long peculiar-shaped piece of material, now
Adet 101
built of steel, which is attached or swung to the ruu
j
11.
by means of pintles (or bolts) on the forward siuio ge;
rudder which ship in gudgeons (braces with an eye i jo
secured to the after side of the rudder post. The pi
on the upper and forward part of the rudder enters the t
through a stuffing box, and this prolongation is called le ).
attachl .
der head. To this head the tiller, or yoke, is prolongal
lower end of the rudder rests on the shoe, or
the keel, which sustains the weight in some cases, renal thl
pintles and gudgeons.
Q. What is a "jury" rudder?
re ersh
A. A jury rudder is one rigged up aboard ship to ig
temporarily the regular rudder which may have beconle t' I
viceable. This was possible on old sailing ships, but wit id
modern ships it would hardly be possible. Sometimesitbeler
is steered by trailing a long hawser astern with tack e5 I
eat,
fast to it leading to each quarter.
Q. What is the tiller?

forwarti
to the
A. It is a large timber, or bar of metal, secured
I
head, and by the use of tackles attached to its
rudder is moved from side to side. Tillers are placed 0ele is
modern ships, but they are mainly for preventer use,
SEAMANSHIP.
121
10 tiro States Naval Service uses the differential screws almost
53 bye OW
is the usual differential screw connected so as to

rudder?
ddjhe large screw is turned by the steering engine. On the
t ionhead is a heavy yoke with arms about three to four
llarci.g.
each end of the yoke rods run forward and
to From
a large nut which works along the screw. Onescrew is left-handed and the other half right-handed,
er tys turned one way the nuts approach, and if turned the
.11
y recede. As the rods to the yoke are attached, each
.tr ui these nuts, it causes the rudder to turn.
15' e w does the helmsman on the forward bridge cause the
ir
engine to move?
whee vvheel on the forward bridge is connected by gearing
eriti el ropes (very flexible wire ropes) to a drum in the
O
the eUgme-room. This drum is connected to the valve
Ca
theeriglue When the wheel is turned in the desired directe, alove valve is opened
and the engine turns and the rudder
in (1,
, over. This motion closes the valve so the rudder
te Is "'at
position until the wheel is turned again.
reo there more than one place where the ship can be
e ?nips can usually be steered from four or five places,
shot away there are other wheels available. In
,th
iDsee ability of the ship to steer is of prime importance.
, th usually steer by steam from each bridge, the conning
superstructure aft, and the steering engine-P00111.
th Without the use of the steering engine) from the after
tile
e superstructure.
rinprtroorn?
w Would you steer the ship if you were at the wheel in
rillwense i iron
would make the compass below decks quite
therefore
it would not be used; but the officer of the
he xn,(1'bY using the steering telegraph, keep me informed
rs. --anted the helm, and I would move the wheel to obey
ne ' If tt
Wit
yo"e
de5
lie
de
oil
se,
officer of the deck signalled to degrees aport, how

er w" move your wheel and how would you know when the
I \vans ,10 degrees aport?
ator lUd move my wheel over to starboard until the helm
lArhas,"wed it was to degrees aport.
Itisdo
,... you mean by putting the helm aport?
3,heada"vIng the apparatus for steering the ship so the
Poi,,Pes to starboard. When the helm is aport, the
"ng to port (looking forward). This same method
I22
115
is carried out in all cases; for example; lee helm
tiller is pointing to leeward; weather helm, pointing tqle
ward. Similarly, put the helm up, means point the t"
windward; down, to leeward, etc.
Q. How do you move the wheel in steering?
A. In all our men-of-war the head of the ship goes"
wheel.
Q. If you are ordered to put helm astarboard., how
you move it?
I, It
the
A. As a starboard helm throws her head to port
goes to port.
Q. What is meant by conning a ship?
A
A. The act of giving various orders to the helms
enable him to keep the ship on the desired course. At r14
Q. Who usually conns the ship coming into port?
A. The chief quartermaster, who gets his orders fro
captain, the pilot, the navigator, or other officer well acclo riA
with the waters. At sea the steering is usually on a
and the actual conning is done by the quartermaster,
watch, who cautions the helmsman concerning his stServi A
modern ships the captain, navigator, or pilot may De #1
conn the ship as they give orders directly to the hela15 e
al/
coming into port.
Q. What is meant by the ship's "course" when it
to the man at wheel?
A. It is the point of the compass at which the sill A.
is to be kept for a certain period.
_t
Q. What is meant by steering a vessel?
any
on
A. Steering is the guiding of a vessel
course.
A.
Q. In steering a vessel what part of the vessel 111ve5
the course is suddenly changed?
A. The stern. When the rudder is put over the
Is
on its surface, pushing the stern around. This'
portant to remember when trying to get away from
alongside a dock.
Q. What is meant by "Helm amidships"?
A. Putting the rudder so it is in a fore and aft line
ship's keel.
Q. Do you know when the helm is amidships?
A. In old ships with wheel ropes, get the same n
turns on forward and after part of barrel, and then se,.
spoke vertical. The helm is then amidships. New 5
helm indicators which show the position of rudder..
indicator nearly amidships, get midship spoke very
fore. Helm is then amidships.
123
SEAMANSHIP.
Q.
115 heftl r,
r1othe old ships, what part of the barrel carries starboard
ille
forward part The after part carries the port wheel
De.
11
can you tell on an old ship how the helm is?

e for helm is to starboard the turns of wheel rope wind on
eates4ward part and unwind from after part. Hence if the
arboa
'Analnber of turns are on the forward part, the helm is
I isr`,!. If the greatest number are on aft part of barrel,
Irea
Port. In modern ships this information is always
Q. b. ò
the helm indicators.
A. 1W
t bat is meant
by two turns starboard helm?
aleans that from amidships the wheel has been
. turned
rwarPlete turns to port. Hence two extra turns will be on
ro Q. 117,Part of
barrel.
A, i'tnat do you mean by the weather side of a ship?
tikes.",,side towards the wind, or on which the wind first
lee side is the side away from the wind.
o
meant by weather wheel? Lee wheel?
-0.at ti essels where hand power is used, two or more men
vireLL
'
Arhael The one stationed on the weather side has
at Ci.,`"er wheel" and the others the "lee wheel." The
is
,Nylker.weather wheel is responsible for the steering; the
WA. Wh straPly assists in putting helm over.
isat tS a "trick" at the wheel?
Leh
the regular turn of a helmsman at the wheel; his
Wheel.
a Q
anix7hat
yes A. liga? are the terms used in conning a sailing ship, with
,lt
9. wh.,',11F
AoRvnerAts
oTARBoARD--Move
wheel so helm is placed as far

starboard as it will go. Tiller points to starboard
8.h".t about 48 angle.
he ship's head is pointing in the right direction.
szt`s-eeP it so.
..A.DY APO (Or STARBOARD)Ship's head is almost on
;Vit course, but put the helm just a little to port to
,
eP her head from turning to port. Steady astarboard
opposite.
a ship's head is approaching the proper
and is swinging, the helm is put gradually over
the
s",..e other way to "meet," or check her, so she will not
wing beyond the desired course.
TI1E BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
fd
ON THE WIND; BY THE WIND; CLOSE HAULED; Orthe
LINEAll are terms to describe the state when
are braced sharp up on either tack. Tacks wella5ci&I
sheets aft, bowlines hauled out, and ship sailing
to the wind as possible.
STARBOARD TACKWhen the wind is from the starvl
side of a sailing ship. Starboard tacks are aboard.
tack, opposite.
No HIGHERShip is already too close to the will(/''ot
helmsman is to let her go off a little.
41
:
1 0(
NOTHING OFFThe ship not as close to the win'
should be; bring her up a little.
off
LET HER Go OFFUp helm, letting her head fall '
from the wind.
LUFF HERHelmsman puts helm down, throwing
Q.
into the wind.
RIGHT THE HELMPut the helm amidships.
SHIrr THE HELMWhen the helm is well over to N.
e 411
shift it over to a similar position on the other sit
EASE THE HELMGiven when the helm is well(Wel
side. It means to let the helm come more near'
ships.
A 0441
WEATHER HELMWhen the helm is to windwar-,
when the tiller is pointed to windward. Lee Itellit
opposite.
e
MIND* YOUR WEATHER HELMA caution given to
,
flies
she
man to watch the ship and meet her if
ward. Usually given when a headsail is taket1 1111 r;
the ship's head will tend to fly into the wind. A o
kl
FULL AND BySails are full, and she is by'the
as much to windward as possible.
VERY WELL THUSShip is sailing a good full and
her so.
eeti
).
Q. When are yards braced sharp up? Braced in? f
A. When the lee braces are hauled in and the weatll ; th
arms are as far forward as the rigging will permit, t V
are braced sharp up. When the weather yard-arms 8(1,j
far forward as possible, the yards are said to be bract
Q. How can weather and lee helm be relieved?
A. Weather helm by reducing after sail, or setting It',,th'ieg
Setting head sails blows the vessel's head away front c
and thus eases weather helm. Lee helm can be relie tir4,
Opposite way.
al
124
1. t
SEAMANSHIP.
125
Q. I/
k A w should a vessel carry her helm?
s
near amidships as possible, so the rudder does not

ve 04nd reduce speed. Vessels
on the wind should generally
or two spokes of weather wheel to tauten wheel ropes
as
Q. IN
(
)
7 hold
rudder steady.
r tria I.en sailing full and by, what guides the helmsman in
A,
theThe ;weather leech of the main royal or any, upper sail
the "'aut. In heavy weather when the light sails are furled,
,Weather leech of the mainsail. The weather leeches
41d'
Q, 147,e kept touching, that is, just quivering with the wind.
IS bearing up?
ard. Ing the helm up, and running away from the wind to
11
5
Red v w close to the direction of the wind will a good square. ,,essel
lie?
. iro11t six points.
Aholv Close to the wind will a fore and aft vessel lie?
rd?\\min four points.
LLat are the usual methods of working a ship to windtacking
or wearing.
what Is tacking?
cl,
ell a ship is close-hauled on one tack, by putting the
11 and
t
'
go the head sheets, she is brought up
mind; then
letting
by properly working the yards and sails
e grli
oe-i'eto fall off on the other tack. This is tacking. The
nrOu
to WhatL.
gn the wind.
ill,
Getti IS wearing?
runni ng a ship on the other tack by putting the helm up,
Plod ng off from the wind and gradually bringing her to
the other tack. The head goes away from the
. tlot
bY A stern going through the wind.
:1,olanY Points will a ship tack in? Wear?
Riott''''I) tacks in twelve points; six on each side of the
heat131 wind. She wears in twenty points, that is, the
LlI throu
nutst go, in tacking, through twelve points; in wear Wi
hat : twenty points.
c ...ratki Ls the best method of working to windward?
.Ing tong, because if
properly performed a ship will lose
be i' that isieeward; on the contrary she will head reach and
g) ra..., she will, while in stays (while in the process of
iv
toni' several ship's lengths to windward. In wearing,
;c
tit rarY, as she is running dead to leeward a part of
eh distance is lost.
01
126
Q. Why not always tack?

A. Some ships will not tack, and especially in bad lie.
when little sail is carried few ships will tack. In sic:
wearing is always done. If near land where, if Yon ves
tac
tacking (miss "stays "), you may drift on the shore,'
is adopted. There is always possibility of failure in
and greater certainly about wearing.
Q. What is leeway?
A. The drift a vessel makes away from the wind wile
hauled.
Q. What is meant by a good full for stays?
A. The helmsman is to keep the sails full and get 10(4
way for tacking.
Q. How is the helm put down in tacking?
A. It is eased down slowly so as not to deaden head A
Q. When a ship fails to tack what is it called?
A."Missing stays."
Q. When is a ship said to be "in irons"?
I
A. When, in tacking, she stops dead in the water and
fall off either way.
done ii
Q. In tacking, if a ship loses her headway what is the helm?
A. It is put amidships, because with no "way" on 3 5 a
a
helm does not affect her. If she gathers sternboard,10
likely to do immediatMy after losing headway, the he .5
be put over the other way, in order that it may a"
around on other tack.
GROUND TACKLE--ANCHORINGMOORING
o
Q. What is meant by "ground tackle "?
r
all
ill
used
gear
given
a
to
term
is
It
A.
general
the
and mooring ship.
It
Q. Of what does it consist?
41
bias,
A. It consists of the anchors, cables, stoppers,
Q. What is a capstan?
al
A. It is a barrel-shaped apparatus used on board
s,
moving heavy weights, such as anchors, guns, erc
t
warping ship, etc.
Pp
Q. What are the principal parts of the anchor?
A. The spindle, barrel, drumhead, pigeon holes, F I1Q
ho
pawl rim.
Q. What is the spindle?
A. The shaft on which the capstan revolves.
Q. What is the barrel?
A. The round, perpendicular part Which forms thc I
has vertical ribs.
SEAMANSHIP.
127
Q*
A. What is the
Q. *e circular drumhead?
part on top of the barrel.
A ivhat are
the pigeon holes?
Qs*,
holes in the drumhead to receive, the bars.
Whatsquare
sbnat
are the pawls?
ic A.
the "rnt bars of iron working on short iron pins, to catch
Ns, Pawl rim and prevent the capstan from turning back
A. Wh
A at is the pawl rim?
e e.'1" east iron rim
secured to the deck around the bottom ofpsta
w, n
having notches in which the lower ends of the pawls
thee capstan
is hove around.
X. INiV.hat
are chain whelps?
y,
i(iges of iron in the space at the bottom of the capstan.
Q.
4. Chat the chain from slipping when heaving in.
are capstan bars?
hej,rge. wooden bars shaped at one end to fit into the Ogsrrif`fs M the capstan. The other end has a slot to receive
fter `'ng
er line which goes around the ends of the bars to
the
en sh.,,
m in when the bars are to be used. These bars,
00 eh
II'Ped and swiftered, are used to turn the capstan when
hoisted by hand.
sl)
Ne many
have vessels of the Navy?
stan ariY everycapstans
stan above vessel is fitted with a steam capstan, and the
er d ntted withdescribed is connected with it. One old style
attachment to the steam gear is on the
ese ,,k and onan
large ships another is on the quarterdeck.
IA: used chiefly
for warping.
It i.t is Meant by a steam capstan?
9nsist
:a.. machine for weighing anchor by steam. Briefly
all 4, anri I.a"wildcat," which, with whelps, takes hold of the
This"as it turns by force of steam power it hauls the chain
thns ,w,ildcat
may be made to turn freely on the spindle,
5, isWii(6":e anchor is
let go without removing the chain from
each extremity of the spindle is a windlass,
$ die lear,9, for use in
heaving in on ropes, etc. The vertical
e engin
'Irif? to the capstan above is connected to the wheels
nne ce, so it can be turned by steam. Usually two wildthe 9,r each
chain, are provided. Brakes are fitted so
Ded
t. when
1
ecred desired. If free from spindle, may be eased or
desirable
deck capstan can be disnut st anti manned by use ofthe
the capstan bars, and used
e?WIlere
earn.
are the
anchors and chain cables of the Navy
The
anchors
are made either at Washington Navy Yard,
event
128
OPEN LINK
SHACKLE
CLUB LINK
SWIVEL
PARTS OF ANCHOR
A Jews Harp or Ring
B Stock
C Fixed Ball
D Movable Ball
E Shank
F Fluke
G Crown
Length of cable 120 WI'

Shackles at Swivels
45 fath
60 .
75
37,/: fat
'
82
90
105
0
NOTE.In all chains recently manufactured a "comb1
shackle" (a shackle and swivel combined) is placed'

fathoms from anchor.
129
SEAMANSHIP.
r b,.
able.; Private firms, according to specification. The chain
Q. re all made at the Boston Navy Yard.
,
A.;hat are some of the various anchors used?
1(1.fa
lr,st, and probably even now the most common, is the
s'ittoned two-armed anchor with stock at right angles.
bbpch, sometimes of wood, is now usually of iron with its
I,"It so that the stock may be easily stowed. Then come
IlchoairlOLIS forms of patent anchor, among which the Dunn's
is probably the most common in our service. Martin's
.akes'etirnes found also. Smith's, Hall's, Tyzack's, and Wilkesii
)
lave the same general features as Dunn's, and may somee. rve seen in the service and frequently in the merchant marese anchors all have two flukes in the mud at once, and
"le1 the manner provided for insuring that these flukes
R.
ground
A
What is a'
solid anchor? A portable anchor?
rle /3; solid anchor is one having the shank and arms made in
It
'
ecei such as the old-fashioned anchor. Portable anchors
Q
so they may be taken to pieces.
'g hat are the principal parts of a naval anchor?
or fi 11
,_e shank, ring (shackle or jewsharp), the arms, palm
roa/4"), bill (or point or pee), the blade, crown, stock and
Q,
A, iv oat is each of these parts?
11411KThe long middle part of anchor between stock
kt and crown.
(SuAcKLE or JEwsnARP).The large shackle bolted
to the upper end of the shank to which the chain is
A
,tr
shackled.
ItttsThe pieces extending from each side of the lower
end of the shank. They form hooks which bury in the
1, ground when anchor is let go, and hold ship stationary.
rALm or FLUKEThe broad shield-shaped piece on each
II arm.
111
;
413EThe part of the arm at the back of the palm.
4.---The part of the arms beyond the palm. Extreme
eltends of the arm.
W14The lower end of the shank where the arms are
.1,4welded on.
"ATThe upper curved part of the arm where it joins
the shank.
130
STocxThe iron beam placed at right angles to the

till,gc;5
It runs through a hole in the shank below theatica
the
being at right angles to the arms, when flukes
i e. If
:
t0
dropped, cants the anchor and causes the
in the mud. Anchors with which both flukes tad
the mud at the same time rarely have stocks as th
not need canting. They lay on their side.
re
Q. How is a stock secured in its place?
attached. e.
A. One end of the stock has a fixed iron ball
other end is bent (for convenience in stowing) and has
q.
'
able iron ball attached. About the middle of the swe
st`, ar
shoulder. The ball is removed from the bent end; the tb
, 1
r`
then put through the hole in the shank and pushed t I e
P
then
is
A
washer
shoulder.
the
till it takes against
0A:
the bent end of stock and shoved up to the shank, and'
tile
key is put through a hole in the stock, thus holding
between the shoulder and the washer. The ball is then se
and the anchor is ready for letting go.
nbo. ,
Q. What are the names of the various anchors on slur
tit
and
anchors,
A. Dower anchors, sheet anchors, stream
111
anchors.
boWs Q.
BowEitsThe anchors which are carried on the
h'
vessel.
on each
b
the
SHEETSSpare anchors about the size of
1411
Sometimes two are carried. Usually only one. . t
are really spare bower anchors, and in moder.1,1b, t,
are usually carried on the bows on a separate to" no
Old ships carried them in the waist.
l
STREAMAbout one-quarter the weight of tile
a
kedge
anchor. Used for work too heavy for a
3o
14)1
heavy enough for a bower.
KEDGESmall anchors used for light work such 31,e 1
ing, kedgifig, etc. From three to four are suPP
varying weights, from zoo to goo lbs.
Q. What is warping and kedging?
A. Warping is a name applied to the act of hauling,
around into a certain position, by m.,king the end 0'. (,1
fast to an anchor, or other secure hold ashore, and mot 417e(
ship by hauling on this line. Kedging is a term aPlie
C
hauling the ship ahead by planting light anchors .a'r
succession and hauling up to them. As fast as the shIPA the
one anchor that one is weighed and carried ahead, sto" 1)4,
meanwhile the ship is hauled ahead on the second.
Q. What is a sea anchor?
g o s a contrivance of large surface, with bridles, sotvethe order of an ordinary kite. When a ship is driftAlai? Put overboard with weight enough to immerse it, and
t ft Le it set upright. Being below the surface it does not
'leoce as the vessel drifts, the lines securing it tauten,
Vessel is held head to the sea. It has various forms,
baY be made of spars lashed together covered with canread" a frame like an umbrella, or even a triangular sail
With a boom and with chain around its lower edge.
e, Pot over, the vessel should ride with a long scope of
Q. WI,
toc Ti,at
" is a mushroom anchor?
ilk-g
eoeY are anchors shaped like a mushroom with a short
jt ,lised Ting up from the center. They have no stock. They
w
ic3r Permanent moorings for buoys, etc.
s0W can you tell the weight of an anchor?
kqe weight of every anchor, whether bower or kedge, is
5
acitle Oti the crown of the anchor. This weight includes the
b
,'lx,nd
stock.
61riat kind of cables are used in the Navy for anchoring?ofain cables. These are usually 120 fathoms long, are
[
'Poser' aPpropriate size chain for the size of ship, and are,
haT5' Q. WI, of shots of fifteen fathoms length.
hi%"at are the advantages of patent anchors over the old1
Asthey
are handled by hooking the catfall into the
r11tilbnink, they are catted and fished in one operation, savi (a)-,pd work. (2) They stow more easily, as they lay
ilit'heY lay flat with no long stock projecting, and there
oThey erference of fire, which is important on men-of-war.
p; ace often fitted so as to be hauled right up into the
I;Co Ole, to avoid catting and fishing. They can then be
YA slacking brake on the windlass. (5) Freedom from
as
lAri;'Ile chiefly to the absence of a long atock.
)PI (') Y are the old-fashioned anchors still- extensively used?
d or a
ccount
of their superior holding power in either
WVery
, so
at 's ft bottom.
the balancing band and link, or ring?
of 18 Diais a band fitted with ring, on each side of the shank.
)ri. k
i
ced, at the balancing point of the anchor so a tackle
will hoist the anchor level, and land it on the billjsu'aTat
1
the
are anchors now made?

of forged steel. Cast steel is. however, often used
bkids
rna"Y
i n Portions:
the stocks, rings, shackles, pins, balanc'etc., are always made of wrought steel.
r32
Q. How are the chain cables made?

Med
A. Each link is made from a wrought iron bar, we t I
form the link after being threaded through the preceding
of the chain. The cast iron stud is then inserted, and tile,'
allowed to cool binding it in place. Chain is designated"
diameter of the iron bar forming the link.
Q. What is the use of the stud in the chain?
A. It prevents kinks. While some think it strengthens s
chain, experiments have proved that it does not.
Q. What are shackles, and for what are they used? lie
A. Chain cables are manufactured in "shots'of 15 13
'
length, and these are connected together by shackle
round end of the shackle is forward so the chain will.,1114
easily when the anchor is let go, and enables the w1"71.1
catch it easily when heaving in. The shackle bolt is v-ro h
is held in place by a pin of steel driven into a hole tlia e
the end of bolt and shackle. This pin is held in place bY r'
lead ring which is upset by a special tool into the go 11
around the end of the pin. In unshackling, this ring is sli o
f
the pin backed out, then the bolt driven out.
Q. How is the large end of the shackle entered in 111 (
11
of the chain?
re
A. The end link of the shots are left withcut studs.
etp
What
are
swivels,
and
what
is
their
use?
Q.
t '
A. They are contrivances placed in the chain to preven,e eet
in the cable as the ship swings to anchor. They are lar6. Q,
usually give trouble in passing over the wildcats, so 0 A,
are used than necessary.
1
Q. What is a swivel-shackle?
ve
A. It is a combination of the swivel and shackle abA5
scribed. It has only lately been adopted in the service. 1,
too large to go over the wildcat, it is placed at such a
from the anchor that it will not come over the vvildc.a1 otu
anchor is hove up.to the hawsepipe, or will not come WI
the hawsepipe if the anchor is on the billboard re3 t s al
letting go. When this is used the regular swivels are 3
/
2 and 82 2 fathoms. Sttic
and 971
/2 fathoms, instead of at 371
Q. Where are cables stowed on board ship?
o
A. In "chain lockers," which are in the forward Part.
vessel a little abaft the windlass. The chain, coining
the wildcat, passes down vertically through the chain P11),1
the locker where it is stowed, arranged in tiers, by 11'` ly
tailed, called "chain tierers."
Q. What is done with the end of the cable?
A. It is taken into the locker first, and is brought
made fast to a beam, or other accessible place, by
SEAMANSHIP.
133
ssbin
eg, so that it can be readily slipped or an additional length
'h.'ule bent on if desirable. The extreme end is called the
nit.te.,.,r end" of the cable.
-ti,w is the chain bent to the ring of the anchor?
11'
"triplet," which consists of the "clublink," and two
linneks, is left permanently secured to the anchor by means
tete!, anchor shackle, and the regular shots of chain are con'
for to the triplet in the usual manner. This arrangement
pee ,e.00venience and ease in shackling. The "club link" is
fit Ilnar shaped link uniting the triplet to the anchor shackle.
111 ths snugly on the bolt of the shackle, giving a good bearing
(-\ e bolt and to sides of shackle.
dc/ h are cables marked to tell the length of cable out?
Ic11ks, eY are marked by turns of wire on the studs of cert.ain
7t,.10 e s,Lne number of the link counting from the shackle being
113
as the number of turns of wire, and each indicating
tholl --er of shots of 15 fathoms then out. Thus at the end
th- second length (3o fathoms) there are two turns of wire
011
:stud of the second link from the shackle. In this way,
1
cir more of the turns are lost, the fact that the turn
11 .Sgt0 is on the second link from shackle would indicate
de 0, Shackles are also marked with a number cut in one
e
the eye to indicate position in cable, but these marks
11finstlallY filled with mud, etc., and do not replace aboveeti'lled marks. There are no shackles at 15 or 3o fathoms in
r5e
Q.
the first shackle is now at 45 fathoms.
to k 101ains;
Ch,at is meant by overhauling cables?
11sed aules should be overhauled quarterly, the chain being
k"
e 1-IP on deck and cleaned, and each shackle, swivel, and
IA5 th-refullY examined. Every length should be unshackled
shackle bolts and pins cleaned and coated with white
petit.' a Pin is found "rusted in" the rust may be cut with
t
or the pin broken. Swivels should be well oiled
'!
15 IllekNed until they turn freely without grinding. Marks
ad) 8 and ui_e verified and renewed if necessary. The chain lockat 41vs ; uilges
under them should be cleaned and whitewashed.
en;
411 the material may be detected by the ring of the metal
stnd :rock by a hammer. A bad shackle should be replaced,
rt btfulitl, link should be replaced if missing. but if a bad or
st
"oh is found the entire shot must be removed. It
4e, 1.1 ft.waYs be borne in mind that the cable is no stronger
Yveakest link, and that the safety of the ship depends
Stren
gth of the cable, and that it will break. if at all,
refo"_
very heaviest weather when it is most needed;
e. re this overhauling of cables cannot be too carefully
a
134
THE
Q. What is the most frequent accident to the cable calls'

loss of anchor?
lit
A. The springing of a shackle which causes it to open
come
may
a
the ends, thus parting the cable. Such strain
the shackle passes over the wildcat, or while lying acros%
outer lip of the hawsepipe. Sometimes also the small Pio
broken in some such way and later the shackle bolt drW,
causing loss of anchor. Therefore each shackle shoLau
carefully examined every time the cable is hove in.
Q. How is the latest chain cable marked?
dl
A. In the cables now being made (tow) the swivel-5,111 a
r
is placed, as already stated, at such a distance that it W.
go over the wildcat if anchor is hove to the hawsepfPe,,
the hawsepipe if anchor is on the billboard, the shot be` h
it and the anchor is therefore about 5 fathoms long. 110,
e
mark is found until the end of the next shot is reached
45 fathoms), the second shot being 40 fathoms long; the.
shots are 15 fathoms each, and are marked as usual. Th1 Q
shot is placed as it is in order that there will be no '"d A
of the shackle being on the wildcat when breaking grotlabo bO
ti!;
because there is no particular use for a shackle at 30 fat
nchour
Ot
Q. About how much cable is given the anchor in a
A. The general rule in fair weather is to give about f11 e
five times as much cable as the depth of the water. In,
weather this is increased as desirable. A long scope 0 A,
on the one anchor is better than two anchors with half as e
Ice
chain on each.
Q. Why is it so desirable to have a long scope of clia
an anchor in heavy weather?
e3
A. Because as the chain hangs in a bight, when a .
heavy strain comes against the ship, the bight straighten')
takes the strain gradually, and there is not such a stidde;14
on the ground tackle. Also, the long scope tends to VI"
flukes deeper in the mud, whereas a short scope would
them to break out and drag.
Q. How are swivels kept lubricated?
A. By placing a mixture of white lead and tallow in th
Q. What is meant by slipping a cable?
A. Unshackling a cable, or cutting the lashing at the 1,
end, and allowing the cable to run out and overboard.
cables are slipped it is usual to buoy them if practiq
order that they may be found and recovered. This Is onlY
in emergencies.
Q. What is a compressor?
A. It is a curved arm of iron which sweeps across the
of the chain pipe below the deck, choking the chain 111
SEAMANSHIP.
135
er edge of the pipe. It is pivoted on one
end and has
elYte in the other to which a tackle hooks. It is used to
lit
tr the chain
after letting go anchor; also to check
Q. .:,?; veering, and to hold ship until stoppers are passed. the
A. Trkhat is meant by veering?
0 n'!"en the chain is allowed to pay out; either when slack
ri ls wanted to cat after heaving up anchor (to allow the
givr to be placed on the billboard), or when it is desired
Q, 1,the vessel more cable on her anchors.
i,v,_nat are deck stoppers?
ueY are short pieces of wire hawser, fitted with hook
11 one
or ookerid and a toggle and laniard to the other. The hook
ed in ring bolts on deck, and the other end lashed by
:Lard to the cable to hold it when the anchor is down.
01' 11411
qeereneY are often used forward of the bitts, they.are more
3 e sh.e1 abaft
them as then the bitts assist them in holding
01
oiNitFt or bitting and unbitting they must be Placed for5
Y.' is
s a deck stopper passed (secured to the cable)?
riLd bo r is
hooked to the ring bolt, it is laid along the chain
tbo ,
s'
e and the
passed over and under, working aft
or '
riverai turnslaniard
are taken, when it is led forward, wrapped
ebd,,th, e chain and stopped down.. The compressor is flip
oQ ix,',ex to let stoppers take strain then it is hove to again.
/V ft/1u are slip stoppers?
s 511 e en,`,1eY are stoppers which have a slip or pelican hook in
e tr, instead of the laniard and toggle. They conveniently
Jet 'e Place of deck stoppers in cases when the chain is to
0 1,k from the stopper, as in veering in heavy weather.
i:Oat is a controller?
,
11 1
an apparatus which catches each horizontal link of
'
e '5'1111 n as it is hove in, so that if it slips on the capstan or
t lig else goes wrong, it will be held from surging or runIt is sometimes used to hold
chain for veering,
tv'i case the link is thrown out ofthe
its resting place by
storked by a lever. It is also sometimes used to assist
%, ,P.Pers in
holding the chain in riding.
ghat are bitts?
e cle,
eLavy vertical cylindrical iron castings, firmly secured to
ttir^ The chain is taken around the bitts, either one or
' Itnos, for riding or for letting go.
lac* is a chain bitted?
le is log held by the stoppers forward of the bitts,
.ii rosed up from below to permit a turn to be enough
thrown
"
Re bitt and the compressor hove
'
to" to keep it from
below. The bight is lifted and dropped into place by
136
a light tackle hooked overhead. The part leading

from bitts is underneath and outboard.
D1/4
Q. What is meant by "ranging cable"?
A. When chain is roused up on deck for cleaning CI ck A
hauling, or for other purposes, it is "ranged" on clevirIC4"fakes" fore and aft. Care must be taken that the Par,,t,,
is to run out first is outside, because if the outside fa"vof
left to run out last there would be a violent inward sweep
bight as the chain tautened out.
Q. How is an anchor let go?
I, ea
A. If it heaves up and is secured in the hawsepipe,
i5
billboard,
fi.
up on the windlass brake. If it is on the
1e10'
which
r,i;
go, "stock and fluke," by means of a trigger
both ring stopper and shank painter at once. Chains are,', rt
(if bitts are provided) before letting go. If the anchor
fashioned, and is secured for sea "on the bows," the 1n,5/ 0,11
must come up, and the inner fluke lifted to the toP
e
billboard, and eased out by the "stock and bill tackles Of 1
it hangs by the shank painter on the sloping surface
cr
billboard.
tae,
Q. What is meant by mooring?
t,
A. A ship is moored when she has two anchors

of
chat
considerable distance apart, with such a scope
each that she is held with her bow nearly in one place be5 a
them regardless of tide, etc. When moored she will
tee
nearly about her own bow as a pivot, the extent of her
et
ing depending on the tautness with which she was tri
Q. What is meant by "clear," "open," and "foul ha',s
9 d
A. If a vessel is moored, and heads west, she has an"
hawse if her starboard anchor is to the North and her P
the South on their respective sides. She can now swing, A.
points either way and keep "clear hawse," that is, the 0 tikh'
ly
continue to lead off on their respective sides clear of each Spos
As soon as the chains begin to cross each other she haS
hawse, described as follows:
CROSS IN HAWSEThe chains cross each other
starboard anchor being on port bow, and port and' le;
starboard bow.
ELBOW IN HAwsF.After putting a cross in hawse:
swings 18o degrees more in same direction sne "111 1
"elbow" in hawse.
ROUND TURNIf30 degrees more in same direction the
round turn in it.
6,
ROUND TURN AND ELBOWThe next half-circle, after
turn.
3,
SEAMANSHIP.
137
w is hawse cleared when foul?

p s'Tnetimes a cross or elbow can be cleared by making the
"dying the right way. If more than this they are taken out
ear hawse gear."
t is the regular "clear hawse gear"?
,
() The clear hawse pendantstout line, with chain tail
e
.and slip hook.
11 (2) DIP ropeline, lighter than (I), tailed with chain; sister hooks on its end.
(3,
/ ) Hawserused as a preventer in connection with (s).
3
41) Line on chain inside for easing out, etc.
p `5) Deck tackles, hook ropes, chain hooks, straps, tools for
W
unshackling, etc.
bi
hat is general method of clearing hawse?
i5 rt 1:leaVe foul turns above water, secure lee chain below foul
Y Clear hawse pendant, and pass the preventer around cable
15111 1W.
of ottl the clear hawse pendant. Pass dip rope in opposite way
4? Part. Unshackle lee cable. Secure end of dip rope to
of th n outboard and haul it around clear of the other chain,
cr:,hawsepipe and shackle again. Cables are usually lashed
reeting for safety. With light cables they are sometimes
o. titlY Paying the unshackled end of lee cable down into a
aot 11,'Ler bows where it is cleared and shackled up again.
i; hat is the mooring swivel?
)ets aril.prevent cables fouling when a moored vessel swings at
d -PLrs, many prefer to use a swivel with two links at each
1, 'Le two riding parts of the cables are brought to the
r iwhile one or both of the inboard ends are taken to the
'
se th irlics of the swivel. When vessel swings the swivel turns
cables remain clear. It is always put on with cup up,
1), Q.
ricated like other swivels.
I'Vlat
disadvantages has the mooring swivel?
C Wit_ Involves much work. It is necessary to take it off before
ly gg either anchor, thus involving delay, and should it sud>
sit eIne necessary to veer, it is inconvenient, as the best
. ti'nn of the ship's anchors for holding is not thus obtained.
ice. Gec'w are mooring swivels put on?
cll
inside the ship, the swivel being put first on one
andnerallY
i out through the hawsepipe, then on the other using
h tiea,Pad
if
14. hawse gear. Methods vary as circumstances require.
rtt thsnlg the mooring swivel it is usual to lead only one chain
swivl inboard.
ol h atWl is meant by foul anchor and how handled?
the .len, in weighing anchor, the chain is found to be foul
th'c1c, shank, or other part instead of leading up from
anchor is reported to be "foul" and must be cleared.
{; 0
e,
138
toc
This was very common with old-fashioned anchors with s, g
ttit
'
hoistil
by
cleared
usually
but is not so frequent now. It is
the cathead or davit, and the chain dipped until clear; sortie
or'' e
t it}
unshackling, and much work is necessary. In all anch5
iii
general
only
el,
circumstances alter the method adopted, and
tions are laid down.
Q. What are the ring stopper and shank painter?
theY
A. Small chains secured on the forecastle of a ship;
ring
the anchor on the billboard ready for letting go. Thedeck:
. A
per passes out through ring and up to tumbler on
,e(1
shank painter goes out around the shank at throat of an,chc)
up to tumbler. By springing the trigger they are relea's}
the same time, and both ends of the anchcr go simultaneu
Q. What is an anchor buoy? .
se
A. Formerly (and sometimes now) it was the custom tcl g
its
mark
to
it
go
letting
before'
a buoy to the anchor
s
well as to assist in recovering it should it be lost. It'
to anchor by buoy rope.
Q. What is "streaming the buoy"?
the'
A. Letting it fall from the forecastle or chains into
just before the anchor is let go.
Q. What is meant by a buoy not "watching"?
ter'
A. When it does not float on the surface of the vira}.4
le
buoy rope is too short it must be lengthened; if buoy "
must be 'bled."
Q. What is meant by "How does the chain tend"?
does
A. It means in what direction, relative to the ship,'the e
example,
For
.
hawsepipe
the
v.
chain lead after leaving
A.
tends broad off the starboard bow."
O''
the
to
make
Q. What reports does the officer forward
what A ka
the bridge when the anchor is being weighed, and
titc
mean? t
A.( Keeps him informed how chain is "tending." thI) e ore
when
(2) "Anchor is at short stay, sir." That is
s
tends in about the same direction as the f
mast stay, not being quite up and down. chile ell
all
(3) "Anchor is up and down, sir." When reach
th e
been hove in except just enough to
torn; chain is vertical.
broke
, s(
(4) "Anchor is aweigh, sir." When anchor is
IN
and leaves bottom.
1)L
call
stock
as
soon
As
sir."
(5) "Anchor is in sight,
sooil 14,
(6) "Clear anchor" (or "foul anchor"), as
can determine its state.
r ,r e ei
(7) "Anchor is up, sir." When it is high enough
ting.
SEAMANSHIP.
139
5toc
CARRYING OUT ANCHORS.

Q,
a is meant by carrying out an anchor?
lett A.t
e s111 IS frequently necessary to carry an anchor away from
thei:1P and drop it in order to secure a line to it from the ship,
r,
moor her, or to obtain a lead for hauling or warping
a I This is called carrying out an anchor. It is usually done
ey Q 2
1tinch.
g
aisr hat general methods are used in carrying out anchors in
k:.A.
(I)The simplest way, but only applicable to light anchors,
111051.A
is to hang the anchor from the stern of a launch by
e"
a strap secured through ringbolt in sternpost bz a
toggle and eye.
(2)A heavy anchor may be carried out under the stern of
)5
disc
a boat by putting casks under quarters, shank horizontal, stock vertical, arms horizontal and held close
to keel by line leading over each rail.
(3) Where launch is fitted with trunk and windlass the
,o
ring may be hung from the stern, the stock horizontal, and the fluke hove up under the keel by a
line leading from one arm up through the trunk to
the windlass.
itec.
'cal' (4)
applicable to patent anchors. Sling anchor
under center of boat by strap secured to balance ring
and leading up over each rail, and secured, by toggle
lo,e5 (5) and eye, each part to the other.
fg,
two boats in tan:dem.
11') Between two boats alongside each other.
/fOtv is a cable, or hawser, carried out with an anchor?
fric
large amount is carried out, another boat is used; but
do i1
Ishi. be towed by the one with the anchor. Chain is carried
'
hot 9f the boat stopped up with strong stops, and before the
Is let go enough stops are cut to allow the anchor to
sa"tan reach the bottom. If cable is attached to the anchor
,
4Y
precaution must be observed. Or if cable is used, it
e laid out like a guesswarp, being paid out as you go, and
enough remains to reach the bottom heave all over
t
.jetting go anchor.
.isco rw is a warp carried out?
t,gecaite the end to the bow of the boat and coil enough down
likietinng when the beach or buoy is reached. Coil the reit h tijP down in the stern. If it is a long warp and a fair wind
-ore. Pay out from the ship until enough remains to get
end then pay from the boat, and on reaching the shore secure
t 1'
)0 4 If against tide use the tide by taking all the line in
at, securing ashore first, then paying down to the ship.
140
STEERING EFFECT OF PROPELLER.

Q. What effect has the propeller on the steering of a sl
screw vessel like a steam launch.
A. The ordinary right-handed screw when going ahead t r
tl
throw her head to port; when backing, her head to starh
Q. Suppose the screw is going one way, but the vessel ha
had time to alter her direction of motion?
A. The general rule is that the effect on the hem is the Ve
as if she has way on, in the direction the screw is goilli
example, if you suddenly reverse engine in steam launch, vs
the headway is lost, and put helm to starboard, head
citledly to starboard, but if put to port, even though titejt
still plenty of headway her head goes a little to port. T1.11,,k
seen that the motion of the screw must decide you wilic",op
to put helm rather than motion of the ship. For this re
is only possible to turn a single-screw vessel around in 3 110 Q
space by turning to starboard. The coxswain of a steamer15,
study this feature of his boat, and know exactly what stl" toi
do under the various conditions.
144
TOWING.
tTo
Q. What is the best towline for a heavy tow?
A. A manila hawser of long scope, tailed with about 01 Q.
fathoms of chain cable, the latter leading from the vessel t
ale,
to the end of the hawser, thus adding weight to theli3eti roti
preventing chafe of the hawser. Wire hawsers are soil
' q.
used to advantage.
Q. In towing, what must the towing vessel carefully av- 10
A. She must avoid having the towline secured directly to
stern, as this renders her rudder nearly useless. It rntl
remembered that in all steering the stern of the ship
movesnot the bowand if the stern is held by a tovvlitl"
towing vessel cannot steer.
Q. When two vessels tow alongside, how is it done? ,
A. In harbors, or narrow passages, most of the towing Is
by the towing vessel being alongside the tow, on account ,
greater ease and speed in handling. If the towing ves5T
right-handed screw she should be on port side of tow.
from the bitts in her bow leads to the forward part of tog
another from the same bitts leads to the after part of the
She is prevented from swinging out by a breast-fast to t00
USING OIL IN A HEAVY SEA.
Q. Why is oil used on the sea, and what is its effect?
A. Oil is used to produce a "slick" over the surface 1"
water when a heavy sea is running. Waves coming t
SEAMANSIIIP.
slick"
iiii;n. are prevented from breaking, and their violence is limey
5i 1, s libed As this "slick" is Just to windward,of the ship, it
eige, net smooth water in which to ride out a gale. Animal and
ria5A.
oils are the best, and it is better that they should be
3 thick. It is spread on the surface in any convenient way,
Dal' 'th'
ta5 cerer,bY perforated canvas bags filled with oakum and oil hung
I, l'Ie weather side, or by filling closet bowls with oakum and
5 verb t may be poured through the scuppers, or even thrown
d ard, hut these methods are very wasteful. If properly
bef 'four or five gallons should be enough for a large ship to
3,e5 e ut a gale.
her!
Lis It
RESTORING THE APPARENTLY DROWNED.
014
9.5.., fk that is the first thing for a sea-going man to learn?
OW to swim. It may save his own life as well as the life

asiso 6)
.thuers
,.
A vv hat is another point of almost equal importance?
tie
knowledge of how to restore those who are apparently
oll
tj'ed.
It''
ll When are you justified in giving an apparently drowned
A.I1P for dead?
Af lir i!r.ot until you have worked at him carefully for three or
,i to
hat would you do if you should rescue a man from the
ille otill'Ind he was apparently dead from drowning, no doctor
ttieti A, a
, (I) Instantly loosen neckband and clothes on chest and
void'
wristband. Turn man on face, stand astride of him
r to
3 t
with your face towards his head, locking your fingers under his belly. Lift body as high as you can
off the ground without lifting his head, to let water
live'
run out of his mouth: Keep him suspended long
enough to count one, two, three, four, five, slowly.
(2) Place patient on ground, face still downward, and stand
astride of him. Place hands under his armpits, and
it ei
raise chest as high as you can without lifting his head
sse'
off the ground, and hold long enough to count one,
A
two, three. Replace him on ground, face up. See
toir
that neck is straight; nose and mouth free. Place
the
your elbows against your knees and your hands on
ov
the sides of his chest, and press over lower ribs
downward and inward long enough to count one,
two. Then suddenly let go. Grasp the patient by
shoulders as before and repeat motion every moor 15
seconds for at least two hours, unless breathing is
restored in the interim.
142
,
bottt1les,
1
(3) After breathing is established, use hot
blankets, rub with hands, etc., to restore circu'v-11
in a
If he can swallow give him hot coffee, tea or
Use whiskey with caution at first. Avoid dela'',
.00 1
everything go until breathing is established, 0
I
not give up too soon. People have been res
work.
after some hours'
tl
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAVING DROWNING PERSONS
SWIMMING TO RELIEF.
11
1. When you approach a person drowning in the water'
sure him in a loud and firm voice that he is safe.
far a
2. Before jumping in to save him divest yourself 0 so
as quickly as possible of all clothes: tear them off if necf or
but if there is not time, loose at all events the foot 011
drawers, if they are tied, because if you do not, they will P
water and drag you.
.11
3. On swimming to a man in the sea, if he be strugg
Si(
not seize him at that moment, but keep off for a few
until he gets quiet. It is sheer madness to take hold or a f j
when he is struggling in the water, and if you do, You
141
great risk.
i
o;
4. Then get close to him and take fast hold of the hair
head, turn him as quickly as possible on his back, give
sudden pull and this will cause him to float; then throw Yg
on your back also and swim for the shore, both hands hav11-0
of his hair, you on your back and he also on his, and
his back to your stomach. In this way you will get s000e
safer ashore than by any other means. One great advaotad
this method is that it enables you to keep your head up, au
to hold the person's head up whom you are trying to save" tae
l
may, in this manner, float until a boat or other help
ii1:
obtained.
s,
5. It is believed that there is no such thing as a death
As soon as a drowning man begins to get feeble and to
10,
reason, he gradually slackens his hold until it is looseneu
4,
gether. A struggling person can easily drown you, but 1
hension need be feared from the death grasp when rescu
drowning person.
6. After a person has sunk to the bottom the exact posi;,, 0 a
his body may be determined by air bubbles which occasional:,
r
to surface. A body may often be regained from the bott, ,
;
this state in time for resuscitation, by diving for it in Ow
tion of these bubbles.
7. On rescuing a person by diving to the bottom, seize
icz
of the head by one hand only, using the other to rise to 6
of cr
SEAMANSHIP.
143
Itio try }If at sea, or in the sea, it may often be a great error to
01 cur,' get to the land. If there is a strong out-setting tide, or
r, if ,`nt, and you are swimming either by yourself or have hold
lion" Person who cannot swim, get on your back and float tip
Sii17,cIties. Many a drowning comes from exhaustion in stem'
a tide. Always remember that floating is easy.
,N,
t
8)
.c.UCTIONS TO MARINERS IN CASE OF SHIPWRECK.
411
sea-faring people should be familiar with the following inert l N
etitins, which are practically identical with those issued by
. onyns having life-saving services. It is the unanimous tes.pof the employees of all life-saving services that the prinar
es 1111r òfficulties with which they have to deal arise from the
erke of shipwrecked crews to co-operate intelligently in the
Of rescue.
Instructions.
trig'
e With a life-boat or surf-boat. The patrolman, after he
sec
or
Your vessel ashore, and after burning a Coston signal
ft f 1}10Wthat you are seen, hastens to his station for assistance.
, Iltkh Ilse of a boat is practicable, either the large life-boat is
ol 11,.. ed from its ways in the station, and proceeds to the wreck
bi ;Liter, or the lighter surf-boat is hauled overland to a point
vte the wreck and launched, as circumstances may require.
y011
der
'
511 ,the boat reaching your vessel the directions and the
f c0 b-st b'-. the keeper, who always commands and steers the boat,
e Implicitly obeyed. Any headlong rushing and crowding
Def %id,
ita 1 bo, Prevented, and the captain of the vessel should remain
Ottie
'
rQ to preserve order until every other person has left.
311
,e. ssee? children and helpless persons and passengers should be
CO talc Into the boat first. Goods or baggage will positively not
kitis,
e,into the boat until all are landed. If any be passed in
sa,.,.,` toe keeper's remonstrance, he is fully authorized to throw
li
lo. '"e overboard.
ccl
'
Rescue with the Breeches Buoy, or Life-car.
;c111
rt d it be inexpedient to use either the life-boat or surf-boat,
wreck gun and beach apparatus for the
itl sette-te Will be had to the
at Y the breeches buoy or the life-car. A shot with a small
0011, Gzi Ilacihed will be fired across your vessel.
ottc
of the line as soon as possible and haul on board until
he
t`'..a tail-black with a whip or endless line rove through it.
blockblock should be hauled on board as quickly as possible
Dr
ent the whip drifting off with the set, or fouling with
St
age, etc. Therefore if you have been driven into the rug-
144
Cot ti
ging where but one or two men can work to advantage,
such
shot-line and run it through some available block,
throat or peak halliards block; or any block which will a
a clear lead, or even between the ratlines, that as fnauY
possible may assist in hauling.
Attached to the tail-block will be a tally-board with the f11f
lug directions in English on one side and French on the ot"
"Make the tail of the block fast to the lowermast, well
the masts are gone, then to the best place you can find. Las
h
shot-line, see that the rope in the block runs free, and
signal to the shore."
As soon as your signal is seen, a three-inch hawser will be t}
on to the whip, and hauled off to your ship by the ltfe-sa
crew.
If circumstances will admit, you can assist the life-savillg
by manning that part of the whip to which the hawser is
, Of
and hauling.
When the end of the hawser is got on board, a tally-boaru tI
be found attached bearing the following directions: "Malen
hawser fast about two feet above the tail block; see all denti
that the rope in the block runs free and show signal to s i of
the
Take particular care that there are no turns of the Wh
ha
around the hawser. To prevent this, take the end of the
up between the parts of the whip before making it fast.
When the hawser is made fast, the whip cast off frog'
hawser, and your signal is seen by the life-saving crew, thd
haul the hawser taut, and by means of the whip will haul
your ship a breeches buoy suspended from a traveller bl
a life-car from ring running on the hawser. If the b!"eg
s,:, P
buoy be sent, let one man immediately get into it, thruua
t
.
legs through the breeches. If the life-car, remove the
;',
place as many persons into it as it will hold (four or 0:
secure the hatch on the outside by the hatch bar and hook.
as before, and the buoy or car will be hauled ashore. "1-1,Itt
be repeated until all are landed. On the last trip of the
the hatch must be secured by the inside hatch-bar.
In many instances two men can be landed in the breeelie, at
at the same time, by each putting a leg through the leg
DI
breeches, and holding on to the lifts of the buoy.
when brought ashore in the buoy, should be in the arms
e
persons or securely lashed to the buoy. Women and C't
should be landed first.
f
'
In signaling as directed in the foregoing instructions, I,
an,
rest
from
himself
the
daytime, :et one man separate
his hat, a handkerchief, or his hand; if at night, the shoo'
SEAMANSHIP.
145
ht
t likeg . and concealing it once or twice will be understood, ane
c.i!lgnals will be made from on shore.
s
gr setucurnstances
may arise, owing to the strength of the current

ijI
ly It In,I, or the danger of the wreck breaking up immediately, when
the'Tuld be impossible to send off the hawser. In such a case
*h;ureeches buoy, or life-car, will be hauled off instead, by the
)41 k,O, or sent off to you by the shot-line, and you will be hauled
71ere through the surf.
LI? '
the Your vessel is stranded during the night, and discovered by
ist
ljj Fatrolman, which you will know by his burning a brilliant
ignr,
Savingkeep a bright lookout for signals or signs of arrival of
crew.
the ri111 one to four hours may intervene between the burning of
54% to is.ight and their arrival, as the patrolman will have to return
4\44 station perhaps three or four miles distant, and the lifeNI crew draw the apparatus or surf-boat through the sand or
Li ad roads to where the vessel is stranded.
I 411ta on the beach will indicate their arrival, and the sound
rdflOn firing from the shore may be taken as evidence that a
n as been fired across your vessel. Therefore upon hearing
31.' in 410n make a strict search aloft, fore and aft, for the shotfor it is almost certain to be there. Though the movements
I' ht life-saving
crew may not be perceptible to you owing to
eu_,arkness, your ship will be a good mark for the men experiI the use of the wreck gun, and the first shot seldom fails.
ogi
lel
Recapitulation.
tl
loc 41cs,ain by the wreck until assistance arrives from the shore,
bre, If Your vessel shows signs of immediately breaking up.
ti
SII3t discovered immediately by the patrol, burn rockets, flareother lights, or if the weather be foggy, fire guns.
i,c)t r 1,17 Particular care that there are no turns of the whip-line
cl the hawser before making the hawser fast.
- rst.11d
Women, children, helpless persons and passengers ashore
tak
'41 e Yourself thoroughly familiar with these instructions and
bre' eat, mr that on your coolness and strict attention to them will
g
1.1,1 .,IY depend the chances of success in bringing you and your
Ne safely to land.
\re% following signals between ships and life-saving stations
een adopted by all nations and will be understood by all:
t 11/n the discovery of a wreck by night, the life-saving force
if 14,, firn a red pyrotechnic light, or a red rocket, to signify:
00" " are seen. Assistance will be given as soon as possible,'
.r
14.6
A red flag waved on shore by day, or a red light, red

or red roman candle displayed by night, will signify: '
away.'
"A white flag waved on shore by day, or a white light sx_

swung back and forth, or a white rocket or a white roman ca''
fired by night, will signify: 'Slack away.'
"Two flags, a red and a white, waved at the same tiale
shore by day, or two lights, a red and a white, slowly svviln6
the same time, or a blue pyrotechnic light burned by nigh!'
signify: `Do not attempt to land in your own boats. It Is
possible.'
A man on shore beckoning by day, or two torches boo
near together by night, will signify: 'This is the best PI5
1 k
land.'
"Any of these signals may be answered from the vesse
of
a
f,
handkerchie
a
flag,
a
follows: In the daytime by waving
sbt
'
ligh!
or even the hand. At night, by firing a rocket, a bluefor
a
tTi
gun, or by showing a light over the ship's gunwale
time then concealing it."
v11,'
DEFINITIONS OF SEA TERMS, EXPRESSIONS, 'its 10.
ABACKA sail is aback when the wind acts on
surface.
ABAFTBehind. In the rear of. On the after side.
LIk
ang''
ABAFT THE BEAMAstern of a line forming a right
o 1
the keel.
ABEAMOpposite the centre of the ship's side, or eight P
from bow and stern.
ABoARDOn the ship.
T]
ABOUTTO "go about" is to change the ship's course frc'''
tack to another.
ALERThe helm is alee when the tiller is pointing to leesi
Helm down.
Lt,
Au. HANDSThe entire ship's company.
N4
,
AwFTOverhead. In some part of the rigging.
ALoNcsiDEClose to the ship's side.
r
ANCHORTo let go the anchor to hold the ship in her
position.
in as
ANcHoRAcEGround fit to anchor on. A berth for the s't kit
aground.
ASHOREOn land. Also applied to a ship when
ASTERNBehind the ship.
111;
AVASTTO stop. To cease hauling.
Ock
BARE POLESA ship is under bare poles when she has iso
and is underway.
SEAMANSHIP.
147
)1CIAVrt,
13
trips of wood such as those nailed or secured over the
`
,.rpaulins
of hatch to batten down in bad weather. Also
ovl bbtrips woodafastened
to spars to take chafe of gear; chafing
iii II.-AinattenZf
11GThe direction an object bears from the ship; either the
,e gocenipass direction or direction referred to the ship's heading.
,11 To WiNnwminSailing a vessel so that the final course
a1:1 good is in the direction from which the wind comes; by
tai
'4 P.N..
'in
g or wearing.
tkil "
1 DNo wind to fill the sails.
-Axe ko
.
...._RA ND--H urry up.
41, Make fast by belaying; to make fast, secure, or even stop.
;e1 kistAn anchorage. A station. A sleeping billet.
a ANWhere prisoners are confined on board men-of-war.
01
11G---The act of going on board a vessel, either for the purust.s.
se of getting information, or of extending courtesies.
14.4, Tohaul on.
trw"RADsPartitions in a ship.
re' WIXT WIND AND WATERThat portion of a vessel about the
terline which when the vessel rolls is alternately above and
W water.
BOARD--Over the side. A mast goes "by the board"
Loex"en it carries away.
ha A;ND BLOCKWhen the two blocks of a tackle have been
bl ed together by hauling on the tackle; also called "two
geks."
\r".1'-kicA cloak used by officers in a boat.
'
10'rixA large cloth for the use of officers using boat.
3111
14
'ITEAn--A term applied to a vessel when it is deeper forIlLard than aft.
STERN_Applied to a boat or vessel when deeper aft than
ca!Pipe, or whistle, used by the boatswain or his mates in

lirt,
'
sing all hands for any purpose, passing routine orders, etc.
04"--Turned from its square position or state. Inclined to
ks
s...
!
0 pay a vessel's head off and bring wind on desired side,
ler( to cast to port." To take a sounding, or cast the lead.
whiiA CRABCatching an oar in the water the wrong way
e rowing.
AwA light air causing a light ripple on water for a few
k-A-13LOCKFu1l.
Filled to the extreme limit.
I48
THE BLUEjAcKET's MANUAL.
`1.
COASTERA vessel engaged in running up and down the coal
CocioiLLA yard is cockbilled when one yard-arm is cocke',
above the other. An anchor, when hanging by ring-sl1
up and down.
CHEcxTo ease off.
CLAP ONTo take hold of.
CLAMP DownTo wash down the decks by use of wet swau5je,
squilgees, when undesirable to put much water on the PIN
CALL THE WATCHTo call the men who are to relieve the"
on deck.
CHAFETO rub and wear.
11%!
CLEAR-Pm-RUNNINGA rope so laid down that it can run th PA"
leading blocks without danger of fouling.
it
Doc VANEA small wind vane placed on truck or above ra.0 PAL,I
DERIUCKA spar supported by guys and a topping lift, wl
purchase for hoisting heavy weights made fast to it.
DISMANTLETO unrig a vessel and discharge all stores, etc.
DismAsTEDA ship deprived of her spars by accident or (11) k)
DOWSETo lower, to let down, as to "dowse" sail.
END-FOR-END--TO shift one end of a rope to position occuPie
the other.
FLATTEN IN FORWARDTO haul the head sheets well aft and 3
ships.
FLAGSHIPThe name applied to a vessel with -admiral's trz,
o
hoisted.
FORGING AHEADGoing ahead slowly.
FEND-OFFTO bear off. To keep clear of.
Fist' A MAST OR SPARTO secure it when broken, or weal
' it
- by winding with rope or chain around pieces of wood or Ittk
called fishes, which are laid along the spar.
FULL DUETo secure permanently, secure for a full clue.
SI
FIELD DAYDay for general cleaning of all parts of ship.
441
FRESHEN-THE-NIPTO set up again.
GRANNY'S KNarLike a reef, or square, knot with upper
crossed the wrong way.
PA4,
HAULTo pull on. Also applied to the wind, when shifting'
(It
HoLYsroNEA sandstone used in holystoning decks.
HEAVERA steel spike with wooden handle, used to heave Quo.
in splicing.
HEAVE-TO--,-TO deaden a vessel's headway by bracing some fit titk,
sails aback. To stop a vessel tinder sail without taking
LABORTo roll and pitch heavily.
LEND-A-HANDTO assist. To aid.
149
coast' - Z-LY-THE-RuNTo let go all at once, as by throwing rope

:Iced p?"" a pin.
lAilD-0NComing alternately near the land and then standing
pFIoxff again.
Ovtit re -Out at sea, well clear of the land.
kZARDOutside of the ship.
ab5
AutTo take apart and thoroughly examine and repair.
0 overtake.
e
bwNA boatswain's call denoting the completion of an
all-hands" evolution, and that you can go below. Also to
11A14StP
0
._ doing anything.
tilt vAs5 A rope in the bows of a boat by which she is made fast.
1>ithè4aordT
.HE WonRepeating an order, or call, so it may be
wi0
de
pied
d an'
is
2alt
or
VasAND NEEDLESSewing utensils used in sewing sails or canklek,

1 kkA small steel spike used by sailmakers for making eyeet holes.
tt,----The incline which most masts have toward the stern of
"
1 ship.
_ NIG TAcKLEsTackles used to assist, or take the place of

t ropes.
;ee'
To raise to an upright position.
iO be held by the cable, as a vessel riding to her anchor.
stis,,13,
4tTo haul in, as "Round in" the main brace.
ttsz,,ill To haul in the slack part of a cable or hawser.
4"
bTGTo come up to the wind when about to anchor.
vessel fouling or sinking another by running
toA'NOne
her.
propeller.
sMANA piece of iron with ring attached seized to the
litzb'011ds.
144; PFTo shove off. To separate by altering course.
c
Dos--Two or more spars raised at an angle, lashed and supWeirted
h by guys, having purchases for raising masts or heavy
10g.
g ts.
d:;-/,. Piece of rope or chain made fast at each end; between
s IIII4v1t-heads, for instance.
d :csWooden clamps holding a piece of rubber, used for
of :
kr)ing decks.
tvAti- A MASTTo lower it.
decks.
A mop made of rope or canvas yarns, used for drying
IC.
150
SWAMPTo sink by filling with water.

SCUTTLETO make holes in a ship's bottom to sink her. A 11
or square opening in deck.
SHIPTo take on board. To enlist, to serve on board shil
SHIVERTO cause the sails to shake by the wind.
SLACK OF A ROPEThe part that hangs loose.
SLEWTo turn about.
STAND ByTo be ready.
SWINGA ship turns, or swings, to her anchor with the will
tide.
SWING SHIPHeading ship successively on the various P01P1
compass.
TAUTTight.
TARPAULINSCanvas covers for hatches, for covering or 1)11)

ing decks.
TiumTo arrange the vessel in desired position, as 'Tri111
boat."
TURN-THE-HANDS-TOTO start all hands at Work.
TURNBUCKLEA link with an adjustable screw for connect
parts of a bar or rod together. Used on Jacob's Is
ridge ropes, guys, etc.
e(
UNSHIPTO take anything from the place in which it is n7v
VEERTO pay out. Also applied to a shifting wind, as
veers aft."
1
VEER AND HAULTO veer on one part and haul on anotherte
connected to same spar or movable article. Also aPPII
shifting wind.
WATER-LOGGED--When a vessel is so full of water as to be 1/1
and unmanageable.
WEATHER GAUGETO windward of. To get the better Of'
WEIGHTo heave an anchor out of the ground.
WIND A BOATTO turn her end for end, at a dock for instat
WIND-DouNDDetained by contrary winds.
WIND-FALLA rush Of wind from a high land. A stroke
luck.
.1
YAWTo deviate from a course. A vessel sometimes yaW"
and forth in steering.
of I
TIDES.
A WINDWARD TIDEWhen the wind and tide are in 1:1
directions.
A LEEWARD TIDEWind and tide are together. Tide is s
to leeward.
IL
SEAMANSHIP.
I5I
TIDETide running out.
roti StA7.
13 T_IDETide running in.
vv ATERWater has no motion due to tide. Usually near
jp.
`1111e of either high or low water.
1)vvARD EBBTide ebbing, and wind blowing in.
w4Ith EBBTide ebbing, and wind also blowing out.
LtINDWARD FLooDTide setting in and wind blowing out.
EWAED FLooDTide and wind both setting in.
110 TIDEThe tides just after the full or new moon. The
arange of the tide is then greatest. The high water is higher,
the low water lower than at any other time.
i.TIIIEOccurs near first and third quarters. The range is
The high water is not so high, nor is the low water
- 'ow as at other times during the moon's phases.
ri
Lag'
avis
opv`
is
4ssr
orti(
at (
rth,
'
ats
4ts
'IP
heti
e
CHAPTER IV
BOATS
CONTENTS.
ds
SeS
Oh
of Boats
!Mature of Boats
154
155
4t Gear
Boats
ileral Service with Boats
4tS under Oars
ikt3 under Sail
Ileiloles of Boat
-sailing
eeral
i Remarks on Reefing, Squalls, etc.
'afichng Force
IlLand-Away
153
155
156
157
159
164
165
167
170
\G`k
Q.
BOATS
CLASSES OF BOATS.
ek
11):
t4t
Q. What boats are generally carried on shipboard?
ste
A. Launches, cutters, whaleboats, and dinghies ,, so
launches; steam cutters, or steam whalers; barges anu
times wherries. Punts and catamarans are also carried
work along the water-line, such as painting, cleaning (9
etc.
Q. What general classes of boats are in use at sea?
A. Wooden boatsalways used in our service; metal h
canvas collapsible boats are in general use in the nr6
service. These boats vary greatly in size and shape.
Q. What are the three systems of building modern 1003o;
ts
A. (I) Cartel; planks lie alongside each other withottl
lapping, and run fore a'nd aft.
ect
(2) Clinker; planks fore and aft, overlapping on
like weatherboarding on a house.
tote
(3) Diagonal built; planks run diagonally from g thy
of
45
with
keel.
Tw
of
to keel at an angle
nesses of planking at right angles to each,hot
are used. It makes a heavy boat. This ine'ro 0. I
used in the foreign services for large boats el 4ts)
A,
heavy weights.
wet,
Q. What system is used in the U. S. Navy?
obab
A. The Carve! system.
Q. What are launches, cutters, whaleboats, and bargt
e tc
for what used?
stores Q8hi
A. Launches are large, heavy boats for carryingCtItter5
men, and fitted to mount a light gun in bow.
e, A
smaller and may be used for same general purposes; a'sit
Both
of
running
boats.
the
above
used for
have square,. t re(i
Whalers; double-ended boats with or without deadwoo(' te re
for running boats and life-boats. They steer in a sea' I
a long oar and are far easier handled than a cutter; are i rh r,
single banked. The captain's gig is a whaler. Ding!' c .a1
small handy-boats; square stern, generally pulling
htio
banked, four oars; used for market boat and light rough tc' ste
Barges are the personal boats of flag officers; like a large it tor
usually fourteen oars; square or round stern. Steam lat't
cutters and whalers are boats with the above qualities, fil
run by steam.
Li
BOATS.
155
Q. I/
A. I .ew are boats stowed on a man-of-war?
"-Ife-boats and some cutters swing at their davits, being
ackrsed for sea by gripes, binding them against their stronghips: Launches, steamers, and some cutters are, in large
stowed in cradles on gallows frame; sometimes stowed
tekists of two or three, each in its own cradle. Cradles for
ers in small ships are on the rail.
NOMENCLATURE.
ta.
I ..Witat
are the following parts of a boat and outfit: Keel?
}lee es? Stem? Sternpost? Deadwood? Strakes? Sheer?
strake? Thwarts? Rising? Fore-sheets? Stern-sheets?
cikel3eard? Plug? Stretcher? Crutch? Rudder? Tiller-yoke?
0irliards? Rowlocks? Trailing line? Thrum mats? Oars?
?IQ Blade? Handle? Heel of mast? Step of mast? Maint5 rails? Goose-neck? Head? Tack? Clew? Sheet? Halliards?
g? c Sliding gunter rig? Sprit? Sprit rig? Lug rig? Sloop
Q uyaf , ? Boom? Shroud?
hat rigs do the various boats use?
ed
tho,.ar,ges, whalers and cutters, the sliding gunter with or
k; cF` Jib; cailing-launches, sloop rig; steamers usually lug
'ttghies, sprit rig.
tl
oil
BOAT GEAR.
tts?WhY is a detaching apparatus fitted to some and not all
A,
i fitted only to life-boats, because it is necessary to
ebabthen while ship is going ahead and the boat would
t 'Y swamp if both falls were not cast off immediately the
s aOtlehes the water. Other boats being lowered only when
re5 f\V:1 ?, is still, do not require this apparatus.
cCt a "flat
articles of equipment should always be kept in all
re
y?f a ship at sea?
51
lid er and tiller each fitted with light laniard; plug
4 to keel by good laniard; set of rowlocks with two
d'
I 4"es; three boat-hooks; boat bucket for bailing and genite1 5. thse; breaker with sufficient good water for proposed crew
1
airee days; boat-box containing equipment given in Boat
11,1 Book; fire-works of some satisfactory kind to attract
ct st2n; provisions to last crew three days; painters in bow
anchor and cable; masts, spars, rigging and sails, in
Loo re,.,srn;
ver ready for use; boat tarpaulin; I set of oars with
Litt' clitPite for one thwart; awning and stanchions if climatic
'Its require it; on:. set of stretchers; 2 foot red signal
136
stkse
fflags with staff;'ensign and staff; answering pennant alld
oil lantern, filled, trimmed and ready for lighting; fitted Q.
A.
shutter for signalling, and can of spare oil; compa55i
4'tei
signal book; (if whaler, a crutch and steering oar).
Q. What of these articles are removed on arrival ill.sPi;
i /.
A. Provisions are stowed in store-room; the compa' .a,t
navigator's store-room; the steering oar and crutch, 1
and fireworks, provided they are not stowed in the b oat" A.
aq
are stowed below.
ARM-AND-AWAY BOATS.
se
Q. What equipment does a boat carry when "Araled

,1 way on Distant Service?"
one
A. She carries all of the above articles and also 0
' 1
401)Q.
d set of weather cloths or arm curtains (these are 11-e1.44
kept in boat-box), boat distinguishing flag, i pair t old
glasses; two hand grapnels, fitted with chain or rope;
vas; boat-stove, if allowed, and fuel, as necessary (it Stove ,
(
1
allimered, a bucket with sand in it should be carried); Pr0v151
ddepesding on the probable length of service; for drill, 00e (2
bread, one box canned meat, two breakers of water i5 t
tient. In going on distant service provisions made IV
(I) bread in water-proof tin; (2) fresh water in elliptical b '
e
ers not over 20 gals. each; (3) one small breaker vil.st,
(4) canned meats; (5) coffee, tea, sugar and salt in wal;el-ai,t) A
packages. These should be previously prepared and
ready. Most boats are supplied with a box of medical sa0e1
and bandages. Crew is armed with rifles and belts op; G
should be stowed in arm curtains (weather cloths); a
tion (not less than too rounds per rifle, so for each re'rec
H artillery boat, the gun and complete equipments
pounder, or ; kat
least 20 rounds for field gun, 6o for
ge
Colt's or Gatling gun; crew armed as per Infantry tf 'Ii
4
tions. The senior officer's boat carries, in addition
4 re ed
above: (e) complete set of boat signals with d
r
i
s
t
i
n
g
a
l
e
number or pennant for each boat, (2) binoculars, (3) r"I

4r
o
Very Night Signals with at least three rockets.
kinds
of
service?
boat
Q. What are the different
A. Distant Service; crew only is carried, intended
expedition at considerable distance ifom ship, occuPYble, ern
eral days. (2) Cutting Out; carry as many men as possi
out unduly crowding it. Intended for a short expeditiol
cutting out of a vessel from landing, or for the surrr"
capture of an armed vessel. (3) For Landing Force. At
various squads and sections are assigned to the variout
t f 114:1
BOATS.
157
are used to carry battalion ashore. (4) Ordinary exer0. ,,,PuRing, sailing, ship's service, and fleet drill.
rthat is the call for each?
vietkrna-and-away boats, followed by one blast means distant
or e; two blasts, cutting out; three blasts, landing force.
,..,exercise the boats are called away by ordinary calls or
Q.taY all boats" without any blasts.
A;:1'hat is done when secure is sounded?
areoata go to their designated places for manning or diswan.111g. Everything is returned to the regular place for
se e; men return and fall in abreast boats; coxswains report
ure to officer of the boat.
or
in
Lt-
ed
GENERAL SERVICE WITH BOATS.

t what other drills of a special nature should the crew of
e drilled and instructed?
rIciquiPped boats: (i) Rowing with muffled oars; (2) emand disembarking on the beach; (3) target practice by
vi51 tell
'
rews and from boat afloat. When not equipped: (I)
tie (2 Parties, i. e. instructed in rescuing people from a wreck,
Ore parties.
is
wit_len would you use muffled oars?
unen trying to surprise an enemy on boat expedition.
1
'0 es, uder these circumstances, what other precautions are
-ary?
Abs
L al 1_ olute silence, and pulling a dry oar.
sop gen
" rescuing people from a wreck, in a sea-way, what are
era' Principles to be followed?
as1s enerally go to leeward, keep clear of wreckage and of
ovde, in order to prevent swamping, and to facilitate
311 Wre g off." Throw heaving lines aboard, and allow people
toJump overboard; then haul them in the boat. CirSt
trees in each case will probably alter these details.
kw equip for "Fire Party?"
got re,Igniar boat's crew should go in boat. Boat should be
nea.nd
fY0 billy,"equipped as rapidly as possible with buckets,
grapnels, and lines for towing, and armorer's
WI_ unshackling or slipping cables.
ft )3 uat is the boat-distinguishing flag, and how marked?
of each ship are numbered in the following order
toe, ers fg,_ with No.
Steamers, sailing launches, cutters,
barges, gigs and dinghies. The number, over the
13," is the boat's distinguishing number.
oisI
cc. At a 1?oat flotilla, how can you tell the number of a boat?
drill each boat is required to carry on staff in bow
Q A
asbr
via 41,Pats
158
ist .S)
a rectangular white flag 26" x 18", with ship's distingli 4 (
letter and boat's number (or initial letter of her Penlia. 1 A
J+1
pennant is assigned her), painted on it in black letteo3
feet
figures to read from staff to fly; staff to show four
Jat
rail.
Q. How are hospital boats distinguished?
1.
6
but
carryift
others,
like
flcif
A. They display a flag in the bow
Geneva cross?
Q. How is a hospital boat equipped?
crew,i
A. Similar to other boats, except the officer or
carry no arms whatever. A complete medical and surgice; L
and usually stretchers and other surgical convenienc wad
carried. It should be a light, fast-pulling boat.
41val
Q. In a ship's boat formation where are the steamer
?
ced
pla
artillery boats usually
cetitr' ,
A. On the flanks, and often one or more are in the
line?
Q. What additional equipment do steamers have?
A. They should have signal masts and yards.
t .41 Q.
Q. On a distant service expedition what importarl
should always receive attention?
A. As far as military fixtures are concerned, they oil, t b,
k
'
the nature of the expedition; but the rules to be alw3
the lookout and guard against surprises are obligatorY
man reet
of the health is absolutely necessary, as a sickreceive
well men to attend him; therefore this should
consideration from every individual man. Drinking
)
water is always dangerous unless it is boiled, even when ylraf
1
ti4s
10
t1
bowel
produces
often
change
as
the
it,
drink
ashore
Always use ship's distilled water if possible; otherwise, Ode
boil water before drinking it. In tropical climates, neve'.
A.
without an overhead protection; an awning, or boat
spread as an awning will suffice.
Q. When flotilla from fleet is called away, where cl
form?
A. They form where directed in line of columns; b
each ship form columns in the order the ships would
formation; flagship's boats on right; intervals betW
columns of four boat lengths (050 feet). The distance
boats in column, i boat length (40 feet); hospital boats
of lines, or columns.
Q. When boats cannot be lowered, where are articles
A. Unless otherwise ordered, abreast boats. Crew f0
in order of thwarts, supernumeraries, etc., on left;
lower and at falls, in boat at their stations.
159
BOATS.
01151t, Q w
hen boats are called away for exercise, what are pro'ql?
tell
et a 4t 0 equipments except those required to be kept in the
(-). are provided.
qt. Who on board ship are supposed to be proficient in
rro. 4.1118?
Pr" very class of enlisted men, including marines, should be
.clent in boating.
After the boat is armed and reported ready, what is to
'tone?
;icti A.
T,
iCeS N4,,,`-'lliess otherwise ordered, shove off, and take place in
natural order, on starboard beam of your own ship,
ers N'as.rig boat abreast ship's cut-water and half ship's length
Stand by to be taken in tow.
j4k
When in tow of stea:ner, what signals are given for cast,off?
two bithree blasts: Get ready oars and stand by to cast off.
,;asts: Up or out oars. One blast: Cast.off and let fall.
being taken in tow what signals are given for boatars?
A, 1,,
hen tow is straightened out, 3 blasts means: Stand by
irY
v()at oars; 2 blasts: Toss and boat oars.
V.
re4
BOAT EXERCISE, UNDER OARS.
a cutter manned at the gangway, ready to shove

1 P."'N'Crew in uniform, bowmen holding on with boat-hooks to
tri .,as 0_ Pe or jackstay on side, crew on thwarts; the coxswain
S to shove off, drill his crew in the various manceuvres
s.alls and oars. What orders would he give to get away
ert
A
side?
at
4. (0 4,
) Stand by your oars!" Each man gets the proper
do
oar for his thwart and sees it clear. They should
be shoved forward over gunwale, but must be kept
fore and aft. Each man must get his proper oar.
"Up Oars!" Oars are tossed quickly to a vertical
Position and held, their blades fore and aft and in
bet
line, handle of oar in the hand, out-board hand at
,
,
height of shoulder, standing by for next order.
`3)"Shove Off!" Bowmen shove bow smartly away
It
from ship's side with boat-hooks, at the same time
-0'11
shoving her a little ahead if possible; the coxswain
sheering her off with the helm and hauling ahead
on the grab-rope. Fenders are taken in.
4 e, .11 ,
. -11PPose
Nield e r
I60
si
When boat is clear of side, "Let Fall!" Thwaqfli
let blades of oars fall outboard together, Pqfh 14
on handle, stopping oar at the horizontal Wg
Ila`p
little noise as possible, blades trimmed
posit"
pointed directly abeam. This is the
Oars." The blades of the oars should cr
down smartly and together and should neve
it c
allowed to touch the water in letting fall.
ho
511i
(5) "Give Way Together!" All thwartmen taketl'
stroke, keeping accurate stroke with star,u0
stroke oar. As soon as the bowmen have ts
off, they place the boathooks fore and aft tii
seats, stand by their oars, raise them tog'v
touch their blades overhead, and let fall, t3 ()14
up the stroke.
f 11
Q. Suppose in shoving off it is impossible to let
o
die
starboard oars on account of a boat or object in
l'a u
what order should be given?
A. "PORT OARS LET FALL!" Starboard oars would
vertical.
Q. As boat clears obstruction, how would you let fall
o
of starboard oars before the others?
A. "STARBOARD I AND 2 LET FALL!"; then when
are clear,"Starboard Oars Let Fall!"
Q. How lay on your oars?
A."OARs!' given while blade is in water, comPletic,ii
stroke and raise oar at once to level of gunwale, till'
together on stioke oar, blades horizontal.
Q. How check headway of boat?
A. "HOLD WATER!" The blades are dropped verticall):.,
the water and held there. With considerable way on, es11',,
in a laden boat, care is required in holding water, to 11 ,1, A e
the oar taking charge, and being swept in a fore and 8ft 111;;
tion, carrying away the gunwale. Under these circunl`''
it is advisable to drop blade in water, inclined at first
whole force is not brought on it, and then graduallY
blade perpendicular to water as motion slows.
Q. How gain sternboard?
A. "STERN ALL I" Oars are backed. Stroke should
as well as when pulling ahead. Feather oars.

lj
Q. How toss oars?
A. "STAND BY TO Toss!""Toss I" The order toss
just before the stroke is finished. Complete the strolsei.
smartly on handle and with one hand under oar near 11;
throw oar in vertical position, trim blades on stroke ()8'. o\S
handle on bottean of boat, outboard hand at height of sil'
(4)
BOATS.
161
Q
sl
c'w "boat" oars from this position?
ot11 w BOAT THE OARS!" Oars are laid quickly and quietly
().aces outboard, keeping them clear.
,
/71an
the above orders be used for one set of oars without
COJ ILIR to the other?
TYes, by prefixing the side referred to, e. g. "STAND BY
Q. SS Praia!"
LAY ON STARBOARD OARS!"
he
.1-1
, 0w turn short around, say to starboard?
rbo1
BACK STARBOARD, GIVE WAY PORT!" At this man5110 hiliere ,the stroke should be kept, one side shoving forward
t
tne other pulls aft.
le Ix.
A
.1,hat is meant by "Trailing" oars?
NrjoS;ngle banked boats have such long oars, and portable
dercies, that the order "Toss OARS" is never giventhe
all lien "TRAIL" being given instead. At this order, given
,e
a blade is just completing a stroke, the thwartman lets
awthe handle of his oar, which is fitted with trailing line; it
Ivios lure and aft and trails along side, the oar remaining in
etc, but slipping through at some distance. To resume
0
, order: "
1
OARS!" Sometimes it is necessary to throw
Q. ts out of the rowlozks in trailing.
all A. 0 cutters ever trail oars?
1, 41s trailing lines are not fitted, and as rowlocks are in the
eY cannot be trailed as in a whaleboat. It is, however,
lee
tr'
get
convenient
,the oars out of the way quickly.
way to
ad'o!le thus. A "stand by order may or may not be given.
outs 'It water,"TRAIL!" Raise handle quickly until leather
rowlock; hold oar by handle, hand hanging slightly
oars swing fore and aft. To resume oars,"OARS!"
sPeele.
es' shoving off in a single banked boat, what order re'
UP Oaas?"
tit di .:OuT
OARS!"
IISt3Q
5
this ever given to a cutter?
l'es, always when awnings are spread, and often wheat
anre not, for sake of expedition. It is not allowed to be
11 some ships unless boat awnings are spread.
a be What orders are given in coming alongside a boat landilellYbile still several boat-lengths away. "IN Bows," given
c,ulades are in water. Bow oars finish stroke, toss and
arals together, take places in bows, standing erect. fa,cing
11 nu, each holding boat-hook vertically in front of him
eeded. Having way enough on the boat to reach the
43", order, "WAY ENOUGH! This order is always given
162
6
while the oars are in the water, the stroke is finished, one
complete stroke made, then starboard stroke comnoth
"Toss!" The oars are tossed, held vertically an instant. oi I
laid in together. Fenders are thrown out. If too much II
way is on, the boat may be considerably checked by stroket
in stern sheets using boat hook. With awnings spread, 50
must be cast off before "WAY ENouGH." Oars are thr,
clear of rowlocks and laid in without tossing verticallY.
bete.;
boat is to remain alongside for a moment only, it is
,
toss and keep oars vertical until ready to shove off.
however, dangerous in a rough seaway when there are -t
head projections, such as boats and gangways. An oar ae311, ,
ing under one of them would either break oar or punch
t ri
in boat bottom.
Q. What difference between bringing a whaler and a Ct
alongside?
(,)
A. Command "TRAIL Bow," or simply "Bow," for.a
tr3
are
After way enough, instead of tossing, the other oars
A
Q. What general rules govern a good oarsman?
t
r
etec
sits
crew
A. A good oarsman in a properly drilled
his thwart, feet together on stretcher bar, hands togeth e, A
handle with backs up, oar level with rail, blade trimmed;
stroke oar. For explanation, a stroke may be divided. 4
motions. At "GIVE WAY TOGETHER," the first motion
all oat
lean well forward, keep back straight, shove both and
r kt
perfectly straight in front, pointing blade forward
Watel,
the
enter
to
about
is
as
it
just
that
so
it
turn
and
flat part of blade is perpendicular. The second motion
feet on stretcher bar, eyes right aft (not watching blade)
arms perfectly rigid and lean back beyond the vertical.
arms should be kept as straight as if they were two Pie
rope from shoulder to handle of oar. Third motion, is IsT 4.
tlt
as the recovery. When leaning back beyond the vertiq
bending the arms quickly, the blade is pulled throng!' Q.
water, and a sudden force is applied to the oar, which
most efficient portion of stroke; the oar is withdrawn lr'91/1
water, the wrists dropped until the blade is parallel t Q.
water; next stroke taken without stopping.
The principles herein given are most important, and Oti 4It
am all Q.
is less efficient or more unseamanlike than to see pulling.
,
ing with his arms only. Always use the back in
Q. If approaching a crowded landing, what orders wool' ot;11
give?
A. Instead of giving "WAY ENOUGH," approach slno tow;
lay on oars, thus keeping boat under easy control am
l'i
BOATS.
fa
all
Ole
heat
0,
C
Sto
163
ble g other boats. When the bowmen have hold of a suitegiebiect, toss and boat the oars. Should they suddenly
n'to foul another boat, trail them.
trA.o..HOW go through an entrance too narrow for the manipu.of oars?
00 Q 9et good way on boat; toss or trail until through.
Sin making a landing alongside, what difference would be
ty
-1,T.3, in handling a heavily laden boat and a light one?
ter
his en -"e command, "WAY ENOUGH" Or "OARS' is given
ov ri touch further away in the heavily laden boat as she
cat Q e8 her way farther, and is much harder to check alongside.
I ow steer a boat across a rapid current?
1, 11 4,),j
et a range ashore (two objects well separated and in
ttkr
and steer so as to keep them in line. In some cases, in
lit
t rinp make a given course, this may require heading almost
angles to the course.
1131
,.._gaving a long pull against a tide, what is the most effecA 41,thod of making it?
11,ittun inshore where tide is slacker. Sometimes a current
V a counter-current may be found close inshore.
bet
1-1
A.
Ow
would you take a tow from another boat?
net
to,l'e
would probably come up from astern. (Taking a boat
.cf
115 6.) When heading at right angles is a dangerous proceedat ,urcler: "IN Bows!' "LAY ON OARS!" Just before the
at 3
,1fles along near your side, order, "Toss!' The towing
tireseould furnish the line and heave it at bowman, who
Lter
, AN fists it ready for slipping in an instant; or tends it if cirillessances require. Never give a towing boat your painter
4 e abSOIlltely necessary, as you are not free to cast it off
1.
Q,411ergency requires it.
i;t1' A. T ow long a tow line is desirable when towing astern?
"
,1 7 with a short scope. The boat towed should be close
iCat 114
Q 4er counter.
4
Ii 15 A. How tow alongside?
ateh ave a long line leading to forward part of towing boat.
to Q. bsteering carefully.
AOW board a vessel with sternway?
not alt oe,ver go alongside a vessel
backing or with sternway.
Q "1c"She stops.
A: ji"tr hoard a vessel in a seaway?
to leeward, watch chance and jump for sea-ladder. In
bid cmgside either in seaway, or in tideway, the coxswain
r
warn bowmen to look out for the line, which will be
0'1
front the ship.
164
54ie
BOATS UNDER SAIL.
;
Q. A cutter crew pulling a boat, what orders are giveil
get her under sail?
A. "WAY ENOUGH!" After boating oars stand by t 51 is
the masts. All hands cast off spar cover. Bowmen seecie re ,
of foremast clear. Stroke oars see step of mainmast'
at ss,
Starboard oars launch mainmast forward until heel of Oa as j
even with step. Port oars similarly raise fore mast and la tsis`t
it aft. When ready "STEP THE MASTS!" Stroke oars gdi th
heel of main into step; bow oars fore; starboard oars, stafj ato
in their places raise main; port, the fore as far as Pc'si
When nearly vertical the bow and second bow guide forc,r, Ined
step, being careful to get it on proper slue, topmast aft.
{Ise
and second stroke similarly step main. These men cast
shrouds and set them up, hauling taut; men keep down as 11,l"kres
as possible. If jibboom is used it is stepped by bow oars '
Is
always attend jib. As soon as these duties are complete t4(1
men sit down on thwarts. Standing in boat is to be d
little as possible. When ready, "LOOSE SAIL!" StrOke
cast off sheet from main, and take place in stern she.etso he
main sheet in hand. No. 2 stroke attends main brad,
No. 2 mans main-topmast halliards.. No. 2 bow casts
fore sheet, passes it aft, and attends fore brails. Bow oar
I 1,
adrift jib halliards, hauls down head of jib to deck arld$.
halliards. Other bow oar sets up jib tack close down
.,
,,,Yep
sheet aft on proper side. Reports all ready forward. vv"..
ready, "MAKE SAIL!" Haul aft port (or starboard)
Q.
Lay boat by helm to desired course, or by the wind 11.4
case may be. Trim sheets. The topmasts are hoisted
up, the brails cased down (especially main brails with
and well overhauled, the jib halliards hoisted; men collvtit 1JeQ'
k?
to sheets attend sheets. Never belay a sheet in a
Bowman (starboard bow, wfi'en wind from starboard snle'd gea;1.1
bow when from port side) keep a bright lookout, and r teliq
any vessel or possible .obstruction to coxswain, who
but little, owing to sails. Men not actually occupied
on their thwarts, or take such position as they may be (II
to, to trim the boat.
Q. Service cutter on the wind, starboard tack, tack herl
A. Give her a good full, i. e. let her run off just a It
get good headway. Watch the sea (which often prey
cutter from tacking), and at a smooth time, order
ABOUT!" Ease the helm down to port, throwing It
into the wind; at the same time the man at main sheet
main boom amidships. (In doing this never let the
BOATS.
565
411e
IN StIn past rudder head, as this makes a back sail out of it,
(it lie'
oil's headway, which it is most important not to do.)
elj n Wind gets ahead, let main boom swing free until she is
st Assround. As she comes up, when jib begins to shiver,
-; OFF JIB SHEETS!" This is eased off roundly, so presd
:st w Wind against jib will not keep her from coming up into
Iltd Hold on to fore sheet until fore sail ceases to draw
j,
,11g as it draws, it is forcing the boat ahead and therefore
g
ti ng the tacking). Then "LET Go SUE FORE SHEET!"
Wind is so strong as to cause it to flap objectionably,
55
N it into the mast well smothered, so as not to keep her
lied Coming around. If, as she often does, she seems init
b to stop with wind ahead, haul aft jib sheet which was in
re,,
efore commencing to tack. This will pay head off as
As this stops headway, it should not be done unless
ia!,ary. Never hold jib directly out, as is so often seen.
d. (1 1111131y stops the boat without even paying her off. When
tls slightly on new weather bow, haul aft jib and foresheets
,ew tack, and when well around, haul in main sheet and
"er by the wind. If at any time during tacking the boat
0 ers stern-board, shift the helm. If it is seen she will not
-erebund, pay off to old tack with jib, and try again. If
does not allow this, get out oar forward on old lee side
14111 her head around.
plA
PRINCIPLES OF BOAT SAILING.
h Q
-Rhat is meant by the trim of a boat?
ch` ktad one way she sits in the water. She is said to trim by the
)0`. tIva r by the stern, according as she is deeper in the water
or aft.
Wh
a!? -at effect does the position of weights have in sailing a
If
most of the weights Are forward, she will trim by the
drher stern being light and not deep in the water, will
e
blow off to leeward, throwing her head up into the
e will require a weather helm to keep her by the
14.
aeSimilarly, if weights are well aft, her stern will be deep
t; r and bow light. The wind will blow bow off, and she
t wind to fall off, and will require lee helm to keep her by
t
a
iv hat is meant by weather or lee helm?

weather helm is when the rudder and tiller, looking
Point to the weather side; lee, vice versa.
\;1 tile trim of a boat important in sailing her?
es, very. Sometimes a boat may be tacked by shifting
r\ ard
166
t g
ballast alone. For example, if everybody goes forward, . d
stern goes away from the wind and the boat flies UP er
wind. Then, if they go aft quickly, the bow, being light'
blown away from the wind and she is on the other tack. i?
Q. In ordinary sailing, how should the helm be carrieu,f ,
A. Most sailors prefer a very little weather helm.
carries a little lee helm, shift one or two men a little le`v
aft; if too much weather helm, a little forward. Only a Q.
little weather helm should be allowed, as it tends to ue
her headway.
at A.
Q. When sailing before a wind, how should a b
be
trimmed?
A. By the stern; if she trimmed by the bow, the stern 5, is
P5
or
yaw,
light would tend to fly around and make her
cause her to broach to.
Q. What is broaching to?
A. When running before the wind, the stern flies ar
causing the bow to fly up toward the wind. This may c
8,
a boat.
Q. How prevent this?
befor
ss
A. Trim by the stern. Haul jib sheet flat aft
wind. If at all dangerous, take in mainsail and only use
sail with sheet eased; if necessary drag bucket or drogue, St
very heavy weather, use steering oar.
r
Q. In trimming a boat, are the weights put in the
ends of the boat, i. e. would it be wise to put cons ,
ballast in coxswain box, or under fore-sheets?
A. As a rule, never put weights in extreme ends of b31' 441r
Q. How wear a service cutter?
A. Put helm up, ease off sheets as wind hauls aftt
main brails; up mainsail. Brail up main boom and Oil le
main sheet. With wind aft, shift over fore and jib 511 VI
leaving them well eased off. The moment the wind hasTd
the stern, haul aft main sheet. Main boom is eased (l0,11ei 1111
asv4t
brails. This, together with helm and headway, causes d iC
4(
fly up rapidly into wind; just before getting by the will
flat aft the fore and jib sheets.
Ot
,
Q. How heave to in a cutter?
A. Put helm down. Brail up foresail; haul aft wealeio i,ktt
sheet; main boom amidships. The boat can be headed
as desired by easing off jib or main sheet as necessary, 11. it tri
bering the main keeps her head up to, and the jib keePs
from, the wind.
t
Q. How go alongside a ship riding to wind in a sail ,
A. Get abeam of vessel, seeing there is nothing ove'
p
,
111111P
167
th
11 h at -might foul; head for the gangway and stand by sheets
r, i4iil"alliards. When way enough to reach gangway, the best
wna.nshiP is IO order, IN JIB AND FORESAIL!" Put helm
main boom amidships. This throws head sharply in
sh. iv hen bowmen have hold of grab-rope, or jackstays,
'Vs side, "IN MAINSAIL!" In smooth weather, some
ehold on until they have way enough, then shorten sail,
ad 0,,in everything, put helm down and head up to wind.
tikttr-litter under sail; what orders, etc., to get in sail and
BOATS.
Lt
s?
t Si`3AND BY TO SHORTEN SAIL!" The crew man brails
be! tlickierld halliards. Bowman gets jib tack ready for slippidg
"SHORTEN SAIL!" Topmasts are lowered, clews of
s9I
d railed up, sheets eased off and finally let go; jib tack
111 II and halliards being kept fast, jib is smothered into
Ak1a.s4. Men sit down on thwarts, awaiting order, "STOW
"PREPARE TO UNSTEP," when bow and stroke oars
aP ()0
!the gear into sails, wrap sails around masts to make
4611, skin and no big lumps of sail; pass sheets around
Mding them into mast, then, taking a shroud (cast off
sssr this interval by men handy) in each hand, by repeated
qq 't,g from one side to another fraps sails into mast securely;
0
kSt 2t1 ends, Bow and second bow stand by to lift fore
111.9 clear of step; stroke and second stroke similarly the
each reports ready for unstepping forward and aft, when
the'tswain orders, "STAND BY TO UNSTEP; UNSTEP!" Men
414 masts lift them up vertically, leaving fore on port side,
,.t1 starboard. Much care is required in a seaway to
elPi:,` Masts going overboard. Men amidships stand up to
ive and stow masts, after unstepping, launch the main
sh', aft and fore forward; sit down and man thwarts quickly.
eiCuld be possible for the waist man to receive the masts
Nr'en they come down with a run. A well drilled crew
uhhlite Perform this evolution thoroughly and easily in one
vvay Except with a reduced crew .or in a very heavy
h Masts should not be permitted to be stepped singly;
shipshape and encourages laxity at drill.
OtN
,
tl A
v-RAL REMARKS ON REEFING, SQUALLS, ETC.
lii ;"11 is invited to the difference between "Shorten
re'.1
I
Dmil Up." Shorten sail should always embrace
)5
st s 9f top;nasts, while .at brail up the halliards are kept
Din
"(or foresail), means brail up,
bo: it "Mlarly "Up Mainsail
halliards fast. "In Mainsail" (or foresail), means to
ef' "11)
tnasts and brail up.
168
Q. How reef sail?

A. Luff her up a little with helm. Ease down topmast b el
liarfls. Secure reef earings at tack of sail, pass points a, Q
foot of sail. Earing in leech should be tightly bound 01 A
' d
foot of sail, not around boom; hoist away to put her on cle
tack; keep boat under command if possible, while reefing' al
Q
Q. When is it time to reef?
A.
A. When a boat begins to take in water over lee rail.
Q. What is meant by "wing and wing"?ril
A. When a boat sailing before the wind rigs foresail Li Q.
A
opposite side from main, she is sailing wing and wing.
.Q. Is this safe?
on
A. Yes, in moderate weather.
d 0 Q.
Q. How is the fore rigged out?
A,
A. An oar, or boathook, is placed in clew and shove
ki
being held in place by the sheets which act as guys.
II)
Q. Why is it dangerous to carry weights in extreme
Q.
boats?
A. It destroys their power of floating and in a heal,
does not permit them to ride over waves, but invites swal/.v.01 f,v. 1
Q. If it is found necessary to carry ballast in a ship's
A, I
what should it be?
A. Invariably water in breakers. Never carry sinkinigoi
last, i. e. ballast heavier than water. Stow weights as' A
V
possible.
6;
Q. How stow cargo in a ship's boat?
A. Stow it so there will be no danger of its shiftiriSo (
seaway. Keep a place clear amidships for baling out. P,,,r,
should stand on a thwart or sit on a gunwale; it is davb Q.
and very unseamanlike.
A: 3
Q. What is meant by "By the Wind?"
cl Q. it
a5
sailing
A. A boat is on, or by, the wind when she is
A)
to the wind as she can and keep good headway.
Q. How sail a boat by the wind?
5
A. Trim her to carry slight weather helm; keep said Ir
full, sheets not too flat aft, but everything drawing ar!i 4?
alive. A very common error is to point boat so high tun''e \
headway is lost and her course is really to leeward of F Q41(1
would make at greater speed if headed off a bit. SlliP. 0 A:
have so little keel and are so flat bottomed that they1,1 4
a great deal of leeway if jammed into the wind. Sheets l''' Iler 11
hauled flatter aft in smooth than in rough water.
elt Q.',
Q. What is the best position for receiving a heavy s 4. 11
boat?
he$ R
A. Receive it by luffing to meet it. A heavy sea a-
BOATS.
569
tirtgerus. If the course puts a boat in trough of heavy sea,

ellsbetter to head off and back, with sea first on quarter and
rOj Q. uti bow.
roti
Linw receive a moderate squall by the wind?
uff enough to shiver sail without spilling all the wind;
at Sheets carefully, and keep heading so you can control
Q. TT
A, C,w receive a strong squall by the wind?
ttilun up into wind; ease off sheets. Do not let go sheets
,t; Q. ?,;eeessary, for this causes you to give up control over her.
Pefore the wind?
he will, running before it, stand a moderate squall. If
otl'ues strong, take in the mainsail. Get main boom up as
Possible to avoid danger of gybing.
tk. n'hat is gybing?
boat gybes when the wind shifts around the stern, causfi3; to come on opposite side of mainsail, causing main boom
iraPidly over from one side to another.
sailing, what is the most dangerous direction to have
4.'A1 at all fresh?
Q stern.
k why)
tecause
of the danger of gybing if wind changes, or if

t," Yaws, which she may dp; and the danger of "Broaching
Q ,4rld of boom dipping, which might capsize the boat.
hi.. what is a good precaution in this case against main boom
A:lk?
e L
lias.L1 it to leeward.
cu.v avoid running dead to leeward?
Q. On with wind first on one quarter then on other.
4."bat is headreach?
5 Q itit distance gained to windward while boat is tacking.
k: it appreciable?
44 es, in a good sailing boat, which tacks without losing
several boat lengths are sometimes made.
i;
'
11 41? an a man-of-war's boat be tacked without losing head113l
41,1 es: as a rule, if .properly trimmed and handled, she
Q never lose headway except in a heavy sea.
II , \P it very safe to gybe?
,513)II ,.'es; in moderate breezes. If the breeze is fresh, always
gp before letting the wind shift from one quarter to the
73 A
Caught at sea in a gale in an open boat, what do?
111' sea-anchor by lashing spars and sails together, sails
fro
170
411111KE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
loosed. Fit span to this and ride by painter. If oil is

use bag of it on sea anchor
THE LANDING FORCE.

Q. What is meant by the landing force?
A. The station bill of each ship provides for landhl
battalion in the boats of the ship. The details govettled
1211,e t
landing are regularly laid down, and the force thus .
'
asn
spoken of as a landing force. For actual service
tl
deemed
entire battalion, or such portion of it as may be
sary, is landed, but the drill should always embrace the
party.
Q. What general system is observed in the landing? :red
A. The various squads, sections, etc., equip as reclu",e
Infantry Regulations, and man boats to which they a'bre
tailed at assigned places. Boats then form in order
ship, generally in tow of a steamer. They are towed ts
the shore. While details vary, the drill generally assull'e fo
the landing is likely to be opposed. The boats therefores
line before reaching the beach, head in, covered by
from artillery boats on flank and center, and sometivIto
ship's fire over their heads. The moment the bows, on
men of the battalion jump overboard, spread out, 1 st
skirmish line, and advance. The men in thwarts arluder
sheets should be so arranged and the boats in such 0,re n
line when they approach the beach that the skirmish le
be formed quickly, and in the same manner as from t
talion in time. The boatkeepers care for the boats,
anchors off the beach, hauling boats out, protecting the 'f
make preparations for the re-embarking of the forceiied
are under the orders of an officer, or petty officer, deta
beach-master.
de
Q. What general arrangement of men in boats is 1113
landing?
A. So far as possible, men are placed in boats so as (01
serve battalion organization when landed. A section ,t
men) should in all cases go in boat together; infantry scr,
in cutters, or whalers; artillery sections in launches an
et? cd
boats which are fitted for field guns.
liar(
Q. How are men of a landing force armed and equiPP
A. Crews of boats carrying field or boat guns a.1;c1;I viillet
and equipped as artillery; other boats as infantry, a" I ersa
or heavy marching order as ordered.
Q. What special details of men are provided for, 3 t
what purposes, and how armed?
AO,
171
tloneers: One man for each section landed, a petty officer

detailed as leader; equipped with axes, spades, picks,
saws and entrenching tools; unless otherwise ordered,
they are armed with revolvers. Their function is to
assist in clearing obstructions, throwing up entrenchments, etc.
4atmunition Party: One man for each section landed. If
dee
a battalion is landed, the ammunition party is in charge
t
re c
Of a petty officer. Unless otherwise ordered, are
armed with revolvers. Dutiesto provide and transNit
Port excess ammunition and ordnance stores, the
amount carried depending on the probable required ,., Inents of the service.
"Inntissariat: One messman detailed as cook for every
re
section landed; armed with revolvers. Under direction
,lbee
of commissioned, or petty officer, detailed as such;
ott'
transport and furnish food supplies for landing force,
st
fe
the amount landed depending on the accessibility of
the ships, probable length of stay, etc.
ties `linbulance Party: One man for every two sections (comtoe
Panies) landed. Under medical officer; carry surgical
instruments, medicines, etc., and one stretcher for each
)0111
t, wo men of party; Geneva Crosses left arm; not armed.
rdee
ignal Men: A number deemed necessary; senior detailed
as leader, armed with revolvers unless otherwise
13, directed; carry signal apparatus.
[3111 'at Keepers: Under general charge of beachmaster.
11.1,
Whalers have one boat keeper, cutters and launches
t,wo
or four; armed with rifles; lookout for boats,
Liled s aaul thcm
out to moorings, etc.
taff Petty officers, detailed to assist adjutant and other
od
officers of battalion staff, when necessary; armed with
to c cutlass and revolvers, perform the duties assigned them.
. 101" bearers and buglers are armed with revolvers only.
iect '
:
'es .0 the men of the battalion carry any provisions them1 1 ,1,,r is it all carried by the commissariat?
4td Ile emergency ration for two days' service may be
ed? harl each man, to be carried in his haversack; it consists
al
1-bread, 20 ounces, one two-pound tin of corned beef;
Vt,se,.es sugar and 4 ounces coffee in small bags furnished in
lek This ration is intended for operations away from
aod eochate base, forced march, etc., where commissariat could
nveniently operate.
172
HE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
Q. What is meant by being fully equipped?

A. Each man carries packed knapsack, haversack, roill r
blanket, overcoat, cartridge belt, filled canteen, and lef Q.
knife lanyard is hauled down straight in front and tucked
of cartridge belt.
Q. What is meant by being lightly equipped?
d
A. Each man carries filled canteen, cartridge belt. ey
leggins.
Q. How are these put on?
e
A. Haversack in rear of left hip; canteen in rear of rlgi
sth
rear
with cartridge belt over both haversack slings and
of canteen; knapsack strapped on back, straps coming al NI
shoulders.
Q. What should haversack contain when packed?
A. Rations, knife, fork, spoon, plate, tobacco.
I\ 1
Q. How is a knapsack packed, and what does it covt.sie, Q.
A. It contains one single blanket; / suit blue or we e5,
required, / suit underclothes, 2 pairs socks, / pair suc
watch cap, 2 white hats, packed as follows: Blanket fia,tefs
t
exact size of knapsack, next to the back; undershirt an cc
sp) 1)11e
ers folded separately, flat folds, side by side, forming
layer; extra suit similarly folded forming third and outer re
each layer to fit knapsack snugly; shoes tucked down,do d
each side, soles outward, heels up and flush with top t'
ing; cap, hats and socks on top of all; then make fast br
A
Knapsack pocket will contain towel, soap, comb, tooth ig
sewing kit, pipe, tobacco, etc. Rubber blanket rolled t eo 'ad
VI
se
,
on its width, the middle of it across top of knapsack
bx two straps, the ends of latter to be tightly coiled rot
ends of roll secured down the sides of knapsack by but't
over them the beckets that secure the flap. Overcoatectif
rolled lengthwise inside the rubber blanket. The cup.is s
by a loop on bottom of knapsack. Sometimes rain fc
may be ordered carried instead of rubber blankets.
case they are secured in the same manner as the rubber bE r
Any of the above mentioned articles, when not reqtdr,!
the
be omitted by order, and on actual service, many of
omitted.
Q. If knapsack is not supplied, what articles are carried
how made up?
A. All the above articles are carried neatly rolled uP
wise in a blanket and stopped at ends. The roll is place('
left shoulder and both ends secured under right arm.
Q. What arms are carried by battalion?
A. Arms for special details are given above. Infantd
BOATS.
173
:.re armed with rifle. Artillery sections, as in artillery

1st P. 0. and Nos. i to 8 inclusive, are armed with
. Olver, the remainder with rifles.
in,v_hat is the general part taken by steam launches in
ti
eY carry the battalion commander and staff, color

signalmen, etc., and guns not intended for landing.
efover landing party from flank, center, or rear. They are
h r towing and may be used for floating boats that
he,een beached off to moorings. They are never to be
Ji and the portion of the force carried ashore in them
b.. ,
ferried to and from the beach in a pulling boat. In
4rking, they cover and protect the landing with their
, 4.
p
Li
What boats is the artillerythat is to be landed carried?
or large cutters.
g,t launches
actual service away from
water, how do the comyt't and ammunition party transport supplies?

e best available method must be adopted. Wheeled
'tie,ca
tr, horses or other animals can usually be procured.
era
.nsportation must be obtained in the most feasible
!din actual operations what flag displayed by the enemy
Tinever be fired on?
IJ.e red-cross flag.
Y hat other flag should usually be respected.
rwhite flag. An enemy would be more likely to use this
d'aith than the red cross. The white flag should never
On without very strong grounds for thinking it a ruse.
ZA
115
CHAPTER V
ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY

CONTENTS.
PAGE
Guns
41'41
4 Metal
of a Gun
eh Mechanisms
,*Rs-Schroeder Breech Mechanism
"tzhkiss Breech Mechanism
:,111ell Breech Mechanism
1;11er Breech Mechanism
S Breech Mechanism
Mounts
trialt!inition
hesing Charges
)41ers
:j ler and Powder Charges
arid Separate Ammunition
iries and Shell-rooms
l'edoes
tions on Gun at which Stationed

Cuts
of Naval Guns
141
Rules
ery
Pointing
raZY and Rapidity of Fire
,
tion of Range
'
aPtainsAiming Drill
177
178
179
182
183
184
185
185
187
187
189
192
193
195
196
197
198
199
200
200
201
202
202
202
204
2o5
176
THE BLUEJACKETS MANUAL.
Age
Firing Regulations
Care and Preservation of Ordnance Outfit ...........
Miscellaneous Instructions
Liquid for Recoil Cylinders
.
Preservation of Cartridge Cases
Gas Check Pads and Rings
Remarks on Gun Drills
Organization, Gun Divisions, etc
Crews in Reserve
Boarders and Riflemen
Raking Fire
Miscellaneous Remarks on Gun Drills
Detail Notes on Drill of Main Battery.................
Detail Notes on Drill of Secondary Battery............

Instructions for Aids to Wounded
ed
1
oirt
ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY
NAVAL GUNS.
w
%. hat guns are used in the Naval Service?
r.13-1n., tz-in., to-in., 8-in., 7-in., 6-in, 5-in., 4-in., 3-in., 6-pdr.
and 1-pdr.; Colt's Automatic, the Gaffing and Maxim t-pdr.
seni
,i atin; 37-mm. Revolver Cannon (t-pdr.) (no longer pur'
e,
1, but 1:3ine are in use). Small arms: The Lee Straight-pull
k236) has been superseded by the Krag-Jorgensen .303-nun.
he Colt's double-action revolver is used.
What metal is now invariably used in the construction of
aans?
eSteel. This is very carefully prepared; going through many
ts es of annealing and forging to increase its strength and
hat happens when a gun is fired?
f
T first springs out, increasing in diameter, but as soon as
essure within is removed, provided it is below a certain
'limit, it returns to its normal size, owing to the elasticity
thee(
S teel of which it is composed.
la IIPPuse the pressure is above this designed limitcalled
Ts,t,ic limitwhat happens?
gun is permanently deformed. It does not explode be'le steel of which it is made is tested before using and
Its jCapable of being elongated 20 per cent (equal to one-fifth
.ellgth) before fracture. If the elastic strength (or limit)
p:in is 40,000 lbs., any pressure inside of it less than
r square inch would only temporarily enlarge the40,h gun,
;iAlould immediately resume its exact former shape. When
% as an elastic strength of 40,000, its real breaking strength
tit too,000 lbs. Therefore if a pressure inside of say
r 60,000 lbs. is encountered, the gun expands and does
e back to its original shape, but it will not burst at the first
kng as the pressure is below too,000. If two or three
iiiseat'sing
Mow or 60,000 lbs. pressure are fired, each shot

he gun more, and it keeps getting larger until it can
I th e noticed by the naked eye, but the gun may not burst
(4e circumference is one-fifth greater than in the beginning.
hi..4sned, pressures are always well inside of the elastic limit;
"s may be considered absolutely safe.
178
Q. In making guns, what system is used in the Navy?

1
A. Guns are "built up" from various parts, which are sltr0
on over each other; they are the tube, jacket and various
Q. How is this done?
A. First the tube is turned the desired size. It runs the 1
length of gun. Then the jacket, which fits over it, is turneei.
that the inside diameter is slightly less than the outside.dlOv
of the tube. It is then heatedhence expandsuntil it fit5.1
tube. The two are then cooledcausing the jacket to $hlv
and binding it on compresses the tube. Next the WO
. me
similarly shrunk over the jacket and chase of tube, in so
The number of hoops, sizes, etc., vary greatly with various
depending on the pressure inside at each portion of the
of the gun.
Q. What causes a shell to leave the gun when fired?
e
'
A. The powder when burned causes a very great volull
gas. This, too, is highly heated by the heat of the
fr.
It expands, and having no other outlet, forces the shell ill
of it to the muzzle. As the shell gets further along the bore',
gases have a continually greater, chamber to hold thou,if
if
the pressure on each square inch grows constantly less. s,.
same pressure could be maintained behind a shell front
of the explosion until it reaches the muzzle, the gun vol;id
the same diameter all along as it is at the breechfor that thir
ness of metal is required to withstand the pressure at that 1)'
As the pressure decreases along the bore, the gun is grad
tapered down in size, preserving a constant safety mar
strengthover the pressure at any point.
O.
GUN METAL.
IL
Q. What is the general difference between cast iron, W r tss

iron and steel?
A. These are all iron with a greater or less amount of elft60,eis
in them.
WROUGHT IRON contains o to t/s per cent carbon. Is
absolutely pure; is malleable; may be welded; is 11
.
impossible to melt; does not temper.
. 0.
2 to it/2 per cent carbon; is malleable'
STEEL contains /
t
be welded; can be melted at a heat higher than OS
'
to 33000 F.) and is capable of being tetriPer
lea)
CAST IRON contains 2 10 5 per cent carbon; is not mal
cannot be welded; is easily melted, and can be tea
imimmi.....milike
steel.
ammimomminim
Gun steel usually contains about TA per cent carbon.
,11.,
(2550.
t7s1
ORDNANCE AND GUNNERY.
Q. 0
A. ,n what does the strength of gun steel depend?
10 kitej-ntirely on the treatment and processes it goes through
Locl Q. ;)ing run into the mould.
4,nWhat
are the general processes in the manufacture of the
;
sil .. -il a gun?
The fluid steel with proper amount of carbon is cast
e4
solid in a large ingot, usually square with round edges,
01ì
called a flask.
This is then compressed under a powerful hydraulic press,
lio'r
thereby removing blowholes and obtaining very dense
i
metal. This pressure continues until the ingot is cool
e.
3. , and reduces the original length %.
Or
it is then re-heated and forged down to the desired size
in forging press or sometimes by a hammer. About
40 per cent of the original weight of the ingot is
removed during this process, 30 per cent from the uplie
per end, 5 per cent from the bottom, to rid it of
impurities.
4.
It
s. t is then annealed, to remove strains due to forging.
re
It is then cored, a solid core removed from it, rough
V 6.
bored, and turned down nearly to size.
If
It is then reheated and tempered in oil.
It is then re-annealed and sent to gun shop, where it is
'tla'
turned down to desired size and made into a gun,
01
by placing jacket, hoops, etc., on itafter which it is
p '
rifled. Screw-box, chamber, compression slopes, etc.,
do
are turned.
5t1/
PARTS OF A GUNRIFLED GUNS.
u,
it hat are the names of the various principal parts of a gun?
ro
nube, jacket, jacket hoops, chase hoops, locking hoops,
tssio'n band, rear face, muzzle face, chase, bore, chamber, comaslope, gas check seat, lands, grooves, jacket cylinder,
s, iacket, screw box, blanks, threads, sight masses, truns a trunnion faces, rim bases, elevating band, elevating band
ndholes.
1
111hat is a rifled gun?
le;ht is a gun in which spiral grooves are cut in the bore of
t
xl;; causing the shell to turn about its axis during flight.
as
(bit is meant by B. L R., M. L. R., S. B., R. F. G.,
per.
111e3
R.Breech-loading rifle. Powder made up in serge
erriP m.13ags; separate primers, and needs gas check pad in plug.
L. R.Muzzle-loading rifle. Old guns. None are now
ri
made.
It.
180
VIII S. B.-8-in. smooth bore. Old; none now Inade;;50 l'It

C'eye
1
In,
R. F. G.Rapid-fire gun is a gun fitted with a quick'
breech; to be closed with one motion of bar or_ho
Uses fixed or separate ammunition. If separate, Ltiri6 A
oj
and primer are made up in one in a metallic car
.s(
case.
Q. F. G.Quick-firing gun is a gun with quick-cl5
breech operated by single motion of crank or lever,
seI NVss
with automatic lock, and uses separate ammunitioe
r.? 04ku
powder charge put up in a cartridge bag.
Q. What is meant by i3-in., 8-in., or 3-in. R. F. G.? 3-Pd
P et Q
A. All guns from 3-in. to is-in. are designated by the dia'
of bore, hence by the diameter of the shell they fire. j3A. 3- A
gun fires a shell 3-in. in diameter; a is-in. a shell 4I. Q.
diameter.A.
,iit n.
The guns of secondary battery are designated by welb ,r
shellt-pdr., 3-pdr., 6-pdr. The 37-mm. refers to dialect
: tk.
bore in that gun. It is a French gun and its name was re'el,l Is
by us. Not now issued. A Krag-Jorgensen is .303 cal., of II Q.
inches in diameter. A Lee straight-pull is .236; a Colt rev(P` q.
.38-in.; a Springfield 45 is .45-in.
re AQ.
Q. Why is a rifled gun more powerful than a smooth bore '1/4
like diameter?
A. The rifling makes the shell revolve around its axis----keeet ,t
I
it end on; it is therefore possible to fire a long projectile WIst 'i.
ing about three times as much as the round shell which Mt
used with a smooth bore.
A
Q. Why is it impossible to use a long shell with S. B.? 4.40 tv_
A. Because without the rifling to give it the rotary 11119-4,
or
would "tumble," that is, go end over end, and would never
Q.
accurately.
A.
Q. Why is it impossible to use a heavier shell?
A. Because being round, the weight is limited by tne
When a long shell can be used it is limited by the length
.
,V
Q. What are the different parts of the rifling?
V.
A. Lands and grooves.
A,
Q. What are lands and grooves?
A. The spiral depressions in the surface of the bore ekt1
tr
grooves; the raised spaces between are lands.
D
Q. What is ribbed rifling, and when used?
A. When grooves are very wide and lands are very hi
.1
it is called ribbed rifling. I, 3, 6-pdr. and 37-mm. usuallY Q411-1
this rifling.
?k.
0. What is the shape of the ordinary spiral of rifling?
A. It starts from the powder chamber, then gradually ittel
its twist until shortly before it reaches the muzzle it has a erl Iiif
__.-4
Iwist
jos
181
1)111
f one complete turn in 25 calibers length. This varies

kb,ewhat.. Some
small guns have uniform twist from begin-
iiQ.
..4
A How does the rifling impart a twist to
projectile?
trI Fol
k . rifling band is secured in an undercut score around the
'etlie near base. This has the diameter of the bore at the
105 0 grooves. When fired
the lands cut into the surface of
fi
causing it, and hence the projectile, to turn in the bore.
I
st.Yhat would happen if rifling band was not well secured
dr.? ok
leliti?Ivould turn and the shell would nothence the shell
onle
tumble shortly after leaving the muzzle.
3"1 What
IYhat is the depth of grooves?
in. Q. ;11.3out 1-20 inch.
What do you mean by the caliber of a gun?
rhtQ. .,1171e diameter of the bore in inches.
te A. .IN hat is meant by I. V., or initial velocity?
ia is 'he velocity of the projectile when it leaves the muzzle.
estimated in feet per second, called fs., or foot seconds.
r
A. What is a high-powered gun?
Q;
)ne whose I. V. is 2500 fs. or above.
,What velocities are common now in our guns?
ore
'Iost modern U. S. naval guns now give an I. V. of 2500
fs. The 5-in. with 50-lb. shell makes 3300 fs.
ore
,Arhat affects the velocity of projectile principally?
Lost
t he pressure behind ithence the quantity and quality of
ej, and the length of gun.
A LVIIY does the length of gun affect it?
ti0 bj'e'eoause the longer the gun the longer the projectile is
eted th pressure behind it, hence the greater its velocity
e,
A'
A: 13103,v is the length of a gun designated?
Y the number of calibers it is long. Thus if a To-in, gun
ti 40 inches long (instead of saying it was 334 feet long),
ktillv111d say
. it was a 40-caliber io-in. gun. Similarly the
of bore is spoken of in calibers; also the length of rifling.
A. hat is the length of bore? Length of rifling?
re go;he distance from face of breech plug to the muzzle. The
e hs
" of rifling is the distance from the beginning of rifling to
Q'tizzle
A: 'here does it begin?
ahlferward of compression slope, which is forward of powder
A..IYhat
T
is the powder chamber?
Nt'llat part of the bore in which the powder is placed before
It is larger than the remainder of bore, to increase the
Cr charge
without making it too long.
182
Q. What is windage?
A. It is only found in muzzle-loading guns. It is the sPay
between the shell and the surface of the bore of the gUl
breech-loading guns the shell just touches the surface oi
bore all around.
.Q. How many grooves has a gun?
A. 4-in. and 5-in. R. F. G. have each 3o grooves. All
above that caliber have a number of grooves equal to four
the caliber of the gunapproximately.
Q. What is the preponderance" of the breech?
A. It is the force required to raise the breech, suppusilo
trunnions had no friction. If the gun was exactly balauc
breech e
trunnions there would be no preponderance. If the
et
uzzlol
m
if
e;
the
of the gun is heaviest it has a preponderanc
is heaviest, a negative preponderance. Generally a small ne'
II
preponderance is allowed so that when shell is placed
the weight will not make the gun hard to elevate.
Q. What general rule for finding approximate weight of Qt.
its projectile and charge?
A. If d equals the diameter of bore, d cubed divided )' 3
equals the weight of the gun in tons; d cubed divided.
equals the weight of the projectile in pounds; d cubed
by 4 equals the weight of the charge brown powder; d
divided by 5 to 7 equals the weight in pounds of stno,"
powder. The weight of smokeless powder varies so greatlY it
different marks of the same gun that this rule, only appr itt
in any case, gives only a very general approximation f1. t
class of powder.
BREECH MECHANISMS.
Q. What qualities has a good breech mechanism?
A. 1. Completely stops the escape of all gas to rear.
2. Must be strong enough to withstand pressure.
ny,
3. Simple, and not easily put out of order; parts
and easily replaced.
4. Easy to work.
k. 1
a
5. Rapid, so as to increase rapidity of fire.
t
the
in
Q. What is the principal breech mechanism in use
'10
service?
A. Small guns: Driggs-Shroeder and Hotchkiss breech ti
anism.
Medium caliber R. F. G.: Dashiell or Fletcher.
Large caliber: Fletcher or Vickers.
Q. How do these check the escape of gas to the rear? \I *11,4"
A. Rapid-fire guns have the powder charge in case. r
fired the case expands against the sides of powder chambe
11
183
a tbs,the gases from coming to the rear, there being no exit

tr,;-.direction.
and B. L. R., having charges in serge bags, have the De
gas check on forward part of breech plug, which keeps
t s,
s from escaping around the plug. Vent-sealing primer in
q,11
e "Vs gases from escaping in the same way that the car*
.,t;,tse does in R. F. G.
hat is the action of the De Bange gas check?
'
1 consists of a circular pad of 65 per cent asbestos, 35 per
illutton tallow held between two discs; the mushroom is
e,N, the breech plug abaft, and the mushroom stem goes
e 0,11 both discs and pad. When the gun fires the breech plug
e thiast the mushroom head is forced back, and this pressure
t cl,
e Pad squeezes it and the edges are pressed out against
,eeic seatthe greater the pressure the harder and more
t.aeèlY the edges of the pad are pressed out, thtz stopping
gtl rWars. A split ring is now sometimes used instead of the
d disc
r ,criv is the breeeh plug prevented from blowing out to the
A,Tlen gun is fired?
111 t is held in place by a screw-thread on the plug engaging
Iseorresponding screw-thread in the screw box.
Ileil".`,,C)NV is the plug quickly disengaged from screw-threads
iy A, "- is desired to open it?
tut ,nks are cut in the screw box and in the plug so that
tipi'
ling the plug a part of a revolution the screw of plug
the's blank in screw box, allowing it to be drawn straight
Q, ear.
g is this done in R. F. guns?
ti'
.31 a system of levers; one motion of main lever turns the
en draws it straight out, then swings it clear of breech.
C).
?
DRIGGS-SCHROEDER MECHANISM.
Scribe the action of the Driggs-Schroeder breech mechanTh
e
block has both a vertical and rotary motion. It hinges

,
11 41ai.t1 bolt, passing through the block, the main cam and
IsIng. The motion of the cam when the main bolt is
eovvers the plug so the threads in the upper part of the
se,1.1gage the corresponding grooves in gun. At the same
ii
r'llg from firing pin, taking against cam, presses the
P'n back until sear catches under the cock notch. As
e4ns the grooves are disengaged the motion of the cam, which
tatsgages a pin in the block, revolves it back and down until
On tray in horizontal position. The plug, during the
a
184
latter part of this motion, presses against the free ends 0

tractors, causing them to eject cartridge case.
ntig tin
Q. What are the names of the various parts of the .,
Schroeder breech mechanism?
.. (1 a t,
A. (r) Breech block, (2) main bolt, (3) operating levelrit tra
guide bolts, (5) main cam, (6) lever-locking piece, (7) ,.to Q,
pin, (8) main spring, (9) sear, (ro) sear spring, (n) extra- d s
Q. What are the names of the various accessories?
,1 9,
A. (r) Babbctt mallet, (2) oil can, (3) firing pin wren 'CO ei
sponge brush, (5) cleaning brush, (6) block support, (7), 0 t
bination screwdriver, (8) front sight, (9) rear sight,(10)
It
?tin
extractor, (II) face plate drift.
Q. What are the chief advantages of this mechanism? tli rill'
A. (r) Rapidity of fire. It is slightly faster than anY ,1, I .
(2) It being possible to easily work the plug with one low A.
enables a crew of three men to work it rapidly, when a 14te
3,
requires four.
HOTCHKISS BREECH MECHANISM.

'501'
Q. Describe the action of the Hotchkiss breech mechaillk
A. It consists of a steel block nearly square, which wi,
and down in a mortise in breech of gun. A double crank
'
0
on right works a crank inside of mortise with a stud eca
end, which travels in a groove in plug. A rocking shaft.
ing the hammer passes through the plug below the housillgci
has a cocking toe on its end. When the handles are tU
p
crank-stud first moves in a circular portion of groove.
does not move, but cocking cam on crank handles pushes CdO
toe back, cocking it. Then the crank stud continues its ,ut
ward motion, and pushes the breech plug down until lbe
unmasked the bore, when it is held by stop bolt. When it
to descend the extractor stud working in extractor groove, vi
is slightly inclined, pulls slowly back, unseating shell; theu
it strikes sharp incline, it jerks back, throwing shell el e(j
breechit hits deflector and falls on large swab provi, $
receive it. The main spring is flat, and mounted on eac'f
of rock shaft. At drill a drill hook relieves tension on 51)
A Mark II model has spiral springs instead of flat; ()the
the mechanism and operation is the same.
Q. Give the names of the various parts of the 14
breech mechanism.
A. (r) Breech block, (2) main bolt, (3) operating lev.eL
guide bolts, (5) main cam,(6) lever-locking piece, (7) fill"'
(8) extractors.
A. (r) Crank, (2) crank stud, (3) crank stud groove,
185
kh
andles, (5) stop bolt, (6) stop bolt groove, (7) face plate,
tlhainmer, (9) firing pin, (m) rocking shaft, (II) main
g. (12) main spring stirrup, (13) main spring rest, (14)
(I5) sear spring, (i6) trigger, (17) cock notch, (i8) cock09) cocking cam, (20) pistol grip, (21) extractor, (22)
Q.et?r stud, (23) extractor stud groove.
s Give the names of the various parts of
the stock, sights
(i erA-CCESSORIES: (I) Stock screw, (2) stock pin, (3) stock

stock
(s) deflector. SIGHTS: (I)Fore sight,
a '
tan(4)
. handles,
g,!nt sight,
(3) sight box, (4) rack and pinion, (5) slid:if, (6) tangent screw. SUPPLIES:(I) Oil can, (2) disitpg tool, (3) screwdriver, (4) cartridge extractor, (5)
c) ,95>k, (6) cleaning brush, (7) bristle sponge.
d, p'hat advantage does this gun possess?
yl is nearly as rapid as the Driggs-Schroeder and is exceedsimple, parts are easy to replace, etc.
DASHIELL BREECH MECHANISM.

1)
,escribe
the action of the Dashiell breech mechanism.
Ihis is a design for rapidly working the interrupted screw
ii
of mechanism. The plug being closed, a pull on the hand
rotates a cogged segment attached to it, thus working the
a pa.'11:1 unlocking plug. When this is done, it is stopped by a
and the center of motion is transferred to its right-hand
'below pivot pin of translating arm. A continued movetherefore swings the arm, withdrawing plug on
'tjtlich when unlocked by the plug, swings to one side ready
c
ading. The cocking is done by one end of the firing pin
or
"g against a cam on inside of housing of plug. The exe
Passes through a hole in the plug and when it is withJerks the case to rear. About one inch lost motion is
w
So a jerk can be brought on cartridge case.
;c1
FLETCHER BREECH MECHANISM.

es, cribe the Fletcher R. F. breech mechanism.
On upper
(
` 1,,s of the interrupted screw typefour blanks.

0
quadrant a rack with teeth at 45 to the axis of
cut, extending partially around circumference. In upper
v_adrant a guide slot is cut, extending circumferentially 450,
tinnen in fore and aft line parallel to axisdistance equal to
of withdrawal of plug. At the forward end this slot is
al yr_
depressed, and ends in a circular depression in plug.
o rter ring is hinged on the right side on same pin on which
Perating lever turns. It is cut on the inner surface with
186
le
blanks and raised portions similar to plug. In its iilWe'dve I
corner it is slotted through and carries a locking device ,,
locks carrier ring to gun when swung to, and locks PItifia
carrier ring when withdrawn. The operating lever has,a
grasp on left end and hinges on hinge pin on right. Its
right-hand end acts as cam on end of extractor and its 0
right-hand surface is shaped into a segment of a circle,oth
five teeth which engage with diagonal rack on plug. fourrac
t,
teeth are so shaped as to fit the threads of plug. The ext,
is a lever turning about a pin. Its inner end fits under t'
of the cartridge case.
Q. Describe its operation.
lad
A. When closed, the plug and the carrier ring are Inc-0(1
er el
place. The locking bolt has its inner end at the upper '
the circumferential part of guide slot in plug, its 011Ler
engaged in a recess in the hinge plate, thus locking Cal
to breech of gun. Rear tooth on lever engages lower tI3i
,
diagonal rack on plug; extractor claw is under rim n't
2. Teeth of lever ,ero II
/
Swing lever to right, through 581
inclined teeth of rack unlocking breech plug from screw tì, b NI
( Ìec
leaving it free for withdrawing. At this instant the Inc'
tiol
reaches end of circumferential slot, sloping motion, ari
first of the teeth to fit section of screw thread; and on
tion of motion of lever, engages these threads, drawl 51
straight to rear, and lock bolt travelling in fore and a rap 5 v
The plug thus moves to rear in carrier ring. 44 more ,,c1:
q 1,1
this part of motion. At this moment the inner end IA
" 6
rf
bolt reaches depression at front end of guide slot.
forces the other end up, pulling lock bolt down, disengag wIt
recess in hinge plate and the plug is locked to carrier ring'havee \\
It
is swung to one side by a further motion of 96 of the
er
Q. On what guns is the Fletcher rapid-fire breech tnec
tt
used?
A. On three, four, five and six-inch rapid-fire guns.
111;
Q. Name the principal parts of the mechanism.
A. (I) Plug, (2) plug rack, (3) guide slot, (4) hil,g
A
(5) hinge plate screws, (6) carrier ring, (7) hinge pin, k o./ tlj
v
pin lock, (9) lever, (to) lever handle, (1t) unlockinr
(12) withdrawing teeth, (13) extractor, (14) extractor Intl' ks
extractor pin lock, (t6) locking bolt, (i7) locking bolt 1ti
locking lever, (19) locking lever pin, (20) locking sPrIlig
electi'c r
locking spring screw, (22) locking bolt recess, (23)
ing case (two pieces), (24) firing pin (four pieces),(25
pin springs (two pieces), (26) firing case lock bolt,(27/,,,
case lock spring, (28) firing case lock grasp, (29) att,a'' \\71
lug, (30) lug lock bolt, (31) lug lock spring, (32) nib
__-..m0M11111111111
187
(33) contact piece, (34) spring socket, (35) firing case

,Q 36)firing case recess.
k? it never used on 8, Io and Tz-in, guns?
l' I .11,1110dification is in general use in these guns.
are the differences?
ki) Instead of carrier ring, a plug tray is hinged to either
,
right or left of gun.
k2) Instead of one lever, a crank with horizontal shaft carrying a worm, rotates a vertical hinge pin carrying
a worm on it. The tray is supported and rotates
on this pin. When the crank is turned the hinge
pin turns, revolving its worm, which engages in
circumferential rack and unlocks gun. This worm
then engages in 450 teeth in a fore and aft rack on
plug, withdrawing it. When completely withdrawn,
it automatically locks itself to tray. As it can come
out no further the entire p ug and tray swings back
o lmias around hinge pin.
this mechanism an extra or?
fitt...")
. Big guns use the charge in serge bags, hence the plug
g 10 with the De Bange gas check and the regular B. L. R.
eA, and there is/do case to extract.
n,hat
VICKERS BREECH MECHANISM.

. wh
Is.
,
at
is
the chief difference between this and the Vickers
c
o A. ilbsin?
1f1 kernstead of having six screw
portions and six blanks, the
e bs, has twelve spaces, nine of which are screw spaces, and
et 111.anks, the screw portions being arranged in steps.
Li
IV hat
advantage has this?
.
1t lessens the distance to turn plug in unlocking. Having a
bearing surface in screw box, plug can be made shorter,
Ond handier, and give that much more space to the gun.
yv hat other Vickers breech mechanism is used in the ser1'
Ii Mechanism
for 6-in. B. L R. or Q. F.
t
vc'Ar does it work?
erY similar to 12-in. It has four thread spaces and two
1tio. Opening it moves a loading tray automatically into
The
of a case, combined with its rapidity in
ic "
directions,
absence
causes it to be very efficient.
GUN MOUNTS.
features are found in every gun mount?
ne weight of gun is supported on trunnions near its
that general
411.11111INIMMII
188
, h
center of gravityso as to allow it to be elevated or deln- .
extreo
,rtv
The trunnions rest in trunnion seats, usually at the
,v tra
of the Y-shaped fork, called the saddle, which itself has a'
pivot, and frictionless bearing in order to permit lateral
Secondary battery guns are pointed by placing shoulder r,60
4-in. and above have hand wheels, which connect to a
gearing, causing the gun to be elevated or trained acc0r.1
' t
the wheel turned. All gun carriages also have hydraulic,
cylinders, which consume the energy of recoil in a certain a't,e h
distance of recoil, and counter recoil system for running
to battery agiin. At present time all gun carriages provibus,
this by counter recoil springs put in cylinders. Instead of ,r0
one spring in each cylinder, a series of short springs seP;vott
by discs are inserted, so that the breaking of one sprill;,1(1
not affect the counter recoil of gun. These functions,
every gun carriage, vary greatly, but the pedestal monnit'as tth
much used for 4, 5 and 6-in. R. F. guns, will be describe
example.
Q. What are the general features of this mount?
15 ktl
Yo
A. The general features of the mount are as follows: A ip
(),
,4
and
abutting
body
rod yoke shrunk over the gun
shoulder thereon, takes hold of two piston rods, wor':0 9, ,
closed hydraulic cylinders, which are themselves cast 1..d er
with the slide in which the gun moves to and fro. The 04
balanced on trunnions, which are supported on a top ca,,,a
The top carriage is of yoke form, resting on rollers and
a heavy vertical pivot extending down completely throle
central body of the pivot stand. The left bracket of Lf
sPra
carriage extends to the rear and supports the vertical '
a worm, which gears into an elevating arc bolted to a b r 011,
like extension of the left side of the slide. The rear 101
of the top carriage furnishes bearings for a horizonta
carrying a worm gearing into a trainingarc extending
pletely around the upper part of the pivot stand. Theo 1,
stand is a frustrum of a cone, bolted to the gun platfo
A
tipper surface forming a roller path and its central Ire
o
t
of
pivot
furnishing bearings at top and bottom for the
carriage. Springs in the recoil cylinder return the gti
,
tery after firing.
ii r e
Q. When gun is fired, what takes place
fr,
jil
A. The top carriage remaining fast holds the slide s.s
coiling by means of the trunnions. The gun itself recoil
it
slide. The piston rods, which are secured to the Piie \,\
e
I
along
sliding
jerked
to
rear--the
pistons
the
yoke are
(i
recoil cylinderswhile the liquid inside escapes from Ili,
c''
of
inside
of piston to the other through the grooves in

189
all the energy of the recoil has thus been taken up, the
I inter recoil springs, expanding between the rear bonnet of
er and the piston, press
the piston forward into its normal
,thus running gun out
to battery.
k: !:,11 heavy gun mounts what variations are seen?
duld mounts run the gun back by hydraulic pressure inof counter recoil springs. The
elevating and training in
,su heavy turret mounts is by machinery, latest is all elec b'clurer; two electric motors
training turret, and one for
e 1111.gun elevating. Instead of the elevating arc the to, 12 and
kvy have an elevating arm secured to bottom
of slide; a
live screw thread working in a nut, screwing up and down,
8 this arm up and down, thus elevating and depressing
When screw is turned. This is turned by a worm gearing
br au electric motor. Ammunition is brought to the rear
15 .et,ceeh in mechanical carriages, and is rammed home by a
bi?uical rammer without handling the heavy ammunition.
til'e the detached features of mounts for different
guns and
tat,different marks of mounts for the same gun may vary
t _LY, the above principles are found in all of our late mounts
tv,erY
caliber.
"s 4, what is meant by Mark I, Mark II, etc.?
r The first design of any gun mount is called Mark I.
Inanufacture certain improvements are found desirable.
19ount or gun is accordingly altered, and to distinguish
a
11, the first it is Mark II. The next change is Mark III, etc.
is it .possible to fire a 6-pounder with shoulder to
1 ft & 1,vpthout injury to gun captain?
stock is attached to the slide and not to the gun. The
hoe jarred but cannot recoil. The stock is covered by
5 IPW rubber piece which prevents the jar from bruising
uer.
AMMUNITION.
0'
1 What are the various classes of ammunition?
ntmunition consists of projectiles, powder charges, prim;begzes, bursting charges. It is fixed ammunition when all
are made up in the form of one cartridge. It is sepajewi?en the charge and primer are in a case separate from
,ile. It is ordinary B. L. R. ammunition when the primer,
l'!.and projectile are all separate.
.What is a projectile?
the missile fired from a gun.
I1
51 1 w fs
hat kinds of projectiles are used in the service?
ne (I) Armor-piercing shell, (2) common shell, (3) shrapnel,
:
illster (for 4, 5 and 6-in. guns).
7
hen
190
Q. What is an armor-piercing (A. P.) shell?

A. It is a shell intended to perforate armor. The Willi
will perforate depends of course on the caliber of the so
but in all cases it may be depended on to perforate consider
more than the common shell of equal caliber.
Q. In what guns is it used?
e
A. In all except 47-mm. R. C.(now almost out of use).
armor-piercing shell in 1, 6 and 3-pounders of course 111, 3
little penetrative effect, but being stronger, being pointe iso A
having increased perforating power, they are called al
piercing. The I, 3 and 6-pounders have bursting charges
(1 ti
:ul ch
,
fuzes; higher calibers carry neither at the present timese
e
Q. What are the characteristics of an armor-piercing A'ile3 Q
A. It is cylindrical, with a solid pointed ogival-shaPe'bor. A.
Radius of ogival is equal to two calibers. A cavity 15..doe .Ith
;ot
'
out, the shell turned to size and tempered to extreme 113
,:for
It will penetrate into ordinary steel without breaking P
deforming shell. There are no sharp corners in cavitY t'ijea t 3L
lines of weakness, and the base of shell is fitted with
steel plug hollowed out in continuation of the cavity.
length is about three calibers. It has extractor score 01I Q.
,
of shell to assist in withdrawing it.
Q. How does it act against specially hardened arillo ari 4st
t ad
A. Special face-hardened armor, such as Krupp or
will generally break the projectile up without inittrirl ajcie
armor seriously.
d?
Q. How has this effect on the shell been partly avO1 1j t1bi(
a'b
of
point
the
on
A. A soft steel cylindrical cap is fitted
piercing shell. The first shock of impact bends the jot 1;iaR
plate in, while the projectile pierces its cap; the hard 1)12ot al I
1
a
shell then strikes the hard surface of armor, when it is'
tio
nearly to its breaking point, and enters easily.
Q. Why do armor-piercing shell not carry bursting
A. They formerly did carry them, but they were
explode before the shell pierced the armor, thus destr0Y01 e c
shell before it had accomplished its purpose.
Derc
Q. What are common shell?
rti
armor-Plece
as
shape
general
same
the
of
are
They
A.
(14t.
i,s
they do not carry the cap and are 3/2 calibers long. Thep ta
is much larger and is filled with a bursting charge.
base plug is a percussion fuze. Their destructive effect Ills e, t
on their exploding when they strike a ship. Their W3,11 V
vi
thinner than armor-piercing and the cavity extends,
ee
,
.
into the ogival head. They are now made up of 0
material (forged steel) as the armor-piercing, but s' at a

TOT
et ,iron or cast steel shell may yet be found in the service.
and above have an extractor score in, the base of
f 8"th to allow extractor to get hold for withdrawing shell.
a?re
at filling the cavity with bursting charge, it is smoothly
with several layers of shell lacquer, which is allowed to
This lacquer is composed of natural asphaltum, rosin
LurPentine in proportion
An and e gallon turpentine. of 1% lbs. of asphaltum, i lb.
vifl common shell pierce armor?
es; but a certain
caliber common shell will not pierce
eorresponding
armor. A 12-in. common shell would pierce
Or
Ill h 7 inches of hardened armor; and 8-in. probably 4 or 5
Cs, etc.
of
,What are shrapnel?
h They are cylindrical, with round, hemispherical head,
a time nose fuze. They have a small bursting charge and
11 Walls, the cavity being filled with a large
number of small
stl bout Va-in. in diameter (from 200 to 400), packed in rosin
to Q ,Phur.
,in what guns are they used?
(.1 in from 3 to 8-in.
LOescribe a shrapnel.
'hey have been made of both cast iron and cast steel.
steel is now used altogether. The walls are thin. The
talc is nearly hemispherical and is made of cast iron, to be
ti er It is attached to the main body by a screw thread.
11,11e fuse is screwed into the nose of the shrapnel. Sweet's
1
e-action fuse used with 3-in. shrapnel may be used as a
as a percussion fuse. A tin case filled with iron balls,
t vt,..or
j.."g a cast iron nose and tube leading through its center in
the
Ilt g'..bdY of shrapnel with bursting charge below it. In assemb4 shrapnel, the bursting charge in a serge
bag is first put in
Irg` rtw"11. The tin case with iron balls is then put in; the head
Id he
on, a strand of quick match is then put in the central
5 e L rough fuse hole to carry flame to bursting charge; the
e Is screwed home Before firing, the fuse is bored for the
h. corresponding to the range. On firing,
the fuse is fired by
C'
rsertussion primer inside at moment of firing. The
flame
eIrs down to bursting charge in a certain time for which it
tal!. The shrapnel being weakest where it screws to head,
"s there, and the bullets are forced out in the form of
a
s 'he explosion in shrapnel driving bullets out of tin case.
.711en are shrapnel used?
5 '0 kill personnel. Against exposed bodies of men ashore,
e at
on exposed decks. The shrapnel should be set to
about 5o yards in front of the target.
192
Q. Are there any other kinds of shrapnel?

11be
t 0 1)
A. A second kind has the bursting charge in the ,
stiii
d"
way
the
all
ded
is
surroun
It
of
base.
center instead
btu.
bullets packed in sulphur. The 3-in. shrapnel carries
iron. 0
charge in cavity in head and has base plug of cast
walls are only 1/5-in. thick iron tubing. It contains 05 se
utl
half inch balls held in place by cast iron discs. The
itt
combination time and percussion.
Q. What is canister, and when used?
co
A. Canister has only recently been made for 4, 5 arl r a
guns. It is not yet regularly issued to the service. ,Ib
sists of a large number of balls packed in rosin or saiP,teri
a thin sheet iron case, and on firing, this breaks up,SC1:11g
c0'
the shot like a shotgun. It is to be used at close'
against exposed bodies of men ashore or afloat. The Calor
Cl
no bursting charge, and depends on explosion of firing
together with rotary motion imported by rifling to bre" ' a
and liberate bullets.
Q. How are shells brought up from shell-room?paint
(
ely
A. Usually in rope straps. They are no longer
era,
oiled; the larger projectiles using linseed oil with 73
be
dryer; cosmaline for t, 3 and 6-pounders.
al, .ber
Q. What marks are on shells?
materi,
A. In base. Place and year of manufacture;
,1 11 Itht
weight. C. I. indicates cast iron; C. S., cast steel; F. S"
Or
steelreferring to common shell. In case of A. F. .'j
p
materiiap
nel, those letters replace the letters indicatingand
ata
common shell. On rotary band the initials
1,1
inspectors.
'
4ry
ter
BURSTING CHARGES.
Q. What are bursting charges?

of a P
A. They are charges of explosives placed inside ing
its
increas
tile for the purpose of bursting it and thus
'4ti
on the enemy.
charges?bz
Q. What shells use bursting

e
common
tea
A. Armor-Piercing I, 3 and 6-pounders;
tured.
' be
calibers; shrapnel, all calibeis that are manufac
Q. Describe bursting charge for common shell.
I ,leo tt
(riffle) )
A. They are now made of fine-grained black into lac 5 ,bY
1 j N:er
They are no longer in bags, but are poured
filled, anu , an
cavity of shell through fuse hole until it ispossible.
as
in
powder
much
as
get
to
down
shaken
193
Q. Giv
c approximate weight of bursting charges in common

ur various guns.
111
1:11
711 kh,
Gun.
Weight of shell.
Weight of
Bursting charge.
elilt,:i.and
6
37 mm
250 grains.
R. C.
1 lb.
. C
600 "
3
3"
.................................
900 "
1450 "
6"
..
33
2 lbs.
.................
;........
3 "
.
:
...........
50"
h ..
334 "
100"
h ...............................
. 10 "
250"
h .. .... .,
39 "
.......................
500"
60
cast.....
850"
steel
prired steel
36 "
850"
50
Ii
orged steel ...................
1100"
Sc
1 aebZ---Very roughly; the weight of the bursting charges
gh,c)ut 1h0 the weight of the firing charge, or 1/20 the
of the projectile.
escribe bursting charge of shrapnel.
le\,CntriPared with shell of same caliber they are very small,
ounces only, the amount in each case being just enough
beqek the thin walls of shrapnel, allowing balls and fragments
ti blicarried forward by their remaining velocity at the instant
hr
,sting. When in the base, it is in a serge bag. The
is are roughly: 4-in. equals Ya lb., 5-in. equals IA lb.,
equals 34 lb.
r
46
66
64
311)
FUSES.
fuses?
hey are small contrivances, fitted with a primer and a
lik4ney
qleer, which fire and ignite the bursting charge at the desired
Itl! after the shell has left the gun.
pr Chat fuses are now used in the service?
'
Ianufacturers of ammunition for small R. F. guns have
1'v type of fuse, such as the Driggs-Shroeder and Hotch, 2n
1,Itted to base of projectiles. Other projectiles have the
1,, inase fuse, made in two sizes with minor differences, but
e' Ion action. 3-in. shrapnel use a combination time and per.,
rt1 fuse. Other shrapnel use the Navy time fuse.
Vescribe the base percussion fuse.
P11 '
L Consists of a metal stock, which screws into the base
a screw thread on it. Inside is a solid cylindrical
i5 er with point. This plunger is held in place by a brittle
and is held by it free from bottom of cavity in stock.
A
194
coot?11 .
In end of fuse is screwed a metallic magazine
Plqo
the
d
towar
e,
surfac
inner
the
on
and
mealed powder,
Prl
sion
percus
a
is
point
r
plunge
and in line with the
Yirirrit
brittle
the
breaks
shock
When the gun is fired the
during the flight the plunger is in the rear of the cavitY: ive
diPt
the shell strikes an object that seriously retards its es
Pr' e,
plunger now free to move, flies forward and explod
)
this explodes magazine, which explodes the bursting cliari
the
on
thread
the
about
there
is
arity
peculi
Q. What
fuses, and why?
the r"
A. All base fuses have left-hand thread, so that rather
tion of the projectile only serves to tighten them
,te o
loosen them in seat.
explo"
Q. About what thickness of metal is required to
itet
of these shells if struck?
er; a;re
A. 3/56-in, plate will explode a I, 3 or 6-poundrs '
.1
roll
plate will explode a 4, 5 or 6-in. Larger calibe
slot
ess.
thickn
r
greate
fuse?L.
Q. What is meant by"arming" a
the wire is broken, ailSi t
when
armed
be
A. A fuse is said to
,too
. It is noted tha
cavity
in
freely
ing the plunger to move
of 52 feei tal,
are armed by the firing of the gun. A drop
should b? he .any
heavy armor plate will arm a Navy fuse. Careng a shell
Iting
not to drop them on this account. Rammi
4 tbi
rapidly cannot do it.
herl
Q. Describe the Navy time fuse.
with hexn15Pi1 er
A. It has a cylindrical composition stock
13:
brass
by a
h
head. Inside it has a plunger held in place breaks theto
only
not
firing
of
so arranged that the shock
,0,
,
exPl
aft,
fly
to
r
plunge
the
but (as in base fuse) causes
spiral r"
np
primer cap, filling central cavity with flame. Aa grooYe
in
d
of slow-burning fuse composition is packe
of
thirds
into
ning around fuse stock. This is graduated supplied 'gi
st I by
is
cutter
fuse
A
s.
second
fifteen
to
up
second
t
inside cavitY
to bore through from outside into the determ
from t,3
ine
yards,
z000
is
the
If
range
place.
desired
third of .swe p0i
the time of flight, and then bore the fuse at fuse Pr',9
the
fired,
is
gun
the
next less than this. When
"e.
;
the cr)
fired, the flame flashes through the opening and
fli5et, eSpo
of
end
tion will burn down into magazine in lower it was sd, er
explode bursting charge at the time for which
n
'
in firi
sheet of tin foil over base of fuse is broken open
hich
n
fuse.
-actio
s
double
Sweet'
be
Q. Descri
br Nat
above,
the
r
to
simila
ts,
respec
A. This is, in many
for a
the percussion feature added. The shell, if set

195
e, ill
it
burst before that time if it strikes a resisting object;
ItlaY be set for percussion effect alone. It is graduated
,
t seconds, with divisions to quarter seconds. Each fuse
a,nts its own cutter and is operated as follows; Turn the
ter" adjusting ring to the left until the V is just over the
the Roints at the desired time mark; pull out the cutter.
v be turned to the S the fuse is at safety and will not
if turned to P the fuse will act as percussion fuse only.
adjustment ring can only be turned to the left, so that
'
3 Motion will not displace setting of fuse.
PRIMERS.
a primer?
4te .Primer is a contrivance by which the firing charge is
.in the gun.
..gliat varieties are used in the service?
ne two general classes are percussion and electric perL:11 primers for R. F. guns. They differ from those for
t0 IP-, as also do the electric primers for these guns.
r escribe the percussion primer for R. F. guns.
tai 91
'minor caliber R. F. guns it consists simply of a cap
31s Anning about 55 grains of fulminate of mercury fitted over
ititty-- When this cap is struck the fulminate explodes,
tiF the charge.
"e large R. F. guns (above 4-in.) it is similar, except that
the anvil is fitted a primer pocket, containing rifle
Tk, Which ignites readily, increasing volume of flame.
, 4scribe percussion primers for breech-loading guns.
hese are in a brass stock. A plunger in end with a
i`n ordinarily just touches a Winchester
2% primer cap conitt fulminate. In the lower part of the stock is 7 grains
PoWder, which in turn ignites the firing charge. The
,c,)1 stock are made thin, in order that it may expand outt uY force of explosion and prevent gas from escaping to
5. What is
electric primers used?

tsc-'rOr allwhatgunsgunsof are
4-in. caliber and above.
gescribe electric primer for R. F. guns.

;e ts is exactly the same shape and size as percussion for
et erl'nding calibers. The firing pin touches the end of
g 01 When breech is closed. The current passes down
,the platinum wire with a wisp of guncotton around
it ien, Passes through a cavity filled with rifle powder.
':iat i
ntim
wire is connected by the other end to the
thence to case, gun, and carriage to earth connection
196
and battery; hence the circuit is complete when the

nuolIr
is pressed. At this time the current heats the plati
charge.
ignites the guncotton and powder and fires the
r 4
Q. Describe electric primer for B. L. R.
prigle-,
r
A. It has the same dimensions as the percussion
1B. L. R. The action is very similar to the one for1
sealing' tj
1
The shape is long with thin walls to make it vent
ship?
d
a
allowe
o
Q. How many primers are
afl,tt
c
electri
two
c
firing,
n d
A. For ships fitted with electri
s ict15 jo
percussion for each powder charge. For ships not
s il
c
and,P;i
. percussion primers. A combination electri one la".tto
two
k,
mon lock and primer is now manufactured, so if
other can be used immediately without loss of time, or W
even shifting primers.
s
.14
POWDER AND POWDER CHARGES.
of i 4,
Q. What is the firing, or powder, charge?
go f
er
A. It is the charge of explosive placed in the charnh
tn
of
out
ile
project
Q1.1.cil
gun, which on being fired, forces the
guns's
Q. What kinds of powder are used in the various, betoir
ka
A. Small R. F. guns now use smokeless powder
. Black P iii shis
black powder may yet be found in the service
orpr,
al,
for small R. F. guns is either irregular spheric all c bap
pounder small grained rifle powder. For other guns
various so
now manufactured are smokeless powder of
in roso
but many brown powder charges are still issued
brown Eder 5.,
use up the supply on hand. Both smokeless and
PW 0 A
charges have a few (from 5 to 13) grains of black
chargeis N e
the
g
of
e
ignitin
purpos
the
for
charge
of
base
the
'4 j
readily. In smokeless powder charges the smoke seen
A, 1
alone.
n
grains
ignitio
to these
r?
Q. What is black powde
saltpetl! ft hell-111
A. It is a mixture of charcoal, sulphur and to Par's'
gt
r
sulphu
15,
al
lows: saltpetre 75 parts, charco
or 0
I
now used only for ignition charges for brown
(
and for saluting powder.
co
Q. What is brown powder?
The char
(:
A. It is a mixture similar to black powder.
not perfectly charred, giving the brown color.
sto
Q. What is smokeless powder?
gives II to 1
A. It is a powder which, on combustion,guncotton in
ry
The service powder is made by ordina making a Pti'
i
soluble in a mixture of ether and alcohol,
.
grains
into
out
it
ng
pressi
and

197
to Q.
.4. rfiat is guncotton?
irk t is an explosive made by treating cotton waste with
fill,.and sulphuric acid. When dry it explodes by detonation,
10 r."'Inate primer being used. 'When wet, it is exploded by a
of dry guncotton, which is itself exploded by a fulminate
tr.
ii.7nat is the weight of the charge compared with the proOil '
A. IT
Lit
j,..
SUallY it is about half the shell when brown powder is
rctr When smokeless powder is used, the charge is about
th
`ne weight of the projectile.
;10 r:
t What advantage has smokeless powder?
t sf.1) Produces no smoke (the black ignition grains make
gtt2ght smoke seen when it is used); (2) leaves no residue
thereby avoiding sponging out gun; (3) gives velocities,
lied.mite pressure, of about soo F. S. greater than brown
t 1: What are the disadvantages?

410
(
.9 Is more unstable; (2) more likely to deteriorate; (3)
'e expensive; (4) is harder to ignite.
;Oil ,r,ow are charges for B. L. Rs. stowed and how put up?
sil
a,neY are made up in layers of grains, put up in a serge
sh"(1 stowed in copper water-tight powder tanks, cylindrical
aPe.
13
FIXED AND SEPARATE AMMUNITION.
Vhat
lit
is fixed ammunition?
rti I is ammunition in which the projectile, charge and
5
b are all made up as a cartridge in a case.
A, Pr what guns is it used?
all guns up to 6-in. 6-in, guns sometimes use separate
1114
5
11It 1ition, charge and primer in case, and projectile separate.
r,a simple B. L. mechanism is used for 6-in., where primer,
and projectiles are separate.
A,( hat advantage has each method?
`1) Fixed ammunition is loaded in one motion; the case
checks escape of gas to rear.
(2) Using separate ammunition avoids the handling of
heavy case each time the gun is loaded and un111
loaded.
llow is fixed ammunition made up?
.41 5 and 6-in. ammunition. each cartridge is in separate
'towed in a long bin by itself. Smaller calibers are in
10
tra
198

tgld
ip
boxes or chests containing 6-pounder, II rounds; 3-Pds ,e,

16 rounds, 1-pounder, 6o rounds; 3-in. field guns, 17 roull qlesrt.
Q. How are these painted? ,
ka
A. (z) Armor piercingblack with white letters.
,e ,
(2) Steel, commonlead color, red letters.
;
(3) Cast iron, commonred, black letters.
1
(4) Shrapnelwhite, black letters.
(5) Canister.
.Y
A, I
A. P. is armor piercing; S. P., smokeless powder;0.50
5
brown powder; E. P., electric primer; P. P., Perc
41
primer.
d1
1e
Q. What ib a drill cartridge?
.13. ,\11
A. Guns using fixed ammunition have a similar1Y 51ait
V.1
wooden cartridge with rifle barrel in axis, so that sub-c A,
1
may be used by same motions as the real cartridge.
,i
A, I
IdAGAZINES AND SHELL-R002dS.

1
A, 1
Q. Where is ammunition stowed?
A. In rooms specially designed for stowing the varinII; lac 1
munition a ship carries. Powder charges for B. L. g1111
-'a
D
charges for shells which are not loaded, are stowed in `_::
1
zines. Heavy fixed ammunition is stowed in separate IP
zines; loaded shell in shell-rooms; ammunition for min,' na t,
bers R. F. Gs. and for small arms and machine guns, III,
111
ammunition-rooms; wet guncotton in guncotton-roonI,L
/ft P
10
c
guncotton (primers) in cases around the deck away (1.
rte
and from guns.
Q. Where are these rooms located, and how fitted?
roof
A. They are below the protective deck usually in g I
one forward, one aft; their arrangement varies. T1,1,eiroll,
always fitted with flood cock for flooding, and usuaa A,
drain and overflow valves.
, a 14
Q. What are the general instructions about stownrig It
care of magazines.
A. As a rule smokeless powder should not be stowed i,,liatt c) v1
same room as brown powder. Excepting ignition '
g,,,io 4:1
black powder must never be stowed in magazine with s".iiif
'
1st
less. It is preferable that it be stowed with brown. An'
1 a,
ill 0 .
tion for secondary battery must be stowed separately fr- fa 'cl,
for the main battery. No small arm ammunition, or et
' 1)1,)
ammunition, containing fulminate primers, can be st,w illi is
p
powder magazines. Two thermometers (maximum an('
mum) must be kept in the magazines, and temperatures ct hi
daily. Magazines must be inspected twice daily; one insPe l .
to be by the gunner, and the conditions as to cleanliness,
199
Ion
hs, temperature, etc., reported to the officer of the deck.

allowed temperature for smokeless powder mags., 'co F. Naked lights must never be taken into a
e containing powder. Floodcocks must be tested
5e8 a.'6Inum
azfil
5 that
f
are the indications of bad powder?
hght in color, showing decided yellow tinge; acidity, soft

yPPearance.
5sY& iew are powder tanks stowed in magazines?
ne magazines are fitted with wooden racks, separated

alieeYs, in which the powder tanks are stowed in bulk, sides
ha e 3'S They are prevented from movement by light wooden
31 5 4 .
.1egv are shells stowed in shell-rooms?
O. R..11eY are stowed, strapped in bulk, in bins.
i-oced ammunition?
the respective boxes in the bins.
OW are magazines and shell-rooms lighted?
Y regulation electric lights in light-boxes opening out, k1 above, but throwing light in magazine. Glass is double.
,a arranged that candles may be used instead. Water is
no 'aced on the bottom.
b
WilY is the guncotton, which is allowed below, wet?
riecause it is less dangerous. It keeps indefinitely when
beat will not affect it; will not explode without being
1)10:0' a dry primer, and when it is used with dry primer,
h'es
e as effectively as dry guncotton would. It is inspected
41, and 25 per cent moisture kept in it.
Oil
TORPEDOES.
at is a torpedo?
is a weapon carrying a head filled with guncotton, and
It `8 own motive gear so arranged that after firing it runs
1,v0vvn machinery beneath the water and explodes in con1 11 some solid object.
A,
39 1"escribe in general terms the latest service torpedo.
IS called a Mark I, 5-meter Whitehead torpedo
It
10
of: (1) Head; a war head filled with wet guncotton,
ill
_exercise head of same weight filled with water are suphe war head carries a dry primer and a ware nose for
din
f g it. (2) Air flask, a strong cylindrical case in which
,'reed to about 1350 lbs. pressure. (3) Immersion chamiii,entaining pendulum and immersion gear. (4) Engineah tere is located the 3-cylinder engine run by compressed
'
4 various gears for governing it. (5) Secret chamber,
$111
200
containing Obry gear to keep it in straight line of fire'

Bevel-gear chamber; and (7) tail. When fired, its val ves,
automatically opened and when it strikes the water itsgr.
pellers begin to rotate rapidly, causing it to assume
speed for a short distance. Fair torpedo range is nowcf)c,
ered 800 yards; speed about 28 knots. It can be causeeltat
at any average depth to stop when desired, then to ;red, [s
sink. By use of the Obry gear, if deflected when 1dfro 1)
resumes the direction it had before deflection. It is Resio
tube by about 7 ounces gunpowder. Its general dialei;or o
are as follows: 5 m. x45 cm., Mark I. Weight of fat
220 pounds. Capacity of air flask, 9.9 cubic feet. We',7e s
'od;
air at 62 F., when compressed to 5350 pounds pressu
square inch, 69.19 pounds. Weight of Obry gear, 8 Pd,
attached),
fIi
ounces. Total weight of torpedo with war head
flasked charged to 1350 pounds pressure, and all r,ea,., r0
launching, 1161 pounds, approximately. Buoyancy lar"
Mately) V2 pound.
'
GENERAL QUESTIONS REFERRING TO THE GUN
YOU ARE STATIONED.
What is.the name of your gun? Name of mount?,
of breech mechanism? What firing mechanism is used. nf
many pieces make up the gun? What are the names:is t
different pieces of the gun? (Tube, jacket, etc.) Whal
weight? Initial velocity? Velocity at 2000 yards? 110Wath
lands and grooves? What twist of rifling? What lenf?od
calibers? Length of bore? Length of rifling? What klo
sight is fitted? To what range graduated? In using slirao
in this gun, how determine the time of flight for a giveni gitIr
What is the permanent angle? Give nomenclature 01 fir
of mount? of breech mechanism? of electric k
gear? How is the gun elevated? trained? What fl it
return to battery? How is recoil taken? What anic!no fec,
fluid is in cylinder? How test battery? What ammul11,`"
used? what projectiles? Describe armor piercing, Cc' li e.
shrapnel. What fuse is used?
1v
NOTES ON THE TABLE GIVING ELEMENTS OF 1 '
t
GUNS.
This table includes only the most recent types
The various marks of the same caliber gun vary considge r
d
but the data given will apply roughly. The old guns
0
much shorter than those now being made, as the imPro

201
all
3 tlo . along been toward increasing length to get greater
pc zcity.
,g(
.5ei:
'11
111 ,colt's automatic is also made in the 236 caliber, that
Op me caliber of the Lee straight pull rifle, which was
3' ,
cd, but which has now been superseded by the Krag'at t:Insen This latter rifle is also used by the United States
fro th,
t ti;'e and 6-pounder semi-automatic guns are now furnished,
115if
eY do not differ except in the attachment for semith.
,ic firing from the other guns, and they may be used
=' 4s
this attachment as a rapid fire gun. Semi-automatic
e
vhen fired, automatically extract the shell and reload
ayeives.
4-in., 5-in., and 6-in. 40-caliber guns given herein, as
;ro, (Os the lower length of guns of other calibers, are old
1
but are still manufactured to some extent for use on
1h ng vessels, auxiliary vessels, and for reserve guns.
Q,01 Ih e I. V. of 29o0 f. s. given for the new 5-in, gun is for a
A similar charge with a 50-lb. shell has given a
it5l
'
3 of 3380 f. s.
01,
USEFUL RULES.
of grooves.Except for 3, 4 or 5-in, equals four

,e,.the
, caliber.
Ve;g,nt of projectile.Cube the caliber and divide by two.
0
7 1 tiignt of brown powder.About half the weight of proiraP \Yei
.0.ht
of smokeless powder.About 75 to 90 per cent of
of brown powder.
fir r,Ight of gun.From Ioo to 525 times the weight of shell.
1,e IP' and 4-in guns 100; for the very large guns 525 times.
';,,-.t lieel='.th of rifling..o5 inch in all ordinary rifling.
AL'io okIg, ht bursting charge, common shell.About rho the
e:'ei_ss charge.
11 -i nt bursting charge for a shrapnel.Very small; less
a Pound.
:
W check pad.-65 per cent asbestos and 35 per cent mutton
4: sewed in canvas.
t ld for recoil cylinders.-8o per cent glycerine and 20 per
Water (distilled).
cr. h cleaning gun after firing.Wash every part in warm
1111 ct Water soap suds and let dry thoroughly, then oil.
TOliHC ic the best lubricant for gun. Fish oil next, and
r animal oil the worst. It thickens in cold weather.
91st4tlialriber
202
GUNNERY.
Q. Of what does good gunnery consist?
A. Good gunnery not only consists in accurate shootillg'11)
o.
in rapid and sure handling of the guns and perfect ortt 7
the fire.
ve
Q. What qualifications must an efficient gun captain Roo
A. (z) He must be a good shot. This involves a fill'
.11
edge of how various things affect the projectile while in '
air, etc. (2) He must be a man who knows all about fli5
and is able to instruct his crew in it without assisiaric'el
s fi
supervision by an officer. (3) He must be a man wh hro
detail
in
Y
mm
a crew effectively, making them perform each
manner. Briefly: (i) Good shot. (2) Full knowledge'
Ability to handle men.
trtl
Q. What is accurate pointing dependent on?
cos51 ts
A. Chiefly on skill in training of gun captain. It
in being able to bunch a string of shots close togetherevie ts
range and correction for sliding leaf are given; to ill(
rectly the proper moment to fire; to allow for firing
when ship or enemy are moving; and to be able to g.t.t 51
to bear quickly and correctly by knowing what orders. 01
and how to give them to men at training and elevating
GENERAL REMARKS ON GUN POINTING.

oost
A gun pointer should always remember he has a 11
'
14
portant position. A ship is built for the use of her 0
he
therefore the gun pointers are of vital importance to t
For this reason every drill, if properly conducted, is of
eti
and should be regarded as the means of obtaining th
possible results from the guns during the few rnotrel'
etPs
battle for which the ship was built. While much pit
this matter, a few general hints are given as a guide for
captains in perfecting themselves.
ACCURACY AND RAPIDITY OF FIRE.
tne
The setting of the sight is the most important eie,di
accuracy of fire, and while very simple, is often nee'
With sights unmoved, a good shot, aiming always at theno
spot, will bunch his shots somewhere, but this is not e
The best gun pointers, after obtaining the range, settii;
i
sight accordingly, and firing one or two shots, may 111
targetdue to the range being incorrectly given. In
it is manifestly useless to continue firing at that fam,ge'
should watch the fall of his shots, and change his jig
203
1
1 the error. Everyone knows if you raise your sight you
s4
ly, Your range, and your shot falls further away. SimiYou lower the sight, the shot falls closer to you. Simithe case of a sliding leaf; if you move it to the right,
ot ot falls to the right of the line of sight, and vice versa.
er words, your projectile follows the direction in which
thl2'e your rear sight. Therefore, if you fire two shots,
from your experience, you think ought to hit, and they
ar together, but away from target, it is foolish to fire.
ithout changing your sight to correct the error. After
rSt shot, especially if it falls far away from the target,
ttte the sight to correct the error. It should be remem,13, that the better shot a man is (if his sights are not corset) the less charp:e he has of hitting the target if he
ifttnot change his sights to correct errors in range! This
ts e for the simple reason that a good shot will bunch his
ts at the range at which sights are set; and therefore, if
4re not properly set, he will not hit the target. If, howl he corrects the sight according to the fall of his shots,
the proper range is ascertained, he may hit the target
time.
't to the ability to bunch shots comes, therefore, the
got' to so change sights as to cause the shots to fall on
tkit)
)st
to this comes a gun captain's ability to handle his
b oth at drill and in action. He should at all times ree '.e,er that drill is but a preparation for action; never for a
ptIlt. Permit slouchiness or inattention at drill. If a crew
inth
. itted to drill slowly and carelessly, they will do it in
10'
,s and if hurried in action, rapidity will be gained only
0 iss of accuracy and rapidity of fire. Remember that a
as much to instruct men how to serve a gun quickly as
or
serve it at all. As long as our possible enemies are
;6 hits a minute with 6-inch guns and from 2 tO 3 hits
ot inute with 9-inch guns at actual target practice at a
t 60 x 2o at 2000 yards, do not rest until you can do.the
lt t' better. Rapidity of hits, the one thing sought, is a
e tPif (I) rapidity of loading gun, and (2) rapidity of pointing
e. gun is loaded.
0
thtY of loading depends on each man doing his part of
jog )rk
ht quickly
and at the earliest possible instant. Each one
0..
must endeavor to use the greatest celerity in his
erew
Vo
1_
115
tic, and at the same time to in no way retard the work
re.
!
4,1 ts T9 do this, each member of the crew must know,
'15t be drilled in, the duties of every station at the gun,
204
,,,, a
its capabilities, its faults, and how to avoid or renteui,, is
dents. Rapidity in aiming is gained by experience, an'is,
the power of any intelligent man. A rapid-fire Ono
mounted, and must be so used, that it is at all times.
the roll and at other times trained on the target. It tsvo
fired at any time during the roll when the sights bear.
in range are corrected, as already described, by eleirat'i I
lowering sight. Lateral errors are corrected, when slid'i/..0
is provided, by moving it the way you want the shot tv
With telescope sights no sliding leaf being provided, the
cal wires may be used for this purpose.
tast
Heavy guns, not having such rapid elevating gears,.111 e
fired either at the top or bottom of a roll; great skill is nob
sary to get the sights to bear at such times. Always relict,
in firing guns, that the first time your sight bears Ysig
make as good a shot as if you wait; and that if Your Oa
do not bear (provided you have the proper range) Ycni toll 8
never, in the excitement, fire your gun. It is worse ill tt]
waste of ammunition. In an action it wastes time, W
far more valuable than anything else.
These instructions summarized:
hitt.
g
(t) Use every effort to gain a maximum Rapidity of"
the
(2) After the gun is loaded, fire it the first time
bear on target or enemy.
(3) Never fire a gun when sights do not bear.
ESTIMATION OF RANGE.
,
fill
With all the present appliances for estimation or detef e ta
n'tice
possibility
tion of range, a very great element and
exists. For this reason, every gun captain should
every opportunity the estimation of ranges with the eYe'ngt te'
practice, the gun captain should be able to estimate 110
accurately that with the flat trajectory of modern
T
should be able to make a hit at 2000 yards or less.
41PI
Q. What is firing interval?
car t
A. The time elapsing between the instant the gun ea the
lea/
shell
makes up his mind to fire, and the time the
the Iflis
gun. As this is from 12/too to 20/too of a second,
will hit short or beyond according to whether ship Ise'e
eticf
toward or away from target, as the shell follows thehad
s
it has when it leaves gun and not the direction it
the gun captain made up his mind to fire. Good mato
ship requires that this be allowed for. For this rens kiivrtl
best time to fire is on bottom or top of a roll, when
instant the gun is not moving. This rule does' not sPr

205
accDick
Cre
is e
guns, because their greater ease in training enables
tlu captain to allow for this firing interval in his aiming.
GUN CAPTAINS.
;rf e Principle cannot be too strongly impressed upon men
hi tt v rY movement at gun drill should be made quickly, no
1g ''low much time may be available. This is always necesi0 Yr,at gun drill, because you are training your gun's crew for
great emergency of battle, and at such time, every
"J every tenth of a second counts; and the only way to
15t, r gun's crew which will intelligently utilize every second
riec",tee battle conditions, is to train them to do it before that
el s.rit arrives. When that time arrives they should be so
)10 ,,trued to using intelligent speed at drill that they will
5;0 t_40 it mechanically. Every instant saved in action in51311,
Your hits per minute. To save instants in action, the
11, tr,crew must be drilled at saving these instants beforehand.
re,V'fort of the gun captain should be directed to this end.
k, hat is the object of aiming drill?
ipe ts object is simply to practice and instruct men in the
use of sights. If, in the ordinary instruction, a man
'
Ice et the dots well bunched, it may not prove that he will
,
a good score, but it does show that he takes the same
.1 ,of front sight each time; that his eye is clear, and that
is tids his gun where he points it, his shots will be bunched.
a s the first step in any training: Bunch your hits. After
t Study of your personal error, rectified by changing your
C tar otherwise, will result in your bunch of hits falling on
ctice ii,r.get. No man who cannot make a fairly small triangle
Ing drill can hope to make a good shot, for it shows
ter. doesn't aim alike every time; hence his shots must be
I
to 11,11g.
.1,v, hat is meant by "Firing with a fixed sight bar?"
tripinis is used for special cases of very rapid firing. For
c3 t o_e, a torpedo attack. The sight bars should be set at
to ,th'40 yards. Fire is opened at isoo yards without touchie life sight; use a very coarse sight at first, and as distance
ro sl;hes, a finer and finer sight is used.
ir r:hat is a "trajectory "?
d
Vvis the path of a projectile through the air.
r10 p hat is "danger space"?
500 I f r any particular height it is the horizontal distance the
fo givr(url a certain gun would traverse after just passing at
t fen height above the ground. For example, the danger
Or a man when fired at by a rifle at 2000 yards is about
206
Ill
150 yards; that is, a bullet just passing through his sealPWg
on level ground, go about iso yards further before strilun
ground.
Q. What is "drift "?
A al
A. If a rifled gun is pointed accurately at some object,
securely clamped, and fired, and if there were no dis,t,,t/
causes whatever, the shell would fall some distance to t'',Iectli tr];
of target. This distance is called the "drift" of Pr'y'd
It increases with range. It is due to the twist imPa' 10 As
rifling to the projectile, and is like the curve a baseball Prect
gives a baseball in throwing it. This error is always ec)r, atl, at
'acti re
by placing sights at a slight angle, called the perniatuit
t
and does not come into consideration in ordinary gun Pr
Pa
Q. What is the "chase" of a gun?
A. It is the outside surface of gun from trunnion 139 se
muzzle.
rea
FIRING REGULATIONS.
tice ij
Q. What are the regulations for small arm target Prac
the Navy?
1'}li
Ite
A. These regulations may be found in the Petty nf6Drill Book, U. S. Navy. They are based on the ArnlY p ,411
Regulations, and are designed to instruct men in all the
ciples of good marksmanship.
Aft
Q. What is meant by the "nomenclature" of a glin? d Ith f
e rt
A. The term refers to the names of the various Palt'ol
"I
gun, mount and accessories. These names are laid a e1 oil
Navy Department publications and it is important fr
member of the crew to know them. This, of coursei'o isht
eth
supposes a perfect knowledge of them by the gun caPta,.0
he is responsible to the officer of division for the just' Ith
of the gun's crew in this particular.
Aar
4th
CARE AND PRESERVATION OF ORDNANCE OIL"'
The officer of division is responsible for the care

nance outfit of his division. Each gun captain is resP0
to the officer of division for the care of his gun. The lie ciho
mate is responsible to the officer of the division for tkd
and preservation of the parts under his control.
n t1 er
os
The following instructions are copied from
the
Torpedo Drills," U. S. Navy:
oi
207
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUCTIONS.
140
ni _14ENcLATRE.It
u
is deemed of great importance that the
.,enclature of guns and gun mounts contained in the books
oad t)(1.1:13' the Navy Department should be strictly adhered to.
I fur ring the first year of the cruise, the men at the guns must
, tri equently instructed
in the nomenclature of the guns and
d ages. Short lessons at evening quarters, when the weather
Asther
circumstances permit, are suggested.
Y
the satisfactory performance of mechanical gun carriages,
ct te
ai."-loading rifles, rapid-fire and machine guns, depends in a
fee,measure upon the condition in which they are kept, it is
D ied that the greatest care and attention .be given to keep
koarts Perfectly clean, properly lubricated, and in thoroughly
0 iti; working order.
k breech mechanism must be cleaned daily, avoiding the
trit11 any gritty substanc'. The breech plug must be frete,,,`Y removed from the tray in order that the bottom
may be reached for cleaning.
tice rigek dust or gritty substances must never be used on any
1,k nf the gun
11C,ge
iv
Parts of the mechanism must never be scraped with
or metal, or be defaced or roughened in any way.
9
Parts of the gun must be kept lightly oiled, as a protecAitagainst rust.
Ith er every firing the guns should be carefully washed out
5 t fresh water, using the bristle bore and chamber sponge.
fli vailrntlizzle should be depressed for this purpose. If a hose is
el
it will be found very efficient and its use will save the
te e bore and chamber should be carefully dried with the
Skin sponges and finally thoroughly oiled by passing
th gb them several times a sheep-skin sponge well coated
A Oil.
Stieular attention should be given to keeping the slope
Afgle origin of rifling well oiled and free from rust.
tp,
ter firing guns of 6-in, caliber and below, completely disrl tsh"t the breech mechanism and wash every part with warm
.th water soap suds; dry them carefully, and let them stand
14)11 time to air. After drying, rub all parts with a well
ke rag, and assemble the mechanism.
ti eP rapid-fire guns covered whenever there is a chance of
I tIl g Coal dust, grit, or salt water on them. Inspect and re.e guns once a week. In re-oiling, first wipe off all the
II which has become clogged with dust and grit. If the
208
TIE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
guns are closed with tompions, these should be witbelra it

every fair day, and the band slope cleaned and re-oiled. tr. h
The gas checks should be, as far as possible, protected
the weather and from everything which could indent or b, u
the pads. The rings or discs should be kept scruPtOur
clean and well oiled, and the pads should be habitually le
with tallow. After battery practice the mushroom and,.ete. a
should be remcved, cleaned and oiled as soon as practicau' a
The pads, rings and discs should, when practicable,it
especially in bad weather at sea, be removed, cleaned, u
and oiled, and be kept in such place as is appointed for thelli
All axles, such as those of trucks, elevating and tral_
gear, yoke and pivot bolts, elevating arc bolts, etc., are t
taken out, oiled and cleaned once in two months.
ho
The ball bearings and friction rollers of R. F. mounts s-tio1
rusk
prevent
be kept clean and lightly oiled in order to
The oil channels in the slide of a R. F. mount must be _
clear of dirt, and should be filled with oil before the OP
fired.
ft d
It having been found that many of the gunsreturned tyA al;
auxiliary vessels are badly rusted at the part going ificler
recoil slide, and that sliding surfaces which should be o
and bright are thickly covered with paint, and that roller to
ings are badly rusted and oil holes stopped up, the Depart
directs that the following precautions be observed with rec
ttytn
to 4, 5 and 6-in, pedestal mounts:
All 4, 5, 6 and 8-in, slides must be oiled at least Ilia 1101
week and the gun moved in the slide, unless the vesselred er
sea and this is impracticable. Guns are not to be Paal eni
rear of slide, over that portion passed by the stren8tPrd esh
band in firing, as is the case in 4 and 5-in. guns. The ais oo,
'
paths must be oiled once a week, and the top carriage:
and rollers taken out and cleaned at least once a mop ct
holes must be kept clear and closed in wet weather. 1 r,300 pti
and elevating gear must be kept clean and steel parts wet' up sai,
h`
For this purpose they must be removed at least once a Lilld
ea
In mounts of the latest types, compressors are furnic",
0
removing and replacing the counter-recoil springs.
fa
the two piston-rod nuts and ease the gun to the posiMat
full recoil. The comnressor screws on the end of the Pre no,
rod and its flange takes against the rear bonnet of the " As '
cylinder.
ti oe tech
,,s
Piston rods must be kept free from rust, but the al,
emery or brick dust for this purpose is never to be

except where necessary to remove rust that has unavol
formed.
2C9
As
A ,a rule, emery is to be used only by trainedmen.

'Peral amount of materials for cleaning purposes is furrt1P. tTille.u, but the allowance is the necessary reasonable amount
tir,sed for keeping the working parts in good order, dependoat
;:',11 the climate and vicissitudes of service.
hec? a the case of the bore it should be remembered that oil put
t
wet steel surface is worse than putting no oil on at all.
Ic
3f1`; gun must be thoroughly dried before oiling.
LIQUID FOR RECOIL CYLINDERS.

be
mixture used in the recoil cylinders consists of glycerine,
"
ye rta by measure, and water 2o parts by measure. The
iJ
o 4Ad ,1-ine used should be free from fatty acids, and the followtiog
ests are prescribed:
to the sample of the glycerine in a large test tube about
0 15 requal bulk of saturated solution of slacked lime and
11g.hly shake the two together. If, after standing for
fro0
(hine, sediment is deposited the glycerine contains fatty
Ott la
'i nd is unfit for use in recoil cylinders.
u.s e another, sample of the glycerine in a test tube and add
cle0'
)ear .af!' an equal bulk of a saturated solution of acetate of lead.
oridoo ter thoroughly mixing and standing for some minutes, a
ga esit,appears, add acetate of lead, and heat the contents of the
If the deposit disappears, or if no deposit appears after
"1xing with the acetate of lead, the glycerine is free.from
110,acid and fit for use in the recoil cylinders.
111 tests should be made, as one is the confirmation of the
00 the L
011 esh bquid in the recoil cylinders (glycerine 8o per cent,
Lis oovIvater go per cent) becomes muddy after a time; and the
a
of the cylinders may become clogged from a deposit
t'lek pasty sediment, which is removed with considerable
.DttPtY It is therefore directed that the recoil cylinders be
A t%sil,,ed, cleaned and refilled directly after the vessel is corn, and at the end of each year thereafter; as much
liquid being added from time to time as may he necessary.
1e circulating pipe, on carriages
having two recoil cylinders,
Lt, fa,e carefully looked after, to guard against clogging, and
c rf),,IIIIY cleaned whenever the cylinders are emptied. Blow
As"gh the filling holes to see if the circulating pipe is clear.
rFeoil cylinders occasionally leak, even when they seem
te .
ig
especial attention will be directed to them during
e2" y inspection, in order to ascertain whether there is any
Jtible leak. Loss of liquid therefrom will, be supplied at
Before every firing, unless an emergency makes this
210

initle
impracticable, the recoil cylinders shall be invariably exa

o
d filled.
A 6-1 (Ht
Instructions for filling recoil cylinders of 4, 5 allu
ved
mounts:
The gun being out to battery, lay it with the breechoiace e
slightly elevated. Remove plugs of filling and air holes., nole t
funnel and pour liquid in slowly until it runs out of air tite lf)
The cylinder of the 4-inch mount holds 32% pints; that 01 IP,
5-in. holds 2 gallons; and that of the 6-in. holds 4 gall0nis:4i
If there is no air hole, care must be taken to pour the 11.50 t
,th
into the funnel in small quantities. Care must also be tak
measure the quantity of liquid poured into the cylinder. g NI;
Instruction for filling cylinders of 6-pounder, 3-pound'
I-pounder hydraulic recoil mounts:
0.00
All hydraulic recoil mounts for minor caliber R.
thus far issued to the service, except the Mark III 6-P11-11
have only one filling hole in the boss on the cylinder.
funnel is placed in that hole, and in all other resPects tht e,
process of filling the cylinder with liquid is the same as
Is
described below for the Mark III 6-pounder mount.
Mark III, 6-pounder hydraulic recoil mounts:
h014 '
sei
In mounts fitted with the Driggs-Shroeder gun, the
bar must first be unshipped.)

Elevate the breech as far as possible, and lock in that c
tion. Take out the top screw in filling hole boss and Os ekt
the side one until only about three threads remain ellga
This opens a free passage into the cylinder by way of th!
11
hole, into which now screw the filling funnel. Take Ole )
its ;
cylinder head. Pour the liquid into the funnel untilthreae;
in the cylinder rises to the lower front edge of the
the head, until it appears in the rear of the piston. Abotic r
pints of liquid have now been poured into the cylinder; 5
0,:
in the cylinder head, hand taught, and level the mount. re (3)
the funnel. Increase the air space in the cylinder by risc
e ba(
big the cylinder head four or five turns. The funnel will
t+t, head, refill the funnel, and procee: ter
itself. Screw
before until no,."more liquid will run out of the funnel, h I,
the cylinder head is partly unscrewed. The cylinder is fit a
sufficiently full. This is made evident by the rise or fall e
liquid in the funnel when the head is screwed up or unsrr
a turn or two.
!4) S
Now set up the cylinder head for a full due, hard agairt .rIg
I be'I
leather packing, using the wrench. Screw the side screw
into its seat, remove the funnel and put in the toe screw.
11 klue
The 6-pounder cylinder holds, when full, 4% pints of'
elle)
211
roe 'the
l'o whole operation can readily be performed in five minutes.
c,;,set
steedy:up or replace the piston rod packing at front end of
linders of minor caliber R. F. guns, the gun being
rco
oe
place .Press the breech and lock securely in position. Take off
s (Irc' Piston rod nuts on outside of oscillating slide, and
ti14 4) gun into position of full recoil. This will give plenty of
to get at the stuffing-box gland.
jqIlIViten
t the gun is again run out, care must be taken, to re
co Cie Piston rod nuts are fully set up. The shoulder inside
1141 readed part of piston rod (where the rod increases in
ti ter) must be drawn close against the inner face of the
t ating slide so that the clearance between the rear face of
tv pIston and front face of the cylinder head shall be pregl ed. The clearance
_der
is from to to 15 inches, depending
the thickness of the leather packing on face of cylinder
s
t113
AND PRESERVATION OF CARTRIDGE CASES.
Prevent the rapid deterioration of metallic cartridge

ts.
es the following rules must be observed for their care and
rvation:
P 1iiThe cases at all times, whether before or after firing,
r d be kept free from salt moisture or oil or grease of any
age s' and from time to time, as opportunity occurs, they should
Vatnined, especially at the neck and mouth, for signs of
f t
SiOn.
The hot cases, when withdrawn from the gun after firing,
not be allowed to fall to the deck, but should be caught
it 3r gloved hands, or in the case of the smaller calibers, in an
The larger cases, when empty, should not be laid on
;c
Sides, except unavoidably, but should be stood up on
-rt (er replaced in their boxes.
011 hAs soon as possible, after firing, the fired primers should
t;aelced out; and the cases thoroughly cleaned with hot
ii'r and soap suds. In the larger cases, a primer pocket is
th 4'
s and this must be backed out by means of an iron or
is rod, the case standing in a block of wood with a hole
ihr These pockets should be cleaned and dried, the caps
.11;R first backed out of the percussion ones, and should be
A (4r1 in with the empty cases for reloading.
ti Should it be intended to clean the cases immediately after
!It' dipping them into water, mouth down, while still hot,
e found to assist in the subsequent removal of the powder
1(
ue Should it, however, be impracticable, to clean the case
le
212
A a0
for a day or more after firing, they should be stowed
perfectly dry for the interval.
11
(5) If the residuum is found difficult of removal, a litt so
may be added to the water used for cleaning; but 110
in a
suds will usually suffice, the soap being not used '
w,
After cleaning, the cases should be rinsed with cleanaway
drained, thoroughly dried, inside and out, and put
their boxes.
(6) No oil or grease of any kind should ever be used 011
cases, except in the operation of reforming, when theyi
be lubricated either with a mixture of lard (or sperm) 01,11
plumbago (4 lb. plumbago to i gallon of oil) or
,it
lead and tallow (3 parts white lead to r part tallow), 1111 -c 5
case only a very thin coating being applied, and the
being carefully wiped clean when reformed.
FITTING AND ADJUSTING GAS CHECK PADS AND
With each gun there are issued to service spare gas ,ft;
',
pads and gas check rings. These pads and rings are earo
fitted to their proper guns before they leave the Pe.,11
ground, and are marked with the number of the gun to 1"ri
they belong, and are not likely afterward to give any seA
trouble. A split steel ring is used between the pad an;f1
mushroom head, at the seat of the gas check; and a steelo
between the pad and the face of the breech plug. Ces
difficulties may, however, arise, and it may in such casettj.
come necessary to fit new pads and rings, or verify the no;
of old ones, either on board ship or at a Navy Yard, ill
case the following instructions should be followed:
The pad and the spit ring, when properly fitted, should
a light bearing upon the gas check slope of the gun, winiebe
after steel ring should come just short of having such a,
ing. If undue play is allowed to the gas check, there is
that the covering of the pad will be cut by the edge 0
ring and the filling be blown out through the annular
around its circumference. On the other hand, if the gas 0
fits too snugly, there is danger that the bearing of the he,
will cause trouble in opening and closing the breech. Sitv
the split ring be slightly too large, it will cause diffiet"'
closing the breech, but probably not in opening it.
To determine whether the pad and rings fit propel
number of light chalk marks are drawn across the slope 0
gun, in the direction of the bore, and the breech plug C',1
If the pad, or either of the rings is too large, difficultY
or less great will be found in turning the plug to the 10e
1.
213
5',,
ji3c)11. This is due to the fact that some part of the check
1 rtnight up on the slope, while the pitch of the thread is
S 3'
rging the breech plug forward. If now the plug be withthe traces left upon the check by the chalk marks will
st
the difficulty, which may lie in either of the rings, or in
y Pad,a or in all three. If the breech closes easily, it follows
,
1 Part of the check is too large. One or all of the parts
l h owevrti
be too small. If this is the case, it will be
0
aited by the absence of chalk marks upon the part when
I A Piug is withdrawn. If all parts are too small, a further
.Af111 atinn will be found in the absence of any pressure as the
1t1/ i8 locked. If the fit is perfect, a slight effort will be
to close the breechjust sufficient to feel at the close
cas
ge locking motion that the pad is taking a bearing, and
nlarks left upon the check by the chalk from the slope
pronounced across the split ring and the pad, and
'Y indicated upon the after ring. If the pad is too small,
he fitted by means which will be described later. lithe
/1
bring is too small no harm will result, unless the difference
eater than rho of an inch all around. If the forward
sring is too small, that is to say, if it has no bearing upon
:(31)e) it should be rejected.
I
13 generally found with new checks, that the pad is slightly
arge. The rings are reduced very carefully in a lathe
fine file, until they are just right, and when completely
bed, must be marked with the number of the gun to which
tofelong. The pad is warmed gently and evenly, sufficiently
rb
ten it, so that it may be indented by the thumb. It is
jeut in place upon the breech
and squeezed out by
11$ g UP tightly on the mushroomplug
stem nuts, and its edge
a little above the ring. The breech is then closed. A
b ,Nerable effort will be required to lock the plug, but the
1 Will compress the pad to its proper size. Should it be
very difficult to lock the breech, the mushroom-stem
'1) 4143T be slacked up a little.
Illust be understood that this proceeding is for the fitting
riilp
w.pad. After a pad has been once fitted and fired a few
it will not usually give any trouble in service, if the
l'hwing directions are observed in its use:
ly wep gas check should be, as far as possible, protected from
)11 eather and from everything which could indent or bruise
ll
' The rings should be kept scrupulously clean and
r l'ed, and the pad should be habitually coated with tallow.
firing, the mushroom and check should be removed,
'ed and oiled as soon as possible.
214
e$
s a
In putting the mechanism together for firing, it is
.
should
treme importance that the mushroom-stem nuts
up moderately tight and left so.
ra
In considering the action of the breech mechanism, It lit
be remembered that the gas check does not turn as the1,roPu its
is locked and unlocked. The plug turns upon the mos'. 4 d
stem.
jo
As the pads are liable to be injured in spite of all precaut
bY
surface
and may even be burnt across their checking
.e
escape of gas, it becomes important to know how serious
injuries are. The pads will check in spite of almus,tre0 t.tt
amount of bruising, provided that their checking circurute a
is intact. A pad may cut at any other point than this'1a
may even have lost a considerable part of its filling, all,
y
check perfectly. Even the checking circumference Ina d et
or
this
bruised
broken without serious results, if
ittitirl
rdi
not extend across the checking surface from front t
101
statement
An exception may be found to this last
plastid"
weather, when by the hardening of the pad its
much reduced.
A pad which has been burnt out by an escape of gas attt
point, or which by any other accident has been broken eTI a In
across its circumference, may be replaced by inserting r
l'he
of canvas, dove-tailed in and sewed neatly.
the
the i]
REMARKS ON GUN DRILLS.
pl
The following extracts from the "Gun Drill Book c
given, as it is important that every member of the gull's
should understand them.
The gun captains should see that the drills laid doull
,,
exactly complied with, except where, owing to the struettl
arrangement of the ship, certain changes in the drill'
authorized by the division officer.
1111
ORGANIZATION.
tall
It is of vital importance for every gun to have a
permanent crew, instead of arranging guns in pairs and ai d
one large crew for a Fun and its opposite. If not abut;
supplied with ammunition, a rapid-fire gun loses its merl.
"rapid firer," and therefore in modern ships a full crew Isti
vided for each gun. The only relation between opposite g,
for the purpose of an unengaged crew reinforcing a dePle'
exhausted crew on the engaged side, and this will be cl
order of the division officer.
215
the watch on deck to clear away all the guns, the

514 ate made up as far as possible, of an equal number of men
'th each watch,
oues tnagazines, shell-rooms, other ammunition rooms, the
00ts(rooms for stowage of wet guncotton, and all ammunition
ee,xcept those in compartments under the entire charge of
'
Y1 ion officers, as in the case of large turrets where the
,nition crew is a part of the turret division) shall be under
Yso littrge of the officer of the powder division.
s third of the engineer force will be stationed in the powder
'en. This division
will supply and hoist ammunition for
a iShell-except those turret guns which have their magazines
rooms located around or near the turret chamber. In
tter case, an ammunition crew from the turret division
tit tstIPPIY
opc_ rthe ammunition, and be under the control of the
00 .1rdir,';;rI T
co ton. Y the torpedo division shall be a part of the powder
itY
GUN DIVISIONS.
:
11 1. divisions shall be as nearly as practicable of the same
16(
r
leal strength, intelligence and offensive powerdue attenpat seIrn the grouping of guns being paid to the possibility of one
ilte Commanding the whole division in action.
the watch officers shall be assigned in the order of their rank
the Powder division and then to the gun divisions. according
0a
relative importance of the divisions.
5 CO
AMMUNITION CREW.
er gunner's mate or other petty officer in charge of ammunivi i
t e tw or party, should receive the necessary keys at general
15 ,,
ts0 open the magazines and shell-rooms, and should see
water provided. He should be particular that proper
thutions are observed by those handling ammunition, and
e lifts are loaded expeditiously.
11
to
NUMBERING THE GUNS.

t e..starboard guns of a battery should be designated by odd
'fis 8, and the'port guns by even numbers, beginning forward.
rini.different calibers should have separate series of numbers.
guns of turrets should be given odd numbers, the left
:ted eilthweel?, numbers. This method eliminates the necessity of
oe
a long list of numbers in order to designate guns.
,Loe right gun of the forward
turret would be 13-in.
, the left is-in. No. 2. The right gun of the starboard
216
THE BLUEJACNET'S MANUAL.
;
forward 8-in. turret would be 8-in. No. 1; the left gun "'-'8,1
2. The right gun of the port forward 8-in, turret would 116, IV]
No. 3; the left gun 8-in. No. 4. The starboard forwar.4 0
gun would be 6-in. No. z;" the port forward 6-in, gun vlf'S
6-in. No. 2. We would also have 3-in. Nos. 1, 2, 3; 6-Pur'
I, 2, 3, etc.
f
TRAINING AND POINTING.
Leff! ev,
With all guns, the order "Train, Right!" or "Train,
refers to the muzzle of the gun; that is, the gun must be P,'; ter
in the direction indicated by the order, "Right" or "Left' ref
In elevating, the order "Raise," "Lower," "Well," etc.,
to the breech of the gun.
Sa
Dr!
CREWS IN RESERVE.
Preservation of the fighting men is imperative to succes5e'ta
.4
1. t
therefore the crews of all unengaged guns, except rill.
barbette guns should be sent invariably "in reserve, behp's I,
armor of turrets or barbettes, and kept there until their golt rao,
on the enemy and are within effective range. At long ,3I,
the crews of all guns of the secondary battery and of rhe,s`;r0 err
guns of the main battery should be kept in reserve killsittO 40;
until the enemy comes within effective range, when they
he
be ordered to those guns which bear on the enemy.
; 11
Exposure of crews of the secondary battery, and n' of ve
gaged crews of the main battery, to long-range firing
enemy's heavy guns may result in needless loss of IOC (4 div
thereby cause a serious depletion in the crews of the raidi lts
guns, which are the guns most depended upon for the rLs b
of a destructive and overwhelming fire when the ship is
moderate range.
, li
The men should be frequently exercised in taking ad"
,,- ri
of the protection offered by turrets, barbettes, and other
sti
for different bearings of the enemy; and each crew should ,
the place it is to go for armor protection when ordereg1 Cl
reserve." This place should be within easy voice range r 0t11
divisional officer, and the men should be on the alert for
Any reserved or unengaged crew of a division may be n'" h
to reinforce or relieve any engaged crewor certain numbertiso tktt
be ordered to fill vacancies, or to remove the killed and vI0
, etc
It will be very necessary to have a reserve force in Prt0 Te
occur
0
, -u
places for the purpose of filling vacancies as they
tte;
crews of the guns on the engaged side. If the enemy is t 0
board give the order, "Port crews in reserve." At this e'
the crews of the port guns of main and secondary batteries,

217
t
8., Nand barbette guns, go rapidly to their designated places
6,1 \VII armor and lie down, keeping on the alert for orders.
0 ean crews are in reserve, all the guns may be manned by
r
er,"Man all the guns." The guns of main battery may
1),), nned by the orders, "Man all six inch"; "Man all five
Ls ete and the secondary battery by the order, "Man all
etc,
the, engaged crews become exhausted, and it is desired to
,eft rdettne entire battery, the order should be "Relieve the star)llt
ter battery. The reserve crews may be ordered separately,
tain numbers of a crew may be ordered to fill vacancies
re 1\i,
6-in. No. 2 relieve (or man) 6-in. No. 1"; "Plugman
san%2 man 6-in. No. I.' If all the guns of a division are of
m
caliber, the caliber of the guns should be omitted in
O
ers, thus "No. 2 man No. 1"; Plugman No. 2 man No.
s
eerve crews may be ordered as riflemen, firemen, pumpor as wreck clearers. Men should never be called away
teresngaged guns to serve as firemen, pumpmen or wreck
unless the reserve crews become exhausted.
11'
BOARDERS AND RIFLEMEN.
arfil tillorr crews should never be called from their guns, and they
311 lie
be designated as riflemen or boarders. Revolvers are kept
turrets to supply the crew.
lv
.
erews of guns of the secondary battery are supplied with
`rs, which are to be taken from the racks when reeded.
div9'ews of all guns of the main battery, except turret guns,
)1 Itsided into boarders and riflemen.
e33e rt_ and arms should always be provided, hut they should
sioee Put on at general quarters unless ordered, and only at
11 441 drill or inspection by the order, TAKE ARMS, after
egive the order, Anis ASIDE. When called away, boarders
irlernen take belts and arms. Turret officers should not
8W0rds or belts at General Quarters.
range, and especially in repelling a torpedo-boat
of cl9se
,ttle riflemen may prove very effective. RIFLEMEN COVER
Orfo UthNs At this order the designated riflemen kneel and fire
the gun ports. In turret ships the riflemen should rally
UPPer deck and fire from under protection of the turrets.
))111
ot etc. AFT; RIFLEMEN FORWARD; RIFLEMEN ALONG STARBOARD
'ling a torpedo-boat attack on one side, during daylight,
th`ngaged crews may be ordered as riflemen on the engaged
PORT CREWS AS RIFLEMEN ALONG STARBOARD RAIL. At
es' u 'is:
Cr the port crews of main battery distribute themselves
cta t
218
along starboard rail as riflemen; the port boarders usieg t

rifles of the starboard riflemen.
sholl
In repelling a torpedo-boat attack, at night, the riflemen 30
never be called from one side to the other, as ships will,look'
roic r
eh
be attacked by one torpedo-boat, and if all hands are on
engaged on one side, the other side is left unprotected. via the
When a night torpedo-boat attack is anticipated, the Creargi
the main battery, including the turret crews, should be r ti
with rifles and stationed along the rail of the ship, nea dy
guns. They will serve as additional lookouts and be re" he
jump to their guns in case a large vessel is sighted.
RAKING FIRE.
In ships with guns mounted on open decks and without a .1
casemates, the men and guns should not be exposed to a 1.1 Ire
a ( sh
fire.
At the order, STAND BY FOR RAKING FIRE FROM FOKW1411-41 14'at
AFT), the guns are quickly trained sharp on the bow, 0 nt e
on the quarter, as the case may require, in order to Fre. s III
smallest possible target, and the men lie down behind thed,
' ri
or behind adjacent barbettes or turrets. At the order, lee
COMMENCE
. FIRING, the men resume their stations. If 9'11d. he
nceuvre is to ram the enemy's vessel, all the guns sh11 0i r a
kept firing ahead or sharp on the bow, with sights set fa ;t:t Y titz
blank range until the instant of ramming, when the order,4,91
BY TO RAM, should be given. At this order all the me; 'del
drop to the deck on their hands, facing forward, an jlo
themselves to resist the shock of ramming. The shellmen 500
lay the shell on deck and firmly hold on to them. At ttie 5, ()ter
LOAD, or COMMENCE FIRING, the men resume their static
AID TO WOUNDED.
en1 e
No number is designated as aid to wounded. All
of the crew should be instructed in the application of"
to the Wounded," and the numbers least busy at the ter he
e
men "in reserve," should be ordered by the divisional 0' ree
aid and remove the wounded.
le u
ch
eit
cool-headed
It is advantageous to have an intelligent and
I
stationed aloft, or on a flying bridge, with telephone or a til
communication to the turrets, so he can give information
qu
the fall of shots, enemy's vessels, etc.
FALL OF SHOTS.
219
GENERAL ALARM AND CALL.

1111 nd "General Alarm" indicates emergency. When the gong
rar
the "General Alarm" the men will start quickly for
1
'
0 letgun stations and listen for the "Call," which is to announce
heatacter of the evolution. The "Call" for General Quarters
0/5 er rapid beating of the drum, accompanied by the bugle; or
101' the drum or bugle.
tb
dY
MUSTER.
he
dr assembly sounded on the bugle, or the ordinary beat of
p 9m or both, will be the call to quarters for muster and
tetion.
110
FIRE ALARM.
Isrielt except in action, will be indicated by the rapid ringing of
IP's bell, followed by one tap or two taps, to indicate fire
511 arlor aft. In action the fire bell will not be rung, but the
!kill always be kept led out, and the divisions will extinguish
go In their own neighborhood.
RETREAT.
retreat is the signal for leaving quarters; or when sounded
i. T1 emergency or other call, it nullifies that call. The bugle
e used on drill, or in action for many commands, such as
5110
CE! COMMENCE FIRING! CEASE FIRING! SECURE!
he
511,
of'
.01
5t
JP'
'
1Ce
SHARPSHOOTERS.
few well-trained marksmen should be stationed as sharpers in the tops and in other advantageous positions.
DEFINITIONS.
tee term fixed ammunition is used to indicate that the primer,
and projectile are fixed in a cartridge case, forming a coincartridge.
term separate antmunition is used to indicate that the
et11 and projectile are separate, although the charge may be
In a cartridge case.
JaPid-fire gun is one that has a quick-working system of
`n. closure operated by a single throw of a lever or.crank;
etther fixed or a separate ammunition, but when using the
requires the powder charge to be put up in a metallic
KIRe case.
quick-fire gun is one that has a quick-working system of
220
breech closure, operated by a single throw of a lever or

is fitted with automatic lock, and uses separate anttnunalo
the powder charge put up in a cartridge bag.
tt
I'll
GUN DRILLS.
V ve :ti(
Drill of the 3-in., 4-in., 5-in., and 6-in, rapid-fire guns.'
NO e
States
SIX men. (See Petty Officers' Drill Book, United
1902.)
Drill of the 5-in., 6-in., 7-in. and 8-in. quick-fire guns. .StatI
or eight men. (See Petty Officers' Drill Book, United
h 411)
Navy, 1902.)
i
Drill of a pair of 8-in. B. L. R. mounted in turrett.w] oo i,I1
,q I
ammunition lift for each gun. (See Petty Officers' Drill
i 41(
United States Navy, 19o2.)
t01 .t
Ammunition crew for a pair of 8-in. B. L. R., 111015` 1`t
turret. (See Petty Officers' Drill Book, United States 1431'.
1902)
tiled
Thil.!
Drill of a pair of ra-in., 12-in., or 13-in., B. L. R., nit pril '

NI
,ye
35 and 36, Gun and Torpeu(Pages 31, 32, 33, 34,
1900.)r
_
for the United States Navy,
Ammunition crew for a pair of ro-in., 12-in., or 13-in.,
mounted in electrically controlled turret. (Pages 37 and 3Q
and Torpedo Drills for the United States Navy, 1900.) ,
Drill of I-pdr. R. F. guns. (See Petty Officers' Drill 13
United States Navy, 1902.)
Drill of 3-pdr. and 6-pdr. R. F. guns. (See Petty Of]
Drill Book, United States Navy, 1902.)
turret.
DETAIL NOTES ON
DRILL OF
MAIN BATTERY'
The following extract is quoted from "Detail Notes

Drill of Main Battery, Petty Officers' Drill Book, United
Navy, 1902."
1. As the most difficult part of handling a gunthat
involves the greatest skill and most careful train1ng--c1
its pointing and the pointing mechanism, if a petty officer lc
a proficient marksman, he should not be assigned as gtifil
of a crew, but in such a case some man of a lower rating,
is a skillful marksman, should be No. I, the petty officer
assigned some other number at the gun; but the petty
should command the gun and superintend the loading.
By "proficient marksman" is meant a man who has ea
under the rules issued by the Bureau of Navigation.
laid
ev
tat
o
:c1
221
Gun-Pointers.
'
2e In each turret there should be at least two men, other than
ttregular gun-pointers, who have been practiced in the use
t:ie training and sighting gear.
Post of gun-pointer of a powerful turret gun is really one

title most responsible in a ship, and though enlisted men are
()fled for this duty, there is nothing to prevent an available
er from relieving the man stationed as such pointer, if effienabwould thereby be served. At the same time it should be
rv_ ered that a knowledge of the range to be used by the
ctilar gun (it is different for different conditions of the same
.11,
ii) that is, a knowledge of where the shots are actually hitting
reference to the target, is of the greatest importance, and
h`ne duty of a divisional officer to make his shots tell.
.ge gun-pointer must keep himself constantly informed of the
ktio of the target. His duty is to point and fire the gun..
ainis reason he is freed as far as practicable from distracting
s of the manual.
,e distance and bearing of the target, or enemy, are fretuY reported to the battery, and the gun-pointer must be
raed.by this distance in setting the sights.
Prescribed Arc.
accustom the members of a gun's crew to the idea that
gun is one primarily responsible for protection against sur1 Iv Or torpedo night attack from certain bearings, each gun's
t,should be allotted a certain arc to watch over, all the guns
cage same caliber combining to cover the entire horizon with
s nearly equal as possible. The "prescribed arc" is supt be marked, and the gun trained at "Cast loose and
ade" to its middle point. This indicates, more especially
so thIl anengaged gun, a general direction to be closely watched
e gun's crew.
Sights.
e
is 'he sight should be habitually set for some fixed range in
on %neighborhood of 600 yards until another range is ordered.
arse sight for ranges above this, and a fine sight for ranges
be
when using guns that are medium sighted, as are the
o
'iss guns, will probably be sufficient for torpedo ranges.
Dn the target or enemy is very close, the rear sight can be
Ped to zero without difficulty.
avoid confusion in the meaning of the foregoing terms,
are herewith defined as follows:
222
.0 e
1tip I
A fine sight is one in which the tip of the front sight is e. ti ir
the
has
bottom of the rear sight notch; a medium sight
has ticii0 Pr
the middle of the top of the notch; a coarse sight the or de
1,n
above the notch. The distance also of the eye from
rell
rear sight affects the line of sight; increasi'ng the distance
h
oug.
the sight more coarse.
u.r,At guns, fitted with telescopic sights, the target can be
sight tI
entirely below the horizontal cross wire for a coarse
sight.
fine
a
for
above
entirely
oitt be
To facilitate quick pointing at night, a white line aboutY ghop
ty
preferabl
and
nt,
be
convenie
as
may
in width, as long
-f
,
turret
a
of
top
on
painted
be
over a sighting hood, should
ing the intersection of a vertical plane parallel to the ax,es by ri
t t4
bores with the turret top. This may be used as a fincler,z eaL
ei
officer or one of the crew. A similar white line from 0000 (
inch in width, according to the caliber, should be placed
gun other than turret guns, in order that in emergenciesi t e
members of the crew may assist the gun-pointer in fiorillg an
sk,1
target.
Primers.
close II
5. It is much safer to insert the new primer and
kifrc
lock completely while the breech is open, because the gunthere
ir
be fired until the breech is entirely closed, and should jerk t
a short circuit at that time the recoil would simply
crank handle out of the hands of No. 2, and no danger, s it
crew would be entailed, but if the breech is closed bellthe
a 4111.1
primer is inserted, and No. 3 then inserts the primer, ancli,
1
should be a short circuit, as soon as he closes the weul1 sh
gun would be discharged and would injure him very serious
ard
er
might kill him.
Misfires.
140,
, this
6. Should a gun, using combination primers, misfire,,,
ri
extracts
circuit,
firing
the
break
to
slightly
breech
opens
primer and inserts a new one, then completely closesarethe ss Dco
again. As long hang-fires with smokeless powder
io
great care should be exercised not to open the breech b11cif
especial
,
occurred
several minutes after the misfire has
primer has been discharged.
5
primers, dlie
If a misfire occurs in guns using vent-sealing
to b'
seconds
the primer not igniting the charge, wait a few
1111
mid
that there is not a hang-fire, insert a new primer Mile coo
another trial. Should this fail, wait a few minutes
there is a hang-fire before opening the breech to exo110
to lI
vent and charge. Pull the charge to the rear, with its
pusile'
be
will
it
that
so
seat
check
gas
the
of
forward

t
ipa
Ito
*:
to
ea
e
a
223
by the head of the mushroom in closing the breech, and

L .n contact with the mouth of the vent. Close the breech
Proceed
as at first.
til3t open the breech until certain that there is no hang-fire.
using fixed ammunition, if a misfire occurs in a gun fitted ,
breech mechanism which requires to be open in order to
the firing pin; extract the cartridge and immediately try
ee; if
this fails, examine the primer to see if it has been
13, struck, and examine point of the firing pin, to see if it
en broken or upset. If the pin is injured, or the spring
'
5 other part of the firing mechanism is broken, it must be
ed If the firing pin can be cocked by hand without open.c breech, a second trial should be made before replacing the
(lee.
electric primers are being used, note if the firing point is
short-circuiting the current; if not test the circuit after the
tt cartridge has missed fire. In action do not try a second
suY cartridge that has once failed, unless it is absolutely
italeY To do so is an unnecessary experiment by which a
shot may be missed. Such cartridges as fail should be
elflr examined after the exercise, and some of them should
Nehcf, if necessary, in order to discover, if possible, the cause
Clearing the Vent.

.e
Y'1h. is highly important not to score the vent and primer seat
1,e` unnecessary use of the priming wire. This instrument and
e,
y
silk drill should be only used when several successive misark)vy that the vent is foul or jammed, and then from the
N.(1 end of the plug, under the personal supervision of an
or the gunner's mate. After the vent is cleared, the

thti seat should be cleaned out with the vent cleaner provided
k,8, Purpose. The slightest enlargement of the primer seat
Lt. ring, wear or erosion, will result in gas leaks to the rear,
55 ePossible jamming of the firing lock and injury to the crew.
q4vent does not need cleaning, but the primer seat should
-if Ined out whenever a primer has leaked about the mouth.
not imperative unless the leak is very serious.
atie
Firing Lock.
ti
h sure that the firing lock is screwed all the way on the
In stem, i. e., until the spring catch takes in its slot.
d
'Pe lock is screwed home, the end of the mushroom stem
to 111 "e flush with the edge of the wedge slot of the receiver.
lock is not screwed home tightly, the primer case will
224.
burst when the gun is fired, and the gases will fuse the Pri
case and spike the vent.
Loading.
thie
9. Every precaution must be taken to prevent injury to!
check seat. To this end the loading tray must be used, elt a
with fixed ammunition, both when loading or unloading the cri
with service or dummy charges. The lip on front end of 12
tray must cover the gas check seat.
'11
If the fixed ammunition cartridges are boxed, they Wl
taken out of the boxes at designated points and brought ri,"03
gun in the shellman's arms. The boxes may be thrown over'
or otherwise stored where not exposed.
With separate ammunition the projectile is entered 11P11er A
:
ird1 8
loading tray and set home. It is important that this be Prt
done. As the point of the projectile rises into the borer 1.011
striVsts
upon the chamber slope, the upper curve of the ogival
top of the bore near the origin of the rifling and for an,_111 fe , n
jams slightly. At this point, it might be thought from the
ing that the projectile is home. Experiment has shoWo ooe IAg
projectiles may easily be made to jam if pushed slow1Y,,,,gctilt 1
but when driven quickly up the chamber slope no such dro0 ,lik
is experienced. The marks on the rammer staff will
e,1
whether the projectile is home or not.
vicl \\II
Push the projectile with moderate speed through the POfrop
chamber until it is near the chamber slope, and then send it
1.4
kill
smartly.
d
h1
also
Unless the projectile is set smartly home there is
that it may slip back from its seat when the gun is elevate azi
the ship rolls.
till
The powder charge is inserted, tie first, and pushed in tli
order
just clear of the as check seat. It is left here in
;rig t,
when the breech is closed the mushroom head may briii tic
against it and push it forward by whatever further amt11
necessary. The effect of this is to leave the base of the C/13 h .
st
in contact with the mouth of the vent.
l tke,
115i
When the charge is put up in two sections, the first sbd
set up against the base of the shell, and the second be left ug Da
the mouth of the vent, as above described.
tolii
The short rammer handle is marked to indicate when the
is home. The mark must then be at the face of the breechs e
When entering the charge, care must be taken not to be, he
the point of the projectile against the rear face of the tu
11n
order to avoid the risk of raising a burr.
The shell occasionally starts from its seat in the neckoS Pr
fled
cartridge case. When this is observed the shellman must
s,e
225
by holding the cartridge vertically and tapping the

against the deck, being careful not to strike the primer.
see again
Sponging.
gs 0, t
,
t xPerience at proving grounds and in the service has demted that sponging is seldom necessary when using brown
and never necessary when using smokeless powder, but
IMPerative that the gas check and gas check seat should
ePt thoroughly clean. As soon as possible after the firing is
t hlitioued, the gun should be thoroughly washed out, the first
1( tin'? with salt water and deck hose with heavy pressure, after
s'it fresh water should be used and the bore dried and oiled.
th 1:441ging
is only resorted to when it will facilitate the loading

pe! Ivsashing out any accumulation of brown powder residuum.
id
tflokeless powder leaves no residuum, sponging is unneces.r The gas check seat and screw box should be wiped out
i5t5 Withdrawing the loading tray, as dirt may be deposited
fee Ifilg the loading.
til sPonging becomes necessary in ro-in., 12-in., and is-in. guns
ts brown powder, the muzzles are depressed and the washing
ii`lose thrust into the breech, the residuum in the chamber
liO 1,19osened by a small bristle sponge. After the gun is washed
,de ttett1 is lowered to the loading position. The gas check seat,
\v, Plug and screw box are cleaned with marine sponges.
ert using brown powder, the projectile should be rammed
as quickly as possible after the gun is fired while the
h'i'm is soft, and after the shell is home a sponge saturated
afresh water may be thrust into the powder chamber if there
113,signs of fire.
r0
Gas Checks.
r g 1. w.,
eit Itn each new gun there are issued to service three gas
tio ks Pads, and two sets of gas check rings. These pads and
are carefully fitted to the guns, and are not likely to give
erious trouble. The rings and pads, when thus fitted, are
ld t ed
for the gun to which they belong, and may be used in
gal Particular gun without any adjustment. If it becomes neces tise them in another gun, they should be carefully adjusted.
e 5 It ife of a pad is very variable.
1.
11
ist
gas checks should be as far as possible protected from the
er, and from everything which could indent or bruise the
t The rings should be kept scrupulously clean and well oiled,
he Pad should be habitually coated with tallow. After batI fl_Dractice, the mushroom and gas check should be removed,
ge
and oiled as soon as possible.
226
As the pad is liable to be injured in spite of all Precs,,t:es,

and may even be burnt across its checking surfaces by 311:-101
of gas, it becomes important to know how important such
Ys
are. The pad will check in spite of almost any amount 01.
a fp 4
ing, provided the checking circumference is intact. A Pa IaoSt a
Ca
be cut at any other point than this, and may even hav,..e
considerable part of its filling and yet check perfectly. VI,rio
checking circumference may be bruised or broken without s fa
results, if the injury does not extend across the checking,S." I
from front to rear. An exception may be found to Wisp
statement in cold weather, when by the hardening of the P3
plasticity is much reduced.
al3
A pad injured near its checking surface should be fer
however, if time permits.
f t
Difficulty may be found in closing the breech, arising -r
tight a fit of the gas check ring.
alre sl
The pad and split rings, when properly fitted, should bffici.e St
light bearing upon the gas check slope of the gun, just st1,10 of
to feel at the close of the locking motion that the pad is `"
a bearing.
101
With the latest form of gas check the mushroom nuts lit kes
be set up moderately tight and left so. There is verY ipty
chance of the pad or rings sticking.
the s a
The inspection of the gas check consists in seeing that
." eft,1
is in place and smooth, and held at the proper tension by t"
thi
on the mushroom stem.
en,
Providing.
tr the
12. Some of the articles mentioned in the drill as beir gar
in
deIi g
vided when casting loose will doubtless be provided
ship for action. The numbers indicated, however, will be
responsible for their presence at the gun.
ill tie
When the ship is cleared for action the division tubs w114e
filled with fresh water.
The number of rounds of ammunition to be brought t
gun as a first supply will be regulated by the commandingthe")
and will depend upon the requirements at the time. In 6r
sence of orders, or for exercise at general quarters without
1,07. rat
one full round for each main battery gun and one full
to
totfl
each secondary gun will be supplied.
8isti
Arms.
Portable racks to carry the rifles and revolvers of bric
gun's crew should be provided. Each arm required for inIt' .12.3
quarters or drill will be assigned by its number to a cer
13.
227
tiO
Sea.
jij
dho will take it from its rack only

when ordered at inspecto 3r when called away as rifleman or boarder. .
brolly s Wreck clearer is assigned. Under ordinary circumstances
119411g, ,nous incumbrance would be cleared away by the carpenter's
0 tail together with the riflemen, if needed, or a division specially
.,
riot must be taken that the fire of no gun is stopped to pertirt3 r tuts duty, if it can possibly be avoided. Axes are in racks
5 13 d each gun for clearing away a local wreck; they will be
men detailed at the time by the gun captain. The boardad
11 not carry cutlasses.
laC
ifl
tall
clert
Ammunition Supply.
the prompt and regular supply of ammunition is one of
,St important parts of the drill of R. F. and Q. F. guns.
to the breech of the gun. The cartridges are to be taken

ed.the boxes at points to be previously designated, at a suitdot c 'stance from the hoist, and the fuse is to be adjusted and
esase wiped off at a point near the gun. The men with cartipty form in a line or chain, and those who are returning with
A
Cases must move by another route, depositing the empty
ie r the md
returning to the hoist by such a route as not to interfere
C till least with the supply chain. These routes are to be most
th Ilv established by the divisional officer, for on the efficiency
ht s Part of the exercise the rapidity of fire will mainly
g pt
hot cases, when withdrawn from the gun after firing,
[ear ill not be allowed to fall on the deck, but should be caught
e lItt gloved hands. The empty cases should not be laid on their
It, but should be stood up on end or replaced in their boxes.
,illitige ammunition passers may carry the ammunition in the
Iler most convenient to themselves.
ei
o
Care of Electric Firing Attachment.
("fit
he it
'
S ,Arhile the firing batteries should remain unimpaired for
6r 1141 Years, it frequently happens that some of the cells deo% rate from internal action, and consequently it is very necesfr t) keep a close watch on each battery in order to replace
ve cells. For this purpose "battery testers" are supplied,
t jog of a fuse bridge in circuit with a resistance coil such
L the firing battery is in proper condition it will illuminate
dge without burning out. Firing batteries should be tested
o
in .bY applying the points of the testers to the battery terminals,
If the current fails to illuminate the bridge, the battery box
22.B
o
should be opened, the trouble located, and the defective Ce'"
cells replaced by new ones.
jld
If no battery tester is at hand, the firing circuit can be clu lace
tested by using a key, knife or any small piece of metal; ,F
the key, or the blade of the knife, in the spring socket i.rlud 4j1
metal handle to the end of your tongue; then place one hall
the gun to complete the circuit and have some one Pres
'
t el
firing key. If the circuit is all right for firing, you will'
e
slight tingle on your tongue.
._0
1
Of course, if the battery be allowed to short-circuit in 1,01
:,ted
waysuch as connecting the terminals, it will run down,
beyond this no trouble with the batteries is to be autie1V-tiol1l.
save the occasional deterioration of single cells by local a.
15 st
Above all, it must be remembered that a battery which cos el
good condition will never give out suddenlythere is 11 ilio
sibility of a battery which tests properly in the morning ta fo teet
in.the afternoon. A battery will fire thousands of primers ve-t
it is exhausted, and will fire hundreds more rapidly than arlY,-,o
can be fired without showing any material loss of strengt1 .. t7r.
sequently if reasonable care is taken to watch the batterle'!,t th
need never be feared that they are at fault when a misfire Fc..uvi
The fault will be most certainly found somewhere in the el
Moreover, there is a practical certainty that the primer itSit re
not fail. Every primer is tested with a current after manufac
and such an occurrence as the failure of an electric prinl,er,n71,0 e )
the ordinary current, is unknown at the Naval proving Yr-,
where electric firing has been used exclusively for several Ys ect
Besides watching the batteries, then, the important thing di ii
0
see tl-q.t there is no break in the electric connections, 01,
excessive resistance due to imperfect or dirty contact. On vart IN
other than those in turrets, the firing key and wire, and the ello
1
connections, should be removed after exercise, so as t
ith
putting the cover over the battery terminals, thus preven
short circuiting the battery by water or other means. The
" vea
minals of the wires and the contact studs of the firing key s':
3
be kept clean and free from grease, and they should be kept
dry place. The electric firing pin and the attachment lugs,
also be habitually kept off the rapid-fire guns if thought 0..
able, with the exception that attachment lugs which are sec'
o
by screws should be kept in place in order to prevent coils
ce
wear,
the screws too loose. When the lug is kept oil
gun, its spring socket can be protected by keeping a soft ur
I he
plug in it.
In turret guns, no connections should be broken. Great. C Ui
should be observed that the same poles of all the batteries
the turret are connected to the ground, in order to prevent bs
,he
229
Sibii
otin '',tY of a wrong gun being fired, due to the common

res el la the center hood. To this end the terminals, both of the
Thea binding posts should be tagged.
tit.daily test having shown that the firing battery is in good
Po, the connections between the cells good and no cell
tfa'wn, and examination having shown that all contact
.
trees are clean and free from grease, it is only necessary, in
te to prepare for firing, to seat the terminals of the firing
allIte,
and of the earth connections firmly in their respective
11111 `s*
3t0
Sighting Telescopes.
i5 I j The axis of the sighting telescope when properly adjusted
pos ,k be Parallel with the axis of the bore of the gun when the
ilie tet reads zero. The adjustment should be made on a distant
order to reduce the parallax to a minimum. Place the
fo t
gil
alghts in the gun and bring the cross wires on a distant
co ti; then adjust the sighting telescope until its cross wires
,
t same distant object; then replace the set screws, which
5,
2Ie tangent and thumb screws.
(cot 4
bronze sight brackets containing socket for telescope and '
arY bar-sights bolted to the elevating bracket of 5-in, and
ti recoil slides of pedestal mounts are not to be removed nor
vit e disturbed. Care should be taken in handling to protect
ti
brackets from any injury, pressure, etc., or from use in
3
,rea telt, in order that the adjustment of the socket. may remain
t The elevating arcs are not to be removed for cleaning.
is
ct
Rules for Firing.
g" b.
Of
vv ith large-caliber guns fire when on the target at the end
roll.
ith
imtI
when on the
et. rapid-fire guns with shoulder pieces, fire
t
hot'aYs
set sliding leaf the way you wish the shot to go, to
t i e et error already made; in other words the shot moves the
; i Way the rear sight does.
de A
414 NOTES ON THE DRILL OF SECONDARY BATTERY.
ot
secure to the crew the freedom of movement necessary
ke efficient serving of the gun, arms and equipments should
W 4 carried until required for use.,
he number of rounds of ammunition to be broughtto
tC gun as
a first supply will be regulated by the commanding
and will depend upon 'the requirements at the time. Iu
je5
lit 40sence of orders, a full box will be supplied.
230
f rid
3. In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, in inserting the ca:r-t
th e I
be very careful not to drive the point of the shell agaI,e. i
edge of the chamber. This will not happen if it is P e i re,11
horizontally, but it is very liable to do so if the cartridg
I
pointed downwards.
In the case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, the rear end f tli II i
e
cartridge should be slightly raised with reference to the P
so as to avoid driving the point of the shell against the:
ele
edge of the chamber. The lower edge and sides are Pr
respectively by the breech block and the extractors.
bti 9
Neglect to observe the above precaution may result in 3
f
about the edge of the chamber.
ill' 4
4. If after firing, the cartridge case sticks after partial e7cf th cii
tion, fully extract and then feel for a burr about the edge
chamber. If such exists it must be filed smooth. If 3J
el
is found it must be removed with a sponge.
1
Lre
5. If in loading a cartridge jams and will not let the 10c
,,
ty
block close, never attempt to drive it home, by forcing the u (1 il
unload at once, put the cartridge aside and try another.
co Ilii
It should not, however, be expected that all cartridge oil lirb l
will go completely home without effort, as the least dillbe be
case or in the chamber will prevent this. There should
411
h (I
hesitation in driving cartridge home with the force due to s
ing the breech block smartly.
a 11.t.d
6. If for any reason the cartridge case will not extract( cp
i
the head with the extracting tool and pull it out. If this
e1
ram it out from the muzzle.Dart
rr t tild
7. In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, if the nib of the elitsc
breaks, back the stop bolt clear of the breech block, lWer a i..
1
block until the extractor slot is clear, pull out the extract /1,.
o tc
insert the spare one.
rac
In the case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, if one e2ct,) e d
breaks, the other can be used for a time, but the first '''s. dl
tunity should be taken to put in a new one; back out the,, in
bolts, half-cock, draw axial bolt, holding the block
lower the block far enough to expose the extractor, restli
'
ra 14g
upper part on the tray for support; pull out the broken ort..,ii 'lira
extractor
Sa
and put in the new one. Do not insert the new
cartridge already in the gun, as the nib will come on the.
e]
side of the cartridge head.
, 'th
.8. In the case of the Hotchkiss gun, if a cartridge illiss-Ao , 1(
withdraw it at once and see that the drill hook has been
and the firing spring hooked up. Insert a second cartridgid 'Ile RI
try again. If the misfire is repeated, remove the breech.5 :Pi
at once and feel the firing pin to see if it is broken. If it 1 Ng,
231
id
ill beiverYthing looks right, change the mainspring before putting
ock back.
rile case of the Driggs-Schroeder gun, if the primer misses
'
1,11 Put in a new cartridge and try again. If it still misses,
t lint the block, remove the face plate and renew the firing
col vePfr Wing, whichever is found defective. If the cap should
led to obturate, at any shot, it is possible that a residuum
ipPe
ecte e nave been deposited on the front end of the firing pin or rear
f face plate, which might shorten the throw of the former
Prevent it striking the cap.
n action, do not try a second time any cartridge that has
e failed unless it is absolutely necessary. To do so is an
experiment by which a telling shot may be missed.
t heessary
o .cartridges as fail should be carefully examined after the
Cr to and some of them should be fired, if necessary, in
0. ,ro
discover possible the cause of the failure.
cc t 'n returningif ammunition,
great care must be taken that
cartridge cases are not put in ammunition boxes containing
1 cartridges and vice versa; 3 is held responsible for
Ca" 11?", lon to this.
of/ ''Llien firing blank cartridges, the empty cartridge cases must
be be returned to a box containing charges, because if there
3' loose powder in the bottom of the box it might be ignited
t" disastrous
results.
After ammunition boxes have been sent below, and before
eng them in the fixed ammunition rooms, the men stationed
5
Da Will re-distribute the ammunition so as to completely fill
tract oiltially filled boxes except one. This last partially filled box
er;,,,never be sent up on deck in supplying.
)1* Ole drill hook is designed to relieve the mechanism of
o'',tchkiss gun from strain when snapping the gun at drill,
` Prevent the firing pin from delivering too strong a blow
,p
drill cartridges are used.
dr.i11, or when the piece is secured, the drill hook should
to' In place, but when the gun is cast loose for action, the
ig 1hook should be removed, and the lower branch of the main' It t's hooked to the stirrup; otherwise a misfire may occur.
ral main-springs and sear springs are used in the latest
eof Hotchkiss guns.
ttkr-Pdr. is not supplied with a drill hook.
the Driggs-Schroeder gun, drill washers have been de00 pi Ior the same purpose. They should not be kept on when
ge th eCe is secured, as they increase slightly the compression
I)1 3. -sPring when unlocked.
he drill apron is used only when the exercise is with drill
j5tges
A
232
ndr A
14. Reserve boxes for the Hotchkiss 6-pdr., 3-pdr., and
01,1
contain the following accessories and spare parts:
ACCESSORIES.Sponge brush, cleaning brush, oil can, earghtip Q
te,
tion dismounting tool, dismounting pin, monkey-wrenclit
extractor (except for ir-pdr.), drill hook (except for I-Par' A.
latest types), lanyard hook.
, 0 I
SPARE PARTS.Stop bolt, hammer, firing pin, mainspring'
spring, sear, extractor.
Pdt Qu
Driggs-Schroeder reserve boxes for 6-pdr., 3-pdr., ancontain the following accessories and spare parts:
Q.
ACCESSORIES.Babbitt mallet, sponge brush, cleaning bras '
can, combination screwdriver, firing pin wrench, block OP
hand extractor, face plate, drift, drill washers.
%us
SPARE PARTE.Firing pin, firing spring, right and left e
tors, sear, sear spring, set of gun screws.
is. In pointing the Hotchkiss gun be sure to fill the rear t
notch with the forward sight point; that is, take a full sig
the shell will fall short.
, Q.
16. Lard oil should not be used on any part of the Mecria b A
as it hardens in cold weather. Mineral or fish oil is better' Q.
vaseline the best.
d rti
17. With the recoil mount, the pistol grip cannot be '.e.t0
the hand when firing without danger of dislocating the " Q.
te;
therefore a trigger lanyard is provided.
A
AID TO THE WOUNDED.
.
fst Qet);'
r16
Every man should be instructed in the rudiments of.
to the Wounded:
fb1 -tit
Q.
(i) Never touch the wound; (2) stop the flow
especially when spurting; (3) take the patient to the
soon as possible.
().
Q. What are arteries?
k,
b100a
().
,,
which
A. They are the passages through the body by
boor
the
conveyed from the heart out to the extremities of
Q. What are veins?
3Pa
A. They are the passages conveying the blood back fr00 ve
extremities to the heart.
etitly
:, Adt.c
Q. Which is the most dangerous to have cut?
tr, e;
it
'
from
of
flow
the
blood
if
A. An artery-, because
stopped a man will bleed to death; while even if a large,0 Q. ,
is cut a man will probably riot lose enough blood from it
him.
Qr ._Du
Q. How can you tell whether bleeding is from a vein
s'aa
artery'?
ORDNiNCE AND GUNNERY.

s
233
olood from arteries is bright red, and it spurts out from

kW
,,,?nod at every beat of the heart; blood from veins is a
n>e.
"red, and oozes out rather than spurts.
:.0W would you stop a wound in the arm or leg from
Mg?
4.
ht pass
tourniquet around limb above wound, and draw it
1
(NI enough to stop bleeding. The lump on the tourniquet
vdr d press on the artery to close it.
11. 'here is the best place to find the artery in the arm?
oj
un the inside of the upper part of the arm.
X In the leg?
I oOn the front inside part of upper leg, on line between
knees.
:to A ipand
o a wound of the arm or leg, what is the first thing to do?
lace tourniquet, as above described if bleeding is profuse.
Q. Tay save the man's life. Then take the man to the Sick Bay.
4. -in wound of hand or forearm, where place tourniquet?
Q. 16"bove the elbow joint; lump of tourniquet on artery.
Pt
i 4. An wound of foot or leg, where place tourniquet?
' Q. above the knee; lump of tourniquet on artery.
11/hat is a quick way of stopping bleeding that is not
Id,
grP
113,,
f raising limb high up.
ce? no tourniquet were at hand, what could you use in its
A. A
.t handkerchief, neckerchief, with knot in it to rest on
t Qtio
A,: p NY would you tighten it?
taui?' Passing knife, bayonet, or stick through it, and twisting
Lor Q
..r.1 wounds of the body, could you use a tourniquet?
Q No.
tt: IATOW would you stop bleeding?
ply first aid dressing and bandage tightly.
that is a first aid package and what does it contain?
ey is a small package containing dressing for wounds.
iv:re chiefly for use ashore when medical attendance may not
elm soon. An intelligent use of the first aid package freILY saves life. The package contains gauze pads, bandages,
;èrchief bandages, and safety pins, all antiseptic; that is,
0 Q 113' cleaned of all germs, etc.
,0w do you apply them?
'Pen carefully touching contents just as little as possible,
0
ert gauze pad on wound. Apply gauze bandage, and if
41.3', put handkerchief bandage over them.
t
ping?
Q
.
234
.-
Q. What must you always avoid in case of any wound? tbc

A. Never touch wound with fingers, and keep dirt and ', t
foreign matter out of it. This is the most important 01 111
learn about dressing wounds. Dress them quickly and Pu out
dressing on securely so as to keep dirt and poisonous genus
and let the rest be done in the hospital.
, toot
Q. In handling a man with broken leg, what must you '
for?
A. Avoid moving the broken limb. Before moving him!,sbto
l
the leg, with handkerchief or bandages to the good leg, or
are broken, to a splint, rifle or something stiff, and then P
on stretcher.
Q. How are stretchers with wounded men carried?
A. Always carry it as level as possible.
fo
Q. What is an easy way of transporting a wounded InaII
a short distance?
A. Using a hand chair: Two men grasping wrists so as
form a seat.
updo
Q. What would you do if there were a number of W0
men on deck and you were detailed to look out for them?, 901 's
A. Move them as quickly as possible out of the way an"
ts
tourniquets.
eati
11.a
hs
is
hiat
*1'41
the
't11
out
CHAPTER VI
411:
bot'
SIGNALS
fo
CONTENTS.
IS
ode
PAGE
236
Signals
41 Questions
on Signals
Numbers
ts
'finals
'ating Signals
Code
11 11;1 and Receive a Message
"gnalsSearchlight
Signals
's Sigl
Night Signals
ant Signals
Signals
ial Squadron and Tactical Signals
rh
ational Signals
era,
" Notes on Signals
a 5E;
237
244
245
247
247
249-250
250
250
251
255
258
258
260
262
267
SIGNALS
nava' s".`, t
cover the subject of
The questions given below
n 11
a
m
y
e
h
every
T
by
ed
master
and
studied
be
should
seaman branch.
FLAG SIGNALS.
g?
Q. If 1442 is hoisted alone, where find its meanin
A. In the general signals.
W011
Q. If you were making a telegraphic signal how
sa
indicate it?
or un
A. By hoisting the telegraphic flag either above
mast with signal.
Q. What is the telegraphic flag?
on toll,
A. It has two white and two blue parts; blue
fly.
in
blue
over
below in hoist; white
Q. How make a geographic signal?
same Masi
A. Hoist geographic flag over signal, or on
Q. What is the geographic flag?
A. The dispatch flag, called the "Five of Clubs." off C y?
G,
Q. How would you make a signal referring to an
number, i. e. how signal the name of an officer?
issue' it
A. Look in Annual Naval Register of latest Hoist
the number opposite the name of the officer.
the convoy pennant above it.
Flat
Q. What is the convoy pennant?
ern,5
A. It is a white pennant with red border.
Q. How make a vessel's number?
A. Select vessel's number from list of vessels in the
Se
of signal book and hoist it with cornet over it.
Q. What is the cornet?
over ri
61311
A. Flag of four red and white squares, white
s in
hoist; red over white in fly.
Cz
Q. How make date signal?
onding t
A. Select number in table of dates corresp it.
over
t
pennan
ing
answer
it
with
Hoist
d.
.desire
Book?
Q. How would you refer to the Boat Signal or ove' het
with,
"B,"
tional
A. By hoisting an Interna
, Or
.signal.
signal book?
Q. How refer to spelling table in boat
tional "C
A. By hoisting position pennant or interna "B ").
ats
a boat signal or under code flag (international
SIGNALS.
237
low make a numeral?

send on the flags representing the numeral to be sig'1_and hoist it with meal pennant over it.
,Wshat books are used in Navy signalling?
R113t kx) General signal book containing also the telegraphic
'
dictionary and geographic code.
,(2)Tactical signal book for use in fleet tactics.
l3) Boat signal book, containing tactical and other signals
v
for use with boats.
t57hat are the flags used for making the numbers in the
I re(,r)Red flag; (2) yellow with blue ball; (3) blue flag;
and blue burgee; (5) yellow and red flag; (6) blue and
5yW burgee; (7) red, yellow, red horizontal striped flag;
,
c11W, red, yellow horizontal striped burgee; (9) blue,
'v, blue horizontal striped flag; (o) yellow burgee with
cross; 1st repeater, red pennant, yellow square in hoist;
ekater, yellow pennant, blue square in hoist; 3d repeater,
Pennant, yellow square in hoist.
GENERAL QUESTIONS ON SIGNALS.

c What methods of signalling are employed in the U. S.
5e General signals, made in hoists with flags; wig-wag sigI.-with small hand flags, torch, or lantern; sound
by
`1-log same alphabet as wig-wag, but letters indicated
signal,L
Whistle or even gun-shots. Very's night signals, made by
Colored lights and rockets; international, made with
national flags; electric or Ardois night signals of four
r5.
distant signals, made by balls and shapes and referring
11.1.bers in general signal book.
ow is a general signal made?
Select from the general signal book the number repreC 6: signal it is desired to make. Take flags representing
ures of this number and bend them on the signal hal',!,11 the order they come. Hoist away roundly when ready.
to Can one number taken from the signal book have more
?Pe meaning?
'es; the same number has different meanings, according
ref, ,,hether it is in the list of general signals, the telegraphic
llarYL the geographic, vessel's number, date signal, boat sigor. is simply a numeral.
,r,Ow would you use the repeaters?
repeaters repeat a flag in the hoist. The 1st repeater
Ls 1st
flag in hoist, ;:d, the ad, etc.; for example, 2332
238
a-t r; e
would be made by hoisting 2, 3, ad repeater, 1st rePe eeate
2333 would be made by hoisting 2, 3, 2d repeater, 3d rePra?
Q. How could you make general signal 2333 in a thick
.A. By using sound signals (the whistle or bell).
Q. How could you make it at night?
A. Either by electric, Very, or sound signals.
al
Q. Could you send a telegraphic, or geographic, algri
these systems?
ario
A. Yes; each system has a method of showing the v
meanings a signal number may have.
ara911
Q. Are you allowed to use the telegraphic or gen'
when general signals are being made?
A. Yes; on another mast. For example, the signa!,
Steam Launch to Bring Off Fresh Beef from Manila,
be made as follows:
Telepraphic Diet.
Boat No.or Recall.
GeograPb.iii
Gen. Sig.
Steam Launch. Bring off fresh From Ma

beef.
Q. What are distinguishing pennants, and how used?
A. Each letter of the alphabet has a corresponding Pe" 3
Ships of a squadron have a call letter assigned thon'g,
therefore the corresponding distinguishing pennants. ELas
of commander-in-chief always "F." Distinguishing tint 11
also given to squadrons, and pennants to divisions; use
those for vessels.
Q. What flags and pennants are used in the NavY
besides the numerals, repeaters, and distinguishing Penri
A. Cornet, guard flag, answering pennant, preparatorY
nant, interrogatory pennant, numeral pennant, affirmativea
nant, designating flag, annulling flag, position Pennant, citi p
tine flag, compass flag, telegraph flag, dispatch flag, V I
pennant, general recall, battalion flags and guide, churcu
nant.
Q. Describe each of the above flags?
A. Refer to plates or flags.
Q. Describe briefly the uses of each flag mentioned? ,
A. The cornet: (I) Hoisted alone at foremast head
order for all belonging to the ship to come on ba
once, regardless of length of leave. Also means
under sailing orders and about to get under-viai
Over a signal means ship's number; under a
means the private number.
Direct.
SIGNALS.
239
ete
Og
d
Iv;
1111116111....
240
REPEATER
PREPARATORY
1000....
2. REPEATER
>
3, REPEATER
NUMERAL OR MEAL
AFFIRMATIVE
ANSWERING
ANNULLING
SIGNALS.
s
1
%a
o0
)
r
:1
"1
i,.1
[0
%o
a
a
Li)
,c1
/
a
1
a
:i
13
t't
r'
o
5
'1
241
Guard flag: (I) Hoisted at fore during daylight at

anchor, vessel has guard duty. Red light fore truck
replaces it at night. (2) Hoisted at yard-arm of flagship calls guard-boat. When under-way in formation
this is guide flag. Hoisted by flagship with ship's
designating pennant over it, appoints that vessel guide
and guard; answered by hoisting flag. Position pennant hoisted under it means haul down guard flag.
Answering pennant: .
(i) To be hoisted close up in answer
to each signal, signifying, "Signal is received and
understood." While telegraph signal is being made
it is only hauled halfway down. If a ship is obeying a
Signal she will not answer. If not understood, hoist
"interrogatory" instead of answering pennant. (2)
Hoisted as a division point, it separates degrees from
minutes, dollars from cents, etc., and replaces decimal
Point. (3) Hoisted over a signal, refers to table of
dates.
Preparatory
reparatory pennant means: (I) Prepare to execute the
signal shown. (2) At yard-arm of senior officer's ship
alone, morning and evening, it is hoisted when the
first call is sounded and hauled down at first note of
bugle, or first beat of drum sounding ruffles and
Ir flourishes.
Iterrogatory: (I) Hoisted above signal, puts it in form
of question, as "Land I see," with interrogatory,
means "Do you see land?" (2) Or it may ask permission; e. g.,"Int. get under way," signifies "May I get
under-way?" (3) If in answer to a signal; "what sig4 nal is that?"
iimeral: Hoisted over, or under, signals means simply
the numeral represented by the signal giving an amount
of something referred to previously, or at that time,
in another signal, for example: In signals reporting
latitude and longitude, numeral above means N. Lat.,
E. Long.; below, S. Lat. and W. Long. In signalling
the time of day, numeral above means a. m., below,
P. m. Soundings: Above, bottom so many fathoms;
below, no bottom so many fathoms. (2) Hoisted as
meal pennant alone, when crew is at meals at anchor.
Shown regardless of the meal hours of other ships.
242
THE
.ssi0
, report
Perffilse,th
Affirmative: (I) In answer to a signal
,
granted," or "Yes." (2) Over a signal
has been done; bee
the work called for in that signal"Batt
alion has 011
over "Land battalion," means
leave Oro
landed." (3) When admiral is about to
down wile
d
haule
it is hoisted under his flag, and
(
shoves off.
e.
'
14
means
signal
a
to
r
answe
In
(I)
Negative:
sens
ve
negati
the
in
it
puts
signal
a
Hoisted over
"Danger Otig,
Danger flag: (r) Hoisted alone meansdenot
es bear'
signal
ss
(2) Hoisted over a compa
desigrIfit
danger from ship making signal. (3) As
ng Pellaa d 5
flag it is hoisted over the distinguishiYork
Iwo!
'
s,e,
vessel designated; e. g., signal: ' New
own, ,ist
rounds of 37-mm. ammunition to the Yorkt
pennant
be made by New York's distinguishing
to shiP .rs
ted
indica
es
articl
d
"Sen
,
signal
over
telegraphic, 3,700
nated "; then numeral 500; then, by
York'
ammunition; then designating flag over
nt.
rse
distinguishing penna
0
,
that nv9
Annulling flag: (r) Annuls all signals at alone,,a'
so
ed
Hoist
displayed on the same mast. (2)
wino'
last signal made, or last hoist. (3) Toannulliai
preceding signal, hoist signal again with
over it, or displayed at same time. (4) To aril/
entire telegraphic signal, hoist annulling flag
telegraphic flag.
indicates
Position pennant: (1) Hoisted by a ship,formatOtt;
a
in
on
ned
positi
has attained an assig
indicate
Hoisted halfway by a ship in formation
hoists ro
she
it
ning
has lost her position; on regai
down. (3) Whella
nant and immediately hauls it distin
guishing Pe:,
played by senior ship with a
or
over it, means, "You are out of position," Will
"
are out of order." (4) When in double
on.
d
divisi
secon
a
by
flag
guide
as
used
most coa.11511t
Quarantine flag: (r) Hoisted at fore, or
I d 13
'
ous place, means "Ship is in quarantine." Is
all boats
day and night. (2) Carried in bows of-comi
ng
ship in quarantine. (3) Hoisted by in boat Oa
indicates that they desire pratique. Noher Vara
officers) shall go alongside a ship until
flag comes down.
to indicate a
Compass flag: Is hoisted with signal numbe
r of clti
tes
indica
,
netic course. If above
SIGNALS.
243
Points to the eastward of north; if under, to the westward of north, thus: Compass flag over 37 indicates
e g
ESE. r
4. E.; below 37 indicates WSW. 3 W.
be'
Telegraph flag: Hoisted above a signal, or on same mast,
tt
indicates meaning is found in telegraphic directory.
co'
General or other signals may be made at the same
time from other masts. If telegraphic signal is not
for all ships Present, the distinguishing pennant of
C. A
Ships addressed will be hoisted over telegraph flag. A
distinguishing pennant under telegraph flag exempts
that vessel from obedience to the signal and she will
011
not answer it.
Dispatch flag: (i) Hoisted at fore, or forward, in a vessel
indicates that she is on dispatch duty. When so engaged she should hoist below this flag the pennants of
Ships to which bound, pennant of first ship to be communicated with at bottom. When this ship has been
visited the pennant should be unbent. (2) In formation,
under-way, dispatch flag should be kept rounded up at
main truck ready to break in case of accident to
Cl
machinery. When broken it indicates break-down
ship not under control; other ships keep clear. (3)
51/1
Hoisted over signal or on same mast; meaning of signal
is found in geographical list.
o" Convoy pennant: Worn at fore of all vessels on convoy
duty. Kept hoisted during daylight. (2) Hoisted alone
at any other point by senior officer present during
evolutions or drills, commands "Silence." (3) Over a
signal number refers to signal number of an officer in
latest Annual Navy Register.
General recall flag: (i) Hoisted at any time by senior
officer is an order for all vessels or boats absent in
(
risP
:ect
15
51
veo
a .4
1/1'
chase, or detached duty, to return with all speed to
Ship or station; should not be hauled down until fully

obeyed. If distinguishing pennants are hoisted over
it, applies only to vessels as designated. If pennants
are under it, exempts those vessels from obedience.
oat recalls: Made by repeaters in day; at night, by
lanterns corresponding to pennants. Will be kept up
until boat is made out as returning, in obedience to
Signals. In case of emergency, a gun may be fired to
attract attention. If hoisted with annulling flag above
it, it indicates that vessel so designated shall not return
at time previously prescribed, but will await further
display of recall.
244
Church Pennant: Hoisted over the ensign during

service on board Navy ships.
Urgent Distress Flag: "0" of Navy Code, di5P13Ye
alone at any time indicates, "I need immediate assi'
ance."
d
Powder flag: (I) No. i of Navy Code, is clisPIP.
fore of all vessels while taking on board, or distil
ing, explosives or loaded projectiles, and in b0 11l
boats carrying powder. (2) Also displayed by 3 ba
engaged in target practice with main or secondary
tery while firing is in progress. Hauled dwil
"Cease firing."
Oat
Union Jack: Blue flag with a white star for ever'',0.r,
ano
(
(r) In port is a sign of dress, and when at
hoisted on jackstaff forward in good weather:aY
Hoisted at fore, it is signal for pilot. Gun
fired to call attention to it. (3) Hoisted at nnzz coo
d
at a yard-arm, denotes general court-material or
ti[ g
of inquiry in session on board.. Hoisted, a eo,
fired, when court meets; hauled down wilw
ellnro
adjourns for the day or is dissolved. (4) `-,111;
bows of boats for a diplomat of or above ra
"Charge d'Affairs" visiting ship officially.
Q. What is the table of dates?
ye
A. It is a table giving a number for every day in the,. 01
Date signals are indicated by hoisting answering pentlan'
the number representing the date.
SHIP'S NUMBERS.
Q. When do vessels exchange numbers?
110
A. When meeting, or falling in with, each other, vessels
number as soon as within signalling distance.
no
Q. Suppose several vessels are together, do all hoist
bers or distinguishing pennants?
A. No; the senior ship of a group of vessels hoistf.
number.
Q. If you are coming into port and hoist your number,
then read the number of the ship in port, what do?
A. Hoist answering pennant.
Q. Would you haul down your number?
A. Not until it had been answered.
di5
Q. When would you make number, and when use
guishing pennant?
A. When of same squadronwhen all ships know all a
SIGNALS.
245
lift ;Ds
Presenthoist distinguishing pennant; ntherwise hoist
tIlber.
aYe Q,
ois A
by not always use distinguishing pennant?
Because ship's numbers are permanent. Distinguishing
ants are assigned by the commander-in-chief ,of a fleet,
vessels not belonging to that fleet have no pennant asd them.
,vvhy not always use numbers?
yb
ecause four flags would usually appear in a number
et over three otherswhile the pennant is much more conQieut and more easily hoisted.
5t3t SuPpose you were entering port and a ship was between
a.4 the flagship, with whom would you exchange numbers?
tv with the flagship. I would hoist my number. The ship
ay ilirn would hoist that number with first repeater over it,
co; 3'ing it was a repeated signal. When answered by flagco or senior ship, she would haul down; then I would haul
hi'. She would then repeat to me the number of the senior
" and when I answered she would haul down.
BOAT SIGNALS.
'
t?What is the boat signal book, and where should it be
jhe boat signal book is a book compiled for use in comt,eating between ships and boats in the U. S. Navy, and
always be kept in the boat in a water-proof bag, where
t all times accessible, in order that a signal may at any
read.
what means can you tell whether the meaning of a
gl will be found in the boat signal book, or in the general
al book?
'blhe flag "B" (red burgee of the international code) is
a?at code flag, and when hoisted on the same mast with the
indicates "Boat signals use." All signals made by
t are taken from this book, and the code flag is unneces. Islls?ow do the different positions of the burgee affect the
4a
i,,turgee at masthead, signal is addressed to squadron of
Burgee at yard-arm or gaff, addressed to ship's own
1310w could the flagship signal to boats of another ship?
fr Y showing that vessel's distinguishing pennant over
ee at the yard-arm or gaff.
246
A
Q. How is a signal made to a single boat?
A. By displaying, above the burgee, the flag or Pennant re
resenting that boat's number.
al t
Q. Suppose the boat belongs to another ship, how sigll
her?
A. Display that vessel's distinguishing pennant over
boat's number and the burgee.
A.
Q. Can the boat code be used to signal to ships?
ex tll
A. Yes; when no boats have been called away forfrorevsi(
and no boat's number is displayed, such a signal
senior ship is addressed to ships present, or to those Trod 111)
'
511 eau
distinguishing pennants are shown above the burgee.
similar circumstances, a boat signal made by any other e
addresses the flagship.
burg Q.
A.
Q. In signalling to ships by this code, where is the
ta
hoisted?
ii
A. At the mast head.
Q.
Q. How are night signals made to boats?
A. Generally by wig-wag code, using torch, lantern, abo
tric light system, or the numbers may be made by rhe,, fp A.
Q.
systems preceded by the proper code call (referring to
A.
signals use ").
Q. How are these signals answered?
Q. By a hand lantern or by a Very's green star.
d
Q. In what order are ship's boats numbered? What
distinguishing call?
0
A. Each ship's boats are numbered in the following ,
beginning with No. I. If the ship has more than ten
those in excess are to be assigned the affirmative, prepar;
and other pennants except position and repeating Perillor
Steam launches, steam cutters, sailing launches, cutters In 0
of their numbers; barges, gigs and dinghies. This number
the burgee is the boat's distinguishing call.
Q.
Q. Where should the answering pennant be kept?
tier
jet,
A. It should be kept with the boat signal book,
de
can be reached quickly in case a signal to the boat is
The boat signal book and the answering pennant shot! 0
st .
be kept locked up in the boat box, which is usually frey
etri
away under the thwarts in inaccessible places, with its Do
board ship.
n tic),
Q. In using boat signals, what would the position Pe- eetl
over the signal mean?
SIGNALS.
247
A. It
would refer you to the spelling table in the back of
re 11
)00k.
lit
jil
REPEATING SIGNALS.
Q.
A. What is
meant by a repeating ship?

rci)
, s A ship which repeats signals between two other ships.
tl1. Inadrons certain vessels are designated to repeat signals;
,1101'des it is a general rule that if a ship is in sight of two other
,
roul which are trying unsuccessfully to communicate, whether
sareaUse they are too far away, Or because something prevents,
hall repeat signals at once.
irg Q Row is a repeated signal indicated?
commander-in-chief of
lia 4If repeated by any one except
, Cron or division, show the 1st repeater above the signal;
Q.[ telegraphic, above telegraph flag.
elkq Row would you repeat a signal to a certain ship of a
airon?
Dcrl
ik Ilnist her distinguishing pennant above the 1st repeater.
If repeating a signal from a ship to flagship?
A.
t linist 1st repeater above the vessel's distinguishing pen-
t!' D. When a repeated signal is answered, what does repeating

do?
(A,
ofda Roists answering pennant.
When does she haul down signal and answering pennant?
0t-A. When the original signal is hauled down.
rat
Loa
oft
r o'
WIG-WAG CODE.
Q. What is the wig-wag code?

leek The wig-wag is a code in use in both army and navy by
riOlich each letter and single figure is represented by a number
ld
UP of I's and 2'S. It may be sent by the use of a hand
or anything visible by day, or by a torch, lantern, or
$1 etric portable light at night. A motion with any of these
915'3 to the right means 1; go to left means 2. A third
ell t 011, called 3, is made by waving the flag or light down
eCtly in front of the sender.
248
f
Q. What is the number corresponding to each letter o
alphabet.
A.
ARMY AND NAVY (WIG-WAG) CODE.

22
2112
121
222
12
2221
2211
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
122
I.
1122
2121
221
1221
11
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
21
1212
.1211
211
212
2
112
V ........11
W.....'00
X..... ii
Y .. 090
Z ''ill
tion .
Q. What are the numerals?

A.
1
1111
2.... .......2222
3
1112
4
2221
5
6
7
NUMERALS.
1122
2211
1222
2i
8...........0 t
9..........'.011
0..........
Q. How would you use figures in a wig-wag message? .,,i,

A. They would be used only when referring to general sispj ,
311/11 3 '
book, using code calls similar to flag signals. For ex.
if desiring to send signal to New Orleans, "Proceed vot IT gn
spi
e iv q
to
dispatch to Yokohama, Japan," and it was desirable
out, call up New Orleans and signal "G. S. U. 3''(signilnd`
general signal's use); the.' X. X. 3 (signifying numeralsj3 I
then G. L. U. 3 (signifying geographic signal use, N. -7%.1
then (supposing 4567 means Yokohama) 2221, 1122, 2211, *1 0 ^
X. X. 333. Numerals in the body of an ordinary message Iv a
be spelled out in full.
/Iv
Q. What abbreviations are used?
,. t'
A. A means after; B, before; C, can; H, have; N, "`,'
are: T, the; U, you; UR, your; W, word; Wi, with; Y'.
XX3, "numerals follow," or "numerals end"; SIG 3,
to
ture.
kti,
Q. When should abbreviations be used?
A. The abbreviations for words should be used whenever te
11;t
word occurs in a message.
Q. What are code calls used for in the wig-wag signals? till
A. For referring to the various signal codes, such as t e,
ei
graphic, geographical, boat or general signals.
shi
Q. What are the code calls?
A. I. C. U., international code use;
th
ell
T. D. U. (Navy), telegraphic dictionary use;
G. L. U.(Navy), geographical list use;
B. S. U. (Navy), boat signals use;
ti
G. S. U.(Navy), general signals use;
SIGNALS.
249
C. S. U.,
compass signals use;

C. A. U., cipher"A' use;
C. B. U., cipher "B" use;
C. C. U., cipher "C" use;
N. L. U., Navy list use;
n V. N. U., vessels' numbers Use.
How send a wig-wag signal with flag, torch, lantern or
)
"'
%j3
Of searchlight?
11 '....,(Tactical Signal Book of the U. S. Navy, page 23.)
s.l.here are but one position and three motions. The first
0on is with the flag or other appliance held vertically, the
s airrian facing squarely toward the station with which it is
?Id to communicate.
'; the signal is waved to
t he first motion, or one' or
;II rright of the sender, and will embrace an arc of go degrees,
,tiug with the vertical and returning to it, and will be made
Plane exactly at right angles to the line connecting the
, t stations.
e second motion, or 'two' or 2,' is a similar motion
al _e left of the sender.
I
T0 make the third motion, front,' or'three,' or 3: the
C11 ;tal is waved to the ground directly in front of the sender,
fy
_nstantly returned to the first position.
old ,N, umbers which occur in the body of a message must be
3 e"fl out in full. Numerals may be used in signalling be,
..1.1 stations having naval signal books, using the code calls.
0 use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be used
Point of reference to the motion. The lantern is more
1:en1ently swung out upward, by hand, from the footlight
'and raised vertically for 3:"
it; I and'2
li
5ig
TO SEND A MESSAGE.
,
k call a station, signal its initial or call letter until
eq0wledged. To acknowledge a call, or receipt of a mescr Ti; signal,
"I understand."
!'t flagship may call another ship by hoisting the latter's
inguishing pennant halfway. When ready to read the mes5 t e, the
ship called hoists the answering pennant halfway; at
istend of the message the flagship should hoist the distin1 ng pennant to the yard-arm, and the other ship should
ge"le same with the answering pennant if the message is
,,t.rstood; otherwise she should hoist the interrogatory pen1
cornet at the yard-arm calls the entire force for a

ral wig-wag signal. Any ship may be exempted by dis-
250
'pS r
playing her distinguishing pennant under the cornet. A- -I 01I ng
thus called, will answer as prescribed above. The hatl, :1
down of the distinguishing pennant, as the case may be,
qa
be the acknowledgment of the answer.
A a 50 (\gi
In signalling, make a slight pause after each letter an-,
after "front." If the sender discovers that he has maueb ch
error, he should make the "front" and 12. 12. 3, after wd ili
Ds
he proceeds with the message, beginning with the wor
ar
which the error occurred.
or
(
a
TO RECEIVE A MESSAGE.
,ts
Q. How do you receive a wig-wag message?
er ca
A. Stand at position, flag or torch vertical, facing $erid
oe5
read each letter made. If possible, especially for long 1 it ea
sages, a second person with pencil and paper should 'II C eet
down message as received. Never guess at a message in
ru
a ei
you have lost a few words. If you have a part of '
immediately signal 121, 121, 33. Do not wait until inessa h tvi(
complete and depend on guessing at the part lost.
message is not perfectly clear, or if you think you nlaY e of
made a mistake, signal repeat after last word you are sat
121, 121, 3, 22, 3; then last word you have received. !t rtil Q,
seldom be necessary to "repeat whole message," if t111.5 r k,
is observed; and after losing a part of a message, not to ofq r i hts'
diately "break" the sender causes him unnecessary sign
A.
FLASH SIGNALS WITH LANTERN, HELIOGRAPH, 13// 1,1

SEARCHLIGHT.
5
,f talw
"Use short flash for r,' two short flashes in quick soec
sion for '2,' and a long steady flash for 3.' The elements
letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals.
t
"To call a station, make the initial or call letter tV 14b,
answerce
acknowledged. Then turn on a steady flash until
a steady flash. The calling station will then proceed with 1,
message.
"All other conventional signals are the same as for the.13t ot
In signalling with beam of searchlight, it will greatly aluti, to,
other ship, if there are clouds, to throw the light on t' (, kr
In this way, signals can be made at a considerable distance' èr
the
x
SOUND SIGNALS WITHFOG WHISTLE, FOG HOR
tits
BUGLE.
A. ]
use one toot (about half-second) for I,' two toot,sof etn,
quick successions for '2,' and a blast (about two seconds I
SIGNALS.
251
1;0
fio3! The ear and not the watch is to be relied upon for
..'rvals.
bilan the use of any other appliance, such as a bell, by which
,st cannot be given, three strokes in quick succession will
15
en in place of the blast to indicate '3.'"
ICIq How signal by sound in squadron?
1 ' In extreme cases signals may be sent by firing guns. Two
in heavy mist never attempt to make fog signal at once.
,lning in fog in squadron, vessels sound distinguishing call
'rder of proximity to flagship. A signal is transmitted to
:droll as follows: Flagship to nearest vessel, which transact, it to one astern, etc., etc. The last vessel acknowledges
eoteall letter. This is repeated back from ship to ship up the
rl at Signal of execution is one blast followed by two toots.
liti,each vessel changes course, she gives one blast if changing
Ii
tlY tq starboard; two blasts if changing direction to port.
iotal-ase of stopping to avoid danger, without previous signal,
Ship toots for five seconds. In case of backing without
111 'lcus signal each ship gives three blasts.
VERY'S SIGNALS.
01
' What
are Very's Night Signals?
A system whereby numbers are made by red and green
Li
S fired into the air from a pistol.
k' What is the general system used?
,i ach figure is represented by four red and green lights
II in succession. If red is one and green is two, the numce a are the same as in the wig-wag code. The signal book
43's used, as all signals by this code are numerals, and
of:
t umber representing the signal desired to be sent is picked
ot bcartridges (four each) representing each figure in the
1, er are picked out and placed in a row. After having
tlkiI`d the station, make code call, to indicate whether a gen1i '11 telegraphic, geographic or boat signal is being made.
13g lee "re the cartridges into the air so they may be seen by
It ar other ship. The receiver, after you have stopped firing
lic
.divides his signal (which he has noted down, in the
er1" In which the stars were fired), in groups of four; places
'
th each group the number corresponding, and by reference
Q e code call, picks the meaning out of signal book.
'hat are the meanings of the various combinations of
ts in the Very code?
NoTE.The letter R stands for red and the letter G for
41, and each letter designates a separate star or cartridge.
ic
252
THE
Bracketed stars are a pair, of different colors, discharge

gether from two pistols.
6. GGRR
1. RRRR
2. GGGG
7. RGGG
3. RRRG
8. GRRR
4. GGGR
9. RGGR
0. GRRG
5. RRGG
Affirmative or Yes," RGRG
Negative or "No," - GRGR
Numeral - - - - GRGG
Interrogatory - - - RGRR
Annulling - - RRGR
Divisional point, date, designator, or interval, GGRG
Telegraphic Directory;
Geographical List; -
R
G
Bracketed.
Followed by a rocket.
g
R1
Boat Signals; Rocket followed by i G
Navy List;{R
G 1.
dt
tf
It
8
IN
Tic
dr
c
t
General callrocket followed by G.
4,
ai
Message callG without the rocket.
03d
The squadron, division, or ship's callthe number of sq ar si}
ron, division or ship. (The squadron and division ca1l,s90 e,
3) kt
given on Plate VII, Tactical Signal Book of the U.
and are distinguished by the fact that the former are alvibe
made of two stars and the latter of three stars.) Ships'MO tli l ic1
are those given in the list of vessels of the U. S. Navy at ,kt7
end of the General Signal Book.
tc
Answering or I understandR.
re
Repeating or I do not understandG.
clr
Danger or distressR repeated several times in quick 5 (
kla
cession.
CO sw t
Q. What are the general instructions for the use of this ;
denotee
43
A. "Squadron, division, or ships' numbers are
t}
being immediately preceded by a rocket.
i
10
"All night-drill signals, and signals which require a caaci rnIrl
of formation, course, speed, or order, shall be considere e,
preparatory. The signal of execution will be a rocket.. ti on
"All other messages are intended for immediate execue !
1
unless the message itself states or distinctly implies a Vs 3 b3
time before execution.
"A message like 'Send a boat' will be executed at Oti e 1
i Tt
G}
SIGNALS.
253
eth a
thiser
rocket follows or not. If a rocket should be used
4 A
Case, it would denote urgency.
111 night-signal messages, whatever their nature, require
11111.11i1ediate response. If the message is understood, the
\z ediate response will be R; if not understood, it will be G.
k,
This is to prevent any mistake as to what ship is
p:11g the call. Should a number of ships be in company it
vssible that one or more might not see the original. call.
RULES.
kITLE i.A ship desiring to exchange signals at night

Ils by making a 'Call.' This signal shall be repeated at
,als of about two minutes until it is answered.
rE.It will be remembered that there are three kinds of
First, the general call, which is to all ships that may
5th 1n signal distance. Any ship seeing this call will answer
'
dee, without regard to the actions of others. Second, the
11,13n, division, or ship's call, which is addressed to a particf"'43 or group. This call will be answered only by the
of the group, or the single ship, called. Third, the mesJail, which denotes the desire to communicate a second
alge to the same ship or group to which a preceding
0 st has been made. It will be answered by the ship prer? addressed only. In case no previous signals have been
a the message call shall be used instead of the general
kod will be so considered and answered by all.
Ibe kdtILE 2.Upon seeing a Call,' all ships to whom it may
111:tressed should respond by making the Answering.'
}ILE 3.Every distinct message must be preceded by a
I, and the Answering.'
AMPLE.Suppose the Alert to arrive off a port at night
$ d the flagship Antietam and several other ships of the
tbrn are at anchor. The Alert makes the ` General'(or
,
$ 43' make the message) call. Antietam immediately makes
w "ring.' Alert then makes, her number (rocket 5).
Id a..41 answers and then makes her number. Alert answers.
it 'en calls message. Antietatn answers. Alert asks perliIi
to anchor. Antietans answers and then makes the
CU t rnative.
Alert answers. The Antietam may then, if deCall the Alert and make any necessary communication.
cot' 11,,e course of messages is to be maintained at the same
pse ; tilt will be observed that a ` Call'made to a group of
a detached, or incoming, ship will be answered only
-flagship or senior officer present.
254
/11 1
:
making a combination or series of contrbi0
)
'
ntle
by
titNe
one
tions the stars are projected deliberately,
through from the first star to the last, without regard t4 6011
intervals either between the stars or between the cornbilv
:st t"
NOTE.It has been noticed that stars projected agaill dotal
across
5igir
fired
those
than
and
longer
wind burn brighter
the wind. But to prevent uncertainty as to which shiP 50 g
nailing the stars should generally be fired vertically, or
to fall toward the ship receiving the signal.,
te tNir
"RULE 5.--The person receiving the message will twitto
four
4
Wsigil
s
,.
of
stars as they appear, dividing them into groups
1
any regard to time intervals, thus ascertaining the
number.
NOTE.Through some unforeseen cause a long intertl
elapse between two stars of a message. No account 111135t e`kgA
taken of this as long as it is less than about a minute. a bo
a star may be broken by the shock of discharge all Ard
several stars of the same color in the air. Record V
star.
rd
"RULE 6.When, after waiting about one minute, tl iesid
ceiver of the signal sees no more signal stars, he will 013/1gii
s
.
he 'w"
the signal finished. If the signal is understood,
Repeating
the'Answering '; if it is not, he will make the `
NoTE.As a guide to the receiver, it will be renter oio
that, in all signals from the general code, there are neverrod
than sixteen stars (not counting the interrogatory, ritif e 1)
etc.). He can, therefore, make a close estimate as to t
star of a signal and answer accordingly.
ec
"RULE 7.H, during the course of a signal, the re, II r11
is led to believe that either he or the sender has made tiC
take, or if confusion of any kind arises, he will at once
the.' Repeating.'
Apr Wi
"RULE 8.H, during the course of a signal, the sell e
,- t
the repeating, he will stop at once, wait about a null
12.
then recommence the signal from the beginning.
01
instcad
close of a message he sees the ` Repeating'
'Answering,' he will recommence from the beginning.
NOTE.--It will be noticed that unless the mistake need zln
the fourth, eighth, twelfth or sixteenth star, the sigri'e d
not be read, as the record is incomplete; therefore the r. -rs
is bound to make the Repeating.' If the mistake 0 r
the fourth, eighth, twelfth or sixteenth star. fire one 00
then wait.
"RULE
4.In
--1
SIGNALS.
255
b01 "
1j
g.The red star made and repeated in quick succesell4 as a 'call,' without the rocket, is a signal of distress and
of immediate assistance.
t a RtILE /0.All
special directions, as 'Navy list use,'Teledictionary,' etc., are bracketed stars, or else contain one
0 It)-ore
rockets.
s0
t'AuLE Ir.Individual pairs of bracketed stars Must be pro-.
t ked separately, and so that only the two stars of any one
i v .` will be seen in the air at the same time. The stars of a
1
are always of different colors.
5
'ULE /aThe divisional point (G G R G) will be used to
rarate the numbers which represent letters, syllables and
ist, (is in a message taken from the telegraphic dictionary.
t se a date signal occurs in the body of a telegraphic mes51119 '
e the 'Divisional point' will be repeated between the last
it
signalled and the number representing the date. The conof the signal will always show whether the GGRG is
bre,dt ,as a designator, divisional point, or to make a date signal.
IttILE 73.In making signals for time and latitude and
itude, when the minutes are less than ten (to), the zero
4 be made before the unit."
ribe
1JLE
ARDOIS NIGHT SIGNALS.

:that is meant by electric signal system?
j,
e is a system of four double lanterns, white and red, in
'1 different letters and figures are shown when reading
aat
top down.
What is general system of alphabet?
red light mean x and white light 2; it is the same as
w
ite ig-wag alphabet. The numerals are the same. A slight
at etlee exists in the conventional signals.
f 42, interval; is used for 3 in wig-wag.
t, cornet; is used for general call in Ardois.
co II, code call; is used to indicate code call when pulsator
1,t work.
ece;2, letters; means message will be spelled att. The 26
is '
I's and these four make 30 displays. By pulsating the
terl
light any of these may be given an entirely different
'tig, thus permitting numerals, code calls, etc., to be made.
nief
256
Q. What is alphabet, numerals, etc.?

A. The following table shows electric alphabet, nurnera
code calls, etc.
Wig-Wag
Flag, Torch.
or Flash Lantern and
Sound Signals
Character.
A
B
C
D
E
F
(1
11
1.
J
li
L
M
N
0
P
Q
S
T
TT
V
W
X
Y
Z
Cornet
Letters
Code Call
Interval
.. ..
..
22
2112
121
222
12
2221
2211
122
1
1122
2121
221
1221
11
21
1212
1211
211
212
2
112
1222
1121
2122
111
2222
1111
1112
2111
2212
Electric Night i
,
Steady
Display.
WW
WHEW
EWE
W WW
RW
WWWR
WWER
RWW
R
RRWW
WRWR
WWR
RWWR
RR
WE
RWRW
RWRR
WER
WRW
W
RRW
RWWW
RRWR
WEWW
ERR
WWWW
RRRR
ERRW
WERE
WWRW
et Li
trpi teat
cA u
Q t
l, eget
Error
4
6,
S
... . )
a
/
1
9
CBg
r
.
t
I
u
tce
7 er z
no
t/ h
N. moo
St
8
8,
BS
_
)
Q. How are the conventional signals made?
r(
A. By using C for 121, E for 12, etc.; they are the soul, le
wig-wag except use X with upper light pulsated insteu
ssa
XX3, and after "numerals" make "letters," RRRW.
has only one display of E pulsating.
Q. How would you indicate "General signal use" bi'sap
ke
Ardois?
upper.0
1 f
pulsate
A. If pulsator worked, make WRW and
toe'
If it did not work, make code call WRRR, then GSU and'
val, WRWW numerals; then proceed to make numbers in
they come in sequence. If the pulsator does not worn Let
SIGNALS.
ral
;a11.S
257
must be made exactly as is done in wig-wag sig-
'
te What are the general instructions for the use of this
la of signals?
iti.kt) In using anything but the "Letters" system, in
the words are spelled out, ships receiving the message
rePeat each display. This is the mode of answering. In
"Letters," the ship receiving will, unless otherwise orte
". only repeat "Interval, Interval," at the end of each
tnce If the flagship desired each display repeated in a
era" message, she would make after the call,
"Repeat"
fLt
siVer light pulsated), then proceed with signal. Receiving
t would repeat each display. Should receiving ship not
,
4rstand
message at any time, she makes "Interrogatory ";
g
when answered, "Repeat," following the rules for wig.... code
1 Night
drill signals, and those requiring a change of
11 Nation, course, speed, etc., are "Preparatory." The signal
ecution
signal executed when it is
tf ed off. will be the "Cornet";
5tnet displayed alone is a general call for all vessels in
t. al.istance.
' shiP's call is made by turning on and off the call letter
e,(1, at regular Intervals until answered. It is acknowloy ships turning their call letters on and off likewise. A
iV 'al
d call is steady cornet. If flashed it would call first
Ls.
tif
,toaking displays, or flashing signals, etc., reasonable time

he allowed for the glow of lamps to die out and light up.
electric light system will be used only for official signals.
RULES.
Lights (except speed lights) which might interfere with
rdeil,eceiPt of a message must be extinguished, or screened,
ad ) signalling.
s After having called a message and being answered, if
w4ge is to be spelled out, make letters RRRW, and when
sered, proceed with message. If sent by signal code, the
11 age
would first be picked out, then after call is answered,
e display for code which you desire to use, then numerals,
make the figures of message.
Ilsator fails make code call (WRRR), then the three
.letters of code, as given in wig-wag code signals, then
At i Interval; then make figures of message. In each case
ietfers or code call are repeated by the receiving ships.
258
In sending compass signal the numeral signal is omitted'

The interval is used as a division point, the same asr 1
answering pennant in flag signals. It will be used to seP
letters, syllables, or words sent by telegraphic dictionarYi0
date occurs in telegraphic message it will come twice togIcat
once at end of last word, and once just before date, to ill
"Use date table."
The affirmative, negative and interrogatory may be used
answer to a signal by either flag or electric signals.
The annulling annuls the whole electric signal, back t
including code call.
Error is indicated by one display of "E," pulsated.
If sender sees "Repeat," while sending a message, he
repeat that portion of the message indicated.
Only one course of messages is to be maintained at the it
If two other ships are signalling, and flagship makes Cal
signals must cease at once.
Under no circumstances shall the marking of the keYb
be changed.
DISTANT SIGNALS.
Q. What are distant signals?
'
A. A system of signals made by balls, cones, and drtunsd f 411
to represent the figures and code calls. They are use
signalling when too far to distinguish flags?
ad
SPEED SIGNALS.
Q. What is the speed cone?
A. It is a canvas cone painted black 24 feet at 1).5er
34 feet high, hoisted at yard-arms by ships in squadron 1
tion.
Q. What do the different positions of the speed cone
cate?
A. (t) At yard-arm, point upgoing ahead at presc
speed.
(2) Hoisted at yard-arm, part of way upgoing alleat
less than prescribed speed, proportional to dis
of cone from yard-arm.
(3) Out of sight, below railstopped.
(4) Hoisted part of way to yard-arm, point downbacking. '
(5) Yard-arm, point downgoing astern, engines b2c
full speed.
SIGNALS.
259
A _
Row indicate going faster than prescribed speed?
ara :1 ,,Iloist affirmative pennant at yard-arm with speed cone
Y.
,the ' When is the cone changed, to indicate change in speed?
icat As soon as the signal to change speed is sent to the
ne-room.
edbo you ever use two speed cones?
es: two speed cones are used on twin- or triple-screw
taeis to indicate motion of each engine: (I) when at halfee; (2) when directed by senior officer, particularly when
!nig or leaving a narrow harbor;(3) whenever the flagship
110 the cones others will do so.
'Po you ever hoist answering pennant at same yard as
i ',Sone?
11, NO.
'What side of a vessel is cone hoisted?
b0 On side toward guide.
' What side of guide is cone hoisted?
On side toward other vessels.
?Are changes of speed ever signalled by flagship by use of
Ls
II
5c
or
es
St
Never. The cone simply shows what speed she is making,

ges of speed must be made by regular signals.
,What speed signals are shown at night by vessels in
iron formation?
electric lights are fitted on trucks:
(I) Steady white light at truck (main truck always used
if in working order). Fore truck light is only
used in case main truck light failsin position,
and going ahead at prescribed speed.
(2) Flashing white truck lightgoing ahead at speed
materially slower than prescribed speed.
(3) Turning off white truck lightout of position and
temporarily out of formation.
(4) Turning off white and turning on redengines are
stopped.
(5) Flashing redengines are backing.
If oil lanterns are used:
(/) One white at truck or yard-armgoing ahead prescribed speed.
(2) Two white lanterns, one at yard-arm or truck, other
half-way upindicates going ahead at speed
materially slower than prescribed speed.
260

(3) Both' whites lowered out of sightout of Psiti
and temporarily out of formation.
(4) One red lantern at truck or yard-armengines st
stopped.
ord
(5) Two red lanterns, one at truck and one at
armengines are backing.
Kite 's
If in column the signal for stopping will be suPPle'll"te,
by rapid toots for five seconds, and that for bacalways by three blasts of whistle.
a
SPECIAL SIGNALSSQUADRON AND TACTICAL Ill'
Q
usage
Q. What lights in addition to those required by
shown at night by ships in squadron formation?
A. When under-way at night in formation, each shiP carri
t A
v
a white light on rail aft, showing from right astern tw
Q.
points on each quarter. All flagships in port or at sea,
in company with other ships, carry a white top light'
,
:
night, in approaching an anchorage where other men-ol
are likely to be found, a vessel acting singly, or each shill 4.
squadron, shall hoist at the peak two white lights in yer5 an/
line. United States vessels of war are required to answer.o,
signal from an incoming vessel by hoisting same display. rc'l
at anchor in port, a vessel of the U. S. Navy is require t
display at her peak a white light when her captain is absOts
night. A flagship shall display a hoist of three white ligh,a
her peak when the flag officer is absent at night. The g_ro
vessel wears a red light at fore truck at night (from stow
to daylight).
Q. If a ship ahead flashes her white light, what does the 11
vessel do?
A. The one next astern flashes her own white light for.
seconds and then turns on the steady white light agaifl.
will be taken by the next ship astern to mean that the'
ahead is slowing.
Q. If ship ahead turns off light, what is done?
:
t
A. The vessel astern takes this as a signal that the ve
ahead has sheered clear of alignment. She continues
and speed, always manceuvring to avoid collisions if in da",
Q. How acknowledge these signals when using oil tante'
A. Wave a red lantern from bridge.
Q. When are speed lights extinguished?
A. The moment the anchor is dropped they are turned
and anchor lights turned on.
SIGNALS.
261
Can truck lights be used for signalling?

A. ,
No;
,
No; they are not intended for that purpose; they are
ar'ended only for the speed signals and for special exceptional
ses.
;Of Q
114 Q. What is the signal for "Man overboard" in formation?

A.
In addition to signals for stopping or going astern, the

losing the man burns a blue light. The ship next
al, if in column, burns a blue light, lowers her lifeboat
ssists in the search. When the man has been picked up
't the search abandoned a blue light will be burned by each
alnWhose boats were lowered, to show she is ready for
g
(.\ Ing again.
OlV When a vessel in formation gives whistle signal for
vt'Ing and backing, what does her next astern do in thick
atlier?
Pc tik She sounds 22, 22, 3, I understand. If she does not
NII
"
,A Q
svy
.er Promptly the vessel ahead should repeat the signal.
changing course in column in thick weather, how does
2
.4
7
ve iIn
ip k.ss
ell indicate her change of direction?
one or two blasts, according to direction, as she
rrilat4
5-d is ;es course. In day time, when ships are clearly seen,
c) is given only by leading vessel.
qt I If, without previous signal, a ship in formation changes
ik.se at any time, what do?
The whistle signal will always be used.
its
0,ter:
,113
tie
ii
a!4
ter'
262

FLAGS AND PENNANTS TO BE USED IN THE
INTERNATIONAL CODE.
DIMENSIONS IN FEET:
Size 3.
Size 6.
----VP
Hoist. Fly. Hoist.
2.9
2.90
7.25
7.25
6,09
5.83 18.00
2.00
2.90
7.25
7.25
2.90
Burgee
Pennant
Square Flag
SIGNALS.
263
JI
_A
264
"CODE FLAG" AND "ANSWERING PENNANT."
When used as the "Code Flag" it is to be hoisted under

ensign.
hoist
When used as the "Answering Pennant" it is to be
at the masthead or where best seen.
INTERNATIONAL SIGNALS.
Q. What are the International Signals?
nat1one534
A. A set of signals which have been adopted by all
g to I
signallin
order that all ships may have a method of
other.
SIGNALS.
265
H
A. ow many flags and pennants are used?
01; wenty-six flags and pennants, one for each letter in the
ab_et, and a code pennant which is also used as an answering
"nant.
Q bescribe flags.
A.
A, Burgee, white hoist, blue fly.
B, Red burgee.
C, Clear white pennant with red ball.
D, Dark blue pennant with white ball.
E, Pennant, red hoist, white, blue fly.
F, Red pennant with white vertical cross.
G, Pennant, golden yellow hoist, blue fly.
Flag, white hoist, red fly.
Yellow flag, with blue ball in center.
7, Blue, white, blue; horizontal striped flag from top to
bottom.
K, Flag, yellow hoist, blue fly.
L, Flag, four squares;(from top to bottom), yellow and
blue hoist, and blue and yellow fly.
AI, Blue flag with white cross.
N, Blue and white checker-board flag.
0, Flag divided by diagonal line from upper left-hand
corner to lower right-hand corner. Upper righthand division red; lower left-hand division yellow.
P, Blue flag with white square in center.
Q, Yellow flag.
R, Red flag with yellow vertical cross,
S, White flag with blue square.
T, Flag, beginning with hoist red, then white stripe, then
blue fly.
U, Flag divided into 4 squaresupper left-hand corner
red, lower right-hand corner red,upper right-hand
and lower left-hand corners white.
ist Y, White flag with red cross.
W, Blue flag with white square in center, red square in
center of white square.
X, White flag with vertical blue cross.
Y, Flag, yellow and red alternate stripes running diagonally up and to right.
, Flag divided into four parts by diagonal linesupper
oris
ea
division yellow, lower red, hoist black, fly blue.
Code Flag and Answering Pennantpennant, red and
white, vertical stripes and red fly.
1111b.
266
Q. How is the International Code used?

A. Any particular hoist has the same meaning in everY:
135
guage. Look up signal in signal book. Take letters abr,70
signal. Bend on flags, reading from top down. When mate
signal, hoist code pennant under ensign. Hoist signal
it can best be seen. If receiving message, its meaning ts f-(1u
oi
abreast letters represented by flags in hoist.
Sti
The following instructions show in a general way the 5,
0
cation of an International Signal:
ho
ree
Instructions.
hei
Show the ensign and the answering pennant under it 7.4r ev
necessary to show that this code is used.
50 IS
If the signal is intended for a particular ship or a sign.a`
ton, refer to the attention signals, page I, part I. Hoist 4
signal where it will be best seen. The proper signal to hnts.t 1,0
:1 Ty (t
be easily found by a reference to part 2. In part 1, the PrItict7c- Is,
signals bearing on the same subject are arranged in gr11rtil
A separate geographical index is at the end of part z re 1
meaning of any signal will be found opposite the letters re,Pti,
sensed by the flags shown. Look it up in part s, where al'
hoists are arranged in alphabetical order. Arrangement
ci
flags gives distinctive character to signal, thus:
Two flag signals with burgee uppermost are "attenti
aSS
signals.
Two flag signals with pennant uppermost are "coniPa55 t1
signals.
./st
Two flag signals with square flag uppermost are "tlrge
signals.
Three flag signals are "universal," and express 1st,''ted by
longitude, time, numeral, and all ordinary signals
quired for communications.
hies alin
Four flag signals with burgee uppermost are "geograPses
signals.
ffri er
Four flag signals with pennant."C," "D," "F," uPPeare "spelling" and "vocabulary" signals.
4-0
Four flag signals with pennant "G" uppermost are Its
of men-of-war.
Four flag signals with square flag uppermost are nal
merchant vessels and are not in signal book.
Q. How read a four flag hoist with square flag on toP? t
A. If the vessel flies a U. S. flag it will be found in'
154
U. S. merchant vessels. Naval vessels are usually not sui)51
with merchant lists of foreign nations, and therefore the vi0,`
cannot be generally made out; there can, however, be nn u
as to its meaning.
SIGNALS.
26
GENERAL NOTES ON SIGNALS.

11
:as' rer,Y man belonging to the Seaman Branch should be familiar
signals. Boatswain's mates, coxswains, quartermasters and
ler" boys must be at all times expert
to the extent that they
011'' read a properly
sent message correctly and that there is no
bination of
with a meaning not known to them. The
nifi ti(ins given flags
above cover, generally speaking, the entire subgoi naval signals.
,
Ild a cipher message be received, great care must be taken
eive and record every letter exactly as it is sent, as every
liei 'dual letter is important.
er answer a signal until its meaning has been understood.
st31 a reflection on the signalman of a ship to acknowledge a
1, then afterward to find out that it was not understood and
laa the interrogatory. In all signals exercise great care with
detail. Care and efficiency in signals is always noticed, as
tingPoor and incorrect signalling. In flag signals celerity in
and hauling down is secondary only to accuracy. Never
eP1' a signal until everything is ready, then "up with a run."
I ',moment the answering pennant is broken, "down with a
t This can generally be easily done if care is taken to guide
Clear of rigging in hoisting. Hand-over-hand hoisting is
Reeve halliards through a snatch block or even around
, ass rail and run away with it both up and down.
ass using wig-wag flag be careful to face receiver. Use flag
,esit sufficiently large to be clearly seen. Always get a clear
.) background if possible. Make movements quickly with
the Pause between each letter. Motions and 2 are go*, not
ita' by way to the ground. Keep flag clear, by exercising care,
' continually stopping to clear it. If you miss a word in
lvag,
signal Repeat last, word." It is no reflection on a
al'
iiC
ses at to break a message, and it is a poor signalman who
an unknown word in a message and who allows the
roli'earr.t0 complete a message and then asks him to repeat it.
ling, above all other things on a ship, should be done
1311 4"0
'
-war fashion."
les
ist
2P1`
ves
clot
Y10
NAVAL AND SHIP REGULATIONS
'GENERAL INFORMATION
are the articles for the government of the U. S. Navy?
9 What
They are articles approved .by .act of Congress, thus made
tc the law of the land for The government of the Navy. The
features of the Navy Regulations are founded on them.
veY are always posted on board ship and are read by the execu,e officer once a month at muster.
.What is known'as the "Blue Book"?
kIt is tlie U.. S. 'Navy Regulations. They are the regular\ils adopted kir the:gOVerrunent of all persons of the Navy.
Y Who has Charge of a boat, or succeeds to command of a
eneral
, The
senior line officer on board able for

QA: What
are
called staff officers?
hat officers.
duty
Medical officers, pay,officers, chaplains, professors of mather ics, naval constructors, civil engineers.
When would, they. assume charge of a boat and be author11 to give orders affecting her safety?.
Only when there was no line officer present.
OFFICER.
. EXECUTIVE
.
. .
Q.
Av.
A. ho is the executive officer of a ship?
t lie is the line officer next in.rank to the captain who is
Performing engineer duties. , He has entire charge, under
t?etion of.the captain, of all matters relating to the bersonnel
routine and discipline of the ship. All orders issued by him
considered as .coming direct from the captain, and will be
ed exactly as if the captain had issued them. No one has a
to ask whether a. particular order came from the captain.
e executive will be.obeyed, and if his orders are not approved,
t alone is responsible.. In case of the disability, or absence of
(.captain, he assumes command.
Who regulates the prices charged by ship's barber, tailor,
A
aker?
The executive officer with the approval of the captain. He
always see that the prices charged are moderate, as the
r d is or their services b the Government.
Q.
CHAPTER VII
11;
AL
(
NAVAL AND SHIP REGULATIO S

GENERAL INFORMATION
(:
,n1
CONTENTS.
;7
Miscellaneous Regulations
". 279
The Executive Officer
27t
Divisional Officers
.
The Officer-of-the-Deck
..
. ;73
General Ship and Naval Regulations.................. "
. 7/ h
Enlistments
. 279
Continuous Service
2S
Fraudulent Enlistment
2S I
Promotion of Enlisted Men.......................... . oo
Acting and Permanent Appointments............... . 2st 1
Seaman-Gunners
,
,,sc.,;? adi.i
... .. . . .
Gun-Captains
Discharge
...
....
.. ,S4'slo
Honorable Discharge
0'sioI
Ordinary Discharge
.0
18 (
Bad Conduct Discharge .................................
Desertion
II.,
.
......................
Absence without Leave.
nit
Rewards and Privileges ..................................
ai,
Medals .
:............................................... 2, do
.
Shore DutyRetirement
, 1,?
Conduct Classes
..-...........
..........................
Monthly Money
Pay
Table ..............
..............
................
:............ Nit
Apprentice
s.........
..........
2Q bc,
Redress of Wrongs ....................................
Exercise of Authority ................................... ... (1IS
Quarrels and Disturbances................................
Courts-Martial ...........................................
NAVAL
AND SIIIP
REGULATIONS.
271
Q. What do the Regulations say about opening and closing airArticle 558, Navy Regulations, says:
0(1) He (executive officer) shall require that no ports shall
,Pened at sea, without the captain's knowledge and consent;
shall always be opened and closed by men specially
l'Inted
for that duty; that those on the lower deck shall be
se
d at sunset unless special authority is granted to keep them
le and that a report shall be invariably made to the officer4'Ie-deck when a port is opened or closed.
(2) He shall never permit either gun or air ports to be
Ited when there is any probability that the sea will enter to
ligerous extent."
Por what may the hatch tarpaulins be used?
279 ;'or covering and battening down hatches, and for no other
27 ose.
'What are the regulations about pets aboard?
27 Birds or animals cannot be brought aboard as pets except
273 the permission of the executive officer.
279
DIVISIONAL OFFICER.
2S
OS
o Over what has the officer of a division control?
/81 I.eis responsible for the control and fighting efficiency of
onsion, for the care and preservation of all ordnance mastores, supplies and articles of the outfit issued to his
g.tn.
y
4n What drills is he required to instruct and exercise his
sion?
2S .1,l'eat guns, rapid-fire and machine guns, artillery, infantry,
41
4-arms, boats, torpedoes, signals, setting-up exercise, etc.
fling is also required. He should see that they are fully
g,inted with their stations for fire, collisions, arm and away,
2
n ship, etc.
'What general duties do division officers have over equip,
-eY are required to exercise a careful supervision over
b'ness, efficient condition of battery, ordnance, equipment
29 oats assigned them.
What report should always be made to the division officer,
Inance officer, when any articles are lost or broken?
RePort the facts and circumstances to him; he reports it
executive officer.
272

OFFICER-OF-THE-DECK.
be
Q. Who is the officer-of-the-deck, and what authority has 14
shill
A. He is the line officer on watch in charge of the
o
represents the captain and has authority in the performanre
captatP
his duty over every person on board ship except theaccordotbA
executive officer, and must be respected and obeyed
gts; I
Q. Where may he ordinarily be found, and how distints
A. At sea he is usually on the bridge, and carries a sPea,te
the rlti%
trumpet. In port, when not otherwise engaged, onallowed
t
deck. If not standing watch but day's duty, he iscontinues, 41
below when not engaged, but the usual routine
, t
he receives exactly the same reports wherever he may heio
port he carries a spy glass or binoculars and wears g
and sword belt.
Q. What responsibility has the officer-of-the-deck?
(If t
A. The officer-of-the-deck is responsible for the safety
n
ship, subject to special orders that he may receive front
fo
captain and executive officer.
Q. When you wish to see the captain, do you have to in
see hlti
the officer-of-the-deck on what subject you desire to
1
A. Yes; the officer-of-the-deck is the captain's representi
at, e
on deck. He is responsible that he submits no frivolousr
`11)
re
to higher authority, and unless told the exact reason for a q
to see the captain, he should take no notice of the request.
Q. After being told your reasons, would he be J ustine'
refusing you permission to see the captain.
A. Yes; if he considers the request trivial, or unnecessarY'
improper, or if he has general or special orders concerning 71
subject, he would be entirely justified in refusing to grant (
request; he would possibly, but not necessarily, inform Yohe refused. If the decision of the officer-of-the-deck vine sl
trary, or not in accord with justice, he himself is responsib
his actions. Requests to see the captain are usually refers' wi
or
,
the officer-of-the-deck to the executive.
Q. What great mistake do enlisted men often make in
of discipline, which causes them trouble?
WI]
A. When for any reason they think themselves unjustly tr.ef (1)
(which.;
statement
instead of making a respectful official
decs 4113,
trivial is always received), they attempt to argue ordisob
matter themselves, often becoming disrespectful or
I
For this they are reported and tried by summary court-1113 rit '(
Q. What reports are made to the officer-of-the-deck?
A. (t) At sea. On coming on watch and as often the
as necessary he has the watch mustered, after which the
'
officer reports the result of the muster. He requires the
NAVAL AND SHIP REGULATIONS.
273
Ins of both life-boats to report to him at sunset of each day

condition of the boats and readiness for service, and at sea
sanle report at the beginning of each watch. Orderly reports
lirie half-hourly. The corporal of the guard the result of
Inspection of the ship every half-hour during the night. The
an Or officer of the watch the same report every 'two hours.
01 sea the boatswain during the a. m. watch examines and
iecl rts the condition of rigging; the carpenter the spars, the
ker the sails. When water ballast is used, the carpenter
ter lef carpenter's mate reports at 8 a. m. and 8 p. m. At least
o g 5 very watch the carpenter's mate reports the result of
an ,ction of each port that should be closed; also sounds sound1 Rthes. At least twice during watch the gunner or gunner's
lo examines battery and reports the result of his examination.
What are the general duties of the officer-of-the deck?
Ile is charged with the maintenance of the routine of the
sees that the regulations are carefully complied with in
Way, and informs his superior officers of such things as
'lay desire to know or he may be required to report.
What is boarding duty, and how done?
tigoi A
0..
junior or petty officer goes in the boat. If to board ship
Ion senior officer, carry note-book. Get explicit orders from
4ficer-of-the-deck as to the duties you must do. Go aboard,
c colors, then salute officer-of-the-deck and report your
re411 11 for coming.
GENERAL SHIP AND NAVAL REGULATIONS.

ad'
iog What are the regulations about uncovered lights in a ship?
y That they shall never be left unattended in any part of the
.Covered lights should always be secured so as to prevent
s o'
ng or breaking. Uncovered lights shall never be used in
'store-rooms, orlops, lockers, bilges or other places below
1;1.eek except to test air. .
what lights and fires are extinguished when magazines are
when handling powder?
qeh as the captain may deem dangerous.
coal, and why?
r trehat precautions must be taken with
if (I) It should not be received on board wet if possible to
cicl '14. If unavoidable, such bunkers as contain it must be
obe .
11 Y watched; wet coal is more liable to spontaneous cornoar l For the same reasons, precautions must be taken to
rt eakage into bunkers from wet decks. (2) When bunknot supplied with ventilators, remove bunker plates twice
ther i for
several hours. (3) No light except a miner's safety
tto
to be used inside bunkers until found to contain no
274
id
gases yr 05
explosive gas. Coal sometimes gives off explosive bags %to la
would ignite if in contact with open light. Coaling
spontaneous e
be periodically examined. They are subject to
bustion.
are
Q. What other sources of spontaneous combustion
oil!
shipboard?
grease ot: te I
A. The most dangerous is waste saturated with
t
Paulo
or
hence always destroy immediately after use. Oiled are st
waste
and
tallow
Oil,
below.
not
allowed
is
canvas
1)1
in metallic tanks.
Q. Can private property like oil, explosives, or in-lining/a
liquid be brought on board?
magaziries.b
A. No; private ammunition can be if stored in
varnis 11
and
Q. Where are spirits of turpentine, alcohol
stored
A. On upper deck in tanks.
Q. What kind of matches are allowed on shipboard? in Sto
A. Only safety matches, and they shall not be used
ic
rooms, holds or orlops.
es
Q. What night drills are required?
A. Fire drill and night quarters.
, l]
,
Q. Is saluting powder kept over night on deck? in tarms
137
A. No; it is sometimes kept there in the daytime
n,
lids secured down and with a sentry over it.
Q. What do the Navy Regulations say regarding fillari
transactions between officers and enlisted men? accept de
A. "237. Officers shall not borrow money nor
d men, e5c
from, nor have any pecuniary dealings with enlistepay
officer' lit)
as provided in Article 1513, for deposits with the
JO the
Q. What about writing for newspapers?
I
or en1P t ia,
A. "252. ... No person belonging to the Navy,
sit"
oildF0
corresp
the
as
act
shall
ment,
Depart
Navy
the
under
pertainl
matters
prints
public
the
in
er,
discuss
a newspap
influence leg' Is.'
the personnel of the naval service,'or attempt to
authoritY
express
the
without
Navy,
tion in respect to the
provision f2
the
of
n
violatio
Any
approval of the Department.
concern ist
person
the
of
this article will be noted in the record
enemy?
Q. What about information that might aid the question i.,
A. "253. In time of war, or while international
employed iiif
pending, no person belonging to the Navy, or oral or iv d
by
,
disclose
or
convey
shall
ment,
the Navy Depart
except as
communications, publications, or any other means, whatever xer
tion
informa
any
duties,
NO
be required by his official
nr
cerning the naval or military establishment or forces,
thcrct
cerning any person, thing, plan or measure pertaining
ts t
Cli
275
isother
,Other information that may be of assistance to an actual or
ii
enemy."
Q Who in the Navy administers oaths required for official
'ers?
256. (2) When practicable, officers and men of the Navy
Marine Corps who may be required to subscribe under oath
a
ite'
Papers relating to naval administration and the administra,re ,of naval justice, will do so in the ,presence of officers of the
authorized to administer oaths.'
What about the sale of malt or alcoholic liquors?
261. No malt or other alcoholic liquors shall be issued,
hit for medical purposes, or sold to enlisted men of the Navy
Corps on board ships of the Navy or within the limits
sly wlarine
N,ral stations or marine barracks."
What regulation governs the Hospital Corps as regards
ring
arms?
262. Members of the Hospital Corps (pharmacists, host stewards, hospital apprentices, first class, and hospital aplitirs) being held as neutrals by international agreement
ies,tot be permitted to bear arms, or to perform any military
, other than those pertaining to the medical department.'
if in wartime you approach an enemy, are you obliged to
Your colors?
, You are obliged to hoist your colors before commencing an
so
but not otherwise.
' Can armed forces be landed for exercise in foreign coun,poNo. Article 304, paragraph 2, U. S. Navy Regulations,
C armed force for exercise, target practice, funeral escort,
plo ha'et purpose shall be landed without permission from the
: Luthorities; nor shall large bodies of men be granted leave
jlLi'sit
ed the shore without a similar permission, nor shall men be
[egl to capture deserters."
ty
When a ship falls in with another ship with a senior line
ioo on board, what does the junior line officer do?
rivf at sea, he signals and requests permission to continue
is. course. If in port, he requests by signal permission to
sr, haul fires, communicate with shore, get up steam, get
Way, or perform any evolution or act of importance.
v,tc If in charge of boat alongside wharf in a foreign port,
as (I You permit your boat to be searched by a foreign customs
Ter ;r officer?
ijo; under no circumstances. First inform him respectfully
re 'will not be Permitted, then if he insists, it would simplify
s to lay off in the harbor until you return to the ship,
276
care
when your actions should be immediately reported. IL is used to inspect the boat it must be repelled.
prisoner_s
Q. What treatment should always be accorded prisoner r e
r
war, and what treatment would you expect if taken
their Poe
A. They shall invariably be treated with humanity,allowqrbey
sonal property preserved and protected, and they arehealth- lid
use of such of their effects as may be necessary tocooked.
must always be supplied with rations properly
in accoroatej ii
receive courtesies, quarters, etc., as far as possible and
Preveliloto
d
guarde
ly
with their rank. They must be careful
most
from escape or revolt. Inattention to this is a
military offense.
,1 1 ab
wott1
Q. In the event of surrender of a ship of war, urrender:, t
s
proper to injure the ship or destroy anything after
be ren,riefil r\P
A. If surrender is inevitable, the ship should that
it 15 lo
After
struck.
are
colors
useless to enemy before
.,vatej A.
ance 0;
i
proper to injure the ship. All papers of any import
to enemy, signal books, cipher codes, etc., should colors-. oal
of
g
strikin
after
be destroyed, whether before or
tactical sIg,,,,31,41signal-book is weighted for this purpose. The general sig"
book is even more important in warfime than the
book.
prese k.
Q. What is the Navy Regulation regarding making
to superior officers?
United Sr.31,t t
A. "234.(2) No officer, clerk, or employee in the from , ei
utions
contrib
solicit
for ce
time
any
at
Government shall
Service
officers, clerks or employees in the Government
nor sse
gift or present to those in a superior official position;or Pre,
any such officials or clerical superiors receive any gift person' ,
offered or presented to them as a contribution from
themselves; qe;
Government employ receiving a less salary than gift or pr 5t;.
a
as
on
shall any officer or clerk make any donati
this see r .(t
to any official superior. Every person who violates einP t
ie
shall be summarily discharged from the Government
wha Ifit
Q. Aside from the regular drills on cruising ships,
se
the
struction is required to be given to young men of
branch?
PT
A. Article 302, Navy Regulations, says:
ordinarY ,(2
"He (the commanding officer) shall cause the
g, he3 an,
men, landsmen and boys to be instructed in steerinand Ile_
palm
the lead, knotting and splicing, the use of the generally I 4r3e.
(3)
sailing and pulling in boats, exercises aloft and
St;
duties of seamen. ..
(4)
ed?
report
board
on
deaths
are
Q. To whom
occurring
A. The captain is required to report all deaths

277
ti,ard to the Secretary of the Navy, and also to the nearest of
5 of r,as given on enlistment record.
?
What is done with the effects, whether officer or enlisted
)ree
Pteb.
re k An inventory is made. The effects, if not perishable, are
up in packages of convenient size, and sealed with seal of
he
.ship and delivered to the pay officer with copy of inventory.
shable effects are sold at auction and proceeds credited to the
runts of the man. Trinkets and effects are sent to legal
Or next of kin. Accounts are closed and forwarded to the
ittor for settlement with relatives of deceased.
Y: What is done in case a man deserts?
Lt 'Itt. The effects are collected, inventoried and sold at public
r
lott and proceeds accredited to the accounts of the deserter
ler cry officer.
Suppose it is necessary to destroy personal effects of officers
Pulisted men?
L',1-11 Hold survey; assign to each piece its actual value at that
4,31
not new value, i.e. not the original purchase value. This
may be allowed by the Department.
Z: How obtain postage stamps, etc.?
r; From the mail orderly appointed by the captain.
sell VA: How register
letters?
Give to mail orderly, who keeps a book. He signs book
;tat t.e-e.;
r Pt for letters,
returns receipt and you sign the book as
Pt. If registered mail is received, orderly signs at postfor and you sign for
it in orderly's book.
res
ENLISTMENTS.
)115
What are the ratings in which first enlistments may he
re5 e?
ecto Article 833, U. S. Navy Regulations, says:
oY i(t) First enlistments in the Navy shall be made only in the
at ilgs of the following table, and between the ages therein
'fled for the different ratings. No person shall be enlisted
:a
Petty officer who is not a citizen of the United States. The
hers of the messmen branch are not petty officers. (See Art.
Par.4.)
C3 1(2) Persons possessing a mechanical trade. may be enlisted
a
ne ndsmen, even if over 25, provided they are under 35 years
(3) A landsman enlisted for a special position shall have the
(stated on his enlistment record.
ifig _4) A landsman, who has not less than two years to serve
vr his current enlistment, may,
under instructions from the
278
ds
for larlo
Bureau of Navigation, be detailed to a training ship
1
men to undergo a course of instruction. (See Arts. 863,'
and 1742.)
"(5) No persons, except an honorably discharged ex-oPProeu
been ho
tice, shall be enlisted as a seaman unless he shall haveshall
years at sea; nor as an ordinary seaman unless he
ENLISTMENTS.
Rating.
Seamen
0. Seamen
Landsmen
Shipwrights
Blacksmiths
Plumbers and Fitters
Sailmakers' Mates
Machinists,1st Class
Machinists,3d Class
Electricians, 241 Class
Electricians,3d Class
Boilermakers
Coppersmiths
Firemen,1st Class
y e. hi
Years of
Age.
Rating.
21 to 135
18 to 30
18 to 25
21 to 85
21 to 85
21 to 85
21 to 85
21 to 85
21 to 35
21 to 35
21 to 85
21 to 35
21 to 35
21 to 85
Firemen,2d Class
Coal Passers
Hospital Stewards ......
Hospital App's,1st Class
Hospital Apprentices .
Officers' Stewards
Officers' Cooks
Mess Attendants
Ships' Cooks,4th Class
Musicians,1st Class
Musicians,2d Class
......
Buglers
Painters
21W
010
01 too
a to
follol,
"Men for the Insu ar Force may be enlisted in thePhilipP
the
in
in
service
vessels
to
only
assigned
ratings and
and at Guam:
Rating.
Years of
Age.
Rating.
Native Seamen
Native 0.Seamen
N. Machinists,1st Class..
Machinists,2d Class
Firemen,1st Class
18 to 25
18 to 25
21 to 85
18 to 25
18 to 85
Firemen,2d Class.........
N. Coal Passers
Native Stewards
N. Cooks
N. M.Attendants,...
Yetto
Age
18 W
18 W
15t0
18 W
18 W
Must have consent of parents if under 18.
been two years at sea before the mast. In both cases, aPPli
shall be required to pass a satisfactory examination.
"(6) Special care shall be taken in enlisting men for
artificer class to see that they have knowledge in the t
required.
(7) A candidate for enlistment as a machinist must
machinist by trade, must know the names and uses of the fa
279
tis of marine engines and boilers, must be able to perform

worIc
11 with various tools in a machine shop, including benchmust be able to write legibly, and must understand arithe etic.
4t
01/
(8) Machinists who have had experience at sea with marine
11 gines for one. year may be enlisted as 'machinists 1st class.'
(9) Machinists who have had no experience at sea with
,,r1Ile engines will be enlisted as 'machinists 2d class.'
h. 00) The examination of candidates for enlistment as masts regarding their knowledge of engines and boilers, must
made in the engine rooms of ships; and regarding the knowlge of machine work, in the workshops of navy yards when
,t;
ecticable.
(II) A candidate for first enlistment as hospital steward,
15 Vital apprentice, 1st class, or hospital apprentice, can be enedd only by order of the Bureau of Navigation on the recom10 Nation of the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery. He should
Goo; Qress his application, giving his name in full, date of birth,
too twity, citizenship, general
education, hospital experience (if
tO
\
tO r, 15, and whether a graduate of a training school for nurses,
tot' the Bureau of Navigation. He must satisfactorily pass a
to' 1..c>fessional examination before one or more medical officers,
r to enlistment, and, if practicable, shall be given a course
instruction in the Naval Hospital before being drafted for
)
0 Dice in a sea-going ship.
pt
1. (12) A candidate for enlistment as electrician must be an
cetrician by trade, must know the names and uses of the various
its of a dynamo and dynamo engine, must be familiar with
ordinary types of switchboard and methods of wiring, must
able to write legibly and must understand arithmetic. Elecnians who have had experience in the handling of dynamos
"
4:it who are competent to stand a dynamo watch will be enas electricians, 2d class. Electricians who are not cornto
to stand a dynamo watch will be enlisted as electricians
to class.
17
ti
,ed
CONTINUOUS SERVICE.
Q. What are known as continuous-service men?
4. Any person, who within four months from the date of his
s'ilarge, is re-enlisted, is known as a continuous-service man.
A
C). What additional pay do continuous-service men get?
per month for each consecutive enlistment in addition
rstne Pay of rating.
In what rating can a petty officer with a permanent appointt re-enlist?
4- In the same rating he held when discharged.
280

FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT.
art I
tit
Q. Suppose a man misrepresents his status on enlistment?
recove11,
A. This is fraudulent enlistment and both that and the

1 11
of pay and allowances thereunder subjects the man to a genera 31,2
court-martial.
fel
er
PROMOTION OF ENLISTED MEN.
be
, (2)
Q. What is the rule about advancement?
A. Article 85o, paragraphs 5 and 6, Navy Regulations, sal'a
No man shall be advanced in rating more than one cis's% eiv
a time, except by special authority, in each case from the nuriìlt wi
,
01 Ca
of Navigation. A petty officer must hold a permanent aPP
ment in the rating in which he has served, or be under rec",er Ti
56.
mendation for such appointment after the full probationa..rY
a:ch
vice, before being given an acting appointment in a higher. vv .
tenders, however, may be appointed from firemen ist class,"
are qualified to fill that rating.ecj
-her
"When it is necessary, owing to vacancies on board, t f
duties
is no objection to giving a man, if qualified, the entitle
pr
higher rating than the one he holds, but this will not
If
to the pay of the higher rating."
var
Q. How are members of the Hospital Corps advanced?
TE
A. Article 850, Navy Regulations, says:
857.
"(ro) Members of the Hospital Corps (see Art. 262) -for
pass satisfactorily a physical and professional examination beTo 4eti.
one or more medical officers prior to promotion; and enlisted
in the Navy or Marine Corps are eligible for transfer to
ths
corps."
C;
ACTING AND PERMANENT APPOINTMENTS.
17,
et
Q. What is done when the captain selects a man for a
officer?
Ace nit
A. The Navy Regulations say:
"8i. When a man is selected for the position of a petty
the captain shall issue to him an 'acting appointment, vol,
shall hold good for twelve months unless revoked for can!
V1)
Such acting appointment may be revoked at any time by
captain of the ship in which he is serving should the Pe.
officer prove not qualified for the position he may be hold' erii
WI]
Petty officers holding acting appointments shall receive the
Wl
of the rating.
fai
"852. When a petty officer has served satisfactorily in
Per Nan
respects under an acting appointment for a probationary reeo
the'
of twelve months, and is recommended on his enlistment
281
all honorable discharge, has not less than a '4' in proficiency

ting, is a citizen of the United States, and has a good
(I, the captain shall recommend him to the Department for
,trianent appointment and submit his record.
13. (i) Should the Department not approve a recommendafor a permanent appointment, or should the captain consider
r probationary services desirable, an acting appointment
be renewed.
(2) Should an acting appointment expire by limitation of
a while the holder is in a hospital for treatment or on board
eiving ship, it shall be renewed by the captain of the ship
i at which his accounts are borne."
0 Can apprentices be rated?
ie The Navy Regulations say:
te11 56. An apprentice, first class, during the last year of his
fluent, may be given an acting appointment as a petty officer,
class, of the seaman branch, as a yeoman, third class, or as
ectrician, third class, and after he shall have served satisfacduring nine months or more of the probationary period and
alified, he shall be recommended for a permanent appointprevious to discharge."
If a petty officer with a permanent appointment in one rate
mranced, how long a probationary period must he serve?
The Navy Regulations say:
or 57. Should a petty officer holding a permanent appointment
ie! 113' rating be advanced to the next higher, he shall be given
acting appointment in said rating, and be required to serve
tr such appointment during the probationary period of twelve
ths subject to the rules given in 851 and 852."
Can a petty officer with permanent appointment be disrated?
Yes, by general or summary court-martial.
t When enlisted men accept appointments as pay clerks, do
enlistments expire?
:Yes; if they accept a commission or pay-clerkship. If
tilted warrant officer or mate it does not expire.
,C
SEAMAN-GUNNERS.
' Who are eligible for seaman-gunners?
(I) Ex-apprentices with good records, who are qualified to
m the duties of a seaman, who have served continuously,
Who are recommended by their commanding officers; and
Who have completed the course of instruction in a trainingfor landsmen, who are qualified to perform the duties of a
who have re-enlisted for four years within four months
"te date of discharge, and who are recommended by their
_A
282
instruction
commanding officers, are eligible for detail for
seaman-gunners. In the case of petty officers who possess
above qualifications, those holding permanent appointments k.
'
be detailed in the rating in which they are serving; those
ing acting appointments shall have such acting aPPointni te
revoked previous to transfer.
(2) The proficiency of men who take the prescribed course
by the rod
instruction for seaman-gunners, shall be determined
Ordnance
to the Bureau of Navigation, of the Inspector of
whose supervision dh.!. course is taken.
(3) Men who have successfully completed the Pres., Iii
course of instruction for seaman-gunners, shall receive fro'. Cl
Bureau of Navigation a certificate as seaman-gunner.
tit.
e11
(4) Men holding certificates as seaman-gunners are re
to
entitled
and
are
rating,
said
to the pay prescribed for
as such.
GUN-CAPTAINS.
ci
;4 1
Q. Who are eligible for gun-captains' course?
oi
o ses
"864. (I) Persons holding either acting or permanent aPP 3 4r.
ments as coxswains or quartermasters, third class, searnenraAde(
apprentices, first class, who are in the last year of their e
ment, and have not less than six months to serve. 10,g ,y 1
cloi IP]
'
attained special proficiency as marksmen with great gtirl
small arms, or whose superior intelligence fits them to ty v
such proficiency, and who by force of character and abillfoho
command are deemed suitable to fill the rating of gun-Sar
forr
are eligible, if citizens of the United States, for detail
of instruction on board a gunnery training-shiP: 0 4e,
upon the successful completion thereof, they will receive fr''
Bureau of Navigation a gun-captain's certificate.
"(2) Those who attain a proficiency of 90 per cent 01 ir 4,
0
receive an 'A'certificate; those who attain a proficiencY '
)
75 to 90 per cent, a B' certificate; and those who a,
proficiency of from 6o to 75 per cent a'C' certificate. Plr th
tificate shall be issued to those who attain a proficiency
.e,eP
than 6o per cent.
,.(z
literl',
leading
as
been
s,
trained
"(3) Gun-captain having
ust
ii
ecw
the
in
be assigned class for class, to fill any vacancy
tIot
ment of the ship in the seaman branch, excepting vacad
as gunners' mates; but their ratings shall not be change ovi(
reason of such assignment."
tr
283
311
DISCHARGE.
()
k:
is an enlisted man entitled to discharge?,
0e0
A,876. (I) Enlisted persons in the naval service of the United
':es are entitled to their discharges only upon the expiration
re their terms of enlistment.
eP .(2) They shall not be discharged before the completion of
tald Ir terms of enlistment except for cause.
4TERAL ORDER
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
crib
O. 104.
WASHINGTON, August 16, 1902.
t t.,he
following Executive Order, superseding the Executive
uer of July TO, 1902, which was promulgated in General Order
'98, is published for the information and guidance of the
WHITE HOUSE,
WASHINGTON, August 13, 1902.
4.5b enlisted person serving in the Navy or Marine Corps of the
ed States shall be discharged therefrom prior to the corn9n of his term of enlistment except for one of the following
es: undesirability, inaptitude, physical or mental disability or
'9 a tness.
(01, - every case the recommendation for such discharge must be
hiaeby the immediate commanding officer under whom the man
5 a be serving.
Lcrla pPlications for discharges which reach the Department in
iitY th Way except through said commanding officers shall be,
aPt out exception, disregarded.
or
THEODORE ROOSEVELT.
.a
CHAS. H. DARLING,
;111
Acting Secretary..
Vhen may a man be discharged outside of the United
Its?

ta p
. (I) No person shall be discharged outside of the United
fo 878
S unless by order of the Navy Department, or in accordance
of
the sentence of a general court-martial, with the following
elnions:
ra) Upon the expiration of the term of enlistment of a man
)111 .1sted within the United States, whose detention on
board
311 I.13
(t essential to the public interests, he may be discharged upon
wn written request, by order of the senior officer present;
rc)v.ided said request states that the applicant waives all claim
transportation at public expense and all consular aid.
284
"(b) Men who have enlisted outside the United States tiP
the expiration of their terms of enlistment, or upon the rec
mendation of a board of survey."
Q. To what.transportation are enlisted men entitled?
A. The Navy Regulations state:
et'
"88x. (i) Men, or apprentices, enlisted within the connn 't
limits of the United States, who are discharged within St1Cj1 jv
by reason of expiration of enlistment shall be furnished rr'slic
portation to the place of enlistment; if discharged within tlit
limits on the recommendation of a board of medical surveY _00
shall be furnished transportation to their homes within the
tinental limits of the United States.
ftl
"(2) If they enlisted within the continental limits 0 en 111
United States and are condemned by medical survey whileisiar
ing beyond said limits, they shall be transferred for disc rge stn
to a port within said limits, and upon arrival shall be dischnts. r
and furnished transportation to their homes within said
tlt Re,"(3) If they enlisted beyond the continental limits 0.`" "t
United States and are discharged by reason of expiration 0.`,1, t
listment or recommendation of a medical board of surveh
are not entitled to transportation.
f
"(4) If they enlisted within the continental limits 0 oi
United States and at the expiration of their enlistments in!
,
diately re-enlist on board of the vessel from which dischajto rg(
(a
they shall be entitled to the privileges of paragraphs (x)
of this article upon expiration of re-enlistment, or disc,4 ili
ice
upon recommendation of board of medical survey, as the
(b
may be."
HONORABLE DISCHARGE.
sat
Q. What is an honorable discharge and who gets it?
"882. (i) Any person in the Navy, who upon the exPlrati
of a three or four years' term of enlistment, is recommendet!ii
his captain for a testimonial for fidelity, obedience, and 0
;
1
during his term of service, and who is a desirable person to ret*
shall receive an honorable discharge.
Q. What are the benefits of honorable discharge?
1
41
. (x) If any enlisted man or apprentice, being hon0
discharged, shall re-enlist for four years within four 1110,1'
thereafter, he shall, on presenting his honorable discharge, cn,
accounting in a satisfactory manner for its loss, be entitleit)i
pay during the said four months equal to that to which he vf .
have been entitled if he had been employed in actual service., girt
et0
"(2) Any man who has received an honorable discharge
or
ec,;
NAVAL AND SIIIP REGULATIONS.
285,
term of enlistment, or who has received a recommendalaf-r

S4-1 re-enlistment,
upon the expiration of his last term of
re, of not less than three years, who re-enlists for a term
within four months of the date of his discharge,
vot tbreceive an increase of $1.36 per month to the pay prescribed
jot
rating in which he serves for each consecutive re-enlist11)4I. Years,
site
ORDINARY DISCHARGE.
the'
When are ordinary discharges given; how is it shown
her the man is recommended for re-enlistment?
The captain endorses across face, "Recommended (or not
f
mended) for re-enlistment."
ser If
a- man had a discharge not recommending him for rebar ttnent, why could he not omit to show the discharge?
arge Because, if he had ever been in the service, he would not
e-enlisted until he had shown his discharge. If he had lost
e 'ne case would be referred to the Navy Department. If he
.eeded in re-enlisting it would be fraudulent, and he would
IP 'able to general court-martial.
, t Who gets an ordinary discharge?
frig
'4483. The following persons are entitled to an ordinary disrge
only:
(a) All who are not recommended by the captain for a tesha nial for fidelity, obedience, and ability during their term of
.ce.
(b) All who are discharged before the expiration of their
of enlistment at their own request, or for their own conknee, except where the discharge is specially authorized, with
same benefits as for complete enlistment."
What are the benefits of ordinary discharge?
It covers only a few of the benefits of continuous service.
d.
BAD-CONDUCT DISCHARGE.
eta'
When is a dishonorable discharge given?
Only by general court-martial.
When is a bad-conduct discharge given?
By general or summary court-martial.
ge
)11I
).
1
d
DESERTION.
A. When a man deserts, what is done?
ek
.
899. (2) As soon as a person is declared a deserter the
uirerrients of Article 885 shall be complied with; in addition
eto, notice of desertion shall be sent to the next of kin, and
386
.THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
to the mayor of the town 'where the deserter resided at Otte

enlistment, each of which letters shall embrace a transcrIP
Articles 913 and 914?
fi t
"914 Every person who entices or aids any person I so
naval service to desert, or who harbors or conceals allY. e sai
person, knowing him to be a deserter, or who refuses to glv,.ei
such person on the demand of any officer authorized to To
him, is liable to punishment by imprisonment and fine, .00
enforced in any court of the United States having jurisdiet1
De(
Deserters lose all the rights of citizenship.
ly
Men convicted of desertion are sent to prison.
als
ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE.
t'o
"i
i.
s
their til
99 Petty officers or
a la
enlisted men absent from
or duty without leave, or after their leave has expire,',i, s
forfeit all pay accruing during such unauthorized absence.
REWARDS AND PRIVILEGES.

Q. Under what circumstances may seamen be promoted t
warrant officers?
pe
A. Enlisted men whose records are good, and who have a
manent appointments as petty officers, first class or above',
who can pass the examination after being recommende0
their commanding officer.
"913. (I) Seamen of the Navy distinguishing then1Selsfe ses
battle, or by extraordinary heroism in the line of their Prt ay;
sion, may be promoted to warrant officers if found fitted IIP11 tkr
recommendation of their commanding officers, approved bY re du,
flag officer and the Secretary of the Navy. And upon such ed , s
ommendation they shall receive a gratuity of $1oo and a 111
,t
of honor prepared under the direction of the Secretary c" heii
Navy.
,
,(7)
(2) Any enlisted man of the Navy or Marine Corps " led
shall have distinguished himself in battle or displayed extra0_
nary heroism in the line of his profession, shall, upon the recin" tee
mendation of his commanding officer, approved by the flag 0 I 1
and the Secretary of the Navy, receive a gratuity and meda
honor, as provided for seamen in paragraph i of this article.. es
"(3) All acts of gallantry or heroism referred to in thisartl
shall be promptly reported to the Secretary of the Navy.
q cl
(9)
MEDALS.
eo;
Q. What medals may enlisted men receive?
A. Medals of honor, life-saving medals (gold or silver), g
conduct medals and clasps.
NAVAL AND SNIP REGULATIONS.

28
ite ct). ,
W
hat badges and medals may be worn in uniform?
pt
k I) Badges of military societies composed of men in the
for
Navy in the War of the Revolution, 1812, Mexican and
a
su wars may be worn by officers and enlisted men members
ve it taid organization in their own right; (2) badge of Regular
eel AY and Navy Union, badges of societies of men who served
r.nlY or Navy of the United States during the Spanisho
an War, and the incident insurrection in the Philippines.
iOu
What medals, etc., must be worn by enlisted men on Sunday
Pection General Muster, and other occasions of dress cereal'? '
,Medals of honor, life-saving medals, or good conduct
Is or pins must be worn by men who have received them.
ati
sh3
SHORE DUTYRETIREMEHT.
'What rewards for long service?
I. Duty on receiving-ships after 25 years' service..
2. Also entitled to home and ration on receiving-ship during
four months' interregnum between enlistments.
X Retirement after 30 years' service if so years old.
pt
a
CONDUCT CLASSES.
What are the conduct classes and qualifications for each?

The crew is divided, irrespective of ratings, into conduct
ofe ses I, 2, 3 and 4.
.`")' Regulations say:
t l'krticle 922. (6) The requisite qualifications for first-class
re auct men are strict attention to duty, implicit and ready obedi, sobriety, alacrity, courageous conduct, neatness of person
E t ,dress, quiet and respectful demeanor, and general usefulness
heir respective ratings.
17) Second, third, and fourth-class conduct men shall be
ued according to the evidence which they give of the possesof the above qualities, or any of them, in greater or less
:0 ft."
ffi
11 What difference exists in privileges allowed each class?
922. (8) The granting of liberty on shore and other priviwill also depend upon the conduct class, and the captain
ti
LI establish rules defining the privileges or restrictions for
class,
(9) First class conduct men shall be allowed every indulac compatible with the demands of duty and with the exigenof the service; and in respect to privileges, a clear distinc-should be made between them and the rest of the crew.
Upon whom reliance may be placed shall form a conduct
288
class to be known as a special first class, to whom special Ptil

leges may be allowed when it is possible to extend these
small number and not possible to extend them to all of the
class."
Q. How go from one class to another?
A. Navy Regulations say:
"922. (3) Reduction in class may be made at any time vv.!'
justified by misconduct, and shall not necessari
be limitecido
one class, Those who are in a lower class andlywhose e,110
warrants advancement, shall be promoted at the end 49!, th
calendar month, not more than one class at
a time, Ind"
shall have reached the first class."
tl
a
th
It
Pet
of
ve
4.k11
Lion
e
Co)
MONTHLY MONEY.
rr
Q. What monthly money is allowed to be drawn?
Sea
"923. (I) The crew shall be allowed to
money, hithl
al La,
in accordance with their conduct classes, draw
given below; , rs,
as
nothing herein contained shall be construed aspreventingeci
captain from granting, for reasons satisfactory to himself, An,
s:Kng teri
requisitions for money in excess of monthly money,
keep'
the man's credit on the rolls the amount required to be
reta; re-er
ot
to their credit.'
"(a) First-class conduct men, one month's pay, or so
I Wi
thereof as may be due in excess of the amount required t e
ratii
retained to their credit.
"'(b) Second-class conduct men, one-half of one month's a IN
,Pr
or as much thereof as may be due in excess
of the amour' 4a.,
quired to be retained to their credit.
;
"(c) Third-class conduct men, one-third of one month'S
or so much thereof as may be due in excess
the a11
o.
of
required to be retained to their credit.
e fc
"(d) Fourth-class conduct men, one-fourth of one troll ktid
pay, or so much as may-be due in excess of the amount requtr
to be retained to their credit.
"2. Each enlisted person in the Navy
than an apPrentj
shall, during his enlistment, be required other
credit. eel
to keep to hisenlistmetiv
the rolls of the pay officer, at least one month's
A
of the ratI esen
pay
in which he is serving; during the first months
al,
his
of
t
monthly money may be allowed him so limited
as to cause ei
specified amount to become due him by the expiratio
n of a 1.11 tes
sonable time.
ar
te
"3. Each apprentice shall be required to keep to his credit
Ls th
least two months' pay of his rating.
A'aQ11
"4. Monthly money should not be paid at sea, nor in Pia' io
289
there is ho opportunity for the men to use it. Such payas have been passed over for this reason should be made
the ship reaches a port where the money can be used.
No payment of money shall be made-to any enlisted person
Navy or Marine Corpsat a: hospital without the approval
e medical officer in charge thereof.' . ,
Petty officers of the Navy, performing duty which deprives
Of quarters, and their rations or commutation thereof, shall
'e $9 per month in addition to the pay of their rating.
All enlisted men of the Navy shall receive $5 per month in
On to their pay while serving on board of submarine vessels
Navy.
Coxswains detailed as coxswains of boats propelled by maor as coxswains to commanders-in-chief, shall receive
r month in addition to their pay.
Seamen in charge of holds shall receive $5 per month in
Lthl :inn to their pay.
at Lndsmen assigned to duty as jacks-of-the-dust, or as lampt. s, shall receive $5 per month in addition to their pay.
ecl ,kay man who has received an honorable discharge from his
gt reterm of enlistment, or who has received a recommendation
ine -enlistment upon the expiration of his last term of service
e't less than three yeat s, who re-enlists for a term of four
111C 3
within four months from the date of his discharge, shall
an increase of $1.36 per month to the pay prescribed for
'4ting in which he serves for each consecutive re-enlistment.
Pa Twenty cents per month is deducted from the pay due each
er, seaman and marine in the Navy to be applied to the fund
4aval Hospitals.
Pa
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
k,L ORDER
)0 11.0
O. 91.
WASHINGTON, June 25, 1992.
following Executive Order, affecting General Orders Nos.
'r le.nd 7o, is published for the information and guidance of the
ee:
WHITE HOUSE, Tune 24, 1902.
e utive Order of November 26, 1901, relative to additional
nsation for enlisted men of the Navy holding goodl-conduct
s pins, or bars, and Executive Order of December 3, 1901,
ve to additional compensation for enlisted men holding ceres as graduates from the Petty Officers' School of Instrucare hereby revoked, to take effect July 1, 1902, from which
the following substitutes shall take effect:
eh enlisted man of the Navy 31iall receive seventy-five cents
konth, in addition to the pay of his rating, for each good-
NAVY PAY TABLES.

EXECUTIVE ORDER, January 1,1901.
TABLE No. 3.Petty officers, enlisted men, etc.Navy.
CLASSIFICATION AND PAY.
Chief petty officers.
ce
0 p,
Artificer branch.
g: OS
Special branch.
0 P.
Chief Masters-at-Arms
Chief Boatswains' Mates
Chief Gunners' Mates
Chief Gun Captains
Chief Quartermasters
$85
50
50
50
50
Chief Machinists
Chief Electricians
Chief Carpenters' Mates. .
Masters-at-Arms,first class...
Boatswains' Mates,first class.
Gunners' Mates, first class....
Gun Captains,first class
Quartermasters,first class
$40
40
40
40
40
azi
o o.
Chief Corn. Steward. .

Chief Yeomen
Hospital Stewards
Cora. Steward
Bandmasters
$70
60
60
60
52
Boilermakers
$65
Machinists,first class '
55
Electricians, first class
50
Coppersmiths
55
Shipfitters, first class
55
Blacksmiths
50
Plumbers and Fitters
45
Sailmakers' Mates
40
Carpenters' Mates,first class 40
Water Tenders
40
Painters
40
Petty officers, second class.
Yeomen,first class
First Musicians
$40
36
Machinists,second class
Electricians,second class
Slaipfitters,second class
Oilers
Yeomen,second class
$70
60
50
Petty officers, first class.
Masters-at-Arms,second class $35

Boatswains'Mates,second class 35
IGunners'Mates,second class. 35
Own Cailts.ins, second elms .s ..l 06
Ccuscrtacrest.e.t.re,
%,,,,,,..a. eNsma-
$40
40
40
RE,CampeoNtoers: 1111...te.S 550- .12,

515
'--
Wi
Z.-
nvnxvitsi s.1.3xovfanag sill
Seaman branch.
-..> P.;
c!as
Artificer branch.
Masters-at-Arms,third class.. $30

Coxswains
30
Gunners' Mates,third class... 30
Quartermasters, third class... 30
,0
.4.2 >.
o es
Special
branch.
Carpenters' Mates,third class $30

Electricians, third class
30
Painters
30
.0 .
0 cd
Yeomen,third class. ...... $30

Hospital Apprentices, first
class
30
Seamen, first class.

Seamen Gunners
Seamen
Apprentices,first class
$26
24
21
Firemen,first class
$35
Musicians,first class
$32
$30
25
Musicians,second class
Buglers
Hospital Apprentices .....
$30
Seamen, second class.

Ordinary Seamen
Apprentices,second class...
$19
15
Firemen, second class

Shipwrights
Seamen, third class.

Landsmen
Apprentices, third class. ..
$16
9
Coal Passer,'
$22
ao
20
(INV 'IVAVN
:0
-
smouririoaH anis
Seaman branch.
292
THE BLUEJACKET'S MANuA.1.-
have !:'ee
conduct medal, pin, or bar which he may heretofore
or shall hereafter be, awarded.t
Each petty officer holding a certificate of- graduation fr113,0t
;h
Petty Officers' School of Instruction, or as gun-captain,
shall receive two dollars h month in addition .to the paY (?
rating.
THEODORE ROOSEV'
WILLIAM H. MOODY
Secretarl.
GENERAL ORDER
No. 102.
I. The following
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, August
Executive Order is published for the

mation and guidance of the service:
._
III
WHITE HOUSE,
'
1
WASHINGTON, D. C., August 4, 9 AI
date the following ratings and Is es
From and after this

ve
pay for same are established in the Naval Service:
eir
Shipfitter, first-class, fifty-five dollars.
Shipfitter, second-class, forty dollars.ti
eco
for,
Men enlisted in these ra.tings to be petty officers first or s
ted
class, respectively.
v,vr.
THEODORE ROOSEV-
2. The complements of all vessels of the first and second, del

are amended so as to include one shipfitter, first-class,
shipfitter, second class. Vessels of the third rate are all,
one shipfitter, second-class.
3. The specialty mark on the rating badge for shipfitterst
_
be the same as that for blacksmiths.
' Q.
CHAS. E DARLING
.
Secretiei Q4.811
Acting
'
GENERAL ORDER
No. 108.
NAVY DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, September II,
'
The following Executive Order is published for the ill
tion and guidance of the service;
A, A
Q.
932
WHITE HOUSE, Septe,mber 4, I 8 oi

Excutive Orders of June 25, 1902, and August 4, 191 1?er
hereby rescinded and from and after July I, 1902, everY erlt ,Mea
% (2)
0
man and apprentice whd has been rated a seaman-0
ere t
he
holds I a gun-captain's cettificate, or a !certificate of gradl
, from lane or more classes bf the Petty 0,fficers' School of IP e
kip
ell
Ions,
293
shall receive two dollars per month in addition to the pay

0his rating for each such certificate, viz.:
o' For certificate as seaman-gunner, or from seaman11
gunner class
$2 oo
For certificate as gun-captain, or from gun-captain
class
2 00
For certificate from petty officer class
2 00
For certificate from artificer class
2 oo
For certificate from machinist class
2 oo
or certificate from electrical class
2 00
very
enlisted man of the Navy shall receive seventy-five cents
9/
month, in addition to the pay of his rating, for each goodduct medal, pin, or bar, which he may heretofore have been,
Shall hereafter be awarded.
THEODORE ROOSEVELT.
(192.
es 11 men who successfully complete, or have completed, the
scribed course in any of the above-mentioned classes, and
rr- been reported qualified, will, upon the recommendation of
eir commanding officers to the Bureau of Navigation, receive
f tificates of Graduation. The Bureau of Navigation will be
1ortned as to any men who are entitled to certificates as indiabove and who have not yet received them.
III accordance with the provisions of the above Executive
der, General Orders No. 91 and No. Icif are hereby revoked.
Ld
Respectfully, '
110
WILLIAM H. MOODY,
Secretary.
5
APPRENTICES.
'4. Where are apprentices enlisted?
4- Apprentices shall be'enlisted only on board such ships and
ch places as the Department may direct.
Whose consent is required for them to ship?
too : A parent or guardian.
IQ' What qualifications are necessary?
932. (/) A boy enlisted for the service must be between the
/ es of fifteen and seventeen years, of robust frame, intelligent,
ioz, Perfectly sound and healthy constitution, free from any
coil ,sical defects or malformation and not subject to fits.
fief (2) He must be able to read and write. In special cases
do3 (''re the boy shows a general intelligence and is otherwise quail1.10 t'i he may be enlisted notwithstanding his reading and writing
Mperfect.
ij
294
THE BLUEJACKET'S MAN-UAL.
t11
"(3) He must voluntarily sign an agreement to serve 10 5 at
Navy until twenty-one years of age, which agreement 0114 II(
Q
before being signed, be carefully read and explained to each
A.
by the recruiting officer.
11 . g
(4) He shall be enlisted as an apprentice, third class, 3
a fi l
shall be continued in this rating while at a training station'
while in training ships.
ovi eaet
v
"(5) No boy who has been convicted of crime or is of lal
bad character shall be enlisted."
I
eel
Q. Do pension laws apply to apprentices?
Sig
A. Yes.
Q. What instructions do apprentices receive?:lc
sratio
iii Ss
A. "937. (I) Apprentices shall remain at the training
,th riti
for a period of six months, during which they shall receive
struction in reading, writing, arithmetic, and the rudiments 1' t c
seaman's profession.
"(2) At the termination of the period of instruction at ,i0 (
training station they shall be transferred to the cruising tra.." Ion
ships.
fro ty
"(3) Should any apprentice be reported not qualified i
sickness or other cause, for transfer to a cruising training
he may, with the approval of the Bureau be retained for a
period of six months."
aPPretiee '
Q.i
Q. What subjects serve to make up the marks of an
5o
A. Knotting and splicing hemp and wire rope
!.
5o
Sailmaking
93,
opei
50
Heaving lead
25
s.
Heaving log
5o
Signalling
(2
li
75.
str
Exercise as captain of gun, M. battery
11d
50
Exercise as captain of gun, S. battery .....
an e
75
School of soldier
25
Sword exercise
. 25
Swimming
25
Sewing
1 to
25
Condition of clothing
i
ii in
Knowledge of his accounts with Paymaster. . .. 25
5o
BearingGeneral conduct (from record)
Pres!s
50
Great-gun target firing (from record)
:id a(
.
5o
,.
,
record)
.
Small-arm target firing (from
Q. When are apprentices, third class, rated apprentices,
class?
Writ
A. The Regulationssay:'oat
"948. Apprentices, third class, shall be rated apprentices, se.c0i
]
class, immediately before being transferred from the till
on i
be the
service to general service,- and shall not again be reduce
s
I,
.erI
295
rating while continuing in general service, except by sen!. of a court-martial."

How are apprentices stationed on cruising ships?
151. (I) Apprentices in general service shall be stationed in
rent parts of the ship, their stations being changed as far as
e ticable, every three months, in order to acquaint them with
vorking of all parts.
2) Apprentices, first class, who have superior intelligence,
eel lanical ability and
aptitude for electrical work, may be
si fled to duty in
the dynamo-room, but under no circum:es will they be given charge of a watch. Apprentices, first
Ss, in the last year of their enlistment, who have at least nine
ths to serve, may, upon recommendation of their command)fficer, be detailed by the Bureau of Navigation to take the
1!1- le of instruction at the electrical school.
3) They shall not be detailed for duty as messengers for
10 iger
period than three months, nor shall they be detailed for
in the fire-room or as mess cooks, unless in cases of neces952. The instruction of apprentices shall be continued in
eral cruising ships as nearly as possible in conformity with
ristruction on cruising training ships."
How are apprentices advanced in rating?
954. One year after being rated apprentice, second class,
:rly qualified apprentices shall be rated apprentices, first
2) An apprentice, first class, during the last year of his
s tnent, may be given an acting appointment as a petty officer,
1\4 class, of the seaman branch, as a yeoman, third class, or
an electrician, third class."
REDRESS OF WRONGS.
Too. If any person in the Navy considers himself oppressed
is superior, or observes in him any misconduct, he shall not
n his respectful bearing toward him, but shall represent such
r!ssion or misconduct to the proper authority. He will be
cl accountable if his representations are found to be vexatious,
ec
lolls or false.
lox. Any application for redress of wrongs shall be made
Writing through the immediate commanding officer to the
ec
nander-in-chief of the fleet or squadron or to the senior
ii.er present, and it shall be the duty of the latter to take such
bei 1311 in the matter as, in his judgment, justice and the good
the service demand."
296
TUE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.
EXERCISE OF AUTHORITY.
quoted, s,
The following articles of the Navy Regulations are
V.
officers:
petty
to
also
applicable
are
they
readiV
obey
to
required
are
Navy
in
the
All
persons
"1070.
of thor is
and strictly and to execute promptly the lawful orders
ee:
superiors.
t ,_Se esse
injure
to
forbidden
"1071. Superiors of every grade are
or. ev rna
capricious conduct,
under their command by tyrannical or
ens(
is
exerc
ess."
kindn
be
to
is
abusive language. Authority over subordinates
with firmness, but with justice and
W. %
Q.
A. i
QUARRELS AND DISTURBANCES.
,
"io82. (i) In the event of a riot or quarrel between mina
a
naval
a
of
limits
the
within
Navy,
belonging to the
I i
rig T
it shall be the duty of the senior line officer present, b ci
; eieglanu:\
srss ri
cne e:
to that command, to suppress the disturbance and, if:
41SE 1
to arrest those engaged in it, even though they be his superwb A. A
ce
in rank; and all persons belonging to the Navy who rilaY
.ari5:
present, shall render prompt assistance and obedience to the of6 rete
Cot
'
thus engaged in the restoration of order.
en
,re
Pres
"(2) Should there be no line officer of the commandwho
P; eac
the senior officer of the Navy or of the Marine Corps
be
be present and belonging to the command, shall exercise' ilo...th
same authority and be entitled to the same obedience.
"(s) In the event of a riot or quarrel between persons b Q. 1
longing to the Navy, not within the limits of a naval comma': ;
.N
it shall be the duty of the senior line officer present to stIPProt 1
esich
the disturbance; if there be no line officer present, this d.e l'thori
devolves upon the senior officer of the Navy or of the Marif ereas
Corps who may be present.
arrest 0 I, Q. E
"1095. No officer shall take part personally in the
but t A. B
necessary,
be
absolutely
may
drunken man further than
grade
tsvo
the
above
not
by
persons
arrest shall always be made
fo
petty officer, who are to be instructed to use no greater
than that required to restrain or confine the offender. have be,
"1099. Whenever any person in the Navy who shall othervo
placed under suspension, arrest, or confinement, or discharf
punished for misconduct, shall be released and entirely
to Inr,,t '
by competent authority, such discharge shall be a bar
disciplinary proceedings in the case by any naval authority.
should,.
In quarrels, disturbances, riots, etc., petty officers
all in their power to quell the disturbance. If necessary,
will use force in stopping the riot. Any one in the naval see"
must give assistance to a superior officer who is endeavoring
stop a quarrel or disturbance.
297
COURTS-MARTIAL.
A. What is a summary court-martial?

ly LI.
The Regulations say:
1808. Summary courts-martial may be ordered upon petty

ers and persons of inferior ratings by the commander of any
s sel or by the commandant
of any navy yard, naval station,
marine barracks to which they belong, for the trial of such
e enses which such officer may deem deserving of greater
punishthan such commander, or commandant is authorized to
fjlet, but not sufficient to require trial by general court-martial."
V. What absolute rights has the accused?
The right of counsel; the right to call witnesses in his own
11 fense; the right to challenge any member of the court for
[nate reasons, and to receive a copy of the specifications
against him in time to work up his case.
ri ared
What is a general court-martial, and what is the limit of
b Ilishment?
4. A general court-martial consists of from five to thirteen
C4,.rs and is ordered by the President, Secretary of the Navy,
t Commander-in-Chief. The sentence is not limited by law.
regulations, there is a limit to the punishment it can inflict
each offense. For many offenses, death or life imprisonment
11 be inflicted. A sentence of death must be concurred in by
4.1 thirds of the members and approved by the President.
*4-.. Is there any military authority above a general courte rtlal ?
&.No; it is the highest military bar. No person, even the
e-sidFnt, can order it to reverse a decision. An approving
hority can mitigate its punishment, but not commute it or
crease it.
ii . How can a general court-martial punish contempt of court?
. By sentencing the guilty party, whether accused or witness,
tWo months imprisonment.
Ii
Itits
ats,
ste
Itinc
14 C
lartq
eL
eau,
orrn
stre,
nal;
tile:
esti,
41.1iseet
or;
ksw;
4era
re 0:
%stir
atqi,
estic
, at s
fe 13(
4erai
tiles c
cTs ,
at r:
?cl 9
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I.
PETTY OFFICERS.
PAGE
7
9
9
ir
ills for Petty Officers

arswain's Mates
ters-at-Arms
nner's Mates .
Captains
rtermasters
e Log Book
eatherStorms
rM Signals
stress Signals
I1a.1s for Pilots
arnen's Proverbs
estions for Quartermasters
,agS, Signals and Ceremonies
ikellaneous Questions
nors
)tswains
aeral Instructions for Coxswains
of Boats
Isring Boats
at-lines
Liestions for Coxswains
far Salutes
e Boats
411,eral Rules
les of the Road, Lights, etc
cTs
at
Tactics
12
13
13
16
17
18
19
19
20
20
23
24
26
26
27
28
28
28
31
33
35
35
40
40
300
CONTENTS
CHAPTER IL
oe
At
GENERAL DUTIES IN CONNECTION WITH LIFE ON BOARD SIIM
rAG5
46
'''' Al
Questions on Discipline and Routine

Sea and Port Routine
Scrubbing and Cleaning .................................. 56 II
Bright-work ............................................ 0
rrl
Sick Call
:7 er
Quarters and Drill; Ship Work
. is N
General Ship Regulations.......................... . .... 59 IN
Shore Liberty
te
Musters and Inspections
tri
Coaling'Ship .......................................... '60
60 tri
Clothes,.Bags and Hammocks
set
.
'
Clothing Outfit ........................................... 63
63
Requisitions for Clothing .............................. 64 ns
Marking Clothes ......................................... 65
Bag Inspection
'
66
Watches and Divisions .................................... 6
6
Messes
66
Smoking Hours
.. 67
Messengers
67
Signal Boys
' 67
Side Boys
6S 84
Lookouts
' 68 e
Spreading Awnings
69 t
Side Cleaners
69 'a
Salutes and Honors
en
kts
,ats
riej
CHAPTER III.
er,
eL
SEAMANSHIP.
QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ON VARIOUS SUBJECTS IN SEAMANS
Nomenclature of Ships
Questions on Spars and Sails
Nomenclature of Sails
Standing and Running Rigging
Knotting and Splicing
vat
11,
CONTENTS
301
PAGE
100
4/eks
4ckles
Pe
05 4he L
Compass
46 e Log
47 e Lead and Sounding
Machine
50 e HelmSteering
56 %rid TackleAnchoringMooring
56 tr,r, 3:ing Out Anchors
r.,7 ,,`r.'ng
'
5$ ing Effect of Propeller
59 4'g Oil in a Heavy Sea
59 storing the Apparently
Drowned
60 q
ructions for Saving the Drowning
60 tructions in Case
63 etie with Breechesof Shipwreck
Buoy or Life Car
63 6.tiitions of Sea
Terms
es
64
103
108
10.8
113
116
120
126
139
140
140
140
141
142
143
143
146
iso
66
66
66
0
61
CHAPTER IV.
BOATS.
sses of Boats
41enclature of Boats
69 Gear
69 -and-Away Boats
'lleral Service with Boats
ats under Oars
4ts under Sail
,
Ileiples of Boat-sailing
"era! Remarks on Reefing, Squalls, etc.
e Landing Force
.d/146
PAGE
154
155
155
156
157
159
164
165
167
170
CHAPTER V.
se
9 al
11 mGuns
etal
PAGE
177
178
302
CONTENTS
PAO
Parts of a Gun........................................... 1
2 tilrep:
I183
Breech Mechanisms ....................................... ,
8/ ni
Driggs-Schroeder Breech Mechanism..................... '
;84 11 I
Hotchkiss Breech Mechanism ............................. /85 .1
Dashiell Breech Mechanism ............................... .85 I
187 cx
Fletcher Breech Mechanism .............................. ,
Vickers Breech Mechanism ................................ ;87 ts
Gun Mounts
A(
Ammunition
.... 1 ..r
Bursting Charges ...................................... 19-/93' ii
lig
Fuses
Primers ................................................ . /19o (li11

Powder and Powder Charges............................ /9 ligi
Fixed and Separate Ammunition......................... / CI
Magazines and Shell-rooms............................... o \Id
Torpedoes
.. o s
Questions on Gun at which Stationed
111
Elements of Naval Guns

22'. 0
Useful Rules .......................................... , tin
Gunnery
'' yo es i
Gun Pointing
yo 1
Accuracy and Rapidity of Fire
20 toe
Estimation of Range
0
Gun CaptainsAiming Drill............................ 2
Firing Regulations .................................... 2II
Care and Preservation of Ordnance Outfit.
.......... 0
Miscellaneous Instructions
......................... y
Liquid for Recoil Cylinders
'. 21
Care and Preservation of Cartridge Cases............... ,.1
Fitting and Adjusting Gas Check Pads.................. ..AA,1 erai
s
Remarks on Gun Drills
" 21 D's
Organization
'21 t s
Gun Divisions ......................................... 01 4/i:
Ammunition Crew
yt g.w.,
.
Numbering the Guns................................... 0 Sena,
Training and Pointing
hs
Crews in Reserve
''.
Boarders and Riflemen
' 2 s;
Raking Fire
^ is
Aids to Wounded ...................................... ; tan,
Fall of Shots .......................................... ';
General Alarm and Call
.. ,.
Muster
Fire Alarm ............................................:
Retreat
L.
.millakift
CONTENTS
303
4,G5
,,
9IsT
eesuooters
shooters
1 ?P
1 83 "nitions .
L1[84 11.ris
)
1 .11
85
1 85 11 Notes on Drill of /vIain Battery
I
rs7
[87
[9;
Pointers
eribed Arc
gres
,n3. lug the Vent

11g Lock
19 cling
1''
ging
Checks
ding
nition Supply
pf Electric Firing Attachment
hug Telescopes
It, for Firing
II Notes on Drill of Secondary Battery
ructions for Aids to Wounded
PAGE
219
219
220
220
221
221
221
222
222
223
223
224
225
225
226
226
227
227
229
229
229
232
CHAPTER VI.
SIGNALS.
21
Signals
rai Questions on Signals
21 1/'a Numbers
21 t ignals
21 eating Signals
21tWag Code
; ',end and Receive a Message
SignalsSearchlight
Signals
sSignals
;18 Night Signals .
; kn Signals
; d
Signals
141 Squadron and Tactical Signals
; aational Signals
era' Notes on Signals
PAGE
236
237
244
245
247
247
249-225500
250
25!
255
258
258
260
262
267
A
30.4
CONTENTS
CHAPTER VII.

GENERAL INFORMATION.
FAG
Miscellaneous Regulations .............................. 27

The Executive Officer
.. a
Divisional Officers
..............
The Officer-of-the-Deck
.................... 27
General Ship and Naval Regulations...................... 27
Enlistments
..
Continuous Service .................................... 27
Fraudulent Enlistment ............................. "
Promotion of Enlisted Men
Acting and Permanent Appointments....................
Seaman-Gunners
.. 2
Gun-Captains
Discharge ............................................. 2
Honorable Discharge ..................................
Ordinary Discharge
..Bad Conduct Discharge
Desertion
.
Absence without Leave
Rewards and Privileges
..
Medals
Shore DutyRetirement .............................. 2
Conduct Classes
Monthly Money
Pay Table ............................................

Apprentices
Redress of Wrongs
Exercise of Authority
......
Quarrels and Disturbances...............................'
Courts-Martial
...."
.
..
AD
0,3
C.> Cr..)
tn
Cr, Cr>
CIS
GC,
CNN C,
C`N TA77Z.
"
"
CA CA CA CX CA CA CA NW
"A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A "A CA CA
. .
.
CA
.
_-....likilli....

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket&#39;s Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

You might also like

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket&#39;s Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket&#39;s Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

41 I ))I ,1 J1

3-inch Field Piece

35 to 42grs. 220 grains

ELEMENTS OF NAVAL GUNS.

Lieutenant RIDLEY McLEAN, U.S.N.

ZOt Rorb Caflimore (Nese

with Life on board Ship.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS

Ihe ship's efficiency.

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

The petty officer in a division should endeavor to have the

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

,that it is kept lighted during smoking hours only. He shall

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

assigned. He forms one of the gunner's gang, and in that

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

L atinnlarly at overhauling battery. They should at all times take

a0The other quarter

Q. What is the log book?

OA. ItIS a record of the daily events on board ship.

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

Q. How is the state of the weather expressed in the-columrIL

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

Cumulus. Thick clouds whose summits are domes

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

A. EARLIEST INDICATIONS.The distant storm usually causes

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

SIGNALS FOR PILOTS.

the International Signals for a pilot?

fro 3. The International Code Flag "S," with or without penr

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

good reason to contrary; when near land, especially forts,

THE BLUEJACICET'S MANUAL.

A. It is a flag of a diplomatic representative of the Unit

Q. What are the chronometers and where kept?

A. They are very accurate clocks kept in the navigator's

A No iron nor steel should be in pockets, nor grommet in

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

Presidents at main during visit.

Sec'ry.at main during salute.

In case of foreign officers, National

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

Special orders concerning visitors using a ship's boats

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

Rank of the Senior Officer

Rank of the Senior Officer in the boat to be saluted.

Stops engine, lays Junior salutes with

TIIE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

Flag Officer or Commo- Junior salutes with

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

Suppose you pass a commanding officer with pennant

THE BLUEJACKET'S MANUAL.

Q. How would you lower a life-boat at sea in bad weather?At

HINTS FOR PETTY OFFICERS.

GENERAL RULES IN HANDLING BOATS.

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket's Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket's Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.

LT Ridley McLean, USN, The Bluejacket's Manual, 1st Edition. Annapolis, MD: Naval Institute, 1902.